Cdma Call Processing

LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company instructions

CL8303
CDMA IS-95 and 3G-1x Base Station Call
Processing
Instructor Guide
Lucent Learning
CL8303-1.0-IG.en.UL
Issue 1.0
July 2001
ii LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES PROPRIETARY
CDMA IS-95 and 3G-1x Base Station Call Processing
Copyright
2001 by Lucent Technologies Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may
be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including
photocopy, recording, or any information storage and retrieval system, now known or to be
invented, without permission in writing from Lucent Technologies.
All material contained in this publication is proprietary information of Lucent Technologies Inc.
Any and all references to AT&T copyrights within this documentation are considered to be the
copyrighted material of Lucent Technologies Inc. as of this printing.
Lucent Technologies Inc.
Lucent Technologies Learning Organization
1-888-582-3688
iii
Preface .................................................................................................. v
Level 2 Assessment ............................................................................... vii
Course Objectives ................................................................................. ix
Major References .................................................................................. xi
Section 1: IS-2000 Overview 1-1
Section 2: Base Station Call Processing Overview 2-1
Section 3: Acquire System 3-1
Section 4: Idle Mode 4-1
Section 5: Accessing System 5-1
Section 6: Traffic Channel Setup 6-1
Section 7: Conversation Substate 7-1
Section 8: Single Carrier Handoff 8-1
Section 9: Power Control 9-1
Section 10: Overload Control 10-1
Section 11: Multi-Carrier Handoff 11-1
Section 12: Appendix 12-1
Acronyms A-1
Glossary G-1
References R-1
CONTENTS
iv LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES PROPRIETARY
v
This course is one in a series of courses intended to provide an in-depth understanding of base
station call processing employing Lucent Technologies CDMA technology.
Cellular engineering is the discipline which addresses how a cellular or PCS system is laid out to
provide radio coverage throughout a service area, how it is grown to meet teletraffic demand, and
how system performance is monitored and adjusted to tune and optimize its operation.
After completing the course, the learner will be able to describe in detail the call processing
algorithms, translation parameters, and service measurements of the Lucent Technologies
wireless systems. The learner will also be able to make informed decisions about the selection of
values for most important translation parameters.
The units are organized with a balance of theory and practice, and are ordered to present a
progression of concepts of increasing complexity.
PREFACE
vi LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES PROPRIETARY
vii
Note To Instructor
S
The following section informs the student of the use of Level 2 Assessment in this
course. This section is to be read to the students at the beginning of the course, after
they have viewed the Level 2 Assessment videotape. Ask the students to read the copy
of this same information, located in the student guide, as you read this to them.
Please read the following passages exactly as written.
Introduction
This course uses Level 2 Assessment tools to gauge the extent to which you have met the
objectives of the course. Level 2 Assessment results should be used solely to make further
training and development decisions. The results may not be used for any other purpose without
the written consent of Lucent Learning.
Purpose Of The Assessment
As stated above, the assessment serves a developmental purpose. There are a number of benefits
to having the assessment as part of this course.
Use of the Level 2 Assessment will objectively measure effective training. The questions are
linked to the course objectives, which, in turn, are linked to the tasks performed on the job. These
links hold our course developers and instructors accountable to produce and deliver materials that
are relevant to your needs.
What The Assessment Consists Of
The assessment for this course is a paper-and-pencil type document that assesses your learning
through the use of knowledge-based questions with multiple-choice answers. Everything that
appears on the assessment will be covered in this course. Along with each assessment booklet, a
scanner sheet will be provided for you to record your answers.
Special Accommodations
If you are in need of any special accommodations during the assessment period, it is your
responsibility to notify the course instructor ahead of time. You may wish to do this as early in the
course as possible so that whatever requirements you may have can be properly prepared.
When Administered
LEVEL 2 ASSESSMENT
viii
The assessment for this course will be administered on the last day of class, after all scheduled
instruction has been completed. During the assessment you will have access to all of the reference
materials that are available to you during this course. Those materials include your student guide.
Time Allotment
You will each have 60 minutes to complete the entire assessment.
Note To Instructor
S
Ask the students What questions do you have at this time, regarding the assessment?
ix
This course is designed to enable you to:
Relate the functionality of the system access, call setup,
location, handoff, power control, and overload control
algorithms to CDMA call processing.
Select the optimal call processing translation parameters that
are used to control the system access, call setup, location,
handoff, power control, and overload control algorithms.
Relate service measurements to monitor the performance of
the call processing algorithms.
COURSE OBJECTIVES
x LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES PROPRIETARY
Lucent Technologies documents can be ordered from:
the Lucent Technologies Learning Organization in Indianapolis, IN
1-888-582-3688 (1-888-LUCENT8)
1-317-322-6416 (outside the continental U.S.).
Additional product information (such as, CTS/PM Bulletins, Fax Flashes, Lucent Alerts,
and applications notes) can be obtained from:
the Customer Technical Support/Program Management Organization
1-800-225-4672
wireless.lucentsupport.com.
IS95 may be ordered from:
Telecommunications Industry Association
Standards and Technology Department
2001 Pennsylvania Ave., N. W.
Washington, DC 20006
1-800-854-7179.
J-STD-008 and IS-2000 may be ordered from:
Global Engineering Documents
15 Inverness Way
Englewood, CO 80112-5710
1-303-397-7956.
NOTE: All documents are continually being updated, so it is extremely important to use the
most current versions.
xi
AUTOPLEX
Electronic Documentation,
401-010-001,
Which includes:
Lucent Technologies PCS CDMA, Product Overview,
401-703-000.
Lucent Technologies Cellular CDMA Product Overview,
401-614-010.
AUTOPLEX
Cellular Telecommunications Systems, System 1000, CDMA Engineering

Guidelines,
401-614-012.
PCS, CDMA RF Engineering Guidelines,
401-703-201.
CDMA 3G-1X RF Engineering Guidelines,
401-614-040.
AUTOPLEX
Cellular Telecommunications Systems, System 1000, Data Base Update,

401-610-036.
AUTOPLEX
Cellular Telecommunication System, System 1000, Service Measurements,

401-610-135.
AUTOPLEX
Acronym Dictionary,
401-610-060.
Flexent/AUTOPLEX
System Capacity Monitoring and Engineering Guidelines

401-610-009.
ANSI, J-STD-008, Personal Station-Base Station Compatibility Requirement for 1.8 to 2.0
GHz Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Personal Communications System.
TIA/EIA Interim Standard,
Mobile Station-Base Station Compatibility Standard for Dual-Mode Wideband Spread
Spectrum Cellular System,
TIA/EIA/IS-95A,
Telecommunications Industry Association.
TIA/EIA Interim Standard,
Family of standards for cdma2000 Standards for Spread Spectrum Systems
TIA/EIA/IS-2000A.
http://wireless.lucentsupport.com
MAJOR REFERENCES
xii LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES PROPRIETARY
Section 1
IS-2000 Overview Section 1
IS-2000 Overview CL8303 v1.0
1-2 LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES PROPRIETARY
ITU 3G Vision
ITU 3G Vision
The International Telecommunication Union (ITU) original 3G vision was for one unify-
ing terrestrial air and core network system for the next generation of wireless communica-
tion. Some of the major aspects of the ITU vision, which help define 3G technology,
include:
Global Roaming with Fixed Wireless Services - Would allow a mobile user from
anywhere in the world to expect the same standard set of wireless services and features,
regardless of where the user travels and the country visited
High Circuit Mode and High Packet Data Rates - Data rate optimization for three
terrestrial radio environments:
Vehicular, high-speed mobile environment
Pedestrian low-mobility
Indoor environment
Internet Accessibility - Provide Internet connectivity and services comparable with di-
rect landline connection. Patterned services in accordance with the Internet model, such
as:
Asymmetric link - Providing a low uplink data rate (narrow bandwidth) for re-
quest and a high downlink data rate for web page download
E-mail push -User does not have to connect to system to receive e-mail
Multi-tasking - User may be on a video conference and receive mail at the same
time
Quality of Service (QoS) - Allowing the user to negotiate the QoS with regard to data
rate, bit error rate, and latency
Variable Date Rate - Allowing user to get a higher data rate when the system is less
busy
Bandwidth-on-Demand - Allowing users willing to pay extra to negotiate for a wider
bandwidth when needed
Support of Multimedia Services- Provide video and audio services for video confer-
encing and streaming video
Radio Operating Environments
The ITU envisioned four very distinct radio operating environments, one satellite and
three terrestrial, where the minimum data rates and coverage differ:
9.6 kb/s for global satellite maga coverage
144 kb/s for high-mobility vehicular macrocell coverage
384 kb/s for low-mobility pedestrian microcell coverage
2 Mb/s for indoor picocell coverage
CL8303 v1.0 IS-2000 Overview
LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES PROPRIETARY 1-3
ITU 3G Vision
Global roaming and fixed wireless services
High circuit and packet data rates
Internet accessibility
Negotiable Quality of Service (QoS)
Variable data rate
Bandwidth-on-demand
Support for multimedia services
Global Wireless Standards
Evolution
Because of large investments in various 2G technologies and equipment, service providers
and equipment venders responding to the ITU C-circular letter wanted to leverage their
knowledge and investment into the new 3G technology. In short, the service providers
from around the world proposed 3G solutions that provided a graceful evolution from
their current 2G terrestrial radio interface and core network technologies.
As result, a variety of proposals was submitted to the ITU. The next step for the ITU was
to build a consensus among all participants to harmonize the different 3G proposals into
three major terrestrial radio interface proposals and two core network technologies, which
became the International Mobile Telecommunication (IMT) family of 3G technologies
standards that are documented into the IMT-2000 Standards.
The three major terrestrial proposal are:
W-CDMA, proposed by GSM service providers
cdma2000, proposed by IS-95 CDMA service providers
UWC-136, proposed by IS-136 TDMA service providers
The core network defines the Mobile Application Part (MAP) that insures the operability
between service providers.The two core network technologies are:
GSM MAP, proposed by GSM service providers
ANSI TIA/EIA-41 MAP, proposed by IS-136 TDMA and CDMA IS-95 service pro-
viders
To permit service providers the freedom to chose any of the three terrestrial technologies
regardless of the its present 2G radio interface, either core network may be used with any
of the three terrestrial technologies in a mix-and-match fashion.
The wideband CDMA or W-CDMA proposal comes primarily from Europe, where GSM
technology is widely deployed. Two official IMT standards are derived from this pro-
posal: IMT-DS (Direct Spread), which is a frequency division duplex (FDD) scheme
where separate carrier are used for uplink and downlink and IMT-TC (Time Code); and a
time division duplex (TDD) scheme, where uplink and downlink data is transmitted on a
single carrier separated by time. W-CDMA will be backward-compatible with GSM on
the core network side, thus protecting the existing GSM infrastructure. In addition to
Europe, there is a great support for W-CDMA from GSM carriers on a worldwide basis.
Support for cdma2000, which is officially known in the IMT Standards as IMT-MC
(Multi-Carrier), comes from those service providers currently using cdmaOne (IS-95)
technology. This support is primarily in the United States. cdma2000 is also supported
Korea and Japan.
Lastly, the UWC-136, officially known as IMT-SC (Single Carrier), was originally sup-
ported by TDMA service providers and manufactures in the United States. This support
has dwindled considerably, and may play a minor role in the IMT-2000 family.
C
L
8
3
0
3

v
1
.
0
I
S
-
2
0
0
0

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
L
U
C
E
N
T

T
E
C
H
N
O
L
O
G
I
E
S

P
R
O
P
R
I
E
T
A
R
Y

1
-
5
U
s
e

p
u
r
s
u
a
n
t

t
o

C
o
m
p
a
n
y

i
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n
s
C
D
M
A

I
S
-
9
5

a
n
d

3
G
-
1
x

B
a
s
e

S
t
a
t
i
o
n

C
a
l
l

P
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g
G
L
O
B
A
L

W
I
R
E
L
E
S
S

S
T
A
N
D
A
R
D
S
E
V
O
L
U
T
I
O
N
IS-95-A IS-95-B
IS-136
GSM
GSM GPRS
cdma2000
1X MC
1xEV-DO
(Phase 1)
HDR
64 kbps Data 153 kbps Data
2.4 Mbps Data
cdma2000
3X MC
384+ kbps Data
1995 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003+
PDC PDC
28.8 kbps
W- CDMA (UMTS)
(Europe)
384 kbps Data
384+ kbps Packet
New RF Interface
1xEV-DV
(Phase 2)
Data and Voice
W-CDMA
(Japan)
EDGE (US)
Compact
EDGE (US)
Classic
Design Characteristics
IS-95 provides:
Overlay with AMPS
Frequency reuse of N=1
Soft handoff
Variable rate vocoders
Fast power control
In addition to the IS-95 characteristics, IS-2000 provides:
Backward compatibility with cdmaOne:
Overlay with IS-95B on the same 1.25 MHz channel
Reuse of same base stations and IS-41D infrastructure
Handoff from 2G to 3G and 3G to 2G
Faster data rates and double voice traffic through technology enhancements
Pilot channels on the reverse link for coherent detection at the base station, which en-
able mobiles to transmit at less power
Faster forward and reverse link power control at 800 times per second
Intelligent Antennas, either switch beam or adaptive array beam, that steer a narrower
beam lobe in the direction of the mobile user
Turbo coding at higher transmission rates (greater than 14.4 kbps) for improved error
detection
Supplemental channel for faster data rates
DESIGN CHARACTERISTICS
Backward compatibility with IS-95
Overlay with IS-95B on the same 1.25 MHz channel
Reuse of same base stations and IS-41D infrastruc-
ture
Handoff from 2G to 3G and 3G to 2G
Faster data rates and double voice traffic through
technology enhancements
e.g. enhanced convolutional coding and Turbo
codes
Supplemental channels for high data rates
Reverse link pilot for coherent detection
Faster forward power control at 800Hz
Supporting intelligent antennas
Reverse Link Physical Channels
A noted difference between IS-95 and IS-2000 is the number of logical and physical chan-
nels used. In IS-95, only two channels are used in the reverse link (Uplink):
Traffic Channel - Used during the actual voice call (physical channel)
Access Channel - For signals in the idle mobile mode (physical channel)
Only one channel is used at any one time; either the traffic during the actual call, or the
access channel for signaling and messages such as requesting access for a call.
To reach the higher data rates and allow more flexibility on the services required for 3G,
in IS-2000, more channels are used in the reverse link. The channels are:
Fundamental Channel (R-FCH) - For low data rates and voice calls that operate in the
same way as 2G traffic channels for backwards capability. Channel carries both mas-
sage and control data.
Supplemental Channel (R-SCH) - For high data rate transmission, such as multime-
dia. The channel carries data only and messages must be transmitted with either the fun-
damental channel and/or dedicated control channel.
Dedicated Control Channel (R-DCCH) - For signaling and short messages for the
supplemental channel
Pilot Channel (R-PICH) - Similar to the downlink pilot channel, it is used at the base
station to provide phase reference for the received uplink signal. The pilot channel al-
lows the mobile to transmit at a lower power level to reduce the overall interference lev-
el.
Supplemental Code Channel (R-SCCH) - For high data rate transmission, such as
multimedia, and is used in a similar manner as the supplemental channel.
Access Channel (R-ACH) - Used when the mobile must access the system to initiate
communication or respond to a direct message sent from the base station. Similar to IS-
95 access channel.
Enhanced Access Channel (R-EACH) - For better access, using 5-ms mini-frames for
less collisions.
Common Control Channel (R-CCCH) - For sending data or messages without setting
up the dedicated traffic channel
C
L
8
3
0
3

v
1
.
0
I
S
-
2
0
0
0

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
L
U
C
E
N
T

T
E
C
H
N
O
L
O
G
I
E
S

P
R
O
P
R
I
E
T
A
R
Y

1
-
9
U
s
e

p
u
r
s
u
a
n
t

t
o

C
o
m
p
a
n
y

i
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n
s
C
D
M
A

I
S
-
9
5

a
n
d

3
G
-
1
x

B
a
s
e

S
t
a
t
i
o
n

C
a
l
l

P
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g
R
E
V
E
R
S
E

L
I
N
K

P
H
Y
S
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
N
N
E
L
S
REVERSE CDMA CHANNEL for SR1 and SR3
Access
Channel
Traffic
Channel
(RC 1 or 2)
Fundamental Code
Channel
0 to 7 Supplemental
Code Channels
Enhanced
Access Channel
Operation
Pilot Channel
Enhanced Access
Channel
Pilot Channel
Common Control
Channel
Pilot Channel
0 or 1 Dedicated
Control Channel
0 or 1 Fundamental
Channel
0 to 2 Supplemental
Channels
(RC 3 to 6)
Reverse Power
Control Subchannel
Note: The following channels are new channels for cdma2000
* Enhanced Access Channel
* Common Control Channel
* Reverse Traffic Channel Operation
Common Control
Channel
Operation
Reverse Traffic
Channel
Operation
RC: Radio Configuration
SR: Spreading Rate
Radio Configurations
Reverse Link
Radio Configuration (RC) identifies the general characteristics of the radio interface,
among which are:
Data rate
Forward error correction (FEC)
Speech coding (vocoder rate)
Modulation scheme
Currently, six reverse link radio configurations (RC1 through RC6) are defined for IS-
2000. The first four RCs are for the 1X spreading rate (SR), which equals 1.2288 Mchips/
sec, and the last two are for the 3X spreading rate (SR3), which equals 3 x 1.2288 Mchips/
sec, or 3.6864 Mchips/sec.
Radio configurations RC1 and RC2, which use the same modulation scheme as the IS-95
8kbps and 13kbps vocoders, respectively, apply to both IS-95 and IS-2000.
RADIO CONFIGURATIONS
Reverse Link
Radio
Config
Associated
Spreading Rate
Data Rates, Forward Error Correction, and General
Characteristics
1 1 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600 bps data rates with R = 1/3, 64-
ary orthogonal modulation (non-coherent) (IS-95, 8kbps
vocoder)
2 1 1800, 3600, 7200, and 14400 bps data rates with R = 1/2, 64-
ary orthogonal modulation (non-coherent) (IS-95, 13kbps
vocoder)
3 1 1200, 1350, 1500, 2400, 2700, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,
76800, and 153600 bps with R = 1/4, 307200 bps data rate
with R = 1/2, BPSK modulation with a pilot (cdma2000 1X,
8kbps vocoder)
4 1 1800, 3600, 7200, 14400, 28800, 57600, 115200, and
230400 bps with R = 1/4, BPSK modulation with a pilot
5 3 1200, 1350, 1500, 2400, 2700, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,
76800, and 153600 bps with R = 1/4, 307200 and 614400
bps data rate with R = 1/3, BPSK modulation with a pilot
(cdma2000 3x, 8 kbps vocoder)
6 3 1800, 3600, 7200, 14400, 28800, 57600, 115200, 230400
bps, and 460800 bps with R = 1/4, 1036800 bps data rate
with R = 1/2, BPSK modulation with a pilot
Reverse Link Walsh Codes
In IS-95 the Walsh codes were used on the reverse link to perform 64-ary Orthogonal
Modulation. In IS-2000 the Walsh codes are used to distinguish the reverse link physical
channels within the mobile. The Walsh codes are used to insure orthogonality. Spectrum
spreading is done with the long code, which is used to distinguish between mobiles as
done in 2G. Because only four channels are being separated, Walsh codes of shorter chip
lengths can be used. The Walsh codes for the four reverse channels are given in the table
To allow easy acquisition of the pilot channel, a null Walsh code is used, just as in the for-
ward link pilot channels in 2G and 3G.
REVERSE LINK WALSH CODES
Channel Type Walsh Function
R-PICH W
0
32
R-EACH W
2
8
R-CCCH W
2
8
R-DCCH W
8
16
R-FCH W
4
16
R-SCH 1 W
1
2
or W
2
4
R-SCH 2 W
2
4
or W
6
8
Supplemental Channel
The Supplemental Channel is used to transmit high speed data. The number of supplemen-
tal channels permitted to be transmitted by the base station is optional. In this regard, a
service may configure the system in may ways.
No Supplemental Channel - A service provider may choose not to have any supple-
mental channels and not provide any high speed data capabilities.
Single Dedicated Supplemental Channel - Only one supplemental channel is avail-
able, and dedicated to one call.
Multi-Dedicated Supplemental Channel - More than one supplemental channel is
available, and each channel is dedicated to one call.
Single Shared Supplemental Channel - More than one user is assigned to a single
supplemental channel. Unlike the users on either the single or multi-dedicated supple-
mental channel that can be in either the switched or packed mode, users on the shared
supplemental channel must be in the packet mode. Each user must receive control data
on either a separate dedicated control channel or fundamental channel.
Multiple Shared Supplemental Channel - More than one shared supplemental chan-
nel is available.
There two ways of sharing the RF resource:
Assign each user its own supplemental channel (either single dedicated supplemental
channel or multi-dedicated supplemental channel)
Assign users to share one or more supplemental channels (either single shared supple-
mental channel or multi-shared supplemental channel)
Regardless of the methods used to assign supplemental channels or if they are dedicated or
shared, the fundamental objective is to keep the overall interference level below a maxi-
mum allowable total interference level. This interference management is handled through
the MAC protocol that will schedule when and how long a user can transmit. The MAC
protocol is transmitted to each user over either dedicated control channel or fundamental
channel using 5ms frames.
A shared supplemental channel is illustrated in the figure. In this illustration, each user is
in communication with the base station on two channels. This means that each user is
assigned two Walsh codes: One for user data on the shared supplemental channel, and the
other for control data, which can be over either a fundamental channel or a dedicated con-
trol channel (this illustration shows the dedicated control channel).
Any request for user data is transmitted to the base station over the dedicated control chan-
nel. The base station will schedule transmission of the requested data over the shared sup-
plemental channel so that user data is sent to only one user at a time. If the base receives
requests for user data from more than one user at the same time, the base station will make
the decision about which user will be served first, based on user QoS or some other param-
eter.
SUPPLEMENTAL CHANNEL
Accumulative Interference
The accumulative interference contributed by the users is illustrated in the figure. User 1,
who is transmitting for a longer period of time than User 8 or User N, at any moment con-
tributes less interference, so this figure shows that User 1 is transmitting a at a slower data
rate than the other two users. This figure also shows that User N is transmitting for the
shortest period of time, creating the highest level of interference during its transmission.
This is because User N is transmitting at a higher data rate than User 1 or User 8. Although
the MAC protocol will schedule the transmission of User 1 with Users 8 and N, to keep
the total interference below the Total Allowable Interference level, it will not allow Users
8 and N to transmit and the same time.
Capacity Saving Techniques
To conserve capacity, when a user is not transmitting user data, the mobile turns off its
reverse supplemental channel. For example, after accessing and downloading a web page,
the user pauses to read the web page and doesnt need to immediately transmit data on the
supplemental channel. At this time, the mobile will turn off its reverse link supplemental
channel to reduce the amount of interference in the environment, because that user is no
longer transmitting at the high data rate. Therefore, it will increase capacity. It will also
conserve mobile battery power in the handset.
Although the reversed supplemental channel is off, the dedicated control is still on. Even
though the dedicated control is a low-power channel in comparison with the high volume
supplemental channel, it still subtracts from capacity of the system. This can be a consid-
erable drain on capacity in a crowded metropolitan area or sports stadium, were hundreds
of user may leave their mobile a web page to periodically request updates. To prevent this
drain on capacity, the service provider can set a time-out period, after which the dedicated
control channel is turned off, and there is no user data transmitted on the user reverse sup-
plemental channel.
However, to enable the user to quickly return on line, the system will record the previ-
ously requested or negotiated QoS values, such as 200 kb/s data rate, 10 -6 bit error rate,
and 30 second latency. When the user goes back on the system, the may be reassigned dif-
ferent supplemental channel and dedicated control channels, but its initial QoS values are
reinstated so the user can return online quickly.
ACCUMULATIVE INTERFERENCE
Forward Link Channels
To maintain compatibility with IS-95, with some variation, IS-2000 uses the same forward
link channel functionalities that are used in IS-95. These channels are:
Pilot Channel (F-PICH) - Similar to the downlink pilot channel in IS-95, it is used at
the mobile to provide continuous time and phase reference to allow the mobile to ac-
quire the base station and to permit coherent detection of the received downlink signal.
Each base station transmits the short PN code using Walsh code W0 (all zeros) over the
pilot channel with a unique timing offset for base station distinction.
Sync Channel (F-SYNC) - In addition to providing system timing and network identi-
fication, the sync channel identifies the state of the long PN code so that the generation
of the long PN code in the mobile is synchronized with the generation of the long PN
code at the base station.
Paging Channel (F-PCH) - Provides notification of incoming calls to idle mobiles. In
addition, the paging channel may be used to broadcast messages.
Fundamental Channel (F-FCH) - For low data rates and voice calls that operate in the
same way as 2G traffic channels for backwards capability. Channel carries both mes-
sage and control data.
As with its reverse link counterpart, in addition to transmitting voice calls and low data
rate transmissions in 20-ms frames, IS-2000 provides the option of transmitting signalling
and control data at only a one-eighth rate (one-eighth power) in 5-ms frames over the for-
ward link fundamental channel.
The additional channels that are introduced in IS-2000 are:
Supplemental Channel (F-SCH) - For high data rate transmission, such as multimedia.
Channel carries user data only and must be transmitted with either the fundamental
channel and/or dedicated control channel.
Dedicated Control Channel (F-DCCH) - For transmitting control data to individual
users on the supplemental channel. The control data includes signaling for soft handoff,
power control, and MAC protocol.
Common Control Channel (F-CCCH) - For broadcasting control data and messages
to all mobiles within the service area
Quick Paging Channel (F-QPCH) - For extending the battery life of the mobile.
C
L
8
3
0
3

v
1
.
0
I
S
-
2
0
0
0

O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
L
U
C
E
N
T

T
E
C
H
N
O
L
O
G
I
E
S

P
R
O
P
R
I
E
T
A
R
Y

1
-
1
9
U
s
e

p
u
r
s
u
a
n
t

t
o

C
o
m
p
a
n
y

i
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n
s
C
D
M
A

I
S
-
9
5

a
n
d

3
G
-
1
x

B
a
s
e

S
t
a
t
i
o
n

C
a
l
l

P
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g
F
O
R
W
A
R
D

L
I
N
K

C
H
A
N
N
E
L
S
FORWARD CDMA CHANNEL
for Spreading Rates 1 and 3
(SR1 and SR3)
Pilot
Channels
Sync
Channel
Paging
Channels
(SR1)
Common
Control
Channels
Traffic
Channels
0-1 Fundamental
Channel
Mobile Station
Power Control
Subchannel
0-7 Supplemental
Code Channels Radio
Configurations 1-2
0-2 Supplemental
Channels Radio
Configurations 3-9
Broadcast
Channels
Quick
Paging
Channels
Common
Power Control
Channels
Common
Assignment
Channels
Forward
Pilot
Channel
Transmit
Diversity Pilot
Channel
Auxiliary
Pilot
Channels
Auxiliary Transmit*
Diversity Pilot
Channels
0-1 Dedicated
Control
Channel
Radio Configurations
Forward Link
For the forward link there are six radio configurations (RC) defined, RC1 through RC9.
RC1 and RC2 corresponds to IS-95 Rate Set (RS) 1 and 2 respectively. The first five RCs
are for the 1X spreading rate (SR1) and the last four for the 3X spreading rate (SR3).
RADIO CONFIGURATIONS
Forward Link
Radio
Configuration
Associated
Spreading
Rate
Data Rates, Forward Error Correction, and
General Characteristics
1 1 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600 bps data rates with R=1/2,
BPSK pre-spreading symbols
2 1 1800, 3600, 7200, and 14400 bps data rates with R=1/2,
BPSK pre-spreading symbols
3 1 1200, 1350, 1500, 2400, 2700, 4800, 9600, 19200,
38400, 76800, and 153600 bps data rates with R= 1/4,
QPSK pre-spreading symbols, OTD allowed
4 1 1200, 1350, 1500, 2400, 2700, 4800, 9600, 19200,
38400, 76800, 153600, and 307200 bps data rates with
R= 1/2, QPSK pre-spreading symbols, OTD allowed
5 1 1800, 3600, 7200, 14400. 28800, 57600, 115200, and
230400 with R= 1/4, QPSK pre-spreading symbols, OTD
allowed
6 3 1200, 1350, 1500, 2400, 2700, 4800, 9600, 19200,
38400, 76800, 153600, and 307200 bps data rates with
R= 1/6, QPSK pre-spreading symbols, MC modes, OTD
allowed
7 3 1200, 1350, 1500, 2400, 2700, 4800, 9600, 19200,
38400, 76800, 153600, 307200, and 614400 bps data
rates with R= 1/3, QPSK pre-spreading symbols, MC
modes, OTD allowed
8 3 1800, 3600, 7200, 14400. 28800, 57600, 115200,
230400, and 460800 with R= 1/4 (20 ms) or 1/3 (5 ms),
QPSK pre-spreading symbols, MC modes, OTD allowed
9 3 1800, 3600, 7200, 14400. 28800, 57600, 115200,
230400, 460800, and 1036800 bps data rates with R= 1/2
(20 ms) or 1/3 (5 ms), QPSK pre-spreading symbols, MC
modes, OTD allowed
IS-2000 Overview
Summary
IS-2000 OVERVIEW
Summary
Evolution of IS-95 to satisfy ITUs 3G vision, IMT-2000
Backward compatible with IS-95
High speed data rates, up to 2 Mbps
Double voice capacity
Reverse link pilot
Faster power control
Reverse link channels separated by Walsh codes
Supplemental channel carries high speed data
New forward link channels
Quick Paging Channel
IS-2000 OVERVIEW
Knowledge Check
Question 1.
What type of traffic is the fundamental channel (FCH) is primarily used for?
A. Voice only
B. Data only
C. Voice and low speed data
D. Voice and high speed data
S
Answer: c
Question 2.
Uplink signal detection at the base station is improved by a phase reference extracted from
what uplink channel?
A. Dedicated Control Channel (R-DCCH)
B. Reverse Pilot Channel (R-PICH)
C. Enhanced Access Channel (R-EACH)
D. Supplemental Channel (R-SCH)
S
Answer: b
Question 3.
True or False? The transmission of user data on a supplemental channel (SCH) must be
accompanied by control data on either a dedicated control channel (R-DCCH) or a funda-
mental channel (R-FCH).
S
Answer: True
Question 4.
True or False? The uplink voice, user data, and control channels are separated by Walsh
codes.
S
Answer: True
IS-2000 OVERVIEW
Knowledge Check
Section 2
Base Station Call Processing Overview Section 2
Base Station Call Processing Overview CL8303 v1.0
MOBILE CALL PROCESSING
State Diagram
A mobile is in one of four states after power is applied. The four states are:
Mobile Initialization State
The mobile selects a serving system, mode of operation, and synchronizes to the
selected system.
Mobile Idle State
The mobile monitors Page Channel Messages.
Mobile System Access State
The mobile sends a message to the base station on the Access Channel.
Mobile Traffic Channel State
The mobile communicates with the base station using the Forward and Reverse
Traffic Channels.
The state diagram shows the states and the events that cause the mobile to change to a new
state.
In the Mobile Initialization State, the mobile tunes to the first preferred RF frequency
channel and attempts to decode the Pilot Channel. If a pilot is not found, the mobile tries
to decode a pilot on the next preferred RF channel. If a pilot cannot be found on any RF
channel, the mobile may (if equipped) change to the 850 MHz band and then try to acquire
a CDMA pilot or switch to the analog mode and scan the analog setup channels and lock
on the strongest. The order is determined by the preferred modes and bands that are pro-
grammed into the mobile or selected by the subscriber using function keys. For the rest of
this discussion, assume the mobile finds a pilot on a PCS RF channel. All the other options
are covered in the courses for AMPS and cellular CDMA.
Once the mobile is synchronized to the Pilot Channel, it then attempts to decode the Sync
Channel to obtain system timing information. Once the mobile has fully acquired system
timing, the mobile will enter the Mobile Idle State.
In the Mobile Idle State, the mobile decodes Page Channel number 1, receives additional
information about the base station, and then may stay in this state and monitor the Page
Channel, or enter the System Access State to register, negotiate for slotted mode, originate
a call, or reenter the Initialization State, if the mobile fails to decode the Page Channel or
if the Pilot Channel from a neighbor is stronger than the serving base station. This last case
is called an idle handoff.
The mobile will enter the Mobile System Access State if it receives a Page Message, orig-
inates a call, or registers. Upon successfully accessing the base station for either a Page
Response or Origination, the mobile will be directed to enter the Traffic Channel State.
Receiving an acknowledgment to any other order or message while in the System Access
State will cause the mobile to reenter the Idle State.
In the Mobile Traffic Channel State, the mobile communicates with the base station using
the Forward and Reverse Traffic Channels. This state allows the subscriber to communi-
cate with the network on either voice or data, simultaneous with the mobile communicat-
ing with the base station to send and receive orders and messages, such as power control
information and handoff information. The mobile will reenter the Initialization State when
the conversation has ended.
CL8303 v1.0 Base Station Call Processing Overview
MOBILE CALL PROCESSING
State Diagram

Mobile Idle Handoff,
or unable to receive
Paging Channel
Receives acknowledgment to an
Access Channel transmission
other than Origination or Page
Response, i.e., registration
acknowledgment
Mobile has fully acquired
system timing
Receives Paging Channel
Message; Originates a call;
Registration
Directed to a
Traffic Channel Ends use
of Traffic
Channel
Mobile
Initialization
State
Mobile
Idle
State
Mobile
System
Access
State
Power-up
Mobile
Traffic
Channel
State
NOTE:
The System Access algorithms deal with the first four states.
Call Processing Differences
Between 2G And 3G-1X
3G-1X is the 1.25MHz implementation of the first phase of IS-2000. IS-2000 was origi-
nally named IS-95C (and IS-95D). This implies that 3G-1X is an evolution of IS-95B.
Hence, 3G-1X is backwards-compatible with IS-95A/B.
The three channels, Pilot Channel, Sync Channel, and Page Channel are coded the same as
the 2G channels for backward compatibility. In fact, when 2G and 3G-1X co-exist, they
are both using the same Pilot, Sync, and Page channels - 64 bit Walsh codes 0, 32, and 1,
respectively.
Air-Interface Messages
Even though 3G-1X is backwards-compatible with 2G there are some differences. The
differences are mainly in the air-interface messages between the mobile and base station.
There are some new messages defined for 3G-1X, and some existing messages have addi-
tional fields for 3G-1X.
More detailed differences in messages and algorithms are discussed in later lessons.
Mapping of Existing 2G Channels
All channels in 2G are still in 3G-1X with the same or similar functionality. The names
have been replaced with abbreviated names for easy classification and recognition of the
channels.
IS-2000 defines both physical and logical channels. The physical channels are assigned
unique Walsh code, and the logical channels are virtual channels in the physical channels.
New Channels in 3G-1X
In 3G-1X, there are new channels defined that do not exist in 2G. The channels are:
Reverse Pilot Channel, R-PICH
Forward Quick Paging Channel, F-QPCH
Forward Supplemental Channel, F-SCH
Reverse Supplemental Channel, R-SCH
The F-QPCH is used to page a 3G-1X mobile to extend the mobiles battery life. The F/R-
SCH is used for High Speed Packet Data (HSPD). The R-PICH is used for coherent mod-
ulation on the uplink and to transmit power control commands. In later lessons, the func-
tionality of the new channels will be discussed in more detail.
S
F-QPCH and F/R-SCH are Scheduled for Release 17.1
CALL PROCESSING DIFFERENCES
BETWEEN 2G AND 3G-1X
3G-1X is backwards compatible with IS-95
additional air-interface messages
additional fields in existing 2G messages
Other differences will be discussed in following sections.
New channels are introduced
R-PICH
F-QPCH
F/R-SCH
MULTIPLE CARRIER
FREQUENCY SYSTEM CONCEPTS
Multiple carrier frequency systems are normally configured such that the carriers are lay-
ered on top of each other with high-traffic areas having more carriers than areas with less
traffic.
The area where there is continuous coverage of carrier Fn is called Fn core area. Base sta-
tion call processing in a core area works in a similar fashion to base station call processing
for a single carrier system. Once a mobile is on a traffic channel in a multi-carrier area, the
mobile will normally not change carrier. A mobile may only change carrier if there is a
lack of resources on current carrier or if the mobile is in a border area.
A border area is an area where one or more carriers are discontinuing. A mobile on a traf-
fic channel in a border area will make a transition to a carrier that is not discontinuing.
If a carrier is common to all bases stations within an area, that carrier is called the common
carrier. Usually F1 is a common carrier system wide.
MULTIPLE CARRIER
FREQUENCY SYSTEM CONCEPTS
F1/F2/F3
C
o
r
e

F
3

A
r
e
a
Traffic
Cell
F1/F2/F3
Traffic
Cell
F1/F2/F3
Traffic
Cell
F1/F2/F3
Traffic
Cell
F1/F2/F3
Traffic
Cell
F1 Traffic
F2 Border
Cell
F1
Traffic
Cell
F1
Traffic
Cell
F1
Traffic
Cell
F2 Border
F1 Traffic
F2 Border
Cell
F1 Traffic
F2 Border
Cell
Traffic
F3 Border
Cell
F3 Border
F1/F2
Traffic
F3 Border
Cell
F1/F2
Traffic
F3 Border
Cell
F1/F2
F1/F2
Traffic
Cell
F1/F2
Traffic
Cell
F1/F2
Traffic
Cell
F1/F2
Traffic
Cell
C
o
r
e

F
2

A
r
e
a
F1/F2/F3
F1/F2
F1 (Common Carrier)
SYSTEM OPERATION WITH
MULTIPLE CARRIER FREQUENCIES
System operation, or base station call processing, in a multiple carrier frequencies system
is similar to system operations for a single carrier frequency system. System operation for
a single carrier system has been discussed previously. In a multi-carrier system the system
access, call setup, and handoff algorithms have additional functionality.
The objective for the additional system access and call setup algorithms is to balance the
load for the access channels, page channels, and traffic channels between the carriers.
Additional carriers are most often deployed due to capacity needs. Occupancy and loading
of access channels, page channels, and traffic channels are affected by the number of
users. Therefore the load has to be balanced between the channels in a multi-carrier sys-
tem. For example, a page channel on F1 can most likely handle the load from the users on
one carrier. But when there are multiple carriers deployed the page channel on F1 may not
be able to handle the load from all the users so the load has to be balanced between the
page channels on the carriers.
The loading of traffic channel should be similar between carriers to make sure that the foot
print for the carriers is similar. If there is a mismatch of footprint there may be perfor-
mance problems with call setup and inter-frequency handoff.
Special algorithms are needed to perform inter-frequency handoffs in a multi-carrier sys-
tem. The purpose of the inter-frequency handoff algorithms is to provide continuous oper-
ation in the border areas. If a mobile is on a discontinuing carrier and going away from the
core area, the mobile has to make a transition to another carrier to avoid dropping the call.
SYSTEM OPERATION WITH
MULTIPLE CARRIER FREQUENCIES
System operation for multiple carriers is similar to a single car-
rier system with a few differences.
Loadbalance access, page, and traffic channels
Access channel: avoid overload
Page channel: avoid overload
Traffic channels: keep similar footprint (loading) of
carriers to increase reliability of call setup and inter-
frequency handoff
Inter-Frequency Handoff
Provide seamless service system wide
Base Station
Call Processing Overview
Summary
BASE STATION
CALL PROCESSING OVERVIEW
Summary
The mobile station has four call processing states:
Mobile Initialization State
Mobile Idle State
Mobile System Access State
Mobile Traffic Channel State
3G-1X defines new messages and new fields in existing
messages.
There are three new physical channels in 3G-1X:
Forward Quick Paging Channel, F-QPCH
Forward Supplemental Channel, F-SCH
Reverse Supplemental Channel, R-SCH
In a multi-carrier system certain channels should be load-
balanced.
Base Station
Call Processing Overview
Summary
Knowledge Check
Question 1.
What call processing state will the mobile station enter when the power is turned on?
A. Mobile Station Traffic Channel State
B. Mobile Station System Access State
C. Mobile Station Initialization State
D. Mobile Station Idle State
S
Answer: c
Question 2.
Of the following options, what is the major difference between 2G and 3G-1X?
A. Air-interface messages
B. Mobile Station Initialization State
C. Forward pilot channel
D. Base station amplifiers
S
Answer: a
Comment: There are other differences as well but of the options available, this
is the best answer.
BASE STATION
CALL PROCESSING OVERVIEW
SUMMARY
Knowledge Check
Question 3.
Select the 3G-1X channels that do not have equivalent channels in 2G?
a. F-PICH
b. R-PICH
c. F-SYNC
d. F-PCH
e. F-QPCH
f. R-ACH
g. F-FCH
h. R-FCH
i. F-SCH
j. R-SCH
S
Answer: b, e, i, j
Section 3
Acquire System Section 3
Acquire System CL8303 v1.0
MOBILE INITIALIZATION STATE
System Determination Substate
In this state, the mobile selects the system to use. The mobile usually has user selectable
preferences that prioritize the mobile initialization sequence. These functions are manu-
facturer dependent but allow user preferences, such as:
CDMA (or analog) Only
CDMA (or analog) Preferred
1900 MHz (or 850 MHz) Band Only
1900 MHz (or 850 MHz) Band Preferred.
Assuming the user prefers CDMA over analog and 1900 MHz over 850 MHz, the mobile
then attempts to acquire a system by scanning for a Pilot Channel on the first CDMA
channel assigned to the preferred system. If the Pilot Channel is not found, then the mobile
scans for the Pilot Channel on the next preferred CDMA channel, etc., until a pilot is
found.
Pilot Channel Acquisition Substate
Remember, the Pilot Channel is assigned Walsh Code zero, which is all zeros, or no code
at all, so the Pilot Channel is simply the short PN codes. If the mobile fails to find the PN
codes within 15 seconds, it will return to the System Determination Substate.
Sync Channel Acquisition Substate
Having obtained a Pilot Channel, the mobile now tries to decode Walsh code 32 to obtain
basic timing information from the base station. Typical information includes:
Protocol revision level (P_REV)
Minimum protocol revision level (MIN_P_REV)
System Identification (SID)
Network Identification (NID)
Pilot PN Sequence Offset (PILOT_PN)
Long Code State (LC_STATE)
System Time (SYS_TIME)
Page Channel Data Rate (PRAT).
The mobile may also use the local time information (daylight savings time indicator, off-
set of local time from system time, and number of leap seconds since start of System
Time) if needed. If after 1 second a sync channel is not found, the mobile will return to the
System Determination State.
Mobile Timing Change Substate
The mobile uses the Sync Channel information to set its internal timing to the system by
synchronizing its long code generator to the system, and offsetting its System Time with
respect to the short code PN sequence.
CL8303 v1.0 Acquire System
MOBILE INITIALIZATION STATE
CDMA System Selected
Pilot Channel Acquired
Receives Sync
Channel Message
System
Determination
Substate
Pilot
Channel
Acquisition
Substate
Mobile
Timing
Change
Substate
Sync
Channel
Acquisition
Substate
Power-up
Analog
Initialization
Task
End analog
mode operation
Begin analog
mode operation
Mobile
to Idle State
SYNC CHANNEL MESSAGES
The Sync Channel Message contains the information shown.
The protocol revision level indicates the IS-95 revision level supported by the base sta-
tion.
The minimum protocol revision level indicates the mobile must support this revision, or
higher, in order to obtain CDMA service from the base station.
System Identification is the identifier number for this cellular system.
Network Identification serves as a sub-identifier for this cellular system.
The Pilot PN sequence offset index is the offset index, in units of 64 chips, for this sector.
System Time corresponds to the point in time 320 msec past the end of the 80 ms super-
frame that contains the Sync Channel Message.
The long code state is the state of the long code generator at the start of the next frame, as
given by the system time parameter.
The leap second parameter is the number of leap seconds that have occurred since the
start of the GPS system time (January 6, 1980, 00:00:00 UTC).
The offset of local time is the offset of the local time of day from the system time. The
current local time of day is system time leap second + offset from local time.
The page channel data rate indicates the current data rate used on the page channels,
either 4.8 kbps or 9.6 kbps.
The frequency assignment corresponds to the CDMA frequency assignment for the
CDMA channel containing a primary page channel. For IS-95A this field is set to the car-
rier containing this Sync Channel.
The extended frequency assignment corresponds to the CDMA frequency assignment
for the CDMA channel containing a primary page channel that a mobile capable or Radio
Configurations greater than two or capable of supporting Quick Paging Channel will use.
SYNC CHANNEL MESSAGES
Protocol Revision Level
Minimum Protocol Revision Level
System Identification
Network Identification
Pilot PN Sequence Offset Index
System Time
Long Code State
Leap Second
Offset of Local Time
Page Channel Data Rate
Frequency Assignment
Extended Frequency Assignment
S
Nokias 2G mobiles have a software error so they will not recognize the 3G Sync
channel, and revert to analog. The basic problem is the EXT-CDMA-FREQ
field and Nokias interpretation of the IS-2000 standard. The problem is being
worked on and this note may change when the issue is resolved.
SYNC CHANNEL
TRANSLATION PARAMETERS
ltm_off
Please refer to the Database Update Manual (401-610-036) for more details on the transla-
tion parameters.
Local Time Offset (hr)
(ltm_off)
Form: cell2, ecp
indicates the number of hours to offset the local time from
the system time. This value may override a similar param-
eter on the ecp form.
Range: -12 12 hours in .5 hour increments
SYNC CHANNEL
ltm_off

CDMA Cell Site Information ONLY:
Daylight Savings Time in Effect ....................................................................................... +281) ___
Local Time Offset (hr).................................................................................................... +282) ___
Overload Threshold (%)
- RCC.......................................................................................................................... +283) ___
- CCC.......................................................................................................................... +284) ___
CRC Overload Control (%) .............................................................................................. +285) ___
Traffic CEs Reserved for Handoff (%) ............................................................................. +286) ___
Maximum Traffic CEs Allowed for SMS (%) .................................................................... +287) ___
Handoff Escalation Interval (sec) ..................................................................................... +288) ___
Traffic Channel Supervision Interval (sec) ....................................................................... +289) ___
Request for Pilot Measurements Interval (sec)................................................................ +290) ___
Total CDMA Channel Elements OOS Minor Limit (%)..................................................... +291) ___
Total CDMA Channel Elements OOS Major Limit (%)..................................................... +292) ___
Overhead Channel Optimization (after RTDIAG)............................................................. +293) ___
Clustering Overhead Channels........................................................................................ +294) ___
Frequency of Routine Overhead Channel Optimization .................................................. +295) ___
NCI Frame Gap................................................................................................................ 296) ___
AUTOPLEX
Cellular SERIES II CELL (cell2) Screen 17 of 21
System Cell ____
SYSTEM ACCESS SUMMARY
The mobile finds
Pilot channel
Sync channel
Page channel.
For 3G-1X a new Sync Channel Message field is used,
Extended Frequency Assignment
Acquire System
Knowledge Check
Question 1.
Select the two channels the mobile station detects in the Mobile Station Initialization Sub-
state?
A. Pilot Channel
B. Page Channel
C. Sync Channel
D. Access Channel
S
Answer: a, c
Question 2.
What is the Extended Frequency Assignment (EXT_CDMA_FREQ) field in the Sync
Channel Message used for?
A. For all mobile stations to find an available carrier.
B. For 3G-1X mobile stations to find an available 3G-1X carrier.
C. For 2G mobile stations to find an available 2G carrier.
D. For 3G-1X mobile stations to know available 3G-1X carriers to hash to.
S
Answer: b
ACQUIRE SYSTEM
Knowledge Check
Section 4
Idle Mode Section 4
Idle Mode CL8303 v1.0
MOBILE IDLE STATE
In this state, the mobile continues to read the paging channel information and measure the
Pilot Channel on the serving base station, as well as other Pilot Channels used in the sys-
tem.
The mobile can monitor all the paging information, or just selected frames, to conserve
battery life in a handheld unit. This is known as the slotted mode. If the mobile is using the
slotted mode, the system can only page a mobile when the mobile is active. The mobile
and base station have to negotiate the frames to be used before the mobile can enter the
slotted mode. The negotiations are conducted between the base station and the mobile on
the Page Channel and Access Channel.
The mobile monitors the Page Channel for:
System Parameters Message
Access Parameters Message
Neighbor List Message
CDMA Channel List Message
Page Message.
The System Parameter Message includes system ID, registration parameters, slot mode
parameters, search windows for Pilot Channels, power control parameters, and pilot
thresholds to add or drop candidate base stations.
The Access Parameters Message includes number of access channels, initial power control
parameters, access channel timing parameters, and authentication parameters.
The Neighbor List Message includes neighbor configuration and Pilot PN sequence offset
for each neighbor.
The CDMA Channel List Message indicates the CDMA channels that are active at this
base station.
While in the idle state, the mobile can originate a call, respond to a page, or synchronize to
a stronger base station. This last process is called the idle handoff. The mobile monitors
the strength of the active pilot, as well as the strength from a number of neighbor pilots, as
well as any other pilot channels. If another pilot channel exceeds the active pilot channel
by an amount specified in the System Parameters Message, the mobile will reenter the ini-
tialization state and attempt to acquire the stronger base station, a handoff while in the idle
state. The mobile will also reenter the initialization state if it loses the signal from the
active base station, and none of the other pilot channels are adequate.
Finally, the mobile will attempt to access the base station if it needs to register, answer a
page, or the user originates a call.
CL8303 v1.0 Idle Mode
MOBILE IDLE STATE
Mobile unable to
receive Paging Channel
Mobile receives
acknowledgment to an
Access transmission other
than Origination or Page
Response
Mobile has fully acquired
system timing
Another pilot stronger
than current pilot
Idle Handoff complete
Mobile
Initialization State
Page
Channel
Monitor &
Pilot Search
Substate
Mobile
System Access
State
Idle Handoff
Substate
Call Termination
Call Origination
Registration
PAGE CHANNEL
Overhead Information Messages
Typical messages sent on the Page channel are listed.
The system parameters messages provide system information, such as the Pilot PN
sequence offset increment, the base station identifier, the number of paging channels,
autonomous registration parameters, power control parameters, and pilot thresholds. Ini-
tially, the mobile decodes the primary paging channel (the primary page channel uses
Walsh function 1), and if the number of paging channels is greater than 1, the mobile uses
a hashing function to determine the paging channel to be used.
The access channel parameters message provides the parameters used by a mobile to
transmit on the access channel. Parameters include number of access channels, access
power parameters, persistence parameters, and access channel protocol parameters.
The neighbor list message provides the Pilot PN sequence offset for all the neighbor base
stations, and if the neighbor has the same paging channel assignments, as the current base
station. This message is only used in band class 0 systems (Cellular A or B band).
The extended neighbor list message is used to send neighbor lists that not only include
the PN offset for neighbors transmitting on the serving frequency, but neighbors that only
transmit on other frequency channels. This message is used in border cells, and PCS sys-
tems.
The general neighbor list is used with IS-95B systems and specifies search priorities.
The CDMA channel list message gives the supported CDMA channel numbers at this
base station.
The global service redirection message is used to redirect mobiles with a specific over-
load class to another CDMA or analog system.
The null message is transmitted any time there is no other information to send to provide a
continuous data stream on the overhead channel.
The extended CDMA channel list (ECLM) is much like the CDMA channel list (CLM),
but only 3G-capable cells will generate an ECLM that includes only those non-test carri-
ers that have 3G equipage and at least one page channel. If the CLM and the ECLM have
identical contents, the ECLM will only be sent if the 3G data feature is enabled. 3G carri-
ers that are not to be shared by 2G mobiles are omitted from the CLM.
PAGE CHANNEL
Overhead Information Messages
System Parameters
Extended System Parameters
Access Channel Parameters
Neighbor List
Extended Neighbor List
General Neighbor List
CDMA Channel List
Common carriers on top of the list
Non-common carriers sorted in ascending order
Pilot-only carriers excluded
Global Service Redirection
Null
Extended CDMA Channel List
EXTENDED CDMA CHANNEL LIST MESSAGE
TRANSLATION PARAMETER
tion parameters.
Allow Sharing 3G-1X Carrier
(Prim/Alt)
(share_3g1x)
(share_3g1x_alt)
Form: ceqface3g
Specifies whether 3G carriers are to be shared with 2G
mobiles. When the alternate value is specified, it will take
precedence over the primary value.
(Primary) y and n
(Alternate) y and n
Allow Sharing 3G-1X Carrier.
Carriers Using Alt
(share_3g1x_carrs)
Form: ceqface3g
Specifies the carrier lists for 3G carriers being shared with
2G mobiles.
Range: y or blank
EXTENDED CDMA CHANNEL LIST MESSAGE
AUTOPLEX
Cellular CELL EQUIPAGE FACE For 3G (ceqface3g) Screen 1 of 3
System
3G1X CDMA - Voice

Cell Site - Number ...........................................*1) ___
- Physical Antenna Face ............................*2) _
3G1X Load Preference Delta ...................................+3) ___
2G Load Preference Delta .....................................+4) ___
Quick Paging Channel Transmit Power Level ....................+5) __
Number of 3G Traffic Channel Preamble ........................ 6) _

Prim Alt Carriers Using Alt
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Preferred 8K Forward RC ......+7) _ +8) _ 10) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Allow Sharing 3G1X Carrier ..+30) _ +31) _ 33) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
PAGE CHANNEL
Mobile Directed Messages
Typical messages sent on the Page channel to individual mobiles are listed.
The general page messages informs a mobile that there is a call for that mobile. The
mobile is identified by its MIN1 and optionally its MIN2. MIN1 represents the 7-digit
telephone number assigned the mobile, and the MIN2 represents the area code. The slotted
page is used when the mobile only listens for a page during specific time periods (slots).
Typical order messages are: Abbreviated Alert, Base Station Challenge Confirmation,
Reorder, Audit, Intercept, Base Station Acknowledgment, Lock Until Power Cycled,
Maintenance Required, Unlock, Release, Registration Accepted/Requested/Rejected, and
Local Control.
The channel assignment message informs the mobile of a new CDMA frequency that it
should tune to.
The extended channel assignment message is used to assign a mobile to a traffic channel
on a different band class. This message allows a mobile that originates on a cellular sys-
tem to be assigned a traffic channel on a PCS system.
The data burst message sends a string of bytes to the mobile for display (Short Message
Service).
The authentication challenge message allows the base station to validate the mobile.
The SSD update message is used to update the shared secret data used by the system and
mobile for authentication and encryption.
The feature notification message contains information to allow the network to display
information on the mobile display, e.g., message waiting.
PAGE CHANNEL
Mobile Directed Messages
General Page
Order
Channel Assignment
Extended Channel Assignment
Data Burst
Authentication Challenge
SSD Update
*
Feature Notification
* A tutorial about authentication is provided as an appendix.
EXAMPLE OF SLOTTED MODE STRUCTURE
The Paging Channel is divided into 80-millisecond slots, called Paging Channel Slots. A
mobile is able to operate in two modes when reading the paging channel. In the first mode
the mobile reads every paging message, responds to messages addressed to the mobile,
and ignores all the rest. In the second mode, called Slotted Mode, mobile will only read
the paging channels messages in selected paging channel slots, and ignores all messages in
the remaining slots. This allows a mobile unit to power down until a selected slot is being
transmitted, extending battery life in handheld units.
The Paging Channel protocol provides for scheduling the transmission of messages for an
individual mobile in certain assigned paging slots. The mobile may not operate in the slot-
ted mode in any state except the mobile idle state. The mobile calculates the page channel
slot by using the hashing algorithm specified in the IS-95A standard. The base station cal-
culates the same page channel slot from the International Mobile Station Identification
(IMSI), as specified by IS-95A, and only transmits messages in that page slot.
The slot cycle is a multiple of 1.28 seconds, and is specified by the slot cycle index. The
length of the slot cycle, T, in units of 1.28 seconds is given by:
T = 2
i
Where i is the slot cycle index. There are 16 T slots in a slot cycle.
Paging channel slot PGSLOT mod 2
(4 + i)
Acronyms
IMSI International Mobile Station Identification
ms millisecond
NOTE:
The Lucent Technologies implementation of slotted mode paging support the
values of i = 0 and i = 1 via the maxslot translation parameter.
EXAMPLE OF SLOTTED MODE STRUCTURE
If mobile computes PGSLOT = 6 based on its IMSI, and
If Slot Cycle Index, i = 0
Then mobile listens to every sixteenth paging slot
starting at slot 6 (that is, 6, 22, 38, 54, etc.)
Minimum Length Slot Cycle of 16 Slots
1.28 Seconds
2047 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

14 15
Mobile
reacquisition of
CDMA System
Paging Channel
Slot 6
Mobile in
non-active state
80 ms
1.28 Seconds
16 17 18 19 20 21 23

30 31 32
Mobile
reacquisition of
CDMA System
Paging Channel
Slot
Mobile in
non-active state
Paging Channel Slot
Paging Channel Slot
80 ms
NUMBER OF PAGE CHANNELS
tion parameters.
Number of Paging Channels
(num_page)
Form: cdmeqp, ceqcom2,
crcseq, bbueqp
Specifies the number of equipped paging channels in the
carrier/sector.
Range: 0 or 1
NUMBER OF PAGE CHANNELS

FLEXENT
Wireless CDMA DIGITAL MODULE EQUIPAGE (cdmeqp) Screen 4 of 4
Networks Cell ___ CDM ___
44) CBR Equipage:
CBR
Number
CBR
STAT
45)
MCA
Number
46)
Phy
Ant
47)
Max
Pwr
48)
CDMA
Carr
49)
Carr
Chnl
50)
CBR
Atten
51)
Base
Class
52)
Number
Paging
Channels
53)
Rx
Desence
54)
Calibration
55)
[1] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[2] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[3] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
WARNING: REMOVE THE CBR PRIOR TO CHANGING ANY INFO FOR THAT CBR. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THE PROPER PROCEDURES MAY CORRUPT THE CELL OPERATION.
PAGE CHANNEL
maxslot
tion parameters.
Maximum Slot Cycle Index
(maxslot)
Form: ecp
specifies the maximum slot cycle index for this system.
This parameter is used to identify the slotted paging oper-
ation period.
Note: The Slot Cycle Index field on the sub and vlr
forms are used for a given subscriber.
Range:
0 = 1.28 seconds
1 = 2.56 seconds
PAGE CHANNEL
maxslot

CDMA Information (Non-Power Control)
Leap Seconds Since System Start Time (sec) .................................................................... 439) ___
Daylight Savings Time in Effect ........................................................................................... +440) ___
Local Time Offset (hr) .......................................................................................................... +441) ___
Pilot PN Sequence Offset Index Increment ......................................................................... 442) ___
Traffic Channel Supervision Interval (sec) ........................................................................... +443) ___
Request for Pilot Measurement Interval (sec)...................................................................... +444) ___
Overload Threshold (%) - RCC............................................................................................ +445) ___
- CCC............................................................................................ +446) ___
Total CDMA Channel Elements OOS Minor Limit (%)......................................................... +447) ___
Total CDMA Channel Elements OOS Major Limit (%)......................................................... +448) ___
Traffic CEs Reserved for Handoff (%) ................................................................................. +449) ___
Maximum Traffic CEs Allowed for SMS (%) ........................................................................ +450) ___
Handoff Escalation Interval (sec) ......................................................................................... +451) ___
Traffic Channel Selection Algorithm..................................................................................... 452) ___
Carrier Assignment Algorithm.............................................................................................. +453) ___
RF Loading Weight Factor ................................................................................................... +454) ___
Maximum Slot Cycle Index................................................................................................ 455) ___
AUTOPLEX
Cellular EXECUTIVE CELLULAR PROCESSOR (ecp) Screen 24 of 40
System
QUICK PAGING CHANNEL
Introduction
The Quick Paging Channel (F-QPCH) is a new channel in 3G-1X that is available as a fea-
ture for cell sites with 3G capable hardware. 3G mobiles will know what carriers supports
F-QPCH by reading the carriers listed in the ECLM.
Benefits
The objective of the Quick Paging Channel (F-QPCH) is to extend a 3G capable mobiles
battery life by reducing the time the mobile spends monitoring paging channels.
How Does It Work?
A mobile monitoring the F-QPCH will be notified about a page or updated overhead mes-
sages on the regular page channel (F-PCH) using a 2-bit indicator 100ms prior to the
assigned slot on the F-PCH.
The slot cycle structure of the F-QPCH is the same as F-PCH but shifted 100ms. See fig-
ure.
The F-QPCH slot is divided into four parts. A paging indicator is transmitted two times, in
part 1 & 3 or part 2 & 4. What parts to transmit the indicator in is determined by the hash-
ing algorithm defined in IS-2000.5 (Section 2.6.7.1). The purpose of the hashing algo-
rithm is to spread out the mobiles over the F-QPCH slot so that not every mobile is
monitoring the same indicators.
The hashing algorithm determines the paging indicator bit position relative to the start of
the F-QPCH slot.
If the mobile cannot detect a paging indicator to be OFF, the mobile will read the F-
PCH slot immediately following the F-QPCH slot. The mobile needs only to detect one
indicator to be OFF, i.e., if the mobile detect the first indicator to be OFF the mobile
does not have to monitor the second indicator.
The F-QPCH is also transmitting configuration change indicators between parts 2 and 3
and after part 4. The configuration change indicators are used to notify the mobiles about
changed overhead information. Configuration change indicators are only used on the first
F-QPCH.
Technical Data
IS-2000 supports up to three F-QPCHs. At the moment, 3G-1X is supporting one F-
QPCH. The data rate of the F-QPCH is 9.6kbps or 4.8kbps. At the moment, 3G-1X is sup-
porting 9.6kbps.
The Walsh codes used to identify the Quick Paging Channels are of length 128 bits. The
first F-QPCH is Walsh code 80, the second 48, and the third 112.
tion parameters.
Quick Paging Feature Enabled
(qpch_enable)
Form:cell3g
Specifies to indicate if the quick paging is on in the
system. This value shall be set to yes only if the
FAF entry for the Quick Paging Channel FAF
(QPCH) is on and the System Operating Protocol
Revision in the cell2 or ecp form is set to IS2000.
Range: y or n
Quick Paging Channel
Transmit Power Level
(qpch_pwr)
Form: ceqface3g
Specifies the transmit power

compared to the Pilot Channel in dB
Range: -5 - 2 dB
AUTOPLEX
Cellular SERIES 2 CELL FOR 3G (cell3g) Screen 1 of 10
System

CDMA 3G1X (Non-Dynamic Power Control)

Cell Site Number............................................*1) ___
CDMA 3G1X Channel Elements OOS Minor Limit (%)..............+2) ___
CDMA 3G1X Channel Elements OOS Major Limit (%)..............+3) ___
Time Allowed Before 3G1X-mode Cell Access Fault (min).......+4) ____
Time Allowed Before 3G1X-mode Cell Call Fault (min).........+5) ____
Quick Paging Feature Enabled................................ 6) _
AUTOPLEX
System
3G1X CDMA - Voice

Cell Site - Number ...........................................*1) ___

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NEIGHBOR LIST
cdmanbr_list.ncs_c, cdmanbr_list.nghbrantf,
cdmanbr_list.pilot_pn, cdmanbr_list.pgn_c
tion parameters.
CDMA Principle Neighbor List
Cell Site
(cdmanbr.nsc_c)
Form: fci
cell site number for a physical cell site on this MSC
(home cell site) or on a different MSC (nonhome cell
site). If this field is used, enter data into the other fields
on the same row.
Range: 1 222
Ant Face
(cdmanbr.mghbrantf)
Form: fci
indicates the home or nonhome cell site physical

antenna face number associated with the cell site
entered on the same row in the Cell Site field.
Range:
0 = omni
1 = alpha
2 = beta
3 = gamma
4 = delta
5 = epsilon
6 = zeta
Pilot PN
(cdmanbr.mghbr_pn)
Form: fci
the neighbor pilot PN sequence offset for this neighbor

cell site.
Note: For CDMA neighbor cells on this MSC (home
cells), the value in this field is defined on the ceqface
form and only displayed here. For nonhome cell sites,
the value for this field must be entered manually.
Range: 0 511
Prior Grp
(cdmanbr.pgn_c)
Form: fci
specifies the priority group of this neighbor.
Range: 0 3
NEIGHBOR LIST
cdmanbr_list.ncs_c, cdmanbr_list.nghbrantf,
cdmanbr_list.pilot_pn, cdmanbr_list.pgn_c

Enter Extended System ID when Neighbor Cell is on different Switch or MSC.
AUTOPLEX
Cellular FACE CODE INFORMATION (fci) Screen 14 of 20
System Cell ___ SG ___ Face __
260) CDMA Principle Neighbor List
Cell
Site
261)
Ant
Face
262)
Pilot
PN
263)
Prior
Grp
264)
Anlg
Ant
Face
265)
Eqvlnt
Serv
Grp
266)
Anlg
Only
Pilot
267)
Ngbr
Conf
268)
Band
Class
269)
Hard
Handoff
Only
270)
AHO
271)
CAM
SHO
272)
AEHO
273)
Extended System ID
DCS ECP SYS
274) 275) 276)
[1] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[2] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[3] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[4] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[5] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[6] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[7] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[8] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[9] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[10] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[11] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[12] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
S
NOTE:
In R16.1 it is possible to specify up to two alternate neighbor lists and to specify
what carriers the alternate neighbor lists apply to.
PRIORITY GROUP VALUES
Each position on the neighbor list has associated with it a translation value know as Prior-
ity Group. This setting is used to break ties during construction of the combined neighbor
list. The setting is also used to automatically sort the neighbor list on the fci form. The
neighbor list is sorted by: priority group, cell site, and antenna face in ascending order.
The range of values allowed and the general guideline for initial setting is:
Additional fine-tuning of the value is needed in order to optimize the cell combined neigh-
bor list.
Values of Priority Group Parameter
Value of Priority Group Field Meaning Guideline
0 Highest Intra-cell neighbor sectors
1 Middle First tier neighbor sectors
2 Low Second tier neighbor sectors
3 Lowest Third tier and beyond
PRIORITY GROUP VALUES
2
2
1
2
2
3
0
0
1
2
A
0 denotes the Neighbor with Priority Group of 0.
One Example of Neighbor Priority Setting for Sector A
PAGING CHANNEL NEIGHBOR LIST SELECTION
pgch_nlsel
tion parameters.
Paging Channel Neighbor List
Selection
(pgch_nlsel)
Form: ceqface, ecp
limits the number of neighbors sent to the mobiles on the
Paging channel.
Range: 6 and 20
PAGING CHANNEL NEIGHBOR LIST SELECTION
pgch_nlsel

CDMA Engineering Parameters
Upward Power Adjustment for Hard Handoff (dB) .................................................... +237) ___
Forward Power Control Timer Value (ms)................................................................. +238) ___
Forward Power Overload Control:
Forward Power Report Source............................................................................... +239) ___
Forward Power Clipping Hysteresis (%) ................................................................ +240) ___
Paging Channel Neighbor List Selection.............................................................. +241) ___
Undeclared Neighbor List.......................................................................................... +242) ___
Full Rate Erasure Setpoint Increase (setpoints) ....................................................... 243) ___
Erasure Setpoint Increase (setpoints)....................................................................... 244) ___
Erasure/Full-Likely Setpoint Increase (setpoints)...................................................... 245) ___
Full Rate Run (frames).............................................................................................. 246) ___
Erasure Recovery Period (frames)............................................................................ 247) ___
Erasure Run Length (frames).................................................................................... 248) ___
Quarter/Eighth Rate Setpoint Decrease (setpoints).................................................. 249) ___
Traffic Channel Preamble Length (frames) ............................................................... +250) ___
AUTOPLEX
Cellular CELL EQUIPAGE FACE (ceqface) Screen 17 of 23
System Cell ___ Face _
PAGING CHANNEL OCCUPANCY
SERVICE MEASUREMENTS
Please refer to the Service Measurement document (401-610-135) for more details on the
service measurements.
CDMAPAF
23: CDMA Paging Channel Occupancy
This count is divided by 100 in order to obtain the percentage of occupancy on the paging
channel(s). For example, 2653 is read 26.53%. If multiple paging channels are supported,
then this number will span all paging channels; in other words, separate counts will not be
maintained for each paging channel. With a data rate of 9600 bps on the paging channel,
one paging channel frame is equivalent to 300 idle bytes. The paging channel will be fixed
at 9600 bps.
With the System Hashing feature off, this count is averaged over the number of equipped
active paging channels.
With the System Hashing feature on:
When all carriers are not border carriers, this count is averaged over the number of pag-
ing carriers listed in the sectors CDMA Channel List message.
When all carriers are border carriers, this count is averaged over the number of
equipped active paging carriers.
The units for this count is the percentage of occupancy divided by 100.
24: Peak CDMA Paging Channel Occupancy
The count for peak paging channel occupancy will be in percent occupancy. Every 10 sec-
onds, the paging channel occupancy is compared with the previous maximum number. If a
new maximum or peak has been reached, the new value is saved.
With the System Hashing feature off, the peak is taken over the number of equipped active
paging channels.
With the System Hashing feature on:
When all carriers are not border carriers, the peak is taken over the number of paging
carriers listed in the sectors CDMA Channel List message.
When all carriers are border carriers, the peak is taken over the number of equipped ac-
tive paging carriers.
The units for this count is the percentage of occupancy.
PAGING CHANNEL OCCUPANCY
CDMAPAF
23: CDMA Paging Channel Occupancy
24: Peak CDMA Paging Channel Occupancy
PAGE CHANNEL OCCUPANCY
Page channel occupancy is defined as the number of occupied page channel slots divided
by the number of total available page channel slots.
The page channel occupancy could increase when the amount of Busy Hour Call (BHCA)
is increased. With an increased number of BHCA the number of directed pages and chan-
nel assignment messages will increase and therefore the page channel will be more occu-
pied. A BHCA increase could be due to an increase of the number of subscribers in the
system, or existing subscribers are making more calls. Also, if the number of Short Mes-
sage Service (SMS) messages sent on the page channel is increased, the page channel
occupancy could increase.
Another reason for increased page channel occupancy could be an increase in the number
of repeated pages. A page to a mobile may be repeated to increase the probability of a suc-
cessful page attempt.
In order to reduce the occupancy of the page channel, the paging strategy can be changed,
for example implementation of the Sub-MSC Paging feature, see 401-612-017. Adding
additional carriers will also reduce the page channel occupancy, since the additional carri-
ers usually bring additional page channels. See unit 4 for more details.
The IS-95 standard also allows for more than one page channel to be configured on one
carrier. The Lucent Technologies architecture currently supports only one page channel
per carrier. Usually when the page channel is close to maximum capacity, additional car-
rier have to be deployed due to high traffic in the system. When additional carriers are
deployed, more page channels are introduced into the system.
Ref.: 401-610-009
PAGE CHANNEL OCCUPANCY
Definition
Occupied paging slots/available paging slots 100%
Page channel occupancy could increase when
number of BHCA is increasing.
more SMS messages are being sent.
pages are repeated.
Page channel occupancy could be decreased by
changing paging strategy.
adding a new carrier.
adding a new page channel.
*
* Lucent currently supports up to one page channel per carrier.
HASHING
Having full capabilities (that is, page and access) on the growth carrier frequency provides
additional page and access capacity. This is particularly important when considering spe-
cial features such as autonomous registration and short message service which consume
access channel and page channel capacity respectively.
In order to realize this additional capacity though, the mobiles must be segregated in some
defined way so that they can be paged on the page channel associated with only one fre-
quency.
In IS-95A there is an algorithm defined called the hashing algorithm. The input used in the
hashing algorithm is the International Mobile Station Identifier (IMSI) and the number of
carriers available as being transmitted in the Channel List Message (CLM) on the page
channel. The hashing algorithm will return a carrier, Fn, that the mobile will hash to - stay
idle on.
By spreading the users evenly between carriers the load on the access channel is spread. A
mobile will send access probes on the access channel assigned to the carrier the mobile is
hashed to.
LOAD BALANCE ACCESS CHANNEL
HASHING
Hashing algorithm in IS-95-A/B is based on the IMSI and
CLM. The algorithm tells the MS to be idle on a certain
carrier, F
n
.
Access probes will be sent on F
n
.
Algorithm will spread the users evenly between carriers to
balance access channel loading.
F
1
F
2
F
2
F
1
F
1
F
1
F
2
F
2
F
1
F
2
S
NOTE:
Focus on hashing, not loadbalance Access Channel.
LOAD BALANCE PAGE CHANNEL
SHAPCAR
The CDMA System Hashing Over Paging Carriers (CDMA SHAPCAR) feature gives ser-
vice providers the ability to spread the paging traffic load over the CDMA page channels
in areas with multiple carriers.
The IS-95-A
*
and ANSI J-STD-008 standards provide for mobile hashing to distribute the
load across multiple paging carriers by choosing a specific paging carrier based on the
International Mobile Station Identification (IMSI). Prior to this feature when each carrier
in a multiple-carrier cell supported at most one page channel, the cell transmitted the same
page messages on each carrier. This feature provides the IS-95-A hashing ability so the
system identifies the paging carrier that the mobile monitors, and then transmits page mes-
sages for that mobile only on the page channel for that carrier.
It is recommended that this feature be provisioned for all multicarrier cell sites of the sys-
tem to gain its benefits system wide.
* IS-95-A, Section 6.6.7.1
ANSI J-STD-008, Section 2.6.7.1
Acronyms
CDMA SHAPCAR CDMA System Hashing Over Multiple Paging Carriers
IMSI International Mobile Station Identification
LOAD BALANCE PAGE CHANNEL
SHAPCAR
Mobile is hashed to a certain carrier, F
n
, and is monitoring
that carriers page channel.
System will only page the mobile on the carrier to which the
mobile is hashed, F
n
.
Page channel capacity is preserved on the carriers other
than F
n
.
F
1
F
N
.
.
.
IMSI
F
2
HASHING OVER PAGING CARRIER FREQUENCIES
f_list5.c_feat[10]
tion parameters.
CDMA SHAPCAR
(f_list5.c_feat[10])
Form: cell2
indicates if the CDMA System Hashing Over Paging Carri-
ers (CDMA SHAPCAR) optional feature is active on this
cell site.
Range: y or n
f_list5.c_feat[10]

AUTOPLEX
System Cell ____
Cell Site Optional Features
198) 200) 202) 204)
[1] CDMA S2M/S2MM _ TDMA CNAP _ OFD-CAP _ MSINACT TRIG _
[2] TDMA TBIA _ CDMA CDPD _ OFD-PG _ TDMA FLCA DA _
[3] CTRAF SMS _ CDMA IP _ TDMA DTX CNI _ Reserved _
[4] CDMA IFHO TI _ CDMA RLPE _ TDMA HIER CELLS _ ANLG ON TMC _
[5] Reserved _ OFD-MS _ Reserved _ Reserved _
[6] Reserved _ OFD-A _ TDMA FLCA LM _ TDMA MDCCH _
[7] Reserved _ CDMA ACO CTRL _ CDMA CNAP _ CDMA FRANGEXT _
[8] Reserved _ TDMA DATAPRIV _ INTL ROAM _ CDMA 3G1XHSPD _
[9] MC DS0 NAILUP _ COACC SMS _ TDMA OTASP 1 _ TDMA DDPC _
[10] CDMA SHAPCAR _ LCR _ CDMA ANFX _ INTL ROAM MIN _
[11] CDMA SCSFT _ CDMA MPIFHO _ CDMA OTAPA _ Reserved _
[12] CDMA PN & UZ _ Reserved _ CDMA RXANT _ Reserved _
[13] TDMA OTASP _ CDMA PPOPTMT _ TDMA GUTS 1 _ Reserved _
[14] TDMA CKT DATA _ CDMA PP 16 _ CDMA COLOC _ Reserved _
sys_hash_sw
tion parameters.
Set Sys. Hashing Over Pg.
Carriers Feature Switch
(sys_hash_sw)
Form: ecp
allows activation or deactivation on the System Hashing
Across Paging Carriers feature for all the System Hashing
QFAF enabled cells. The sys_hash_sw field will enable
the System Hashing feature for all cell sites that have the
CDMA SHAPCAR feature activated on the cell 2 form.
Range: y or n
sys_hash_sw

Sector Size (miles) .............................................................................................................. +456) ___
Set Sys. Hashing Over Pg. Carriers Feature Switch...................................................... 457) ___
Maximum Neighbor List Number Sent to Mobile................................................................. +458) ___
Neighbor List Selection Mechanism.................................................................................... +459) ___
Paging Channel Neighbor List Selection............................................................................. +460) ___
Undeclared Neighbor List .................................................................................................... +461) ___
Global Service Redirection (GSR) Message:
Return from Analog if Failure........................................................................................... +471) ___
Redirect to Other System (SID)....................................................................................... +472) ___
Ignore CDMA Capability Message .................................................................................. +473) ___
Search Order for Analog.................................................................................................. +474) ___
AUTOPLEX
System
+Overload Classes - Subscriber Access Allowed for CDMA
464) 466) 468) 470)
[1] Class 0 _ Class 4 _ [1] Class 8 _ Class 12 _ [1]
OMIT BORDER CARRIERS FROM
CHANNEL LIST MESSAGE
Inter-frequency Idle Handoff
Internal system borders are formed between areas of different numbers of CDMA carriers.
The sectors internal to the internal system borders (internal sectors) often have more carri-
ers than sectors external to the internal system border (external sectors). A common fre-
quency is a CDMA carrier whose frequency is common to both internal and external
sectors. A discontinuing/border frequency is a CDMA carrier frequency used by internal
sectors only. The last tier of sectors that have both common frequency and discontinuing/
border frequency forms the internal border. The RF footprint of the internal border sectors
between the common frequency and discontinuing/border frequency is usually different.
This is a result of lack of forward link interference on the discontinuing/border frequency
and different levels of traffic on common frequency and discontinuing/border frequency.
Experience in the field shows that call attempts on the border frequency (F2) of the inter-
nal border sectors in the area not covered by the common frequency (F1) are more suscep-
tible to failure either during the origination/termination process or the CDMAtoCDMA
interfrequency handoff process.
With this feature, the CDMA Channel List Message will omit reference to any Paging
Channels of a discontinuing frequency (F2) on any internal border sectors that are config-
ured for interfrequency CDMAtoCDMA handoff. The Paging Channel on the discon-
tinuing/border frequency will inform the mobiles to monitor the Paging Channel on a
different frequency. The mobiles then re-hash to another frequency (common frequency
(F1)) so that the mobiles do not attempt to access the system on the discontinuing/border
frequency of the internal border sector, idle inter-frequency handoff.
If the internal border cell/sector is configured for directed interfrequency CDMAto
CDMA handoff, this feature is automatically activated without other special translation
settings.
Inter-frequency Idle Handoff
To perform idle inter-frequency handoff at borders.
Feature turned on automatically when sector is defined as
a border sector.
Internal system border
Alpha:
Beta:
Gamma:
F1 only
F1 only
F1 only
Alpha:
Beta:
Gamma:
F1 only
F1 only
F1 only
Alpha:
Beta:
Gamma:
F1/F2
F1/F2
F1/F2
F1/F2
footprint F1
footprint
F1
footprint
F2 footprint
F1/F2 border
F1/F2
F1 only
Cell B
Cell C
Cell A
Cell A
Alpha, Beta: internal sectors
Gamma: internal border sector
F1
footprint
F2
Mobile monitors page channel using
Non-slotted mode
Slotted mode.
Mobile performs idle handoff based on neighbor list.
Page channel can be overloaded.
Mobile hashes to a page carrier
Load balance channels
Paging channel - SHAPCAR.
3G introduces the Quick Paging Channel (F-QPCH)
IDLE MODE
Knowledge Check
Question 1.
What Walsh code is used for the 2G page channel?
A. Walsh code 0 of length 64
B. Walsh code 1 of length 64
C. Walsh code 32 of length 64
D. Walsh code 80 of length 128
S
Answer: b
Question 2.
What Walsh code is used for the 3G-1X page channel?
A. Walsh code 0 of length 64
B. Walsh code 1 of length 64
C. Walsh code 32 of length 64
D. Walsh code 80 of length 128
S
Answer: b
Comment: Stress the fact that 3G-1X is using the same pilot, page, and sync
channel as 2G.
Question 3.
What is the Extended Channel List Message (ECLM) used for?
A. For all mobile stations to find carriers to hash to.
B. For 2G mobile stations to find 2G carriers to hash to.
C. For 3G-1X mobile stations to find 3G-1X carriers to hash to.
D. To assign a 3G-1X traffic channel to a 3G-1X mobile station.
S
Answer: c
IDLE MODE
Knowledge Check
Question 4.
For every F-PCH slot, how many times is the paging indicator transmitted on the
F-QPCH?
A. 1 time
B. 2 times
C. 4 times
S
Answer: b
Question 5.
What is the purpose of the F-QPCH?
A. To extend the battery life of a mobile station.
B. To increase the capacity of the F-PCH.
C. To allow more SMS to be transmitted.
D. To ensure that phone calls are returned faster.
S
Answer: a
Question 6.
Why is the battery life extended when the F-QPCH is used?
S
Answer: The mobile will only decode the F-PCH when the FQPCH has
indicated that there may be a page on the F-PCH. Detecting the paging
indicator to be ON or OFF requires less processing power than identifying if a
page channel message is for a specific mobile station or not. Hence, less battery
power is used and the battery life is extended.
Section 5
Accessing System Section 5
Accessing System CL8303 v1.0
MOBILE SYSTEM ACCESS STATE
Simplified
In this state, the mobile attempts to access the base station for the following reasons:
The user originates a call.
The mobile has received a page, indicating that there is a call to the mobile.
The mobile needs to send the base station a registration message.
The mobile needs to send the base station an acknowledgment or response to a message.
The mobile first reads the Page Channel overhead message stream until it has received a
current set of configuration messages, and then transmits a message to the base station on
the access channel. If the message is received successfully, the system will assign the
mobile to a traffic channel for call origination or termination. The mobile will return to the
idle state after sending a registration message, message acknowledgment or message
response.
CL8303 v1.0 Accessing System
MOBILE SYSTEM ACCESS STATE
Simplified
Received message
or order requiring
an acknowledgment
response
Received Page Message
Page
Response
From Mobile
Idle State
Mobile
Station Order/
Message
Response
Registration Access
User initiated a call
Update
Overhead
Information
Mobile
Station
Origination
Attempt
To Mobile Traffic
Channel State
To Mobile
Idle State
Registration
Access
ACCESS CHANNEL PROTOCOL
Message/Order Response Access Attempt
The mobile accesses the base station on the Access Channel using a random procedure to
minimize the chance of interference to other users. The access protocol is controlled by
base station translation parameters that are transmitted to the mobile in the Access Param-
eters Message on the Page Channel. The parameters are unique to each sector so each sec-
tor can be engineered to solve local interference problems. The Access Channel uses two
protocols, one when the mobile responds to a page, a request message or mobile order, and
the other when the mobile attempts to originate or register with the base station. Shown is
the mobile protocol to respond to a message from the base station.
The entire process of replying to a message and receiving (or failing to receive) an
acknowledgment is called an access attempt. Each transmission in the access attempt is
called an access probe. The mobile transmits the same data in each access probe in the
access attempt. In the following description, all translation parameters are italicized.
Within an access attempt, access probes are grouped into access probe sequences. Each
sequence consists of up to num_step access probes, all transmitted on the same access
channel. The first access probe of each sequence is transmitted at a specified power level
relative to the nominal open loop power level. Each subsequent access probe is transmit-
ted at a higher power level until the base station acknowledges the transmission. The ini-
tial power, shown as IP, is:
IP = nom_pwr + init_pwr 76 (mean received signal by mobile),
for PCS mobiles
IP = nom_pwr + init_pwr 73 (mean received signal by mobile),
for cellular mobiles
and the increase between attempts is pwr_step. nom_pwr, init_pwr, and pwr_step are all
translation parameters found on the ceqface and ecp forms.
The start time for the first probe is delayed a random time from the start of a frame to min-
imize interference, since all mobile use the same codes on the access channel. The mobile
uses a pseudorandom number generator based on its electronic serial number, and the
maximum delay permitted in the system, 2
probe_pn_ran 1
.
The timing of the start of each access probe sequence and the timing between each access
probe is determined pseudo randomly, to reduce interference between mobiles. For each
failed access probe sequence, a backoff delay RS is generated such that:
0 < RS < 1 + bkoff.
Timing between access probes is also generated pseudo randomly. The mobile waits for
period TA after transmitting for an acknowledgment from the base station;
TA = 80 (2 + acc_tmo). If an acknowledgment is received, the attempt is successful. If
not, the mobile waits a random period, RT, before transmitting again;
0 < RT < 1 + probe_bkoff.
The actual access probe transmission consists of a preamble, Walsh modulation symbol 0,
for pam_sz frames (each of 20 msec.), followed by the actual message consisting of
max_cap_sz frames (each of 20 msec.). The preamble is used to synchronize the base sta-
tion to the mobile. The preamble plus the message capsule is called one access slot.
Access Probe
Seq. 1 Seq. 2 Seq. 3 Seq. max_rsp_seq (15 max)
Time
Response message
ready for transmission.
Start time based on RN.
RS RS
Access Probe
num_step (16 max)
P
o
w
e
r
pwr_step
pwr_step
IP
Access
Probe 1
Access
Probe 2
Access
Probe 3
TA RT TA RT TA
Time
One Access Channel Slot
Preamble
Message
Capsule
max_cap_sz
(3-10 frames)
pam_sz
(1-15 frames)
20 ms
Request Access Attempt
The protocol, when the mobile is originating or registering, is similar to the protocol for
the message/order attempts. The difference is the pseudorandom interval between access
sequences contains an additional delay, called PD. Again, for every access probe
sequence, a backoff delay RS is generated such that: 0 < RS < 1 + bkoff. However, for the
request access probe sequences, an additional delay, PD, is generated by a persistence test.
For each access channel slot, the test generates a pseudorandom number and compares it
to a threshold. The threshold depends on the type of request, the access overload class
(ACCOLCp) assigned to a subscriber (as programmed into the mobile), the persistence
value for that class, psist, and the persistence modifier; msg_psist for messages or
reg_psist for registrations. The purpose of the persistence test is to increase the probability
a high priority subscriber will gain access over a lower priority subscriber during emer-
gency or overload conditions. The mobile generates a random number between 0 and 1,
then compares it to a persistence threshold calculated from the persistence parameters.
The mobile will transmit in the next access channel slot if the random number is lower
than the threshold, or calculate a new random delay, RS, and perform the persistence test
again if the random number was above the threshold. The parameters provide higher
thresholds for high priority mobiles giving the subscriber more chances to transmit an
access sequence.
The access sequence is identical to the access sequence described for the previous mes-
sage/order attempt.
Acronyms
PD Persistence Delay
RN Random Number used to determine the start of transmission
RS Backoff Delay
RT Retry Delay
TA Acknowledgment Time
NOTE:
The CDMA Automatic Access Channel Overload feature available with
APXD13.1 will manage access channel occupancy and prevent overloading by
dynamically changing the persistence.
Access Probe
Seq. 1 Seq. 2 Seq. max_req_seq (15 max)
Time
Response message
ready for transmission.
Start time based on RN.
PD RS
Access Probe
num_step (16 max)
P
o
w
e
r
pwr_step
pwr_step
IP
Access
Probe 1
Access
Probe 2
Access
Probe 3
TA RT TA RT TA
Time
One Access Channel Slot
Preamble
Message
Capsule
max_cap_sz
(3-10 frames)
pam_sz
(1-15 frames)
20 ms
Seq. 3
PD RS PD
ACCESS CHANNEL
nom_pwr, init_pwr, pwr_step, num_step,
acc_tmo, max_req_seq, max_rsp_seq
tion parameters.
Nominal Transmit Power Offset
(nom_pwr)
Form: ceqface, ecp
defines the correction factor used by the mobile for open-
loop transmit power estimation.
Range: 0 dB 5 dB
Initial Power Offset for Access
(init_pwr)
Form: ceqface, ecp
specifies the correction factor to be used by the mobile for
open-loop transmit power estimation for initial transmis-
sion on a access channel.
Range: -16 dB 15 dB
NOTE:
It may be motivated to increase the value specified for the init_pwr translation parameter to
make the detection of access probes more reliable at troublesome base stations.
Access Probe Power Increment
(dB)
(pwr_step)
Form: ceqface, ecp
specifies the increments (in dB) by which mobiles are
allowed to increase their transmit power between succes-
sive access probes in an access probe sequence.
Range: 0 7
Number of Access Probes
(num_step)
Form: ceqface, ecp
used to map the maximum number of access probes that
mobiles are to transmit in a single access probe sequence.
The number of access probes is equivalent to the number
of steps plus one.
Range: 1 16
Acknowledgment Timeout
(acc_tmo)
Form: ceqface, ecp
Used by the mobile to calculate the time (in milliseconds)
the mobile has to wait after the end of an access channel
transmission before determining that the base station did
not receive the transmission.
Range: 0 15
Max Access Probe Sequence
Request
(max_req_seq)
Form: ceqface, ecp
used to map to the maximum number of access probe
sequences that mobiles are to transmit for an access
channel request.
Range: 1 15
Response
(max_rsp_seq)
Form: ceqface, ecp
used to map to the maximum number of access probe
sequences that mobiles are to transmit for an access
channel response.
Range: 1 15
ACCESS CHANNEL
nom_pwr, init_pwr, pwr_step, num_step,
acc_tmo, max_req_seq, max_rsp_seq

CDMA Power Control Parameters
Reverse Link Open-Loop:
Nominal Transmit Power Offset (dB) ................................................................................ +165) ___
Initial Power Offset for Access (dB).................................................................................. +166)
___
Access Probe Power Increment (dB)................................................................................ +167) ___
Number of Access Probes................................................................................................. +168) ___
Access Control Parameters for Reverse Link:
Acknowledgment Timeout ................................................................................................. +169) ___
Max Access Probe Sequence
- Request.......................................................................................................................... +170) ___
- Response....................................................................................................................... +171) ___
AUTOPLEX
System Cell ____ Face ___
ACCESS CHANNEL
max_cap_sz, pam_sz,
probe_pn_ran, probe_bkoff, bkoff
tion parameters.
Max Access Channel Message
Capsule Size (frames)
(max_cap_sz)
Form: ceqface, ecp
used to map to the maximum number of access channel
frames in the access channel message.
Range: 3 10 frames
Access Channel Preamble
Length (frames)
(pam_sz)
Form: ceqface, ecp

frames in the access channel preamble.
Range: 1 15 frames
Time Randomization for Access
Channel Probes
(probe_pn_ran)
Form: ceqface, ecp
used by the mobile to compute the time randomization for

each access attempt.
Range: 0 8
Access Channel Probe
Backoff Range
(probe_bkoff)
Form: ceqface, ecp

slots a mobile must delay its transmission due to random
backoff between consecutive access probes. The mobile
uses this value to determine when to retransmit after an
access probe.
Range: 1 16
Sequence Backoff Range
(bkoff)
Form: ceqface, ecp

slots a mobile must delay its transmission due to random
backoff between successive access probe sequences and
before the first access probe sequence of a response
access.
Range: 1 16
ACCESS CHANNEL
max_cap_sz, pam_sz,
probe_pn_ran, probe_bkoff, bkoff

Overload Redirection to Analog.......................................................................... +217) ___
Max Access Channel Message Capsule Size (frames).................................. +218) ___
Access Channel Preamble Length (frames)................................................... +219) ___
Time Randomization for Access Channel Probes......................................... +220) ___
- Backoff Range........................................................................................... +221) ___
- Sequence Backoff Range......................................................................... +222) ___
Rate Rate
E
b
/N
0
Setpoint Set 1 Set 2
- Minimum (dB).............................................................................................. +223) ___+224) ___
- Maximum (dB)............................................................................................. +225) ___+226) ___
Traffic Channel Gain
- Minimum (dgu) ............................................................................................ +227) ___+228) ___
- Maximum (dgu) ........................................................................................... +229) ___+230) ___
Power Report Delay............................................................................................ +231) ___
Power Control Reporting Frames ....................................................................... +232) ___
Lower Forward Link FER Threshold (%)............................................................. +233) ___
Upper Forward Link FER Threshold (%)............................................................. +234) ___
AUTOPLEX
ACCESS SEARCH WINDOW
The figure shows the delays between a channel element and the mobile. Because not all
delays are known, an access search window has to be used to allow for variations in the
delay, specifically the air_delay. The optimal width in PN chips of the access search win-
dow is
2 cell_size 6.6 + 2 maxdif_txdelay 1.2288 + 2
probe_pn_ran
- 1
For non-simulcasting cases, maxdif_txdelay = 0 and rxdelay is roughly fixed.
Every frame transmitted from the CE is actually transmitted earlier than the GPS time by
the amount txdelay such that at the antenna (earliest antenna for simulcasting), the frame
boundary will be at the exact GPS time (to meet the IS-95A standard). Since it is impossi-
ble for a corresponding signal to arrive between the GPS time (time 0) and rxdelay, the
optimal access search window starts at rxdelay. Then the access search window width
should cover any possible delay between the (earliest) antenna and the mobile.
There is upper and lower bound associated with the cell access search window. The mini-
mal cell access search window size is about 20 chips. The maximal cell access search win-
dow size is restricted by hardware. Therefore under all circumstances, the following
inequality for delay budget must be satisfied
20 < rxdelay 1.2288 + access search window < 512
If the cell access search window size by any combination of the above translation parame-
ters is outside the range, that is less than 20 chips or greater than 512 chips, the channel
element will be put into out-of-service (OOS) when the translations are loaded into the
channel element modem. Note: for the Flexent CCU1.1 the upper bound is 1024 chips.
The cell_size translation parameter will impact the access search window size and access
protocol translation parameters. See Translation Application Note No. 6 for more details.
txdelay rxdelay
Series II Based Cell 22.5 14.0
Flexent Cellular Microcell 30.1 13.0
Flexent Cellular Modular Cell 30.1 13.0
Flexent PCS Microcell 22.2 4.0
Flexent PCS Modular Cell 22.2 4.0
Note: antennas relatively close to each other
Delays between channel element and mobile
txdelay/rxdelay know, depends on hardware
air_delay unknown, cell_size is the upper limit
Access search window needed
2 cell_size 6.6 + 2 maxdif_txdelay 1.2288 +
2
probe_pr_ran
-1 [chips]
The access search window has to satisfy the inequality
20 < rxdelay 1.2288 + access search window < 512
[chips]
Note: For the Flexent CCU1.1 the upper limit is 1024 chips.
Antenna
rxdelay
txdelay
a
ir
_
d
e
la
y
CE RF Components
txdelay, rxdelay, cell_size, maxdif_txdelay
tion parameters.
Transmit Antenna Propagation
Delay (microseconds)
(txdelay)
Form: ceqface
one of two parameters that requires adjusting to ensure
that each antenna broadcasts CDMA signals synchronized
to the base station.
Range: 0.0 - 400.0 microseconds in 0.1 increments
Receive Antenna Propagation
(rxdelay)
Form: ceqface
one of two parameters that requires adjusting to ensure
that each antenna broadcasts CDMA signals synchronized
to the base station.
Range: 0.0 - 400.0 microseconds in 0.1 increments
Sector Size (miles)
(cell_size)
Form: ceqface, ecp
specifies the radius (in miles) centered at the transmit
antenna of the sector in steps of 0.5 mile. This field is used
along with the Maximum Differential Transmit Delay field
to determine the size of the access search window. The
primary purpose of these fields is to allow the cell to deter-
mine the maximum time allowed for a message to be
transmitted from the base station, to the mobile, and
return. This allows the base station to determine if a
mobile is within its defined range and if the mobile is to be
served by the cell.
Notes: 1) Although this parameter is entered in miles, it is
converted and stored as PN chips.
2) 1 mile = 1.609 km.
3) Cell size was increased from 31.5 miles to 75.0 miles in
R15.1 with CCU1.1 and ECU1.1.
Range: 0.5 75.0 miles in 0. 5 increments
Maximum Differential Transmit
(maxdif_txdelay)
Form: ceqface
specifies the maximum transmission delay (in microsec-
onds) between any two remote antenna drivers (RADs) on
the same sector.
Note: Maximum Differential Transmit Delay is 0 for non-
simulcasting configurations.
Range: 0 - 200 microseconds
txdelay, rxdelay, cell_size, maxdif_txdelay

CDMA Information (Non-Power Control):
Transmit Antenna Propagation Delay (microseconds) ................................................. 92) ___
Receive Antenna Propagation Delay (microseconds)................................................... 93) ___
Pilot PN Sequence Offset Index.......................................................................................... 94) ___
Pilot Detection Threshold (dB) ............................................................................................ 95) ___
Pilot Drop Threshold (dB).................................................................................................... 96) ___
Active Set vs Candidate Set Comparison Thresh (dB) ....................................................... 97) ___
Active Set vs Candidate Set Comparison Thresh for Analog (dB)...................................... 98) ___
Drop Timer .......................................................................................................................... 99) ___
Search Window Size: Active Set and Candidate Set ....................................................... 100) ___
Neighbor Set ................................................................................ 101) ___
Remaining Set ............................................................................. 102) ___
Cell (microseconds) ..................................................................... 103) ___
Sector Size (miles) ............................................................................................................ +104) ___
Maximum Differential Transmit Delay (microseconds) ................................................. 105) ___
Analog Handdown Physical Ant Face at Serving Sector .................................................... 106) ___
Analog Equivalent Server Group at Serving Sector ............................................................ 107) ___

AUTOPLEX
ACCESS CHANNEL OCCUPANCY
CDMAPAF
1: CDMA Access Seizures
The count is incremented whenever a valid message (as defined in IS-95) is received on an
access channel. Messages included in this count are origination, page response, registra-
tion, and authentication. However, when the cell site is Call Processing Inhibited, this
count will not be incremented.
21: CDMA Access Channel Occupancy
This count is divided by 100 in order to obtain the percentage of occupancy on the access
channel(s). For example, 2653 is read 26.53%. If multiple access channels are supported,
then this number will span all access channels; in other words, separate counts will not be
maintained for each access channel.
22: Peak CDMA Access Channel Occupancy
This count is divided by 100 in order to obtain the percentage of occupancy on the access
channel(s). For example, 2653 is read 26.53%. If multiple access channels are supported,
then this number will span all access channels; in other words, separate counts will not be
maintained for each access channel.
Every 10 seconds, the %_interval_occupancy is compared with the previous maximum
number. If a new maximum or peak has been reached, the new value is saved.
ACCESS CHANNEL OCCUPANCY
CDMAPAF
1: CDMA Access Seizures
21: CDMA Access Channel Occupancy
22: Peak CDMA Access Channel Occupancy
ACCESS CHANNEL OVERLOAD CONTROL
The CDMA Access Channel Overload Control (ACOC) feature allows the system to
detect the existence of an access channel overload condition and automatically adjusts the
persistence parameters on a per-sector basis to reduce the load on the access channel.
ACOC controls the overload situation on Access Channels by effectively spreading out
mobile call attempts. The spreading of the call attempts is achieved by imposing a delay,
which is determined by a persistence test. The persistence test reduces the overall rate of
access attempts.
A persistence test is performed by the mobile when an access attempt, by the mobile on an
Access Channel, is for an origination or an autonomous registration. Therefore, ACOC
does not apply to response access attempts by terminating mobiles (page responses).
Once the ACO is invoked on an Access Channel, the base station adjusts the Persistence
Test (PSIST) parameter, which is sent to mobiles in the Access Parameters Message on
the associated Paging Channel.
On receiving the Access Parameters Message, the mobiles adjust the delay of call
attempts, according to the PSIST value specified in the message. A PSIST value of 0
implies no additional delay, while a PSIST value of 63 causes an infinite delay. Only the
PSIST (0-9), persistence test value for the overload class 0 through 9 mobiles (normal
mobiles, including normal mobiles making 911 calls), are changed by the ACOC feature.
The mobiles with overload class 10 (test mobile) and class 11 (emergency mobile), which
use PSIST (10) and PSIST (11) respectively for their persistence test, are not affected by
this feature.
The CDMA Access Channel Overload Control (ACOC) stages are:
1. Detection of an Access Channel Overload condition: During the normal condition,
PSIST(0-9) value is zero, and the occupancy of the Access Channel is monitored
every two seconds.
2. Start of ACOC: When the Access Channel occupancy exceeds the ACO Invocation
Threshold, ACOC is triggered. The PSIT(0-9) value is no longer zero. Instead, the
PSIST(9-0) is incremented by Increase Step Size. The OVERLOAD CONTROL
STARTED message is sent to ROP.
3. Continuation of ACOC: The occupancy is continuously monitored every two sec-
onds. The PSIST(0-9) is being incremented (based on Increase Step Size) or decre-
mented (based on Decrease Step Size) depending on whether the Access Channel
occupancy is above the Invocation Threshold or below the Lower Threshold. If the
occupancy is between the thresholds, the value of PSIST(0-9) remains the same.
4. Retiring of ACOC: As the ACOC is in progress, the PSIST(0-9) value is being ad-
justed, eventually the PSIST(0-9) reaches zero. When PSIST(0-9) reaches zero, the
ACOC ends and the OVERLOAD CONTROL RETIRED message is sent to
ROP.
Note: lower threshold = 80% of aco_thresh
ACOC State
Measure occupancy
Is
occupancy >
aco_thresh
?
Increase PSIST(0-9)
by aco_inc
Measure occupancy
Is
occupancy >
aco_thresh
?
Decrease PSIST(0-9)
by aco_dec
Is
PSIST(0-9) = 0
?
Exit ACOC State
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Is
occupancy <
lower threshold
?
f_list6.c_feat[7]
tion parameters.
CDMA ACO CTRL
(f_list6.c_feat[7])
Form: cell2
indicates if the CDMA Access Channel Overload Control

(ACOC) feature is active on this cell site.
Range: y or n
f_list6.c_feat[7]

AUTOPLEX
System Cell ____
198) 200) 202) 204)
aco_thresh, aco_inc, aco_dec
tion parameters.
Access Channel Overload Control
Invocation Threshold
(aco_thresh)
Form: ceqface, ecp
the upper limit of allowable Access Channel Occupancy
(ACO) as a percentage before the persistence test should
be increased.
Range: 30 90
Increase Persistence Step Size
(aco_inc)
Form: ceqface, ecp
the increase to the Persistence Step Size.

Note: This field requires CDMA Release 8.1 (or later).
Range: 1 12
Decrease Persistence Step Size
(aco_dec)
Form: ceqface, ecp
the decrease to the Persistence Step Size.
Range: 1 4
aco_thresh, aco_inc, aco_dec

Access Channel Overload Control:
Access Channel Overload Invocation Threshold ..................................................... +152) ___
Access Channel Overload Increase Persistence Step Size..................................... +153) ___
Access Channel Overload Decrease Persistence Step Size.................................... +154) ___
Base Station Antenna Latitude:
Degrees...... +155) ___ Minutes ...... +156) ___ Seconds ..... +157)____
Base Station Antenna Longitude:
IS-95B AHO, CAMSHO:
Access Handoff Enable.................................................................................................. +161) ___
Channel Assignment Into Soft Handoff Enable.............................................................. +162) ___
AUTOPLEX
System Cell ___ Face __
CDMAPAFCARR
23: Access Channel Overload Control Peg Count
The number of times the access channels on each of the carriers of each sector invokes the
overload control algorithm (Cell R13.1 and later).
24: Access Channel Overload Control Duration
The total duration, in seconds, that the overload control algorithm was on access channels
on each of the carriers of each sector (Cell R13.1 and later).
CDMAPAFCARR
23: Access Channel Overload Control Peg Count
24: Access Channel Overload Control Duration
IS-95B ACCESS HANDOFF FEATURES
IS-95B adds features to the System Access State to improve the probability of a successful
call setup. The features currently implemented are, Access Entry Handoff (AEHO),
Access Handoff (AHO), and Channel Assignment Message into Soft Handoff (CAM-
SHO). AEHO and AHO are presented here, CAMSHO will be presented in a later lesson.
3G-1X is using the IS-95B Access Handoff features.
Mobile (MS) searching for Pilots
Origination
?
MS perform access attempt.
Yes
No
Active-, Neighbor-, Remaining Set
Up to 6 strongest pilots including
active pilot in message capsule
Access
Handoff
Mobile Traffic
Channel State
Access Entry
Handoff
BS sends general
page to MS
Channel Assignment
Into Soft Handoff
Access Entry Handoff
The Access Entry Handoff (AEHO) optional feature allows IS-95B mobiles to improve
termination performance by transferring reception of the paging channel from one base
station to another before the mobile enters the system access state on a termination.
When the feature is turned on at the Mobile Switching Station (MSC), a cell that supports
Access Entry Handoff is said to be Access Entry Handoff Enabled (AEHOENB). If a
mobile can send the Page Response message to a cell that neighbors an Access Entry
Handoff Enabled cell without receiving a page from this cell, the neighbor cell is said to
be Access Handoff Allowed (AEHOALW). By default, all cells are disabled for Access
Entry Handoff and all neighbors are Access Entry Handoff disallowed. The service pro-
vider must identify which neighbors are allowed for Access Entry Handoff through
Recent Change/Verify (RC/V) by changing the value for the AEHO field on the fci form.
The system disallows Access Entry Handoff for all inter-MSC neighbors. System deter-
mined Access Entry Handoff disallowed neighbors cannot be overridden.
When an IS-95B mobile receives a General Page message from a cell that is Access Entry
Handoff Enabled and one or more neighbor pilots are stronger than the active pilot, the
mobile performs an Access Entry Handoff to the best Access Entry Handoff Allowed
neighbor prior to entering system access on a termination.
See 401-612-364.
Access Entry Handoff
Neighbor
?
MS change active pilot
Yes
No
Return to
Access Entry
Handoff
enabled
Neighbor stronger
?
than active
to the neighbor pilot
access
process
No
Yes
AEHO
Access Handoff
The Access Handoff optional feature allows IS-95B mobiles to transfer reception of the
paging channel from one base station to another after a successful access attempt. When a
mobile sends a message to a cell and receives an acknowledgment from the cell, a success-
ful access attempt has been made. The handoff can occur when the mobile enters either of
the following substates within the system access state:
Page Response substate
Origination Attempt substate.
When the feature is turned on at the Mobile Switching Center (MSC), a cell that supports
Access Handoff is said to be Access Handoff Enabled (AHOENB). If a mobile can listen
to the paging channel of a cell that neighbors an Access Handoff Enabled cell, the neigh-
bor cell is said to be Access Handoff Allowed (AHOALW).
By default, all cells are disabled for Access Handoff and all neighbors are Access Handoff
disallowed. The service provider must identify which neighbors are Access Handoff
Allowed through Recent Change/Verify (RC/V) by changing the value for the AHO field
on the fci form. System determined Access Handoff disallowed neighbors cannot be over-
ridden. The system disallows Access Handoff for the following:
Inter-MSC neighbors
Intra-MSC IS-95-A neighbors
Hard handoff only neighbors
Analog only neighbors
IS-634 neighbors.
If the serving paging channel is lost or if one or more neighbor pilots are stronger than the
active pilot and meet the t_add detection threshold, the mobile performs an Access Hand-
off to the best Access Handoff Allowed neighbor.
See 401-612-367.
Access Handoff
Neighbor
?
MS change active pilot
Yes
No
Return to
Access
Handoff
enabled
Neighbor > t_add
?
and neighbor > active
to the neighbor pilot
access
process
No
Yes
AHO
Note: assuming a successful access attempt
aho_enable
tion parameters.
CDMA Access Handoff
(aho_enable)
Form: ceqface, ecp
This field is used to toggle on and off the CDMA Access
Handoff feature. It cannot be set to yes unless the feature
is active in the FAF file.
Range: y or n
aho_enable

Access Channel Overload Invocation Threshold........................................................... +152) ___
Access Channel Overload Increase Persistence Step Size.......................................... +153) ___
Access Channel Overload Decrease Persistence Step Size ........................................ +154) ___
IS-95B AHO, CAMSHO:
Access Handoff Enable............................................................................................... +161) ___
Channel Assignment Into Soft Handoff Enable ............................................................. +162) ___
AUTOPLEX
aho_allow, aeho_allow
tion parameters.
AHO
(aho_allow)
Form: fci
Identifies whether this Principle Neighbor List entry is lim-

ited to CDMA Access Handoff feature. It cannot be set to
yes unless this feature is activated in the FAF file.
Range: y or n
AEHO
(aeho_allow)
Form: fci

ited to CDMA Access Entry Handoff feature. It cannot be
set to yes unless this feature is activated in the FAF file.
Range: y or n
aho_allow, aeho_allow

AUTOPLEX
Cell
Site
261)
Ant
Face
262)
Pilot
PN
263)
Prior
Grp
264)
Anlg
Ant
Face
265)
Eqvlnt
Serv
Grp
266)
Anlg
Only
Pilot
267)
Ngbr
Conf
268)
Band
Class
269)
Hard
Handoff
Only
270)
AHO
271)
CAM
SHO
272)
AEHO
273)
Extended System ID
DCS ECP SYS
274) 275) 276)
[1] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[2] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[3] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[4] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[5] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[6] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[7] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[8] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[9] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[10] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[11] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[12] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
HASHING
Having full capabilities (that is, page and access) on the growth carrier frequency provides
additional page and access capacity. This is particularly important when considering spe-
cial features such as autonomous registration and short message service which consume
access channel and page channel capacity respectively.
In order to realize this additional capacity though, the mobiles must be segregated in some
defined way so that they can be paged on the page channel associated with only one fre-
quency.
In IS-95A there is an algorithm defined called the hashing algorithm. The input used in the
hashing algorithm is the International Mobile Station Identifier (IMSI) and the number of
carriers available as being transmitted in the Channel List Message (CLM) on the page
channel. The hashing algorithm will return a carrier, Fn, that the mobile will hash to - stay
idle on.
By spreading the users evenly between carriers the load on the access channel is spread. A
mobile will send access probes on the access channel assigned to the carrier the mobile is
hashed to.
HASHING
Hashing algorithm in IS-95-A/B is based on the IMSI and
CLM. The algorithm tells the MS to be idle on a certain
carrier, F
n
.
Access probes will be sent on F
n
.
Algorithm will spread the users evenly between carriers to
balance access channel loading.
F
1
F
2
F
2
F
1
F
1
F
1
F
2
F
2
F
1
F
2
SYSTEM ACCESS FEATURE
SUBSCRIBER ACCESS CONTROL
CDMA Subscriber Access Control (SAC) permits the service providers to have more con-
trol of call originations and terminations for certain mobiles under certain conditions.
First, the service provider can improve service at the borders of CDMA networks by redi-
recting the calls to an abutting system. Second, SAC can be used to grant access to spe-
cific mobile (e.g., CDMA test mobile) only, redirecting other mobile to another cellular/
PCS system during testing.
There are four versions of SAC: SAC1A, SAC1B, SAC2, and SACPCS. SAC1A/
1B was introduced in ECP release APXEC10.0 to provide basic subscriber access control
and to allow the system to redirect originating mobile units to an analog system. SAC2 is
an extension to SAC1 that allows global redirection of mobiles to another system, not
just during a call setup. SACPCS is an extension of SAC2 to allow redirecting mobiles
to another CDMA system or analog system.
Ref: Translation Application Note No. 8
Acronym
SAC Subscriber Access Control
SYSTEM ACCESS FEATURE
SAC1 (ECP Release APXEC10.0)
SAC1A
SAC1B
SAC2 (ECP Release APXEC11.0)
SACPCS (ECP Release APXEC11.0)
Boundary between
two systems
SAC1A/1B
The SAC-1A feature allows CDMA mobiles to be redirected to an analog system. Specif-
ically, mobile with Overload Classes (OLC) activated in the database can be redirected to
an 850-MHz analog system upon call origination and termination on a per-call basis.
When a mobile originates (or terminates) a CDMA call and the OLC associated with the
mobile is activated, the system directs the mobile via the Channel Assignment Message on
the forward link to acquire the analog system. After receiving the redirection message
from the system, the mobile then operates in the analog mode for call origination/termina-
tion for the same call attempt. Note that, with SAC-1A, the system does not dictate to the
mobile which 850 cellular band (A or B) to scan first for analog redirection; the process
for the analog system selection is left to the mobile manufacturer. It is usually influenced
by a set of expressed user preferences for analog initialization, such as the following: A-
Band Only, B-Band Only, A-Band Preferred, and B-Band Preferred.
A mobile may return to CDMA in a given time after the call is released, this is a mobile
manufacturers option (e.g., the Qualcomm QCP 800 dual-mode phones are designed to
return to CDMA in a few minutes after the call is released). Independently of the mobile
manufacturers option, SAC-1B provides the ability to force the CDMA-capable mobile to
return to CDMA after the call is released in the analog mode. The CDMA_AVAIL bit
indicates the availability of the CDMA service consistent with the value specified for the
cdma_avail translation parameter. The CDMA_AVAIL bit is transmitted as part of the
CDMA Capability Global Action Message of the Overhead Message Train (OMT). The
OMT is sent on the Analog Forward Control Channel every 800 300 milliseconds. Note
that, with the current implementation, the CDMA_AVAIL bit can only be sent from the
Analog Forward Control Channel of a CDMA/analog overlay sector, but not from that of
an analog-only sector.
SAC1A/1B
Mobile receives a
page or user
originates a call
Mobile reacquires
on Analog system
for call setup and
re-originates on
Analog
Upon call
origination
or
termination
Base Station redirects the mobile
to Analog system via the Channel
Assignment Message
Mobile sends Access Probes for call setup
Mobile
Mobile acquires system
Mobile monitors Paging Channel
User Powers on
Base Station
SAC2
SAC-2 is an extension of SAC-1A. SAC-2 redirects specific mobiles whose Overload
Classes are activated in the database to another 850-MHz analog system. Mobiles receive
the Global Service Redirection (GSR) Message that is transmitted on the CDMA Paging
Channel as soon as the mobiles power up or move while in idle mode into the coverage
area of the sector with SAC-2 activated. Since the GSR Message is sent at the rate of every
1.28 second on the Paging Channel, specific mobiles are redirected from CDMA to analog
during the idle state independently of any call origination or termination attempts.
Overload classes 0 through 9 are based on the last digit (least significant) of the assigned
phone numbers. Overload class 10 is assigned to CDMA test mobile. Overload class 11 is
assigned to emergency mobile in this release. Overload classes 12 through 15 are reserved
for future use in IS-95B.
SAC-2 is enabled on a per-cell site basis.
Note SAC-2 will redirect a mobile as soon as the mobile powers on. SAC-1 did not redi-
rect the mobile until the mobile accessed the system. SAC-1 presents a potential problem
for the subscriber. As long as the mobile is idle, it will be tuned to a CDMA channel and
the handset will indicate digital service is available. However, when the mobile accesses
the system it will only receive analog service, contrary to the digital indicator on the hand-
held display. SAC-2 overcomes this problem by redirecting the mobile as soon as it pow-
ers on.
SAC2
Mobile reacquires
on Analog system
in idle state
Sends GSR
message with
the overload
class(es) that
are denied
CDMA service
Global Service Redirection Message
sent on paging channel
Mobile
User Powers on
Base Station
SACPCS
SACPCS, also called SAC-3, is an extension of SAC2. Specifically, SACPCS adds the
capabilities to redirect mobile between CDMA systems, between PCS and cellular band.
SACPCS also provides the control to redirect the mobiles to a different Network within
the same CDMA or analog system. SACPCS allows the operator to define the Band
class, the System ID, Network ID and the CDMA Channel to which the mobiles are
directed.
SACPCS redirects specific mobiles with Overload Classes activated to another CDMA
system. This is done by the Global Service Redirection Message (GSR) via the CDMA
Paging Channel as soon as the mobile power up or, while in idle mode, moves into the
coverage area of the sector with the SACPCS feature activated. The CDMA system to
which the mobile is redirected by SACPCS feature is selected by translations. Since the
GSR Message is sent at the rate of every 1.28 second on the Paging Channel, specific
mobiles are redirected during the idle state independently of any call origination or termi-
nation attempts.
With SACPCS, it is also possible for the mobile to ignore the CDMA Capability Mes-
sage transmitted on the analog Forward Control Channel as discussed for SAC-2.
Overload classes 0 through 9 are based on the last digit (least significant) of the assigned
phone numbers. Overload class 10 is assigned to CDMA test mobile. Overload class 11 is
assigned to emergency mobile. Overload classes 12 through 15 are reserved for future use
in IS-95B.
SACPCS is enabled on a per-sector basis.
SACPCS
Mobile reacquires
on either CDMA
or Analog system
in idle state
Sends GSR
message with
the overload
class(es) that
are denied
CDMA service
Mobile
User Powers on
Base Station
sub_acc.cntl, rtn_anlg, exp_sid, ign_cdma,
srch_ord, cdma_avail, redirect_nid
tion parameters.
Overload Classes - Subscriber
Access Allowed for CDMA
(sub_acc_cntl)
Form: cell2, ecp
indicates whether the subscribers on this cell site are
allowed to use CDMA service or if cellular CDMA calls are
to be redirected to analog service and CDMA PCS calls
are to be redirected to analog or cellular CDMA service.
Range: y or n
Return from Analog if Failure
(rtn_anlg)
Form: cell2, ecp
Indicates whether the system is required to return to
CDMA if there is a failure on the analog system.
Range: y or n
Redirect to Other System (SID)
(exp_sid)
Form: cell2, ecp
specifies the system (SID) that the mobile is to be redi-

rected to.
Range: 0 32767
Ignore CDMA Capability Message
(ign_cdma)
Form: cell2, ecp
indicates whether the mobile is to ignore the CDMA Capa-

bility message on the analog system to which it is being
redirected.
Range: y or n
Search Order for Analog
(srch_ord)
Form: cell2, ecp
specifies the search order in which the mobile is to attempt
to obtain service on an analog system.
Range: 0 5
CDMA Available
(cdma_avail)
Form: cell2, ecp
indicates to the mobile whether CDMA is available or not.

Range: y or n
Redirect to Other Network
(redirect_nid)
Form: cell2, ecp
indicates which Network to redirect calls to for CDMA PCS

Subscriber Access Control.
Range: 0 65535
sub_acc.cntl, rtn_anlg, exp_sid, ign_cdma,
srch_ord, cdma_avail, redirect_nid

Global Service Redirection Message:
Return from Analog if Failure........................................................................................+273) ___
Redirect to Other System (SID) .....................................................................................+274) ___
Ignore CDMA Capability Message.................................................................................+275) ___
Search Order for Analog................................................................................................+276) ___
CDMA Available ................................................................................................................+277) ___
CDMA Spectrum Swap Participant..................................................................................... 278) ___
Redirect to Other Network ...............................................................................................+279) ___
AUTOPLEX
System Cell ____
+Overload Classes - Subscriber Access Allowed for CDMA
266) 268) 270) 272)
[1] Class 0 __ Class 4 __ [1] Class 8 __ Class 12 __ [1]
redirect_dest, redirect_band, redirect_chan_c
tion parameters.
Redirection Destination
(redirect_dest)
Form: ceqface, ecp
specifies whether calls should be redirected to analog or
CDMA for CDMA PCS Subscriber Access Control.
Range: a or c
Redirection Band
(redirect_band)
Form: ceqface, ecp
specifies whether calls should be redirected to CDMA Cel-

lular or CDMA PCS Band for CDMA PCS Subscriber
Access Control.
Range: 850 and 1900
Redirect to CDMA Channel
Number
(redirect_chan_c)
Form: ceqface, ecp
specifies what CDMA or CDMA PCS channel calls should
be redirected to for CDMA PCS Subscriber Access Con-
trol.
Range:
the 850 common carrier are 283, 384, 691 and 777.
Legal values for other 850 carriers are 1-309, 358-642,
691-692, 741-777, and 1015-1023.
Legal values for the 1800 common carrier are 25-575
in increments of 25.
Legal values for other 1800 carriers are 25-575.
Legal values for the 1900 common carrier are 25-1175
in increments of 25.
Legal values for other 1900 carriers are 25-1175.
redirect_dest, redirect_band, redirect_chan_c

Redirection Destination ................................................................................................... +130) ___
Redirection Band.............................................................................................................. +131) ___
+132) Redirect to CDMA Channel Number
[1] ____ [2] ____ [3] ____
CDMA-to-CDMA Handdown Threshold.................................................................................. +139) ___
CDMA-to-Analog Handdown Threshold ................................................................................. +140) ___
CDMA-to-CDMA Handoff Threshold ...................................................................................... +141) ___
CDMA-to-Analog Handoff Threshold...................................................................................... +142) ___
Maximum Number of Active Set Pilots ................................................................................... +143) ___
Border Sector Loss Threshold for Inter-Frequency Handoff................................................... +144) ___
Border Sector Loss Threshold for CDMA-to-Analog Handoff ................................................. +145) ___
Border Pilot Versus Interior Pilot Threshold ........................................................................... +146) ___
Request for Pilot Measurement Interval (sec) ........................................................................ +147) ___
Carrier Assignment Algorithm................................................................................................. +148) ___
RF Loading Weight Factor...................................................................................................... +149) ___
AUTOPLEX
TEST CARRIER AND SAC
The Test Carrier Capability feature allows the designation of a CDMA carrier as a Test
Carrier. Tests can then be run on the carrier so designated (via translation parameters)
without interfering with other services.
With the Test Carrier Capability feature, a new carrier, Fn, can be designated as a test car-
rier through the RC/V translation Test Carrier Designation. The carrier can be configured
as a non-exclusive test carrier or an exclusive test carrier. The GSR message on the paging
channel of non-test carriers will redirect test mobiles (access overload class = 10) to the
test carrier Fn, therefore ensuring that all test mobiles are monitoring and staying on Fn.
When the test carrier, is designated to be non-exclusive use, the paging channel Channel
List Message (CLM) on the non-test carriers will list all carriers including the test carrier,
allowing subscriber mobiles to hash to the test carrier. However, if the test carrier is desig-
nated to be exclusive use, the paging channel CLM on non-test carriers will list only
non-test carriers, and the GSR message on the test carrier will redirect all non-test mobiles
to the non-test carriers, ensuring that the test carrier is used by test mobiles only.
If the System Hashing across Paging Carriers (SHAPCAR) feature is enabled and TCC is
also active, the system will page a test mobile only on the paging channel of the test car-
rier. The system will page a non-test mobile on the carrier hashed from the carriers listed
in the CLM on the paging channels of the non-test carriers. This, however, prevents the
simultaneous activation of TCC non-exclusive and SHAPCAR, when SAC is not active.
A non-test mobile monitoring the test carrier will stay on the test carrier; the cell will, on
the other hand, send out page for the mobile on the hashed carrier, which could possibly
be a non-test carrier, resulting in the mobile not receiving the paging. Such a combination
is not allowed by call processing.
TEST CARRIER AND SAC
Mobiles of the
affected overload
classes are re-
directed to the
Test Carrier
Sends GSR
message with
overload
class(es) to re-
direct.
Mobile
User Powers on
Base Station
Sends GSR msg
with either all
non-10 overload
class(es) or only
those re-directed
via SAC-2 or
SAC- PCS.
sent on Test Carrier paging channel
Mobiles reacquire
on system speci-
fied via SAC-2 or
SAC-PCS transla-
tion parameters.
TEST CARRIER
tcc_tci
tion parameters.
Test Carrier Designation
(tcc_tci)
Form: ceqface, cgsa
This parameter is used to indicate if this carrier is a desig-

nated Test Carrier for Exclusive use by test mobiles, a
designated Test Carrier for Non-Exclusive use by test
mobiles, or a Non-test Carrier.
Range:
0 = test carrier, non-exclusive
1 = test carrier, exclusive
TEST CARRIER
tcc_tci

AUTOPLEX
System Cell ____ Face ____
CDMA Per Carrier Information
253) CDMA Pilot Level Calibration and Pilot Type
Pilot
Channel
Calibration
Value (dB)
Pilot
Type
Test Carrier
Designation
Common Carrier [1] ____ ____ ____ ____
[2] ____ ____ ____ ____
[3] ____ ____ ____ ____
[4] ____ ____ ____ ____
[5] ____ ____ ____ ____
[6] ____ ____ ____ ____
[7] ____ ____ ____ ____
[8] ____ ____ ____ ____
[9] ____ ____ ____ ____
[10] ____ ____ ____ ____
Mobile sends access probes to initiate contact with base
station.
Access channel protocol objective
Establish contact quickly without causing excessive
interference.
Access channel can be overloaded.
Load balance channels
Access channel - Hashing.
IS-95B Access Handoff features.
3G-1X uses the 2G Access Channel Protocol
SYSTEM ACCESS
Knowledge Check
Question 1.
What happens after the mobile station (MS) has powered up and selected a CDMA RF
channel?
A. MS verifies the SID (system identification)
B. MS decodes the synchronization channel
C. MS decodes the pilot channel
D. MS negotiates with the base station for what frequency band to use
S
Answer: c
Question 2.
If the slot cycle index is increased, what is the impact on page channel capacity?
A. Does not change
B. Increases
C. Decreases
S
Answer: b
Question 3.
In the access channel protocol, what is the persistence delay used for?
A. Give the base station time to respond to an access probe
B. Give the base station time to lock on to an access probe
C. Randomize the time between two access probes
D. Give access priority to certain mobiles
S
Answer: d
SYSTEM ACCESS
Knowledge Check
Question 4.
In the access channel protocol, what is the translation value nom_pwr (Nominal Transmit
Power Offset) used for?
A. Determine the increase in power between two access probes
B. Determine the maximum power of an access probe
C. Increase power of the first access probe
D. Increase overall power of all access probes
S
Answer: d
Question 5.
In the access channel protocol, what is the translation value init_pwr (Initial Power Offset
for Access) used for?
A. Determine the increase in power between two access probes
B. Determine the maximum power of an access probe
C. Increase power of the first access probe
D. Increase overall power of all access probes
S
Answer: c
Question 6.
The access channel overload control algorithm adjusts what parameter?
A. Back off delay (RS)
B. Acknowledgment timeout (TA)
C. Persistence delay (PD)
D. Time randomization for access probes (RN)
S
Answer: c
SYSTEM ACCESS
Knowledge Check
Question 7.
Will a Full Capacities Growth Carrier impact the System Access algorithm.
A. Yes
B. No
S
Answer: a
Question 8.
What does the mobile use to determine the carrier on which to monitor the page channel?
A. International Mobile Station Identifier
B. Channel List Message
C. System Hashing algorithm
D. All of the above
S
Answer: d
Question 9.
If the page channel occupancy is near its maximum, what could one do?
A. Install another carrier
B. Implement the SHAPCAR (System Hashing Over Paging Carriers) feature
C. Any of the above
S
Answer: c
Note: The suggestions here applies to a multi-carrier system. There are more
strategies to increase page channel capacity such as implementing Sub-MSC
Paging, increase slot-cycle index, and decrease the number of repeated pages.
SYSTEM ACCESS
Knowledge Check
Question 10.
What is the purpose of the IS-95B Access Handoff features?
A. To reduce occupancy of page and access channel.
B. To allow the mobile station to quickly access the network.
C. To allow the mobile station to be in soft handoff with two or more access channels.
D. To lower the number of origination and termination failures.
S
Answer: d
Section 6
Traffic Channel Setup Section 6
Traffic Channel Setup CL8303 v1.0
MOBILE
TRAFFIC CHANNEL STATE
After the mobile successfully accesses the base station and receives a traffic channel
assignment, the mobile verifies that the Forward Traffic Channel can be decoded and
begins transmitting on the Reverse Traffic Channel. If this is a mobile originated call, the
mobile enters the conversation substate until the call is ended by either party. For mobile
terminated calls, the mobile enters the wait for order substate, and naturally waits for an
order, usually the alert. The mobile now enters the waiting for mobile answer substate
until the user answers the call. The mobile enters the conversation state when the user
answers the alert. Finally, the mobile resets back to the initial system determination sub-
state when either party hangs up. If the party calling the mobile terminates the call
before the mobile party answers, the mobile will enter the release substate.
NOTE:
The Call Setup algorithms deal with the first four states.
CL8303 v1.0 Traffic Channel Setup
MOBILE
TRAFFIC CHANNEL STATE
MS call termination:
MS receives an
Acknowledge Order on
forward traffic channel
MS receives
Release Order
MS receives an
Alert Order
MS user disconnects
or MS receives Release
Order
MS user
answers call
Traffic
Channel
Initialization
Substate
MS receives
Release Order
MS call origination:
MS receives an
Acknowledge Order on
forward traffic channel
To Mobile
Initialization State
From Mobile System
Access State
Release
Substate
Waiting
for Order
Substate
Waiting
for Mobile
Answer
Substate
Conversation
Substate
TRAFFIC CHANNEL INITIALIZATION SUBSTATE
Single Frequency Base Station
Once the mobile has successfully accessed the base station, the system takes over the pro-
cess of getting the mobile assigned to a traffic channel. In a system with a single carrier
frequency,
*
the first step is selecting a cluster controller (CCC) to load balance traffic over
the CCCs. If all CEs are busy or reserved for soft handoff, the call attempt ends with a
reorder to the mobile. Otherwise, an idle CE is selected and assigned a Walsh code and
sector.
Next, the base station attempts to configure the CE for the service option (SO) requested
by the mobile, e.g., Rate Set 1, Rate Set 2, secondary traffic channel, data, fax, etc. If the
option is not available, the base station will offer an alternate (such as Rate Set 2, if Rate
Set 1 is not equipped) to the mobile. If no alternates are available, the base station will
send the mobile a reorder message and terminate the call attempt. When the service option
is available, the base station will activate the CE and set the downlink power (CE gain) to
the initial value. Once communication is established on the uplink, the forward power
control algorithm will change the CE gain to maintain an adequate signal level at the
mobile. Additional negotiations of the details of the service request may occur on the traf-
fic channel.
Now the base station sends the mobile a channel assignment message over the paging
channel. The message includes the mobile ID (either ESN or MIN), the RF channel, if dif-
ferent from the current channel, the Walsh code, and if encryption is to be used. Finally,
the base station attempts to detect the mobile by using the round trip delay calculated from
the access channel. Once the mobile is detected, the forward and reverse power control
loops continually adjust mobile and base station power to maintain adequate signal levels
on the up and down links.
* In a system with multiple carrier frequencies, other factors pertaining to balancing the load across carrier
frequencies are considered as discussed in Unit 4.
TRAFFIC CHANNEL INITIALIZATION SUBSTATE
Single Frequency Base Station
From System
Access State
Select CCC
Is
a Traffic CE
available?
Send alternate
option to MS
Activate traffic CE;
Set initial CE gain
for downlink power
control
Send Channel
Assignment to MS
To traffic channel
confirmation
substate
Origination
or Termination?
Send Reorder and
Forced Release
to MS
Send Forced
Release
to MS
Origination
Termination
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Assign CE and
Walsh Code to call
BS receives
SO request
from MS
Is
option available?
Is alternate
option available?
Use round trip delay
from access
channel to detect
traffic from MS
3G-1X RADIO CONFIGURATION
3G-1X introduces a number of Radio Configurations (RC), specifically five for the for-
ward link and four for the reverse link. See table.
RC1 and 2 operate like 2G Rate Sets (RS) 1 and 2, respectively. RC3 and greater than 3
operate in 3G mode with a different RS.
The difference between forward links RC 3 and 4 is in the coding. RC3 is uses 1/4 convo-
lutional coding (more robust) and 64 Walsh codes. RC4 is uses 1/2 convolutional coding
(less robust) but has 128 Walsh codes.
On the reverse link, there is only one RC (RC3) for the RS1 option. This is because there
is no need for 128 Walsh codes on the reverse link.
3G-1X RADIO CONFIGURATION
Radio Configuration Operating
Mode
Service
Option
Forward
Walsh Length
IS-95A/B IS-2000
Fwd/Rev Fwd Rev 2G 3G RS1 RS2 W64 W128
1 1 1 X X X
2 2 2 X X X
- 3 3 X X X
- 4 3 X X X
- 5 4 X X X
TRAFFIC CHANNEL SETUP
tion parameters.
Preferred 8K Forward RC
(Prim/Alt)
(pref_rc)
(pref_rc_alt
Form: ceqface3g
Specifies if Radio Configuration RC 3 with 64-bit Walsh
functions or RC 4 with 128-bit Walsh functions is pre-
ferred in a sector/carrier. When the alternate value is
specified, it will take precedence over the primary value.
Range:
(Primary) 3 and 4
(Alternate) 3 and 4
Preferred 8K Forward RC
Carriers Using Alternate
(pref_rc_carrs)
Form: ceqface3g
Specifies the list of carriers using the alternate value for
Preferred 8K Forward RC.
Range: y or blank
AUTOPLEX
System
3G1X CDMA - Voice

Cell Site - Number ...........................................*1) ___

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
WALSH CODE ADMINISTRATION
Because 3G-1X can co-exist with 2G on the same carrier, and Walsh codes of different
length can be used, Walsh code administration is an important function in the base station.
The original 2G Walsh functions are all 64-bit Walsh functions W
k
N
, where the super-
script is the number of bits N (otherwise known as the length of the Walsh function) in the
Walsh function, and the subscript is the Walsh function k of Walsh length N.
Walsh functions are used by the cell in the forward direction to organize traffic into differ-
ent channels that can be isolated and decoded by the target mobiles. Orthogonality is the
property that enables the independent channels to be isolated. All Walsh functions in use,
must be orthogonal with each other, including those of a different length. The table shows
how Walsh functions of different lengths are related. Only Walsh functions that do not
share one or more rows with another Walsh function are orthogonal, e.g. W
32
128
is orthog-
onal to W
0
64
, but not to W
0
32
. The entries with dark gray shading indicate those Walsh
functions in use or reserved, and the entries with light gray shading show which related
non-orthogonal Walsh functions that cannot be used as a result.
The reserved Walsh codes for 3G-1X are:
Pilot Channel W
0
64
Sync Channel W
32
64
Page Channel W
1
64
Orthogonal Transmit Diversity (OTD) Pilot Channel W
16
128
Quick Paging Channel W
80
128
, W
48
128
, W
112
128
(1st, 2nd, 3rd F-QPCH)
Non-provisioned F-QPCH Walsh code is available for traffic
Note: The same pilot, page, and sync channels are used for both 2G and 3G. Also, the
OTD function is not used in the first phase of 3G-1X.
Walsh Function Lengths Walsh Function Lengths
W
4
W
8
W
16
W
32
W
64
W
128
W
4
W
8
W
16
W
32
W
64
W
128
0
0
0
0
0 0
2
2
2
2
2 2
64 66
32 32 34 34
96 98
16
16 16
18
18 18
80 82
48 48 50 50
112 114
8
8
8 8
10
10
10 10
72 74
40 40 42 42
104 106
24
24 24
26
26 26
88 90
56 56 58 58
120 122
4
4
4
4 4
6
6
6
6 6
68 70
36 36 38 38
100 102
20
20 20
22
22 22
84 86
52 52 54 54
116 118
12
12
12 12
14
14
14 14
76 78
44 44 46 46
108 110
28
28 28
30
30 30
92 94
60 60 62 62
124 126
Continued
Continued
Walsh Function Lengths Walsh Function Lengths
W
4
W
8
W
16
W
32
W
64
W
128
W
4
W
8
W
16
W
32
W
64
W
128
1
1
1
1
1 1
3
3
3
3
3 3
65 67
33 33 35 35
97 99
17
17 17
19
19 19
81 83
49 49 51 51
113 115
9
9
9 9
11
11
11 11
73 75
41 41 43 43
105 107
25
25 25
27
27 27
89 91
57 57 59 59
121 123
5
5
5
5 5
7
7
7
7 7
69 71
37 37 39 39
101 103
21
21 21
23
23 23
85 87
53 53 55 55
117 119
13
13
13 13
15
15
15 15
77 79
45 45 47 47
109 111
29
29 29
31
31 31
93 95
61 61 63 63
125 127
TRAFFIC CHANNEL
CONFIRMATION SUBSTATE
Base Station
Once the mobile has been sent the traffic channel assignment parameters, the base station
attempts to decode uplink traffic frames from the mobile. The mobile will send uplink
frames as long as it receives good downlink frames from the base station.
The mobile will start a timer when it receives 12 consecutive bad frames, and stops trans-
mitting when the timer exceeds 5 seconds. Two consecutive good frames resets the timer.
The base station uses its own timer to determine when the call attempt has failed. The base
station will start the timer after receiving too many bad traffic frames and the traffic chan-
nel confirmation will fail if the timer expires. The base station sends a reorder (fast busy)
and a forced release order for an originating call, or a forced release order for a terminat-
ing call. The timer is reset after receiving enough good traffic frames.
After receiving good frames from the mobile, the base station sends an alert order to the
mobile for terminating calls, and then enters the conversation substate.
TRAFFIC CHANNEL
CONFIRMATION SUBSTATE
Base Station
From traffic channel
Initialization Substate
Send traffic frames
Start timer
traffic frames
Origination
Has
Origination
Send Forced
Send alert order
Send Reorder and
Traffic channel confirmation
To Conversation
on downlink
received from
timer
or Termination?
or termination?
to MS
Substate
Release
to MS
Forced Release
to MS
failure:
To System Determination
Substate
Origination Termination Termination Origination
Yes
Yes
No
No
expired?
Good
MS?
TRAFFIC CHANNEL
INITIALIZATION SUBSTATE
Mobile
Once the mobile receives a channel assignment message, it attempts to decode traffic
frames being sent by the base station. As soon as the channel assignment message is
received, the mobile starts a supervision timer. The timer is reset as soon as two consecu-
tive good frames are received. If the mobile does not receive two good frames within the
time specified on the T5OM variable which is typically 1 second, it will reset and return to
the system determination state. As soon as it receives the two good frames, the mobile
goes to the conversation state or wait for alert state depending if it is a terminating or orig-
ination call.
The T5OM timer, with a typical value of 1 second, is defined as the maximum time to
obtain two consecutive good forward traffic channel frames when in the Traffic Channel
Initialization Substate
Acronyms
CNT Count
TC Traffic Channel
TRAFFIC CHANNEL
INITIALIZATION SUBSTATE
Mobile
From Access
Start supervision
timer & CNT = 0
TC Frame
CNT > 1
?
timer > T5OM
?
CNT=CNT+1
CNT=0
Yes
Yes
Yes No
No
No
State
Reset timer
Transmit on
TC
Origination or
Termination?
received with
Origination Termination
Conversation
Substate
Wait for (Alert) Order
Substate
Return to System
Determination Substate
correct CRC
?
WAIT FOR ALERT SUBSTATE
Mobile
For Mobile Terminated (that is, incoming) calls, once the mobile has confirmed the traffic
channel is sending and receiving traffic frames, the mobile now waits for an alert message.
The mobile starts a 5-second timer, checks that it is still receiving traffic frames, and starts
to adjust power based on the power control bits sent by the base station. The mobile waits
for an alert message and will return to the system determination state if the 5-second timer
expires. Once the alert message is received, the mobile starts a 65-second timer, and waits
for the subscriber to answer the call (press the send button). Once the subscriber answers
the call, the mobile is in the conversation state until either party terminates the call.
WAIT FOR ALERT SUBSTATE
Mobile
Wait for (Alert) Order
Start alert
timer
Lost Traffic
message
received?
Return to System
Adjust Power
Yes
Yes
No
No
Substate
Alert
Start Answer
timer
Answered?
Channel?
Conversation
Substate
Answer timer >
65 seconds?
Yes
No
Alert timer >
5 seconds?
No
Return to System
Subscriber
No
Yes
Alert
Yes
TRAFFIC CHANNEL
ccutraf
tion parameters.
Traffic Channel Selection
Algorithm
(ccutraf)
Form: ecp
specifies the CDMA traffic channel algorithm for the CDMA
Channel Unit (CCU).
Note: The CDMA Traffic channel algorithm does the fol-
lowing: 1. Selects the CCC for the call based on load-bal-
ancing considerations.
2. For up to two times per a given call, does the following:
2.1 If most idle, select the CE idle the longest, otherwise
select sequential (for sequential, the CE now idle and
closest to the BBA in the daisy chain is selected).
2.2 Try to activate the selected CE. a) If the CE is active or
an error is returned, the algorithm is finished. b) If the CE
did not activate, it is placed on guard timing list for 5 sec-
onds and step 2.2 is repeated. 3. If there is no active CE,
the call fails and the algorithm is finished.
Range:
m = most idle
s = sequential
TRAFFIC CHANNEL
ccutraf

Leap Seconds Since System Start Time (sec) .................................................................... 439) ___
Daylight Savings Time in Effect ........................................................................................... +440) ___
Local Time Offset (hr) .......................................................................................................... +441) ___
Pilot PN Sequence Offset Index Increment ......................................................................... 442) ___
Traffic Channel Supervision Interval (sec) ........................................................................... +443) ___
Request for Pilot Measurement Interval (sec)...................................................................... +444) ___
Overload Threshold (%) - RCC............................................................................................ +445) ___
- CCC............................................................................................ +446) ___
Total CDMA Channel Elements OOS Minor Limit (%)......................................................... +447) ___
Total CDMA Channel Elements OOS Major Limit (%)......................................................... +448) ___
Traffic CEs Reserved for Handoff (%) ................................................................................. +449) ___
Maximum Traffic CEs Allowed for SMS (%) ........................................................................ +450) ___
Handoff Escalation Interval (sec) ......................................................................................... +451) ___
Traffic Channel Selection Algorithm................................................................................ 452) ___
Carrier Assignment Algorithm.............................................................................................. +453) ___
Maximum Slot Cycle Index .................................................................................................. 455) ___
AUTOPLEX
System
CALL SETUP
CDMACS
1: CDMA Digital Only Call-Mode Preference at Seizure
This count supports planning CDMA capacity. This count is pegged whenever the base
station receives an origination or a page response message with the REQUEST_MODE
field equal to CDMA only.
2: Either Analog or CDMA Digital Preference at Seizure
This count is pegged whenever the cell site receives an origination message or a page
response message with the REQUEST_MODE equal to either_CDMA_or_analog.
9: CDMA Origination/Termination Overflow with Handoff Reserved Channels
Available
This count is pegged at the cell site whenever the cell site cannot allocate a traffic channel
for setting up a CDMA call and idle traffic CEs are available for supporting handoffs.
However, this count will not reflect overflow events due to the power budget.
CDMACARR
2: CDMA Origination/Termination Overflow
for setting up a CDMA call due to either no available channel elements (CE) or packet
pipe slots. (This count does not reflect overflow events due to exceeding the power bud-
get.)
3: CDMA Origination/Termination Overflow due to PP Blocking
element for a CDMA call because of packet pipe blocking. This count is pegged even if
the cell site allocates traffic channel elements to a subsequent carrier for the CDMA call.
This event may occur if the variable bandwidth is too small. This count is a subset of
CDMA-CARR field 2.
CALL SETUP
CDMACS
1: CDMA Digital Only Call-Mode Preference at Seizure
2: Either Analog or CDMA Digital Preference at
Seizure
9: CDMA Origination/Termination Overflow with
Handoff Reserved Channels Available
CDMACARR
2: CDMA Origination/Termination Overflow
3: CDMA Origination/Termination Overflow due to PP
Blocking
CALL SETUP
SERVICE MEASUREMENTS (cont.)
CDMAPAF
25: CDMA Intercept Messages
This count is pegged whenever an intercept order is sent to a mobile. An intercept order is
sent to an originating mobile to inform the user of a dialed digit error. The user may have
dialed an invalid exchange or attempted to dial more digits than can be supported. This
order is also sent if a valid mobile attempts to originate a CDMA call but is denied CDMA
service in the system data bases.
26: CDMA Reorder Messages
This count is pegged whenever a reorder order is sent to a mobile. A reorder order is sent
to an originating mobile to inform the user of a system resource shortage preventing com-
pletion of a new call attempt.
27: CDMA Forced Release Messages
This count is pegged whenever a forced release order is sent to a mobile, specifically due
to system resource shortages.
CALL SETUP
CDMAPAF
25: CDMA Intercept Messages
26: CDMA Reorder Messages
27: CDMA Forced Release Messages
CALL SETUP
CDMAPAFCARRSC
15: CP Fail CDMA Call Setup Failure Origination
This count is the incremental number of CDMA call origination setup failures that are not
included in CDMA Originations Traffic Channel Confirmation Failure and in CDMA
Origination/Termination Overflow Count. The associated event will trigger pegging this
count, providing that the event occurs during mobile origination before the traffic channel
confirmation message is sent from the cell site to the CDN. The intent is to peg origination
setup failures before the call is stable on the radio channel and a packet pipe connection
has been established.
This SM count will NOT be pegged for MOST, CRTU, Mobile Loopback, and SMS calls,
or if the call is in the Release State.
16: CP Fail CDMA Call Setup Failure Termination
Similar to CP Fail CDMA Call Setup Failure Origination but for Termination.
19: Originations Assigned to CDMA Traffic Channel
This count is pegged whenever a cell site sends a CDMA channel assignment message to
the mobile in response to an origination message (Cell R13.0 and later).
20: Terminations Assigned to CDMA Traffic Channel
This count is pegged whenever a cell site sends a CDMA channel assignment message to
the mobile in response to an page response message (Cell R13.0 and later).
23: CDMA Origination Seizures
This count is incremented when the cell site receives a valid origination message.
24: CDMA Page Response Seizures
This count is incremented when the cell site receives a valid page response message.
CALL SETUP
CDMAPAFCARRSC
15: CP Fail CDMA Call Setup Failure Origination
16: CP Fail CDMA Call Setup Failure Termination
19: Originations Assigned to CDMA Traffic Channel
20: Terminations Assigned to CDMA Traffic Channel
23: CDMA Origination Seizures
24: CDMA Page Response Seizures

NOTE:
For description of the call processing failure messages see CTS/PM
Bulletin 00-011.
CALL SETUP
MPC-CDMA
1: Seizures (Successful Access) per Power Class
This count records the number of seizures for each of the mobile power classes.
CP CDMA
3: CDMA Origination Attempts at Setup
The ECPC pegs this count after it has informed the cell to proceed with an origination
attempt in CDMA mode. This count will be pegged when a user with appropriate permis-
sions originates a call over the CDMA access channel and sufficient resources (channel
elements, power) are available to serve the call in CDMA mode.
4: CDMA Termination Attempts at Setup
This count is the number of incoming call attempts that can be associated with this cell site
that are allocated CDMA resources when trying to set up the call.
5: CDMA Roamer Origination Attempts at Setup
This count is the number of origination attempts received from roaming mobiles at the
ECP from this cell site that are allocated CDMA resources when trying to setup the call.
6: CDMA Roamer Termination Attempts at Setup
This count is the number of incoming call attempts to reach a roaming mobile unit at this
cell site that are allocated CDMA resources when trying to setup the call.
CALL SETUP
MPC-CDMA
1: Seizures (Successful Access) per Power Class
CP CDMA
3: CDMA Origination Attempts at Setup
4: CDMA Termination Attempts at Setup
5: CDMA Roamer Origination Attempts at Setup
6: CDMA Roamer Termination Attempts at Setup
CALL SETUP
CP CDMA {8K|13K|EVRC|CMDATA}
1: CDMA Origination Traffic Channel Confirmation Failure [Flexent]
This count is the number of originations that failed either because the cell site does not
acquire the mobile on the traffic channel in the required time interval or because the cell
site cannot establish a logical connection on the packet pipe. In addition, the ECPC times
out waiting for a channel_confirmation message or receives a
channel_confirmation_failure message from the cell site.
2: CDMA Termination Traffic Channel Confirmation Failure [Flexent]
Similar to CDMA Origination Traffic Channel Confirmation Failure but for Termination.
ECPPAF CDMA
1: CDMA Originations Denied Due to Traffic Channel not Available
The number of originations that fail because the cell does not acquire the mobile on the
traffic channel due to non-availability of traffic channel elements.
2: CDMA Terminations Denied Due to Traffic Channel not Available
The number of terminations that fail because the cell does not acquire the mobile on the
traffic channel due to non-availability of traffic channel elements.
ECPPAFSC CDMA
1: Origination Failed Due to No Speech Handler Assignment Received at Cell
This count is pegged during mobile origination attempts that fail because the cell site did
not receive a speech handler assignment message.
2: Termination Failed Due to No Speech Handler Assignment Received at Cell
This count is pegged during mobile termination attempts that fail because the cell site did
not receive a speech handler assignment message.
CALL SETUP
CP CDMA-{8K|13K|EVRC|CMDATA}
1: CDMA Origination Traffic Channel Confirmation
Failure [Flexent]
2: CDMA Termination Traffic Channel Confirmation
Failure [Flexent]
ECP-PAF CDMA
1: CDMA Originations Denied Due to Traffic Channel
not Available
2: CDMA Terminations Denied Due to Traffic Channel
not Available
ECP-PAF-SC CDMA
1: Origination Failed Due to No Speech Handler
Assignment Received at Cell
2: Termination Failed Due to No Speech Handler
CALL SETUP
ECPPAFCARR CDMA
11: CDMA Page Response Seizures Due to Silent Page
This count is pegged whenever a mobile is released after it responds to a pre-page and a
TLDN is returned to the entity (MSC, HLR, etc.) requesting the page, versus the mobile
being setup on a traffic channel.
12: CDMA Page Response Seizures Not Resulting in CE Assignment
This count is pegged whenever a mobile is released after it responds to a page to the entity
(MSC, HLR, etc.) requesting the page, versus the mobile being setup on a traffic channel.
This count is not pegged for seizures resulting from page response due to a pre-page,
which is counted separately.
Reasons for this count being pegged include:
Calling party abandons the call to the mobile after the page is sent but before resources
are assigned and the page response is received.
A late page response is received.
The system detected a fraudulent mobile.
Call was redirected to analog; page response has request mode set to AMPS.
Service option request cannot be honored.
13: CDMA Silent Reorigination Attempts
This count in incremented when a mobile redials through silent reorigination capacity
built into the IS-95 CDMA mobile. In addition, the system shall peg the silent reorigina-
tion event when redial is done manually but meets the conditions of silent reorigination.
CALL SETUP
ECP-PAF-CARR CDMA
11: CDMA Page Response Seizures Due to Silent
Page
12: CDMA Page Response Seizures Not Resulting in
CE Assignment
13: CDMA Silent Reorigination Attempts
CALL SETUP
ECPPAFCARRSC CDMA
1: CDMA Origination Denied Due to No Packet Pipe Connection
This count is the number of call origination failures resulting from the inability to estab-
lish a packet pipe connection between the cell site and the DCS.
2: CDMA Termination Denied Due to No Packet Pipe Connection
This count is the number of call termination failures resulting from the inability to estab-
lish a packet pipe connection between the cell site and the DCS.
3: CDMA Origination Traffic Channel Confirmation Failure
This count is the number of originations that failed because the cell site does not acquire
the mobile on the traffic channel in the required time interval. This count is also pegged
for Traffic Channel Activation failures. In addition, the ECPC times out waiting for a
channel_confirmation message or receives a channel_ confirmation_failure message from
the cell site.
4: CDMA Termination Traffic Channel Confirmation Failure
Similar to CDMA Origination Traffic Channel Confirmation Failure but for Termination.
5: CDMA Origination Traffic Channel Activation Failure
The number of origination attempts that fail because of traffic channel activation failures.
6: CDMA Termination Traffic Channel Activation Failure
The number of termination attempts that fail because of traffic channel activation failures.
CALL SETUP
ECP-PAF-CARR-SC CDMA
1: CDMA Origination Denied Due to No Packet Pipe
Connection
2: CDMA Termination Denied Due to No Packet Pipe
Connection
3: CDMA Origination Traffic Channel Confirmation
Failure
4: CDMA Termination Traffic Channel Confirmation
Failure
5: CDMA Origination Traffic Channel Activation Failure
6: CDMA Termination Traffic Channel Activation
Failure
3G-1X IMPACTED
The following Service Measurements are added or changed as a result of the introduction
of 3G-1X. Please refer to the Service Measurement document (401-610-135) for more
details on the service measurements.
3G-1X IMPACTED
CDMA-CARR
2: 2G CDMA Origination/Termination Overflow
CP CDMA
8: 2G Originations/Terminations Reacquired on
Analog from CDMA
16: 2G Roamer Origination Attempts Denied
18: 2G Origination Denied-Error
57: 2G Originations Re-acquired on Analog from
CDMA
58: 3G Origination/Termination-Reacquire on
Analog from CDMA
59: 3G Roamer Origination Attempts Denied
60: 3G Origination Denied-Error
61: 3G Originations Re-acquire on Analog from
CDMA
3G-1X IMPACTED
Continued
3G-1X IMPACTED
Continued
CDMA-PAF
25: 2G CDMA Intercept Messages
60: 3G CDMA Intercept Messages
CDMA-SUBCELL
6: 3G Origination/Termination Overflow
CDMA-PAF-CARR-RC
1: CDMA calls per Radio configuration
3G-1X IMPACTED
Continued
3G-1X IMPACTED
Continued
CDMA-PAF-CARR-SC
15: 2G CP Fail CDMA Call Set Up Failure-
Originations
16: 2G CP Fail CDMA Call Set Up Failure-
Terminations
19: 2G Originations Assigned to CDMA Traffic
Channels
20: 2G Terminations Assigned to CDMA Traffic
Channels
23: 2G CDMA Origination Seizures
24: 2G CDMA Page Response Seizures
32: 3G Origination Assigned to a 3G Fundamental
Channel
33: 3G Termination Assigned to a 3G Fundamental
Channel
34: 3G Origination/Termination Assigned to a 2G
Channel
35: 2G Origination/Termination Assigned to a 3G
Channel in 2G mode
36: 3G Origination Seizures
37: 3G Page Response Seizures
38: 3G CP-Fail Call Setup Failures-Origination
39: 3G CP-Fail Call Setup Failures-Termination
3G-1X IMPACTED
Continued
3G-1X IMPACTED
Continued
ECP-PAF-CARR CDMA
11: 2G P age Response Seizures due to Silent Page
12: 2G Page Response Seizures Not Resulting in
CE Assignment
14: 3G Page Response Seizure due to Silent Page
15: 3G Page Response Seizures Not Resulting in 3G
CE Assignment
1: 2G Origination Denied Due to No Packet Pipe
Connection
2: 2G Termination Denied Due to No Packet Pipe
Connection
3: 2G Origination Traffic Channel Confirmation
Failure
4: 2G Termination Traffic Channel Confirmation
Failure
5: 2G Origination Traffic Channel Activation Failures
6: 2G Termination Traffic Channel Activation
Failures Channel Confirmation Failure
8: 2G CDMA Cellular Networking Termination
Failure Due to Packet Pipe Connection Failure
9: 2G CDMA Cellular Networking Termination Alert
Confirmation Failure
12: 2G CDMA Alert Confirmation Failure
3G-1X IMPACTED
Continued
3G-1X IMPACTED
Continued
14: 3G Origination Traffic Channel Confirmation
Failure
15: 3G Termination Traffic Channel Confirmation
Failure
16: 3G Origination denied due to no Packet Pipe
Connection
17: 3G Termination denied due to no Packet Pipe
Connection
18: 3G Origination Traffic Channel Activation
Failures
19: 3G Termination Traffic Channel Activation
Failures
20: 3G CDMA Alert Confirmation Failures
Traffic Channel Confirmation Failure
Failure Due to PP Connection Failure
23: 3G CDMA Cellular Networking Termination Alert
3G-1X IMPACTED
Continued
3G-1X IMPACTED
Continued
ECP-PAF-SC CDMA
1: 2G Origination Failed Due to No Speech Handler
2: 2G Termination Failed Due to No Speech Handler
3: 3G Origination failed due to no Speech Handler
4: 3G Termination failed due to no Speech Handler
ECP-PAF CDMA
5: 2G Origination Failed Due to DCS Error
6: 2G Termination Failed Due to DCS Error
8: 3G Origination Failed Due to DCS Error
9: 3G Termination Failed Due to DCS Error
CAMSHO
The CDMA Channel Assignment Into Soft Handoff (CAMSHO) feature gives the capa-
bility for an IS-95B compliant mobile station (MS) to set up multiple traffic channels with
multiple IS-95B compliant cells when the traffic channel assignment takes place. Specifi-
cally, the CAMSHO feature allows an IS-95B MS to be assigned to as many as six traffic
channels during the call setup phase to reduce the chance of failed mobile call attempts.
The IS-95B standard introduces two mechanisms to make this possible for both mobile
call origination and call termination:
MS pilot reporting in the Origination/Page Response message This mechanism pro-
vides the cell with the necessary pilot information to set up the multiple traffic channels
during the call setup phase.
Extended Channel Assignment Message (ECAM) This mechanism allows the base
station to assign multiple traffic channels to the MS.
The system initially determines if a neighbor of a CAMSHO enabled cell is CAMSHO
Allowed (via the CAMSHO field on the fci form). All intra-MSC neighbors that support
this feature are CAMSHO allowed neighbors, unless the service provider overrides them
via Recent Change/Verify (RC/V). All inter-MSC neighbors are always disabled for
CAMSHO.
This feature implies that any paging channel message that is sent to the MS while the MS
is in the Page Response sub-state or the Origination Attempt Sub-state, needs to be broad-
casted over the AHO neighbors reported in the origination or page response message
received by the cell.
When an IS-95B cell receives an origination or page response for termination message
from an IS-95B MS, the origination or page response message may contain an optional list
of up to five additional cells/sectors. The base station sends an ECAM to the MS instruct-
ing it to set up the traffic channels with the reported pilots. The call is in a state of soft
handoff.
The MS may report pilots from IS-95A cells and inter-MSC cells. However, since this fea-
ture works for only IS-95B cells and intra-MSC cells, the IS-95B base station does not use
the IS-95A and the inter-MSC pilots in performing the CAMSHO.
See 401-612-289.
CAMSHO
IS-95B enabled base stations send an Extended Channel
Assignment Message (ECAM) to the mobile.
The ECAM contains up to six traffic channels from the
strongest pilots reported to the mobile.
Mobile enters soft handoff in the call setup phase.
camsho_enable
tion parameters.
CDMA Channel Assignment Into
Soft Handoff
(camsho_enable)
Form: ceqface, ecp
This field is used to toggle on and off the CDMA Channel
Assignment Into Soft Handoff feature. It cannot be set to
yes unless the feature is active in the FAF file.
Range: y or n
camsho_enable

Access Channel Overload Invocation Threshold........................................................... +152) ___
Access Channel Overload Increase Persistence Step Size.......................................... +153) ___
Access Channel Overload Decrease Persistence Step Size ........................................ +154) ___
IS-95B AHO, CAMSHO:
Access Handoff Enable................................................................................................. +161) ___
Channel Assignment Into Soft Handoff Enable........................................................ +162) ___
AUTOPLEX
camsho_allow
tion parameters.
CAMSHO
(camsho_allow)
Form: fci

ited to CDMA Channel Assignment Into Soft Handoff fea-
ture. It cannot be set to yes unless this feature is
activated in the FAF file.
Range: y or n
camsho_allow

AUTOPLEX
Cell
Site
261)
Ant
Face
262)
Pilot
PN
263)
Prior
Grp
264)
Anlg
Ant
Face
265)
Eqvlnt
Serv
Grp
266)
Anlg
Only
Pilot
267)
Ngbr
Conf
268)
Band
Class
269)
Hard
Handoff
Only
270)
AHO
271)
CAM
SHO
272)
AEHO
273)
Extended System ID
DCS ECP SYS
274) 275) 276)
[1] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[2] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[3] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[4] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[5] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[6] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[7] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[8] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[9] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[10] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[11] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[12] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
CDMAPAFCARR
1: CAMSHO Requests
This count is the number CAMSHO requests. It shall be pegged once for each CAMSHO
secondary sector; e.g., if a single call set-up uses one primary sector plus two secondary
sectors, the count shall be pegged twice.
If this count is pegged for a request that is rejected by a pilot-only cell, it shall be decre-
mented, or un-pegged.
2: CAMSHO Acknowledgements
This count is pegged at the requesting cell when it receives an acknowledgment message
from the target cell or sector indicating that a channel for CAMSHO secondary was suc-
cessfully activated and ready to participate in the call setup. It is pegged once for each
acknowledgment received from a CAMSHO secondary.
3: CAMSHO Mobile Acquired
This count is pegged at the primary cell (CCC) when the mobile has been acquired on the
reverse link. Although any of the secondaries can acquire the mobile on the reverse link
first, (i.e., detect the mobile's preamble), only the primary can send any signaling message
to the mobile. Therefore this count is pegged only at the primary.
4: CAMSHO Origination Seizures
This count is the number of origination seizures for CAMSHO-related calls.
5: CAMSHO Termination Seizures
This count is the number of termination seizures for CAMSHO-related calls.
6: CAMSHO Request Received at the Secondary
This count shall be pegged when a cell receives a message from another cell requesting to
set itself up as a CAMSHO secondary. The request could be for either originating or ter-
minating calls.
7: CAMSHO Request Denied Overflow at Secondary
This count shall be pegged when a CAMSHO request is received at the secondary cell but
cannot be honored because of CE overflow or packet pipe blockage.
This count shall not be pegged for pilot-only carriers.
8: CAMSHO Request Denied Power Control Overload at Secondary
This count shall be pegged when a CAMSHO request is received at the secondary cell but
cannot be honored because of power control overload.
CDMAPAFCARR
1: CAMSHO Requests
2: CAMSHO Acknowledgements
3: CAMSHO Mobile Acquired
4: CAMSHO Origination Seizures
5: CAMSHO Termination Seizures
6: CAMSHO Request Received at the Secondary
7: CAMSHO Request Denied Overflow at Secondary
8: CAMSHO Request Denied Power Control
Overload at Secondary
CDMAPAFCARR
9: CAMSHO Originations Assigned to a Traffic Channel
This count is pegged whenever the cell sends an Extended Channel Assignment Message
(ECAM) to the mobile in response to an origination message for a CAMSHO-related call.
10: CAMSHO Terminations Assigned to a Traffic Channel
Similar to CAMSHO Originations Assigned to a Traffic Channel but for terminations.
11: CAMSHO CPFail Call Setup Failures Originations
This count is the incremental number of CAMSHO call origination setup failures that are
not included in CAMSHO Origination Traffic Channel Confirmation Failure. This count
is pegged at the primary cell only after channel assignment and before the call is stable.
This count shall be pegged for the same reasons as the non-CAMSHO related CP-Fail
Origination Setup Failure count.
12: CAMSHO CPFail Call Setup Failures Termination
Similar to CAMSHO CP-Fail Call Set Up Failures Origination but for terminations.
13: CAMSHO Changed to Simplex
This count shall be pegged for CAMSHO requests that degrade into a simplex call set-up
due to no resources available at any secondaries or all secondaries have timed-out. This
count shall not be pegged after a traffic channel confirmation occurs, only before.
14: CAMSHO Degraded to Simplex
This count shall be pegged for CAMSHO requests that degrade into a simplex call set-up
because of a rate set change from Rate Set 2 to Rate Set 1.
10: CAMSHO Origination Traffic Channel Confirmation Failure
This count is the number of CAMSHO originations that fail because the cell site does not
acquire the mobile on the traffic channel in the required time interval. The ECPC times out
waiting for a channel confirmation message or receives a channel_confirmation failure
message from the primary cell site.
11: CAMSHO Termination Traffic Channel Confirmation Failure
CAMSHO Origination Traffic Confirmation Failure but for terminations.
CDMAPAFCARR
9: CAMSHO Originations Assigned to a Traffic
Channel
10: CAMSHO Terminations Assigned to a Traffic
Channel
11: CAMSHO CP-Fail Call Setup Failures
Originations
12: CAMSHO CP-Fail Call Setup Failures
Termination
13: CAMSHO Changed to Simplex
14: CAMSHO Degraded to Simplex
10: CAMSHO Origination Traffic Channel Confirmation
Failure
11: CAMSHO Termination Traffic Channel
LOAD BALANCE TRAFFIC CHANNELS
TCA
When operating with multiple RF carrier frequencies, a base station must not only perform
all of the processing previously described in Unit 2 for the Call Setup Algorithm for a sys-
tem with a single carrier frequency, it must also perform traffic carrier frequency selec-
tion.
While operating with multiple RF carrier frequencies, the base station may receive a sei-
zure from a mobile on the access channel associated with a particular RF carrier fre-
quency, but the mobile may be served by a traffic channel associated with a different RF
carrier frequency. This is called cross carrier assignment.
In CDMA 6.0 the cross carrier assignment was based solely on RF loading of the available
frequencies. However, the algorithm caused some unnecessary assignment across carriers
when the RF loading only differed by a small amount. Refinement of the algorithm was
made in CDMA 6.1 to give a certain weight to the RF loading, letting the engineer decide
to favor the assigned frequency or not.
The purpose of the Traffic Channel Assignment algorithm (TCA) is to balance the load of
traffic channels between carriers. If the carriers are equally loaded, then their coverage is
similar which is important for multi-carrier call processing, especially during call setup.
S
NOTE:
In APXD12.0 the lcoos_t translation parameter on the cell2 form was used for
this weighting.
LOAD BALANCE TRAFFIC CHANNELS
TCA
Access probes are received on the carrier to which the
mobile is hashed, F
n
.
Traffic Channel Assignment algorithm (TCA) may assign a
traffic channel on another carrier to maintain traffic channel
loading cross carrier assignment.
Objective is to keep the footprint of the carriers similar.
Hashing based
on mobile
Paging
Channels
Traffic channel selection
Traffic
Channels
based on forward RF
loading gives weight
to originating carrier
F1
F2
TRAFFIC CARRIER FREQUENCY
SELECTION ALGORITHM
When operating with multiple RF carrier frequencies, a base station must not only perform
all of the processing previously described in Unit 2 for the Call Setup Algorithm for a sys-
tem with a single carrier frequency, it must also perform traffic carrier frequency selec-
tion. While operating with multiple RF carrier frequencies, the base station may receive a
seizure from a mobile on the access channel associated with a particular RF carrier fre-
quency, but the mobile may be served by a traffic channel associated with a different RF
carrier frequency. This is called cross carrier assignment. The decision as to the selec-
tion of the actual traffic carrier frequency is affected by the comparative downlink loading
across RF carrier frequencies. This comparison can be controlled by weighting with the
RF Loading Weight translation parameter, tca_weight, on the ceqface form.
The downlink loading is calculated by estimating the total power transmitted on the down-
link, P
Total
, on a per carrier basis using the equation:
and then normalizing by dividing by the value specified for the max_power translation
parameter. Finally, the value of the tca_weight translation parameter is subtracted from
the normalized value calculated for the carrier frequency that the access seizure was
received, F
K
.
The least loaded, after the weight factor has been subtracted, and unblocked carrier will be
selected for the traffic channel.
scale 10 pilot_gain
2
+ sync_gain
2
+ paging_gain
2
+ traffic_gain
i
2
traffic activity
i = 1
M
bcratt_fact
10
P
Total
=
P
Total
max_power
(F
1
),
P
Total
max_power
(F
2
), ... ,
P
Total
max_power
(F
K
) - tca_weight), ... ,
P
Total
max_power
(F
N
)
Minimum (
S
NOTE:
In APXD12.0 the lcoos_t translation parameter on the cell2 form was used for
this weighting.
TRAFFIC CARRIER FREQUENCY
SELECTION ALGORITHM
Calculate Downlink Loading
for F
1
, F
2
, ..., F
K
, ..., F
N
normalized on max_power
Subtract tca_weight from
Downlink Loading for F
K
Select RF Carrier Frequency with
Available Traffic Channel Elements,
Available Packet Pipe Capacity, and
Minimum Downlink Loading
Called Cross Carrier Frequency Traffic Channel
Assignment when selected RF Carrier Frequency F
K
Access Seizure Received
on Frequency, F
K
CONTROLLING
TRAFFIC CARRIER FREQUENCY SELECTION
The traffic carrier frequency selection algorithm can be controlled by a weighting factor.
The weighting factor can be specified to affect a compromise between the benefits of uni-
form downlink loading across the RF carrier frequencies, and the risks of cross frequency
assignments.
CONTROLLING
TRAFFIC CARRIER FREQUENCY SELECTION
Range of Weighting
0 to 100%
Value of Weighting
tca_weight
ceqface form
[%]
Effect
5 + Best Downlink Loading Balance
Most Cross Carrier Assignments
50 Some Cross Carrier Assignments
Some Downlink Loading Balance
100 + Fewest Cross Carrier Assignments
Worst Downlink Loading Balance
TRAFFIC CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
ALGORITHM CONSIDERATIONS
Border Carrier
The feature Omit Border Carrier From Channel List Message prevents mobiles from mon-
itoring the paging channel on a border carrier, Fn. Due to the ballooning phenomenon in
a border area it is desirable to further balance the loading between carriers. Therefore, the
weight factor used with a border carrier (not listed in the Channel List Message) will be
half of the translation value.
Border Carrier
For a border carrier the tca_weight value used in the
algorithm is half of the translation value.
Example:
tca_weight = 20
F1: 30% (common carrier)
F2: 45% (originating carrier)
F3: 30% (border carrier)
F2 vs. F1: (45-20) vs. 30: F2 lower than F1
F2 vs. F3: (45-10) vs. 30: F3 lower than F2
Traffic channel assigned to F3
BCR Attenuation Factor
If the BCR setting is changed without changing the corresponding max_power setting, it
affects the multi-carrier RF load balancing based traffic channel assignment (TCA) algo-
rithm. To explain this, two different cases are considered.
BCR attenuation settings on all carriers are changed identically
When BCR attenuation for the carriers is changed by the same amount with respect to the
standard configuration, say raised by x dB, without altering the max_power, it lowers the
full load Pilot fraction, and hence the carrier loading, by an equal amount.
The above indicates that a common increase in BCR attenuation across all carriers
requires TCA bias to be scaled down by the same amount in linear units, and vice versa.
This applies to both core traffic as well as border sectors. The impact of BCR attenuation
adjustment on the TCA bias is higher for border cells because all the call seizures are on
the continuing carrier.
BCR attenuation settings on all carriers are changed unidentically
When BCR attenuation for only some carriers is changed by the some amount with respect
to the standard configuration, say raised by x dB, without altering the max_power, the
weight factor will be modified based on loading. Hence, for unequal changes in the BCR
attenuation settings across different carriers, it is strongly recommended to appropriately
change the max_power translation in order to maintain uniform RF loading.
Ref: Translation Application Note No. 7.
BCR Attenuation Factor
If bcratt_fact is changed on one carrier without changing
max_pwr to recommended value, tca_weight will be
dependent on RF loading.
If bcratt_fact is changed equally on all carriers without
changing max_pwr, tca_weight will be scaled by the
amount of the bcratt_fact change.
Example:
bcratt_fact changed 2 dB for all carriers
tca_weight
new
= tca_weight
old
10
-2/10
SPECIFYING A VALUE
FOR tca_weight
By considering the nominal amount of power that would be required for each additional
traffic channel that is activated, calculation can be performed to relate the value specified
for the tca_weight translation parameter to the difference in the number of active traffic
channels before there are cross carrier assignments. The details of such a calculation
would include the Traffic Channel Activity Factor and the amount of power allocated to
the overhead channels (that is, Pilot, Sync and Page). Since these do not actually vary
much in practical situations, a representative relationship between the tca_weight transla-
tion parameter to the number of calls before there are cross carrier assignments can be
illustrated.
SPECIFYING A VALUE
FOR tca_weight
Range of Weighting
0 to 100%
Value of Weighting
tca_weight
ceqface form
[%]
Difference in Number of Active
Traffic Channels before
Cross Carrier Assignment
8 kbps 13 kbps
10%
20%
30%
40%
50%
60%
70%
80%
90%
3
7
10
14
17
20
24
27
30
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
TRAFFIC CHANNEL FREQUENCY SELECTION
tca_alg, tca_weight
tion parameters.
Carrier Assignment Algorithm
(tca_alg)
Form: ceqface, ecp
specifies the algorithm that will be used for selection of
traffic channel.
The possible algorithms are Lowest Forward RF Loading,
Origination Carrier, and Lowest CCC Loading.
Notes: 1) If Origination Carrier is selected, then all carri-
ers (excluding Pilot-Only carriers) on the affected sector
should be equipped with Paging and Access channels.
2) CCC loading was used prior to CDMA 6.0 and was
retained for backward compatibility during the transition to
the new algorithms in CDMA 6.0 and CDMA 6.1.
Range:
rf for lowest forward rf loading,
oc for origination carrier, or
ccc for lowest ccc loading
RF Loading Weight Factor
(tca_weight)
Form: ceqface, ecp
specifies the weight factor to the origination carrier when
the Carrier Assignment Algorithm is Lowest Forward RF
Loading.
Range: 5 100, in increments of 5
TRAFFIC CHANNEL FREQUENCY SELECTION
tca_alg, tca_weight

Redirection Destination....................................................................................................... +130) ___
Redirection Band ................................................................................................................ +131) ___
[1] ____ [2] ____ [3] ____
CDMA-to-CDMA Handoff Threshold....................................................................................... +141) ___
Border Sector Loss Threshold for Inter-Frequency Handoff ................................................... +144) ___
Border Pilot Versus Interior Pilot Threshold............................................................................ +146) ___
Carrier Assignment Algorithm ............................................................................................ +148) ___
AUTOPLEX
3G-1X TRAFFIC CHANNEL
ASSIGNMENT ALGORITHM
3G-1X does not change the TCA algorithm per se, but adjusts the loading values used in
the TCA algorithm. Depending upon whether the 3G-1X carriers are co-existing with 2G
and/or there are a number of overlaid 3G-1X carriers, there is a need to give preference to
a 3G or 2G carrier.
For example, if 3G-1X is co-existing on a number of carriers but there are one or more
carriers that are 2G-only, then a 2G bias could be assigned to those carriers. By assigning
a bias to the 2G-only carriers, a 2G mobile would prefer one of those carriers instead of
the carriers that are both 2G- and 3G-capable.
There are three biases an operator can use to adjust the carrier loading used in the TCA
algorithm:
2G Load Preference Delta
3G-1X Load Preference Delta
3G-1X Data Load Preference Delta
The 2G Load Preference Delta (ld_pref_dlta_2g) translation on the ceqface3g form is
used to reduce the load for all 2G-only carriers before the TCA algorithm is run, so that
2G mobiles prefers the 2G-only carriers.
The 3G-1X Load Preference Delta (ld_pref_dlta_3g1x) translation on the ceqface3g form
is used to reduce the load for all 3G capable carriers before the TCA algorithm is run, so
that 3G mobiles prefers the 3G carriers.
The 3G-1X Data Load Preference Delta (d3g_ldpf_delta) translation on the ceqface3g
form is used to reduce the load for all 3G carriers before the TCA algorithm is run so that
a 3G data call prefers the 3G carriers.
It is also possible to specify an alternate value for the 3G-1X Data Load Preference
(ad3g_ldpf_delta), and with what carriers to use the alternate value.
3G-1X TRAFFIC CHANNEL
ASSIGNMENT ALGORITHM
Loading is adjusted for generation prior to TCA
3G mobiles prefer 3G-capable carriers
2G mobiles prefer 2G-only carriers
Three translations
TRAFFIC CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT ALGORITHM
tion parameters.
(ld_prf_dlta_3g1x)
Form: ceqface3g
Specifies the loading factors for carriers with available 3G-
only CE resources for the purpose of selecting a carrier for
a 3G-limited mobile.
Range: 0 - 100, in increments of 5
(ld_prf_dlta_2g)
Form: ceqface, ecp
Specifies the loading factors for carriers with available 2G-
only CE resources for the purpose of selecting a carrier for
a 2G-limited mobile.
Range: 5 100, in increments of 5
3G-1X Data Load Preference
Delta (Prim/Alt)
(d3g_ldpf_delta)
(ad3g_ldpf_dlta)
Form: ceqface3g
Being used to adjust loading factors for 3G-capable carri-
ers with available 3G CE resources for the purpose of
selecting a carrier for a 3G data call and for 3G mobiles
capable of 2G. When the alternate value is specified, it will
take precedence over the primary value.
Range:
(Primary) 0 - 100
(Alternate) 0 - 100
3G-1X Data Load Preference
Delta Carriers Using
Alternate
(ldpf_carr)
Form: ceqface3g
Specifies the list of carriers using the alternate value.
Range: y or blank
TRAFFIC CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT ALGORITHM
AUTOPLEX
System
3G1X CDMA - Voice

Cell Site - Number ...........................................*1) ___

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AUTOPLEX
3G1X CDMA Information - Data

F-SCH Max Rate (kbps) ....................................... 56) _____
R-SCH Max Rate (kbps) ....................................... 57) _____
Anchor Monitoring Interval (sec) ............................ 58) ___
Anchor Hysteresis (dB) ...................................... 59) ___
Data Relative Strength Threshold (dB) ....................... 60) ___

3G1X Data Load 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Preference Delta (%) ........+61) __ +62) ___ 64) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
RISKS OF
CROSS CARRIER FREQUENCY
TRAFFIC CHANNEL ASSIGNMENTS
There are risks of traffic channel confirmation failures when a base station assigns the
mobile to a traffic channel associated with a different carrier frequency than the frequency
of the mobiles paging channel. The root cause for these traffic channel confirmation fail-
ures can be a mismatch between the areas covered (adequate signal-to-impairment ratio of
the traffic channels) or served (adequate signal-to-impairment ratio of the pilot) by differ-
ent carrier frequencies. The mismatches can vary dynamically in accordance with time
variations of traffic loading. The mismatches can also be due to other causes.
RISKS OF
CROSS CARRIER FREQUENCY
TRAFFIC CHANNEL ASSIGNMENTS
Cross carrier frequency traffic channel assignment failures
can be caused by mismatch between the footprint of carrier
frequencies. Footprint mismatch can be due to:
Different antennas
Different antenna orientations
Different cables
Different transmit powers
Different traffic loads
Different external interference.
REQUIREMENTS FOR SUCCESSFUL CALL
ORIGINATION IN CORE F2 AREA
Example
To achieve successful call origination the following condition must be satisfied:
At the location where a call is placed, the dominant coverage should be provided by the
same CDMA sector for all existing CDMA carriers.
In the example, there may be a problem if the mobile is hashed to F1 in the area where
there is no dominant F2 coverage from the same sector, cell B gamma face, and is being
assigned a traffic channel on F2. If there is no dominant coverage of F2 from the same sec-
tor, the mobile may not be able to confirm the traffic channel on F2 and a traffic channel
confirmation failure will be seen.
REQUIREMENTS FOR SUCCESSFUL CALL
ORIGINATION IN CORE F2 AREA
Example
Cell B (g) sector:
Dashed line
Solid line
Cell A
Cell B
Cell C
F2 footprint is smaller than F1s
Cell A (b) and Cell C (a)
Dominant server of F2: C (a)
Origination on F2 of C (a) may
Dominant server of F1: B (g)
fail here if assigned to F1
extend to fill in F2 hole
Bad orientation
of F2 antenna,
nearest sector
fills in
F2 footprint
F1 footprint
Traffic Channel Confirmation Failures
The RF footprint of the internal border sectors between the common frequency and dis-
continuing/border frequency is usually different. This is a result of lack of forward link
interference on the discontinuing/border frequency and different levels of traffic on com-
mon frequency and discontinuing/border frequency. Experience in the field shows that
call attempts on the border frequency (F2) of the internal border sectors in the area not
covered by the common frequency (F1) are more susceptible to failure either during the
origination/termination process or the CDMAtoCDMA interfrequency handoff process.
With this feature, the CDMA Channel List Message will omit reference to any Paging
Channels of a discontinuing frequency (F2) on any internal border sectors that are config-
ured for interfrequency CDMAtoCDMA handoff. The Paging Channel on the discon-
tinuing/border frequency will inform the mobiles to monitor the Paging Channel on a
different frequency. The mobiles then re-hash to another frequency (common frequency
(F1)) so that the mobiles do not attempt to access the system on the discontinuing/border
frequency of the internal border sector. Since no mobiles are on the page channel of dis-
continuing carriers, call setup will be done on the continuing carriers. Traffic channels can
be assigned to the discontinuing carrier. The discontinuing carrier normally has a bigger
footprint than continuing carriers, so the risk for Traffic Channel Confirmation Failures is
reduced.
If the internal border cell/sector is configured for directed interfrequency CDMAto
CDMA handoff, this feature is automatically activated without other special translation
settings.
Traffic Channel Confirmation Failures
F1/F2 coverage imbalance at the internal system border
No mobile will originate or terminate on the border carrier
TCA will assign traffic channels to border carrier
Internal system border
Alpha:
Beta:
Gamma:
F1 only
F1 only
F1 only
Alpha:
Beta:
Gamma:
F1 only
F1 only
F1 only
Alpha:
Beta:
Gamma:
F1/F2
F1/F2
F1/F2
F1/F2
footprint F1
footprint
F1
footprint
F2 footprint
F1/F2 border
F1/F2
F1 only
Cell B
Cell C
Cell A
Cell A
Alpha, Beta: internal sectors
Gamma: internal border sector
F1
footprint
F2
High Speed Packet Data
Introduction
In 3G-1X, it is possible to transmit High Speed Packet Data (HSPD). Since an HSPD call
does not need the high data bandwidth all the time, the resources have to be efficiently
managed to maximize capacity.
Characteristics of a High Speed Packet Data Call
The figure shows an example of a HSPD call. The user session is the time when a data
user is logged on to the system, i.e., parameters about the session are stored at the MSC.
During a session, several calls may be made. Being logged on to the system does not
necessarily mean that air-interface resources are allocated to the user. The time where the
user is still logged on but no resources are allocated to a call is called the dormant time.
An HSPD call always has a Fundamental Channel (FCH) assigned. The FCH is used to
send signaling information and may be used for re-transmitting data. If a data burst needs
to be transmitted, the system will set up a Supplemental Channel (SCH) in addition to the
FCH to transmit the high speed data. The bandwidth of the SCH and the duration of the
burst is determined by the amount of data transmitted, and a number of factors such as
available resources and RF conditions.
If the call has been inactive for a while and the inactivity timer expires, the FCH is torn
down in order to increase capacity.
In the first phase of 3G-1X, the data rates supported by the SCH are 19.2kbps, 38.4kbps,
76.8kbps, and 153.6kbps. When the FCH has no information to transmit the rate goes
down to 1.2kbps from 9.6kbps in order to minimize interference.
F/R-SCH Setup
The SCH can only be set up once an FCH is established. Therefore, the messaging to allo-
cate a SCH is transmitted over the FCH. In the base station, the Supplemental Air
Resource Allocation (SARA) algorithm determines the capacity and duration of the SCH
burst.
C
L
8
3
0
3

v
1
.
0
T
r
a
f
f
i
c

C
h
a
n
n
e
l

S
e
t
u
p
L
U
C
E
N
T

T
E
C
H
N
O
L
O
G
I
E
S

P
R
O
P
R
I
E
T
A
R
Y

6
-
8
3
U
s
e

p
u
r
s
u
a
n
t

t
o

C
o
m
p
a
n
y

i
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n
s
C
D
M
A

I
S
-
9
5

a
n
d

3
G
-
1
x

B
a
s
e

S
t
a
t
i
o
n

C
a
l
l

P
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g
T
R
A
F
F
I
C

C
H
A
N
N
E
L

S
E
T
U
P
H
i
g
h

S
p
e
e
d

P
a
c
k
e
t

D
a
t
a
Data Rate
[kbps]
1.2 kbps
(FCH)
9.6 kbps
(FCH)
19.2 kbps
(SCH)
38.4 kbps
(SCH)
76.8 kbps
(SCH)
153.6 kbps
(SCH)
t
download
Dormant
Period
t
dormant
t
think
t
think
t
think
Legend
t
session
User Session Time
t
hold
Call Holding Time
t
dormant
Dormant Period Time
t
think
User Thinking Time
t
download
Data Download Time
T
inact
User Inactivity Timer
Legend
t
session
User Session Time
t
hold
Call Holding Time
t
dormant
Dormant Period Time
t
think
User Thinking Time
t
download
Data Download Time
T
inact
User Inactivity Timer
T
inact
expired.
FCH released.
T
inact
expired.
FCH released.
1
st
call (t
hold
) 2
nd
call N
th
call
User session (t
session
)
During SCH operation
FCH is transmitting 1/8
rate and no user data
During SCH operation
FCH is transmitting 1/8
rate and no user data
t
download
t
download
Log on Log off
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR RESOURCE ALLOCATION
A SCH typically transmits with a much higher data rate than an FCH and therefore trans-
mits with a higher power. Higher transmit power increases interference and may degrade
capacity. The base station has a module called SARA (Supplemental Air Resource Alloca-
tion) designed to allocate SCH resources on forward and reverse link (F-SARA and R-
SARA). F-SARA and R-SARA determine the data rate and duration of the SCH burst.
When a SCH is requested, call processing interrogates SARA to determine if there are suf-
ficient air interface resources to assign an SCH, and the values of the power control
parameters and data rate of the SCH.
Before calling SARA, call processing determines a maximum SCH data rate based on CE
availability, Walsh code, Packet Pipe and other hardware and software resources. This
maximum SCH data rate does not take into account the RF air interface resources; SARA
determines if this maximum data rate, or a lower one, is allowed by the current RF condi-
tions.
When an existing SCH burst is allowed to extend its end duration at the same SCH data
rate, the operation is called SCH continuation. Call processing interrogates SARA to
check if the RF conditions support the SCH continuation.
Since consecutive F-SCH bursts may have different data rates, SARA keeps records of the
SCH data rate information to apply a correction to the computation of SCH initial power
at any data rate. To compensate for small changes of path loss between close consecutive
bursts, SARA records the FCH power at the end of the previous burst, and at the time of
the SCH request. SARA keeps track of the time between bursts to ensure that only fresh
measurements are used to estimate the SCH power control parameters.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR RESOURCE ALLOCATION
SARA determines data rate and burst duration of SCH
First maximum data rate is determined
Channel elements, Walsh codes, packet pipes etc.
Then data rate and burst duration
Maximum data rate and RF conditions.
3G-1X PACKET DATA
tion parameters.
3G1X IP Service Enabled
(ip_enable)
Form: ecp3g
This parameter enables IP data service with CDMA 3G1X
fundamental channel over the whole system.
Range: y or n
3G1X CDPD Service Enabled
(cdpd_enable)
Form: ecp3g
This parameter enables CDPD data service with CDMA
3G1X fundamental channel over the whole system.
Range: y or n
F-SCH Max Data Rate (kbps)
(fwd_maxrate)
Form: ecp3g
Specifies the maximum forward supplemental channel data
rate allowed for the system.
Range: 0, 19.2, 38.4, 76.8 and 153.6
R-SCH Max Data Rate (kbps)
(rev_maxrate)
Form: ecp3g
Specifies the maximum reverse supplemental channel data
rate allowed for the system.
Range: 0, 19.2, 38.4, 76.8 and 153.6
F-SCH Max Rate
(maxrate_fsch)
Form: ceqface3g
Indicates the maximum allowed rate for all F-SCHs in the
cell when the CDMA 3G1X High Speed Data feature is on.
Range: 0, 19.2, 38.4, 76.8 and 153.6
R-SCH Max Rate
(maxrate_rsch)
Form: ceqface3g
Indicates the maximum allowed rate for all R-SCHs in the
cell when the CDMA 3G1X High Speed Data feature is on.
Range: 0, 19.2, 38.4, 76.8 and 153.6
Anchor Monitoring Interval (sec)
(anplt_inthr)
Form: ceqface3g
Indicates the interval of Periodic Pilot Strength Measure-
ment Message below which the Anchor Cell is deemed too
unstable to assign an SCH.
Range: 0.8 - 4.0 in 0.2 increments
3G-1X PACKET DATA
AUTOPLEX


3G1X Data Load 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AUTOPLEX
Cellular EXECUTIVE CELLULAR PROCESSOR for 3G (ecp3g) Screen 3 of 3
System
CDMA 3G1X Packet Data

3G1X IP Service Enabled ................................ 18) _
3G1X CDPD Service Enabled .............................. 19) _
F-SCH Max Data Rate (kbps) ............................. 20) _____
R-SCH Max Data Rate (kbps) ............................. 21) _____
RLP Round Trip Time (frames) ........................... 22) _
3G-1X IMPACTED
3G-1X IMPACTED
CDMA-PAF-CARR
89: 3G Forward Fundamental Channel selected
count
90: 3G Forward Supplementary Channel 19.2kb/s
rate selected count
rate selected count
rate selected count
rate selected count
94: 3G Reverse Fundamental Channel selected
count
95: 3G Reverse Supplementary Channel 19.2kb/s
rate selected count
rate selected count
rate selected count
rate selected count
99: 3G Data Call Forward Supplementary Channel
Setup Failure - CP Fail count
100: 3G Data Call Reverse Supplementary Channel
Setup Failure - CP Fail count
TRAFFIC CHANNEL SETUP SUMMARY
TRAFFIC CHANNEL SETUP SUMMARY
Base station informs mobile about traffic channel
assignment on the paging channel.
Base station and mobile have to confirm the traffic channel
at setup.
It is desirable to start power control and get into soft handoff
as early as possible in the call setup process.
Loadbalance Channels
Access channel Hashing
Paging channel SHAPCAR
Traffic channels TCA
Objective: Maintain similar footprint for all carriers
on a sector.
Traffic channel will be assigned the least RF
loaded, unblocked carrier.
The weight factor, tca_weight, is used to give bias
to the carrier receiving the access probes.
Bias can also be given to 2G-only carriers, 3G
voice, and 3G data.
A HSPD call uses a FCH all the time and a SCH when data
bursts are transmitted
SARA determines data rate, up to 153.6 kbps
Knowledge Check
Question 1.
How long does the mobile wait to receive an alert message after confirming the traffic
channel?
A. 0.2 seconds
B. 2 seconds
C. 5 seconds
D. 65 seconds
S
Answer: c
Question 2.
When is the service measurement CDMA-PAF-CARR-SC 19 (Originations Assigned To
CDMA Traffic Channel) pegged?
A. When mobile starts sending frames on the traffic channel
B. When base station sends a channel assignment message (CAM) to the mobile
C. When base station starts sending frames on the traffic channel
D. When mobile acknowledges a CAM
S
Answer: b
Question 3.
When is the service measurement CDMA-CARR 2 (CDMA Origination/Termination
Overflow) pegged?
A. When there are no channel elements or packet pipes available
B. When there is no speech handler available
C. When there is not enough downlink power available
D. When an origination and a termination is done at the same time
S
Answer: a
Knowledge Check
Question 4.
If a base station receives a seizure from a mobile on the access channel associated with a
particular RF carrier frequency, but assigns a traffic channel associated with a different RF
carrier frequency, what is that called?
A. SHAPCAR
B. Cross-carrier assignment
C. Multi-carrier traffic channel
D. Hashing
S
Answer: b
Exercise 1.
Assuming that a 2G mobile is monitoring the paging channel on the F2 carrier, please
complete the table
S
F1 loading 50% 30% 20% 20% 30%
F2 loading 50% 50% 50% 50% 50%
F3 loading 50% 40% 15% 15% 40%
tca_weight 25 25 25 70 5
Assigned traffic channel carrier
F1 loading 50% 30% 20% 20% 30%
F2 loading 50% 50% 50% 50% 50%
F3 loading 50% 40% 15% 15% 40%
tca_weight 25 25 25 70 5
Assigned traffic channel carrier F2 F2 F3 F2 F1
CALL SETUP
Knowledge Check
Exercise 2.
Given a RF Loading Factor of 20 (tca_weight=20), 2G Load Preference Delta of 10
(ld_prf_dlta_2g=10), and the following loading of carriers:
- F1 = 40 (2G-only)
- F2 = 50 (2G + 3G)
-F3 = 55 (2G + 3G)
On what carrier will traffic channel be setup if a 2G mobile station is hashed to F3?
A. F1
B. F2
C. F3
S
Answer: a
Comment: Effective loading of F1 is 40 - 10 = 30, which is lower than the
effective loading of F3, 55 - 20 = 35.
Exercise 3.
Walsh code 42 of length 46 bits (W
42
64
) is used for a traffic channel. By the table and
shadowing the Walsh codes, what Walsh codes can not be used if orthogonality is
maintained?
S
Answer: W
2
4
, W
2
8
, W
10
16
, W
10
32
, W
42
128
, and W
106
128
CALL SETUP
Knowledge Check
Question 5.
In the following figure, what may happen if the mobile is hashed to F1 and is assigned a
traffic channel on F2?
A. Successful call setup in core F2 area
B. Successful call setup in core F1 area
C. Successful call setup on neighboring cell site
D. Unsuccessful call setup
S
Answer: d
Solid line F2 footprint
The mobile is in red area
Cell A Cell B
Cell C
Dashed line ---- F1 footprint
Dashed line
Solid Line
F1 footprint
F2 footprint
Section 7
Conversation Substate Section 7
Conversation Substate CL8303 v1.0
CONVERSATION SUBSTATE
When the mobile station (MS) is on a traffic channel, in the conversation substate, a lot of
activities, besides sending traffic information between the MS and the base stations (BS),
take place.
The MS no longer monitors the page channel. Also, the access channel is no longer used
to send information to the base station (BS). Messages between the BS and MS are instead
being sent on the traffic channel, it is called associated signaling.
The traffic channel is continuously being confirmed so that resources are not unnecessar-
ily tied up to a traffic channel that is not functioning. Other call processing activities that
takes place is location of handoff candidates as well as performing handoffs. To maximize
capacity and performance, power control is being done. And to protect resources and per-
formance, overload control also takes place.
CL8303 v1.0 Conversation Substate
Messages being sent on the traffic channel
Continuous confirmation of the traffic channel
Locating handoff candidates
Performing handoffs
Power control
Overload control
Other call activities
TRAFFIC CHANNEL ASSOCIATED SIGNALING
Uplink Reverse Traffic
Typical messages on the Reverse Traffic Channel are listed.
Typical order messages on the reverse traffic channel are: Base Station Challenge, SSD
Update Confirmation, SSD Update Rejection, Parameter Update Confirmation, Request
Analog Service, Mobile Station Acknowledgment, Service Option Request, Service
Option Response, Release (normal and with power-down indication), Long Code Transi-
tion Request (public and private), Long Code Transition Response (public and private),
Connect, Continuous DTMF Tone (start and stop), Service Option Control, Local Control,
Mobile Station Reject (with and without a reason).
The authentication challenge response message contains the information to validate the
mobile's identity.
The flash with information message contains information records from the mobile con-
cerning: mobile features, mobile keypay facility, called party number calling party num-
ber, the connected number (i.e., the responding party's number).
The data burst message is a user generated data message sent by the mobile to the base
station.
The pilot strength measurement message sends information about the strength of other
pilot signals that are not associated with the serving base station.
The power measurement report message sends frame error rate statistics to the base sta-
tion. The report is made at specified intervals or when a threshold is reached.
The send burst DTMF message requests the MSC to send DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Fre-
quency) tones to the PSTN representing a dialed digit. The message specifies the dialed
digits to be generated by the MSC, the length of each digit, and the interval between digits.
The status message contains information records from the mobile concerning: mobile
identification, mobile call mode, mobile terminal information, MIN information, security
status.
The origination continuation message is a continuation of the origination message that
was sent on the access channel if additional dialed digits need to be sent.
The handoff completion message is the mobile response to a handoff direction message.
The parameters response message is the mobile response to the base station retrieve
parameters message.
Uplink Reverse Traffic
Order
Authentication Challenge Response
Flash With Information
Data Burst
Pilot Strength Measurement
Power Measurement Report
Send Burst DTMF
Status
Origination Continuation
Handoff Completion
Parameters Response
Downlink Forward Traffic
Typical messages on the Forward Traffic Channel are listed.
Typical order messages are on the forward traffic channel are: Base Station Challenge
Confirmation, Message Encryption Mode, Parameter Update, Audit, Maintenance, Base
Station Acknowledgment, Pilot Measurement Request, Lock Until Power-Cycled, Main-
tenance Required, Service Option Request, Service Option Response, Release, Long Code
Transition Request (public and private), continuous DTMF Tone (start and stop), Status
Request, Service Option Control, Local Control.
The authentication challenge message allows the base station to validate the mobile's
identity (see Page).
The alert with information message contains information records to allow the network to
supply display information to be displayed by the mobile, to identify the called party's
number, to identify the calling party's number, and to convey information to the mobile by
means of tones or other alerting signals.
The data burst message is a data message sent by the base station to the mobile.
The handoff direction message provides the mobile with information to begin the handoff
process.
The analog handoff direction message tells the mobile to switch to the analog mode and
begin the handoff process.
The in-traffic system parameters message updates some of the parameters set by the sys-
tem parameters message in the page channel.
The neighbor list update message updates the neighbor base station parameters set by the
neighbor list message on the page channel.
The send burst DTMF message requests the mobile to generate DTMF tones, two tones,
one low and one high frequency, to represent a dialed digit sent from the PSTN to the
mobile.
The power control parameters message tells the mobile how long the period is, or what
threshold is to be used, in measuring frame error statistics that will be sent in the mobile's
power measurement report message.
The retrieve parameters message requests the mobile to report on any of the retrievable
and settable parameters (J-STD-008 Appendix E).
The set parameters message informs the mobile to adjust any of the retrievable and setta-
ble parameters (J-STD-008 Appendix E).
The SSD update message is a request by the base station for the mobile to update the
shared secret data.
The flash with information message contains information records to allow the network to
supply display information to be displayed by the mobile, to identify the responding
party's number (the connected number) to convey information to the mobile by means of
tones or other alerting signals, and to indicate the number of messages waiting.
The mobile registered message informs the mobile it is registered and supplies the neces-
sary cellular system parameters.
Downlink Forward Traffic
Order
Authentication Challenge
Alert With Information
Data Burst
Handoff Direction
Analog Handoff Direction
In-Traffic System Parameters
Neighbor List Update
Send Burst DTMF
Power Control Parameters
Retrieve Parameters
Set Parameters
SSD Update
Flash with Information
Mobile Registered
TRAFFIC CHANNEL
At Base Station
While the mobile and base station are in the conversation substate, the base station moni-
tors the uplink traffic frames. When too many bad frames are received, the base station
starts the traffic channel supervision timer, and the call is determined to be lost when
this timer expires. The timer value is set by the tcsupervsn translation parameter. The
timer is reset when enough good frames are received. This function is similar to the AMPS
Fade Timer specified by the fadetm_a translation parameter on the ceqface form for ana-
log AMPS calls. The recommended value for this CDMA timer is 8 seconds, but is a
translatable parameter that can range from 5 to 20 seconds.
The logic can be summarized.
Start a supervision timer after too many bad frames.
Reset supervision timer after enough good frames.
Declare a lost call if the supervision timer exceeds the tcsupervsn translation parameter.
TRAFFIC CHANNEL
At Base Station
From Traffic Channel
Confirmation Substate
No Yes
Good Traffic
Frame Received
Reset
Too Many
Bad Frames
Traffic Channel
Start
No
Yes
from MS?
Received?
Traffic Channel
Supervision Timer
Good Traffic
Frames Received
from MS?
Is
Timer >
tcsupervsn?
Supervision Timer
Call Ended
Release Resources
Normal Call End:
To System
Lost Call:
To System
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Enough
Naturally?
TRAFFIC CHANNEL
tcsupervsn
tion parameters.
Traffic Channel Supervision
Interval (sec)
(tcsupervsn)
Form: cell2, ecp
indicates the number of seconds that must elapse from the
time a mobile turns off its transmitter to the time that the
cell detects a loss of traffic continuity.
Note: This timer is the CDMA equivalent of the AMPS/
TDMA fade timer.
Range: 5 20
TRAFFIC CHANNEL
tcsupervsn

Daylight Savings Time in Effect ....................................................................................... +281) ___
Local Time Offset (hr) ...................................................................................................... +282) ___
- RCC.......................................................................................................................... +283) ___
- CCC.......................................................................................................................... +284) ___
CRC Overload Control (%) .............................................................................................. +285) ___
Traffic CEs Reserved for Handoff (%) ............................................................................. +286) ___
Maximum Traffic CEs Allowed for SMS (%) .................................................................... +287) ___
Traffic Channel Supervision Interval (sec) .................................................................. +289) ___
Request for Pilot Measurements Interval (sec)................................................................ +290) ___
Total CDMA Channel Elements OOS Minor Limit (%)..................................................... +291) ___
Total CDMA Channel Elements OOS Major Limit (%)..................................................... +292) ___
Overhead Channel Optimization (after RTDIAG)............................................................. +293) ___
Clustering Overhead Channels........................................................................................ +294) ___
Frequency of Routine Overhead Channel Optimization .................................................. +295) ___
NCI Frame Gap................................................................................................................ 296) ___
AUTOPLEX
System Cell ____
DROPPED CALL
CDMAPAFCARRSC
17: CP Fail CDMA Dropped Calls
This count is the incremental number of CDMA dropped calls that are not included in
CDMA Lost Calls. This count is not pegged if CDMA Lost Calls is pegged for the associ-
ated event. This count is pegged only if the call is stable on the radio channel and the
packet pipe connection has been established and if the call is torn down for reasons not
relating to the initiation of a release either from the mobile or from the network.
The count will be pegged after the traffic channel confirmation message has been sent
from the cell site to the CDN. This count will not be pegged if the call is in the Release
State (i.e., a normal release indication has been received at the cell site from the mobile or
from the network). This count will not be pegged for the following Call Types:
MOST
CRTU
Mobile Loopback
SMS.
18: CDMA Lost Call
This event occurs when call processing declares a loss of traffic continuity. If a soft hand-
off is configured, then a lost call is pegged by the primary only if both the primary cell site
and the secondary cell site cannot maintain the traffic channel with the mobile.
This count is pegged when the cell detects a loss of continuity in traffic going from the
mobile to the cell site. This could be the result of mobile equipment problems or most
likely RF coverage limitations.
ECPPAFCDMA
7: Call Dropped During Talk State Due to DCS Error
The number of calls dropped due to an error reported by the DCS.
DROPPED CALL
CDMAPAFCARRSC
17: CP Fail CDMA Dropped Calls
18: CDMA Lost Call
ECPPAFCDMA
7: Call Dropped During Talk State Due to DCS Error
CONVERSATION SUBSTATE DIFFERENCES
Introduction
The differences introduced to the Conversation Substate depend on the Radio Configura-
tion (RC). RC 1 and 2 are operating as IS-95B Rate Sets 1 and 2, respectively. RC 3, 4,
and 5 are 3G-1X-specific configurations and add new functionality to the Conversation
Substate.
Differences
For Radio Configurations greater than 3, the following changes are notable:
3G will support messages of length 20 ms as well as 5 ms. However, in the first phase
of 3G-1X, only 20 ms messages are supported.
A reverse pilot, R-PICH, will facilitate coherent modulation on the reverse link. The re-
verse pilot also transmits power control information for the Forward Link Power Control
(FPC).
Reverse pilot gating is not supported.
If a data call is made, the system may set up a Supplemental Channel, F/R-SCH, to trans-
mit bursts of High Speed Packet Data (HSPD).
CONVERSATION SUBSTATE DIFFERENCES
R-PICH is used for RC3 or greater
Message of length 20ms or 5ms
In the first phase of 3G-1X only 20 ms messages are
supported
SCH may be assigned
3G-1X IMPACTED
3G-1X IMPACTED
CDMA-PAF-CARR
6: 2G Total Traffic Channel Element Usage
8: 2G Traffic Channel Element Usage
(Secondary Cell)
85: 3G Total Fundamental Channel Element Usage
86: 3G Total Fundamental Channel Element Usage-
2nd cell
87: 3G Normal Release of 3G Data Fundamental
Channel Resources
88: 3G Priority Release of 3G Data Fundamental
Channel Resources
101: Normal release of 3G data Forward SCH
Resources count
102: Normal release of 3G data Reverse SCH
Resources count
103: Priority release of 3G data Forward SCH
Resources count
104: Priority release of 3G data Reverse SCH
Resources count
105: 3G Data Forward SCH dropped calls - CP fail
count
106: 3G Data Reverse SCH dropped calls - CP fail
count
Summary
Summary
While on a traffic channel, messages are being sent over
the traffic channel as associated signaling.
3G-1X introduces a reverse link pilot for coherent
modulation and power control information.
Knowledge Check
Question 1.
Through what channel is the base station communicating with the mobile station when in
the conversation Substate?
A. Forward Pilot Channel
B. Page Channel
C. Sync Channel
D. Traffic Channel
S
Answer: d
Question 2.
What are the benefits of the Reverse Pilot Channel (R-PICH)?
S
Answer: The R-PICH provides the ability to do cohert modulation at the base
station receiver. Coherent modulation lowers the required Eb/N0 of the traffic
channel, effectively increasing capacity. The R-PICH is also used to transmit
power control commands to the base station during Forward Link Power
Control.
Knowledge Check
Section 8
Single Carrier Handoff Section 8
Single Carrier Handoff CL8303 v1.0
LOCATION AND HANDOFF ALGORITHMS
When a mobile is on a traffic channel the mobile has to perform handoffs, transfer the con-
trol to other base stations. The handoff process can be divided into two steps, a trigger and
a transition.
The location algorithm will trigger the handoff for a single carrier frequency system or a
intra-frequency handoff. In IS-95 CDMA systems, the handoff is triggered based on what
the mobile is reporting in the Pilot Strength Measurement Message (PSMM).
For intra-frequency handoff scenarios there are two types of transitions, soft and softer
handoff. Inter-frequency handoff triggers and transitions will be discussed in Multiple
Carrier Frequency System Operations.
CL8303 v1.0 Single Carrier Handoff
LOCATION AND HANDOFF ALGORITHMS
The handoff process consists of two steps:
Trigger
Transition.
The location algorithm triggers the handoff based on what
the mobile reports in the PSMM.
There are two handoff transition scenarios for intra-
frequency handoffs:
Soft handoff
Softer handoff.
CDMA PILOT SETS
In the following, the term pilot refers to a Pilot Channel, identified by a pilot sequence off-
set index and a frequency assignment. A pilot is associated with the Forward Traffic
Channels in the same Forward CDMA Channel. The identification of distinct pilot signals
by the mobile relies on the fact that each pilot within range is assigned a different time off-
set of the short PN sequences.
Handoffs using the same frequency assignment are initiated by the mobile. The mobile
continually scans for pilots to detect the presence of CDMA Channels, measures the signal
strength, and notifies the base station when there is a new potential serving base station.
The base station uses this information to determine the best base station(s) to serve this
call and initiates a handoff, when necessary.
Pilot Sets for Mobile:
All detected pilots are assigned to one of four groups by the mobile:
Active Set: The pilots associated with the Forward Traffic Channels currently used by
the mobile. The mobile searches for these pilots using a search window specified by the
srchwina translation parameter and measures the strength of any pilot found within the
search window. The mobile tracks a maximum of six active pilots specified by the base
station. Note that the signal processing performed by the mobile does optimal combin-
ing of whatever signals are actually received, and is free to use its three fingers however
it considers best.
Candidate Set: The pilots that are not currently in the Active Set, but have sufficient sig-
nal strength to indicate that the associated Forward Traffic Channels could be demod-
ulated successfully. These are the candidates for soft or softer handoffs. Candidates are
moved into this set from one of the other sets based on signal strength. The mobile Can-
didate Set is limited to five pilots (IS-95A mobile, ten for IS-95B mobile).
Neighbor Set: The pilots that are not in the Active or Candidate Set but are pilots from
cells that may become eligible for handoff (e.g., sites in geographic proximity). The
mobile searches for these pilots using a search window specified by the srchwinn
translation parameter and measures the strength of any pilot found within the search
window. The neighbor set contains a maximum of 20 neighbor pilots. The neighbor set
may also contain pilots that were removed from the Candidate Set when the Candidate
Set overflowed or a candidate signal strength was below the t_drop threshold.
Note: The mobile neighbor set may not be the same as the base station neighbor list.
Remaining Set: The set of all possible assigned pilots in the current system on the
CDMA frequency assignment, excluding the pilots defined in the above sets. The mo-
bile searches for these pilots using a search window specified by the srchwinr transla-
tion parameter and measures the strength of any pilot found within the search window.
Note: The mobile only scans for assigned pilot indices (specified by pilotinc), not all 512
possible pilot indices.
Highlight on viewgraph mobile Neighbor Set does not equal Base Station
Neighbor List.
CDMA PILOT SETS

PILOT SETS FOR MOBILE:
Active Set, Maximum of 6 entries
Candidate Set, Maximum of 5 entries
(10 IS-95B)
Neighbor Set, Maximum of 20 entries (40 IS-2000)
Remaining Set
Base Station A
PILOT
A
Base Station B
PILOT
B
NOTE:
Prior to R13 the neighbor set in idle mode was limited to 12 entries.
PILOT THRESHOLD EXAMPLE
For this example, assume the call is being served by base station A and base station B is a
neighbor. The mobile travels from base station A toward base station B and then returns to
base station A. The sequence shows the pilot B strength and the set assigned by the mobile
as the mobile enters and leaves the soft handoff region between base station A and B.
1. Pilot B strength exceeds t_add, mobile sends a Pilot Strength Message to base sta-
tion and moves pilot to Candidate Set.
2. System decides to put mobile in soft handoff with base station A and B and sends
Handoff Direction Message to mobile.
3. mobile moves pilot to the Active Set and sends a Handoff Completion Message
to base station A.
4. Pilot strength falls below t_drop; mobile starts the handoff drop timer.
5. Handoff drop timer exceeds t_tdrop; mobile sends a Pilot Strength Measurement
Message to base station A.
6. System decides to end soft handoff with base station B and sends a Handoff Direc-
tion Message to mobile.
7. Mobile moves pilot B from the Active Set to the neighbor set and sends a Handoff
Completion Message to base station A.
The mobile maintains a handoff drop timer for each pilot in the Active Set and Candidate
Set. The mobile starts the timer whenever the strength of a pilot falls below the threshold
t_drop. The mobile will reset and disable the timer if the pilot exceeds the t_drop thresh-
old.
When the mobile is first assigned a Forward Traffic Channel, the mobile initializes the
Candidate Set with no pilots. The mobile adjusts the Candidate Set whenever any of the
following events occur:
When the mobile detects the strength of a Neighbor or Remaining Set pilot exceeds the
t_add threshold, the mobile adds the pilot to the Candidate Set.
When the mobile receives a Handoff Direction Message that does not list a pilot in the
Active Set, and the handoff timer has not expired, the mobile will move the pilot to the
Candidate Set.
When the mobile receives a Handoff Direction Message that lists a pilot in the Candi-
date Set, the mobile moves the pilot to the Active Set.
When the handoff drop timer exceeds t_tdrop for a pilot in the Candidate Set, the mo-
bile deletes the pilot.
When the mobile attempts to add a pilot to a full Candidate Set, the mobile deletes the
pilot with the drop timer closest to expiration. If none of the candidate pilots have an
active drop timer (indicating all pilots exceed the t_drop threshold), the pilot with the
lowest signal strength is deleted and the new candidate pilot is added.
PILOT THRESHOLD EXAMPLE

Neighbor
Set
Candidate
Set
Active
Set
Neighbor
Set
Time
(7) (6) (5) (4) (3) (2) (1)
Pilot B in
which set?
t_drop
t_add
Mobile Sends Pilot
Strength Measurement
Message to Base Station
Base Station Sends
Handoff Direction
Message to Mobile
Mobile Sends
Handoff
Completion
Message to
Base Station Sends
Handoff Direction
Message to Mobile
Pilot B
Strength
t_tdrop
t_drop = Pilot Drop Threshold
t_add = Pilot Detection Threshold
t_tdrop = Drop Timer Value
E
c
/I
0
[dB]
Base Station
Mobile Sends
Handoff
Completion
Message to
Base Station
Mobile Sends Pilot
Strength Measurement
Message to Base Station
NOTE:
Draw illustration of mobile moving
from being close to Base Station A,
to being between Base Stations A and B,
to being close to Base Station A.
PILOT TRANSITION SUMMARY
Shown are transitions of pilots between the four pilot sets. Controlling the transitions are
four translations, t_add, t_comp, t_drop, and t_tdrop.
T_add and T_comp
T_add is a pilot detection threshold. If a pilot is in the Neighbor or Remaining Set, and is
detected above T_add, it is moved to the Candidate set. The mobile performs this move
autonomously, without intervention from the cell. Movements of pilots into the Active Set
are also influenced by T_add, but the exact conditions required for the movement depend
on the state of the Active Set. Following is a set of general rules used by the base station
governing this movement. However, it may be modified with new features (e.g., Base Sta-
tion Assisted Handoff).
If the Active Set is not full, a pilot will gain entry simply by exceeding T_add.
If the Active Set is full, a pilot will gain entry if it meets either of these criteria.
1. The candidate pilots strength exceeds the two weakest Active Set pilots strengths
by at least T_comp, or
2. The candidate pilots strength exceeds the weakest Active Set pilots strengths by
at least T_comp, and is within 5 dB of the average strength of the two strongest Ac-
tive Set pilots.
A strong pilot that is not in the Active Set is a strong interferer.
T_drop and T_tdrop
T_drop and T_tdrop together control the removal of a pilot from the Active Set. The basic
mechanism is as follows. If a pilots E
c
/I
o
is below T_drop for T_tdrop seconds, then
remove it from the Active Set. Further, T_tdrop also controls the demotion of a pilot out of
the Candidate set. If a pilot is in the Candidate set when its T_tdrop timer expires, it will
be demoted to the Neighbor Set.
Although these parameters are related, their purposes are slightly different. T_drop pro-
vides general control over how reluctant the Active Set is to release pilots. T_tdrop on the
other hand, is primarily a mechanism to combat the premature dropping of pilots in a fad-
ing environment.
With the current implementation, when the call is in soft/softer handoff, the handoff
parameters of the primary pilot are being used. Since there is no easy way to identify the
primary sector for all instances, it is recommended that the values of handoff parameters
(i.e., T_add, T_drop, T_comp, and T_tdrop) be set uniformly throughout the entire CDMA
system.
PILOT TRANSITION SUMMARY
Active Set not full and
pilot exceeds t_add
or
Active Set full but
swap criteria met
Pilot replaced
by candidate
t_tdrop
expires
Pilot below
t_drop
for t_tdrop
seconds
Pilot
exceeds
t_add
Candidate
Set
Remaining
Set
Neighbor
Set
Active
Set
Pilot
exceeds
t_add
Pilot
included on
the neighbor
list
Pilot not
included on
the neighbor
list
SIX WAY SOFT HANDOFF
Before six way soft handoff, up to three pilots allowed in Active Set only. If a fourth pilot
was found, either soft swap with a weaker pilot or drop-then-add. Pilots swaps try to main-
tain best Active Set at all times. Soft swap is fast, but still bound by IS-95 messaging
(about.425 seconds to swap). With six way soft handoff the maximum Active Set size is
now up to six and is settable by sector. This allows for use in specific local coverage areas.
The maximum size now may differ across clusters.
More soft handoff legs makes coverage more robust in multipilot areas and allows the
mobile more pilots to choose from. This lets the mobile choose best pilots rather than the
cell, but the cell retains high level control of Active Set.
Six way can be better for interfrequency HO improvements and provide better immunity
to around-the-corner problems (rapid changes to the RF environment). Faster, more agile
finger switching to continuously track best pilots and moves the rake fingers to better sig-
nals faster than evaluating a new handoff and messaging a new Active Set.
There might be a possible increased usage of channel elements but should be small overall
percentage. Three, four, five, and six way will partition the current 15% time proportion
for current three way soft handoff. There is also possible increased forward power from
extra leg but that leg may be the best RF link, causing DGU reduction on each leg.
A drawback with six way soft handoff may be that the mobile spends more time and
resources looking for active pilots. The mobile may not see a new pilot as quickly as
desired. A pilot not in the Active Set is an interferer.
SIX WAY SOFT HANDOFF
Six way soft handoff allows for up to six pilots in the
Active Set.
Six way soft handoff is a tool for specific problems:
Helps the uplink
Costs resources on the downlink
Consider six way soft handoff an additional tool in
the toolbox
Use minimum setting to cover needed pilots may
only need four rather than six pilots.
HANDOFF
maxlegs
tion parameters.
Maximum Number of Active Set
Pilots
(maxlegs)
Form: ceqface, ecp
specifies the Maximum Number of Active Set Pilots.
Range: 3 6
S
maxlegs is set to optimize the probability of handoff success. maxlegs should
be selected to equal the number of pilots with adequate quality that can be
received in the handoff region.
HANDOFF
maxlegs

Redirection Destination...................................................................................................... +130) ___
Redirection Band ............................................................................................................... +131) ___
[1] ____ [2] ____ [3] ____
CDMA-to-CDMA Handdown Threshold ................................................................................. +139) ___
CDMA-to-Analog Handdown Threshold................................................................................. +140) ___
CDMA-to-CDMA Handoff Threshold...................................................................................... +141) ___
CDMA-to-Analog Handoff Threshold ..................................................................................... +142) ___
Maximum Number of Active Set Pilots .............................................................................. +143) ___
Border Sector Loss Threshold for Inter-Frequency Handoff .................................................. +144) ___
Border Sector Loss Threshold for CDMA-to-Analog Handoff ................................................ +145) ___
Border Pilot Versus Interior Pilot Threshold........................................................................... +146) ___
Request for Pilot Measurement Interval (sec)........................................................................ +147) ___
Carrier Assignment Algorithm................................................................................................ +148) ___
RF Loading Weight Factor ..................................................................................................... +149) ___
AUTOPLEX
THRESHOLD
t_add, t_drop, t_comp, t_tdrop
tion parameters.
Pilot Detection Threshold (dB)
(t_add)
Form: ceqface
used by the mobile to trigger the sending of the pilot
strength measurement message thereby initiating the
handoff process.
Range: -31.5 dB 0 dB in .5 dB increments
Pilot Drop Threshold (dB)
(t_drop)
Form: ceqface
used by the mobile to start a handoff drop timer for pilots
in the Active Set and Candidate Set.
Active Set: pilots associated with the forward traffic
channels assigned to the mobile. Candidate Set: pilots
not currently in the Active Set but have been received by
the mobile with sufficient strength to indicate that the
associated forward traffic channels could be successfully
demodulated.
Active Set vs. Candidate Set
Comparison Thresh (dB)
(t_comp)
Form: ceqface
when the strength of a pilot in the Candidate Set exceeds
that of a pilot in the Active Set by the margin (threshold)
defined in this parameter, the mobiles transmit a pilot
strength measurement message.
Range: 0.0 dB 7.5 dB in .5 dB increments
Drop Timer
(t_tdrop)
Form: ceqface
specifies the timer value after which an action is taken by
mobiles for a pilot
1) that is a member of the Active Set or Candidate Set,
and
2) whose strength has exceeded the value of the Pilot
Drop Threshold (dB) field.
Range: 0 15
THRESHOLD
t_add, t_drop, t_comp, t_tdrop
Handoff Drop Timer Values
t_tdrop
Timer
[seconds] t_tdrop
Timer
[seconds]
0 < 0.1 8 27
1 1 9 39
2 2 10 55
3 4 11 79
4 6 12 112
5 9 13 159
6 13 14 5
7 19 15 319

Transmit Antenna Propagation Delay (microseconds)........................................................ 92) ___
Receive Antenna Propagation Delay (microseconds)......................................................... 93) ___
Pilot Detection Threshold (dB) ........................................................................................ 95) ___
Pilot Drop Threshold (dB) ................................................................................................ 96) ___
Active Set vs Candidate Set Comparison Thresh (dB).................................................. 97) ___
Drop Timer ......................................................................................................................... 99) ___
Search Window Size: Active Set and Candidate Set ....................................................... 100) ___
Neighbor Set ................................................................................ 101) ___
Remaining Set ............................................................................. 102) ___
Cell (microseconds) ..................................................................... 103) ___
Maximum Differential Transmit Delay (microseconds)........................................................ 105) ___

AUTOPLEX
LOCATION TRIGGER
CDMAPAF {8K|13K|EVRC}
1: CDMA Mobile Triggers
This measurement is pegged only for the Primary Sector at the Primary Cell Site. It is
incremented if the cell receives an autonomous or non-autonomous
Pilot_Strength_Measurement message from the mobile that is a Trigger, i.e., a member is
added to or removed from the Active Set. However, this count will not include the CDMA
Periodic Cell-Requested Triggers.
The mobile will autonomously send a pilot strength measurement (PSM) when:
The strength of a Neighbor set or Remaining set pilot is found to be above the t_add
threshold.
The strength of a Candidate Set pilot exceeds the strength of an Active Set pilot by
t_comp threshold.
The strength of an Active Set pilot has been below the t_drop threshold for time
t_tdrop.
PSM request after handoff reject.
LOCATION TRIGGER
PILOT THRESHOLD CONSIDERATIONS
The t_add threshold influences several aspects of system operation and must be chosen
carefully to optimize operation. First, the threshold determines the size of the soft/softer
handoff regions. Large regions will result in better voice quality, since the mobile unit is
in the conversation state with several base stations; but this will require additional base
station hardware, since more calls will be served by several base stations. On the other
hand, a mobile in soft handoff can transmit at lower power, reduce interference to others,
and increase system capacity. The following presents some of the tradeoffs to be consid-
ered when choosing the threshold.
PILOT THRESHOLD CONSIDERATIONS
Soft/Softer Handoff Region Size
Mobile Populations in Handoff
Cell Capacity
Cell Coverage
BASE STATION COVERAGE
Soft Handoff Regions
Coverage contours for a simple cell configuration are shown. All base stations are omnidi-
rectional and located on a hexagonal pattern with 8-mile radius. Also, a flat terrain with a
nominal 40 dB/decade increase in path loss is assumed. These assumptions lead to the
symmetry in the coverage for each cell. The contour surrounding each base station is the
connected set of locations where the E
c
/I
0
relative to the base station is equal to the value
of t_add:
Where:
E
c
= chip energy received from the serving sector
I
0
= spectral density of total received interference.
Values of E
c
/I
0
within the contour will be greater than t_add; values outside the contour
will be less. Accordingly, a station crossing the boundary into the cell will add that base
stations pilot to its Active Set. A station crossing the boundary out of the cell will not nec-
essarily drop the pilot, as this function depends on the values of t_drop and t_tdrop. Under
the assumptions, setting t_add equal to -12 dB results in adjacent coverage areas with little
overlap. The ballooning out of the outer tier boundaries is due to the complete absence
of outer interference sources. In a large system with many cells, the coverage area for
inner cells is similar to the central cell.
0 -40 -30 -20 -10 10 20 30 40
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
Cell Coverage, t_add = - 12 dB
y

c
o
o
r
d
i
n
a
t
e

i
n

m
i
l
e
s
x coordinate in miles
Changing t_add controls the fraction of mobiles in a soft or softer handoff state. With the
above assumptions, handoff populations for thresholds above t_add = -11 dB are negligi-
ble. By lowering the threshold, more mobiles will go into 2-cell soft handoff; and as the
threshold is lowered further, more of these mobiles will go into 3-cell soft handoff.
0 -40 -30 -20 -10 10 20 30 40
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
Cell Coverage, t_add = - 15 dB
y

c
o
o
r
d
i
n
a
t
e

i
n

m
i
l
e
s
x coordinate in miles
2 Cell Soft Handoff Region
3 Cell Soft Handoff Region
HANDOFF POPULATIONS
Sectorized Base Station
Shown are the curves for the soft/softer handoff populations for sectorized base stations.
In contrast to the previous curves, the fraction of mobiles in softer handoff remains rela-
tively constant over the t_add range. As the threshold is lowered, mobiles enter the softer
handoff state with an adjacent sector. At the same time, mobiles already in this state enter
into soft handoff with a neighboring base station. The curve is flat because the rate of
mobiles entering into softer handoff roughly balances the rate at which they leave softer
handoff and enter soft handoff with a neighboring base station sector.
HANDOFF POPULATIONS
Sectorized Base Station
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
- -21 -20 -19 -18 -17 -16 -15 -14 -13 -12 -11
Total Soft/Softer
Total Soft
2-Cell Soft
3-Cell Soft
Softer
t_add [dB]
F
r
a
c
t
i
o
n

C
a
l
l
s

i
n

S
o
f
t
/
S
o
f
t
e
r

H
a
n
d
o
f
f
NEIGHBOR LIST
nlselnum, nlselmech
tion parameters.
Maximum Neighbor List Number
Sent to Mobile
(nlselnum)
Form: ceqface, ecp
limits the number of neighbors sent to the mobile to
reduce the detection time.
Range: 6 20
Neighbor List Selection Mechanism
(nlselmech)
(Form: ceqface, ecp
specifies the mechanism for selecting which active
neighbor lists should be combined.
Range: d = distance and s = strength
S
nlselnum can be set to optimize the time required to search for neighbors.
nlselnum should be selected to equal the number of pilots with adequate
quality that can be received in a sector.
NEIGHBOR LIST
nlselnum, nlselmech

Directed Handdown Carrier................................................................................................ 110) ___
Directed Handoff Preferred Indicator ................................................................................. 111) ___
Soft Swap Compatibility ..................................................................................................... +112) ___
Maximum Neighbor List Number Sent to Mobile .......................................................... +113) ___
Neighbor List Selection Mechanism.............................................................................. +114) ___
Send Global Service Redirection Message........................................................................ +115) ___
CDMA Registration Zone ID............................................................................................... +116) ___
CRTU Radio Switch Panel Transmit Port .......................................................................... 117) ___
CRTU Radio Switch Panel Receive Port ........................................................................... 118) ___
AUTOPLEX
OVERVIEW OF
HANDOFF PROCEDURES
Base Station
Handoff candidate selection starts when the base station receives a mobile to base station
pilot strength measurement message. The base station then processes the active and candi-
date pilot measurements to determine if a handoff is appropriate (pilot strength measure-
ment assessment procedure). The base station then determines the type of handoff to
process (handoff evaluation procedure). Finally, the base station or base stations involved
do the appropriate sequences for the selected handoff type. If a handoff is not appropriate
or resources are not available for a handoff, the base station waits for the mobile to send
another pilot measurement.
Soft Handoff
A soft handoff occurs when two or more base stations are communicating with a mobile at
the same time. (Soft handoff is also used at the same base station when the mobile is in
soft handoff with three sectors; two sectors are served by one channel element in softer
handoff, and the third sector is served by a second channel element.)
Softer Handoff
A softer handoff occurs when a single channel element communicates with a mobile
through two sectors of the same base station at the same time. (Softer handoff is a special
type of Soft handoff, and is not specified in the air interface standards.)
Inter-MSC Handoff
Handoffs can occur between base stations controlled by interconnected MSCs. When an
IS-41 or similar connection is available, CDMA hard handoffs can be performed. Soft and
semi-soft handoffs are used when MSCs share high speed packet bus connections. When
this occurs, the speech handling equipment in the originating MSC remains dedicated for
the duration of the call, even if the mobile moves outside the respective coverage area.
OVERVIEW OF
HANDOFF PROCEDURES
Base Station
Wait for mobile
to report pilot
E
c
/I
0
strength
measurements
Pilot strength
measurement
assessment
Any
Handoff
candidates?
Softer
Handoff
Soft
Handoff
Semisoft
Handoff
CDMA Hard
Handoff
Yes
No
AMPS Hard
Handoff
procedure
Handoff evaluation
SOFT HANDOFF
Soft Handoff Advantages
Less switch processing
Little or no speech path disruption
No echo canceller relearning
No speech coder resynchronization
Best speech quality on a per frame basis while in soft handoff
Soft Handoff Definitions
Primary base station: During a soft handoff, the base station that has direct control of call
processing. Only the Primary base station can initiate forward control messages, and there
is exactly one Primary base station during a soft handoff.
Secondary base station: During a soft handoff, the base station which does not have direct
control of call processing. There may be one or more Secondary base stations assigned to
a CDMA call.
S
NOTE:
This is mobile assisted handoff.
NOTE:
Power control information is supplied by both the primary and secondary
base stations. The mobile will increase power only when all base stations
command an increase. The mobile will decrease power when any base station
commands a power decrease.
SOFT HANDOFF
MSC
Base Station B
Base Station A
SOFTER HANDOFF
Shown is a base station in softer handoff with a mobile.
Softer Handoff (intrabase station) is handled within the base station by one channel ele-
ment (CE). The softer handoff is only a handoff between a base stations sectors, in this
case and sectors. There is a single stream of traffic frames between the base station
and MSC, and thus the 5ESS
2000 switch DCS is not involved.

A softer handoff occurs when the mobile moves between cell sectors. The base station
sends the mobile a handoff direction message so the mobile establishes communication
with both base station sectors. The mobile is in a soft handoff mode, since it is communi-
cating on two CDMA traffic channels in the same 1.23 MHz band. The base station uses
the CEs rake receiver to combine the traffic frames from both sectors into a single traffic
frame that is sent to the MSC. The MSC treats this traffic frame as if it were the only
frame received by the base station CE. The base station CE also generates two forward
traffic channel frames, one with the codes assigned to a traffic channel on the sector, and
a second with the codes assigned to a traffic channel on the sector.
The table below shows the handoff operational state of the MSC, base station, and mobile
during a softer handoff.
CDMA Network Entity Handoff Operational State
MSC No impact
(operates as if a single CDMA traffic channel)
Base Station Intra-base station with different sectors
base station determines when to initiate softer
handoff and save resources in the MSC
Mobile Soft Handoff
S
NOTE:
Softer handoff is a function of the base station, and is not specified in
IS-95.
SOFTER HANDOFF
MSC is not handoff
Base Station is in softer handoff
Mobile is in soft handoff
MSC
Speech Handler
Base Station
Traffic
Frames
Channel Element
INTER-MSC SOFT HANDOFF
During an inter-MSC soft handoff, a continuous flow of speech packets is maintained
between the frame selector/speech handler at the originating MSC and the mobile. As the
mobile carries the call into soft handoff across the MSC boundary, a high speed packet bus
(ATM) transports the speech packets between the MSCs, enabling the frame selector to
continue choosing the best packets available. The mobile does soft handoffs between the
base stations (make-before-break connection). No change of CDMA carrier frequency is
involved and there is little or no speech path disruption.
INTER-MSC SOFT HANDOFF
Mobile is in soft handoff
BSs are in soft handoff
MSCs are in inter-MSC soft handoff
No F
1
- F
2
handoff
Frequency 1
PSTN
Frequency 1
MSC 2
ATM
Frame Selector
Speech Handler
MSC 1
Base
Station 2
Base
Station 1
Inter-MSC
Data Link
TRAFFIC CHANNEL
cehandoff
tion parameters.
Traffic CEs Reserved for Handoff (%)
(cehandoff)
Form: cell2, ecp
specifies the percentage of active CDMA traffic CEs
that will be reserved by the cell for handoff only (not for
call setup). These reserved CEs can be used for all
handoff types that require an additional CE resource.
The reserved applies to both soft and semisoft hand-
offs.
The value specified in this field (cehandoff) is used to
compute a threshold according to the following for-
mula: threshold = [(100 - cehandoff)
total_traffic_CEs] 100. The term total_traffic_CEs is
the number of CEs handling traffic after subtracting
CEs used for special functions (for example, pilot,
etc.).
The threshold is rounded down to a whole number.
Note: Usage of the threshold is as follows. When a
new call needs a CE, if the number of traffic CEs
already in use for any purpose (handoff or not)
exceeds the threshold, then no CE is available for the
new call. (When a CE is needed for handoff, the previ-
ous rule does not apply.) As calls clear or handoffs
complete, the number of CEs in use will drop below
the threshold, which allows new calls to be made
again.
Range: 0 30
S
NOTE:
These cannot be used for call setup. All CEs can be used for handoff.
NOTE:
The worst case, nonzero calculation for the 10 CE ECU is 3 CEs.
TRAFFIC CHANNEL
cehandoff

Daylight Savings Time in Effect........................................................................................ +281) ___
Local Time Offset (hr)....................................................................................................... +282) ___
- RCC.......................................................................................................................... +283) ___
- CCC.......................................................................................................................... +284) ___
CRC Overload Control (%)............................................................................................... +285) ___
Traffic CEs Reserved for Handoff (%) .......................................................................... +286) ___
Maximum Traffic CEs Allowed for SMS (%)..................................................................... +287) ___
Traffic Channel Supervision Interval (sec) ....................................................................... +289) ___
Request for Pilot Measurements Interval (sec) ................................................................ +290) ___
Total CDMA Channel Elements OOS Minor Limit (%) ..................................................... +291) ___
Total CDMA Channel Elements OOS Major Limit (%) ..................................................... +292) ___
Overhead Channel Optimization (after RTDIAG) ............................................................. +293) ___
Clustering Overhead Channels ........................................................................................ +294) ___
Frequency of Routine Overhead Channel Optimization................................................... +295) ___
NCI Frame Gap................................................................................................................ 296) ___
AUTOPLEX
System Cell ____
SOFT/SOFTER HANDOFF
CDMAPAFCARRVC
2: Mobile Soft and Softer Handoff Request
Similar to Softer Handoff Request but for Soft Handoff.
Soft handoff may be derived by subtracting Softer Handoff Request from this count.
3: Mobile Soft and Softer Handoff Order
Similar to Softer Handoff Order but for Soft Handoff.
Soft handoff may be derived by subtracting Softer Handoff Order from this count.
4: Mobile Soft and Softer Handoff Complete at Requesting Cell Site
Similar to Softer Handoff Complete at Requesting Cell Site but for Soft Handoff.
Soft handoff may be derived by subtracting Softer Handoff Complete at requesting sector
from this count.
5: Mobile Soft and Softer Handoff Complete at Target Cell Site
Similar to Softer Handoff Complete at Target Cell Site but for Soft Handoff.
Soft handoff may be derived by subtracting Softer Handoff Complete at target sector from
this count.
6: Mobile Softer Handoff Request
This number of times the cell sends a handoff request message to the target sector in the
cell indicating that a softer handoff is permissible.
7: Mobile Softer Handoff Order
This number of times the cell receives an intra-cell_handoff_ack message indicating that a
softer handoff command to the mobile should be initiated and that an antenna face will be
added to the call.
8: Mobile Softer Handoff Complete at Requesting Sector
The number of times the cell site receives a handoff_completion message from the mobile
after initiating a softer handoff.
9: Mobile Softer Handoff Complete at Target Sector
The number of times the target sector acquires the specified mobile after receiving an
intra-cell_handoff_request message to initiate softer handoff. This count indicates the
number of softer handoffs received and successfully served by the sector.
SOFT/SOFTER HANDOFF
CDMAPAFCARRVC
2: Mobile Soft and Softer Handoff Request
3: Mobile Soft and Softer Handoff Order
4: Mobile Soft and Softer Handoff Complete at
Requesting Cell Site
5: Mobile Soft and Softer Handoff Complete at Target
Cell Site
6: Mobile Softer Handoff Request
7: Mobile Softer Handoff Order
8: Mobile Softer Handoff Complete at Requesting
Sector
9: Mobile Softer Handoff Complete at Target Sector
SOFT/SOFTER HANDOFF
CDMAPAFCARR
11: Mobile Inter-MSC Soft Handoff Complete at Requesting Cell Site
Similar to Softer Handoff Complete at Requesting Cell Site but for Inter-MSC Soft Hand-
off.
12: Mobile Inter-MSC Soft Handoff Order
Similar to Softer Handoff Order but for Inter-MSC Soft Handoff.
13: Mobile Inter-MSC Soft Handoff Request
Similar to Softer Handoff Request but for Inter-MSC Soft Handoff.
14: Mobile Inter-MSC Soft Handoff Complete at Target Cell Site
Similar to Softer Handoff Complete at Target Cell Site but for Inter-MSC Soft Handoff.
47: Call Shutdown Handoff Complete Time-out
The number of times the cell times-out waiting for a handoff complete message from the
mobile (Cell R14.0 and later).
48: A Single Strong Pilot with Cell Having Maximum Active Legs
The number of times a single pilot is above T_add but the cell site has the maximum num-
ber of legs as specified in the translations active during the call (e.g., a call is in a three
way handoff and a fourth pilot is above T_add) (Cell R14.0 and later).
49: Two Strong Pilots with the Cell Having Maximum Active Legs
A call is in a three way handoff and a fourth and fifth pilot are above T_add.
50: Three Strong Pilots with the Cell Having Maximum Active Legs
A call is in a three way handoff and a fourth, fifth, and sixth pilot are above T_add.
51: A Single Pilot Stronger than Active Pilots while the Cell Has Maximum Active
Legs
The number of times a single pilot is above T_comp but the cell site has the maximum
number of legs as specified in the translations active during the call (e.g., a call is in a
three way handoff and the fourth pilot is above T_comp) (Cell R14.0 and later).
52: Two Pilots Stronger than Active Pilots while the Cell Has Maximum Active Legs
A call is in a three way handoff and a fourth and fifth pilot are above T_comp.
53: Three Pilots Stronger than Active Pilots while the Cell Has Maximum Active
Legs
A call is in a three way handoff and a fourth, fifth, and sixth pilot are above T_comp.
SOFT/SOFTER HANDOFF
CDMAPAFCARR
11: Mobile Inter-MSC Soft Handoff Complete at
12: Mobile Inter-MSC Soft Handoff Order
13: Mobile Inter-MSC Soft Handoff Request
14: Mobile Inter-MSC Soft Handoff Complete at Target
Cell Site
47: Call Shutdown Handoff Complete Time-out
48: A Single Strong Pilot with Cell Having Maximum
Active Legs
49: Two Strong Pilots with the Cell Having Maximum
Active Legs
50: Three Strong Pilots with the Cell Having Maximum
Active Legs
51: A Single Pilot Stronger than Active Pilots while the
Cell Has Maximum Active Legs
52: Two Pilots Stronger than Active Pilots while the
53: Three Pilots Stronger than Active Pilots while the
SOFT/SOFTER HANDOFF
CDMACARR
1: CDMA Handoff Overflow
This count is pegged at the Target Cell Site when the target cell site cannot allocate a traf-
fic channel for a CDMA handoff or the Packet Pipe is blocked.
4: CDMA Handoff Overflow due to PP Blocking
This count is pegged at the cell site whenever the target cell site cannot allocate a traffic
channel element for handoff because of packet pipe blocking. This count is pegged even if
a traffic channel element is assigned to another carrier for CDMA handoff. Only soft
handoffs are pegged in this count.
SOFT/SOFTER HANDOFF
CDMACARR
1: CDMA Handoff Overflow
4: CDMA Handoff Overflow due to PP Blocking
Unsuccessful handoffs may also be due to overload control algorithms.
CONSTRUCTION OF
MOBILE NEIGHBOR SET
The base station constructs a neighbor set for the mobile based on the active pilots, trans-
lation parameters, and information reported by the mobile. The base station forms a com-
bined neighbor list from the individual neighbor lists on the fci form for each active pilot.
First, each pilot is weighted by the number of sponsors, i.e., the number of times a pilot
appears on a different neighbor list. All pilots with the same number of sponsors are
ranked by the priority group translation parameter, cdmanbr.pgn_c, on the neighbor list on
the fci form of the stronger active pilot sponsor. Instead of the stronger (signal strength)
active pilot sponsor, the closer (distance, time delay) active pilot stronger sponsor could
be used. The signal strength or distance ranking is selected with the nlselmech translation
parameter on the ceqface form. If there is still a tie, the order of the pilots in on the fci
form is used to break the ties. The neighbor list on the fci form is automatically sorted by
priority group, cell number, and antenna face.
The ranked list is then truncated to the number specified by the nlselnum translation
parameter on the ceqface form. The truncated list is then sent to the mobile to use as the
new neighbor set. This neighbor set remains in effect until modified by the base station
based on the mobile pilot signal strength reply messages.
CONSTRUCTION OF
MOBILE NEIGHBOR SET
Pilots on each list are combined into one prioritized list
using the following criteria:
Number of fci forms in the Active Set on which the
pilot appears
Signal strength or distance of the active pilots
The priority group translation parameter,
cdmanbr.pgn_c, of that pilot in the fci form of the
stronger active pilot
Order in which the pilot appears on the fci form of the
stronger active pilot.
Truncate the list to the number specified by the Neighbor
List Selection translation parameter, nlselnum.
Send list to mobile to update Neighbor Set.
CONSTRUCTION OF
MOBILE NEIGHBOR SET
Exercise
The members of the Neighbor Set in the mobile are sent from the base station to the
mobile based on a number of considerations including the neighbors identified on the fci
form, the pilot strengths reported by the mobile and other translation parameters.
Primary Active Pilot
2
CS Face cdmanbr.pgn_c
2 0
4 1
3 0
4 0
1 1
1 1
2 0
3 1
Secondary Active Pilot
2
2 0
4 1
1 0
1 1
4 1
2 0
Secondary Active Pilot
4
2 1
2 1
4 0
1 1
1 1
4 0
Neighbor Lists on fci Forms
2, 2 and 4 are eliminated since these are in the Active Set.
Neighbor List
Sent to Mobile
CS Face Sponsors
1. 1 3
2. 4 3
3. 1 3
4. 2 2
5. 3 1
6. 3 1
7. 4 1
CONSTRUCTION OF
MOBILE NEIGHBOR SET
Exercise
1
2
3
4
Given:
The mobile is in softer handoff with 2, 2, and soft handoff with 4.
The pilot E
c
/I
0
reported for 2 = -8 dB
The pilot E
c
/I
0
The pilot E
c
/I
0
The neighbor lists and pilot signal strength measurements for all the
sectors are shown on the facing text page.
nlselmech = S for 2
nlselnum = 7 for 2
Determine:
The neighbor list that is transmitted to the mobile to use as its
Neighbor Set.
UNDECLARED NEIGHBOR LIST FEATURE
The CDMA Undeclared Neighbor List feature allows a cellular or PCS service provider to
detect the pilot channels that are not included in the cell's neighbor list, but are part of the
remaining pilot set.
The Mobile Station (MS) reports these pilots as having enough strength to be considered
valid candidates for handoffs. The base station sends the undeclared neighbor list to the
Operations and Management Platform (OMP) on the Mobile Switch Center (MSC).
With the undeclared neighbor list feature, when evaluating the neighbor list, the operator
can use the CDMA Handoff Matrix feature to determine:
how the pilots that are already on the neighbor set are used for handoffs
what pilots can be deleted from the neighbor set.
For more information about the matrix, refer to the document, CDMA Handoff Matrix,
401-612-140.
Components of Data Entries
Component Definition
Cell and Sector Identification The sector reporting the undeclared neighbor event.
UNL Event Number The per-cell event number (0-65535) that is incremented
for each event. It wraps around when the maximum num-
ber is reached. The event number is not reset when the
data is sent to the OMP.
Remaining Pilot Pseudo Noise
Phase
The Pilot Pseudo Noise phase that is reported in the pilot
strength measurement message that was sent by the
mobile to the base station.
Remaining Pilot Keep Indicator Information that is obtained from the pilot strength mea-
surement message. It is set to 0 if the handoff drop timer
corresponding to the pilot has expired.
Remaining Pilot Strength Information obtained from the pilot strength measure-
ment message.
Secondary Sector Information Information that allows the service provider to determine
more accurately where to add the reported pilot. Because
there can be up to five secondary sectors for a handoff,
five separate blocks of data exist. Each block contains:
indication if this secondary sector corresponds to the
reference PN sequence offset
secondary sector pilot PN offset index
secondary sector pilot strength.
The undeclared neighbor list allows the service provider to
detect when an incomplete neighbor list is configured and
when to add more pilots to the list.
One undeclared neighbor list exists on every cell that
contains data for the sectors.
UNDECLARED NEIGHBOR LIST ALGORITHM
When the base station receives the pilot strength measurement message from the mobile, it
checks the pilot against the existing neighbor list. If the pilot is part of the neighbor set for
that cell or sector, the base station instructs the mobile to start handoff procedures. If the
pilot is part of the remaining list (and not part of the neighbor set), no handoff is allowed.
The pilot stays in the remaining list.
UNDECLARED NEIGHBOR LIST ALGORITHM
MS measures
pilots strength
Does not go on
undeclared
neighbor list
BS instructs MS
to start handoff
procedures
BS checks pilots
against existing
neighbor list
MS sends BS
message
MS moves pilot
to Candidate Set
Strength >
threshold?
Undeclared
neighbor
Neighbor list?
No
No
MS
BS
Mobile Station
Base Station
Legend
Yes
Yes
unl
tion parameters.
For the undeclared neighbor list feature to work, the following must be in place:
Feature Activation File (FAF) 547 must be activated. The service provider must define
a Neighbor Pilot List for each cell and sector to be used for handoffs.
The service provider must turn on the undeclared neighbor list for each sector on which
UNL events are to be reported. The ecp form is used to turn on and turn off UNL event
reporting for all sectors. Also, the UNL field in the ceqface form must be populated.
Samples of both forms are shown:
Undeclared Neighbor List
(unl)
Form: ceqface, ecp
indicates whether the undeclared neighbor list feature is

turned on for this sector.
Range: y or n
unl

Forward Power Clipping Hysteresis (%)................................................................. +240) ___
Paging Channel Neighbor List Selection................................................................... +241) ___
Undeclared Neighbor List....................................................................................... +242) ___
Full Rate Erasure Setpoint Increase (setpoints)........................................................ 243) ___
Erasure Setpoint Increase (setpoints) ....................................................................... 244) ___
Full Rate Run (frames) .............................................................................................. 246) ___
Quarter/Eighth Rate Setpoint Decrease (setpoints) .................................................. 249) ___
AUTOPLEX
SOFT HANDOFF
CDMAPAFCARR
46: Undeclared Neighbor Handoff Failure
The number of times a handoff request by a mobile is not granted by the cell site because
the pilot in the requested cell is not in the neighbor list.
SOFT HANDOFF
CDMAPAFCARR
46: Undeclared Neighbor Handoff Failure
HANDOFF FEATURE
BAHO
The purpose of the Base Station Assisted Handoff (BAHO) feature is to minimize unnec-
essary soft/softer handoff, thereby reducing channel element usage and possibly improv-
ing forward link capacity. It may also have additional benefits of reducing forward link
interference, as well as the cell and mobile processing burden.
When the combined E
c
/I
0
of the Active Set is greater than a threshold, any additional pilot
may only offer minor or diminishing performance improvement. The idea of BAHO is to
filter out the handoffs that are unnecessary if the candidate pilot makes a negligible contri-
bution to the RF performance of a call. The unused forward link resource can be assigned
to other users in need, so that overall system performance may be improved.
The BAHO algorithm uses a parameter called T_Quality. It is a threshold to maintain the
RF performance for a single call. When T_Quality is 0 dB, BAHO is off at the base sta-
tion. When T_Quality is not equal to 0 dB, upon receiving a PSMM, the base station will
add the candidate pilot into the Active Set by following the normal handoff procedure
only if at least one of the following conditions is true:
The combined E
c
/I
0
strength of the Active Set is less than T_Quality.
The E
c
/I
0
strength of the candidate is greater than or equal to (T_add + T_comp) dB.
The E
c
/I
0
strength of the candidate is greater than or equal to the pilot strength of the
highest ranked Active Set.
The figure illustrates the BAHO conditions. Those conditions work to ignore any marginal
candidate pilots if the Active Set is robust enough, but would add a strong candidate pilot
regardless of the Active Set strength.
Cell site processing will disable BAHO on the border carrier if it is configured for directed
(i.e., non-pilot-assisted) interfrequency handoff and is serving as the primary for the call.
It is also recommended to turn off BAHO translation in a sector if any of the carrier of the
sector is configures for T_add Pilot Assisted Interfrequency Handoff (see unit 4).
HANDOFF FEATURE
BAHO
Is the combined
Yes
E
c
/I
0
> t_quality
No
No
No
Is the
candidate
PS < strongest pilot
in the Active Set
?
No
Combined E
c
/I
0
for pilots in the
Active Set
Is BAHO active?
Is the
candidate
PS < t_add
?
+ t_comp
DO NOT process the
handoff trigger
peg the SM for BAHO
Process
handoff trigger
Yes
Yes
Yes
Process
handoff trigger
?
BASE STATION ASSISTED HANDOFF
t_quality, baho_mode
tion parameters.
BAHO Quality Threshold (dB)
(t_quality)
Form: ceqface, ecp
indicates quality threshold in dB for the BAHO feature.
Range: 0 and -6.0 dB -9.0 dB in .5 dB increments
BAHO Mobile Type
(baho_mode)
Form: ceqface, ecp
indicates BAHO Mobile type.

Range:
n = none, i = IS95A_ONLY, and
a = ALL_IS95
t_quality, baho_mode

Operational Fault Detection - Multisector (OFD-MS):
Average Number of Accesses on Other Sectors ........................................................... +121) ___
Average Number of Incoming Calls on Other Sectors ................................................... +122) ___
Average Number of Outgoing Calls on Other Sectors ................................................... +123) ___
Enable Fault Analysis on Sector .................................................................................... 124) ___
Enable Carrier Fault Analysis......................................................................................... +125) ___
Base Assisted Soft Handoff (BAHO):
BAHO Quality Threshold (dB)..................................................................................... +126) ___
BAHO Mobile Type....................................................................................................... +127) ___
AUTOPLEX
9: CDMA Mobile Triggers Screened by Base Station Assisted Soft Handoffs
This is the number of pilot strength measurement messages ignored by base station
assisted soft handoffs. It differentiates mobile handoff activity purposely screened out by
the base station assisted handoff feature from that which was rejected for other reasons
such as lack of system resources.
9: CDMA Mobile Triggers Screened by Base Station
Assisted Soft Handoffs
IS-95B SOFT HANDOFF ALGORITHM
The IS-95B soft handoff algorithm enables the network to reduce the average number of
legs per call, improves forward link capacity, and saves the packet pipe without impacting
the RF performance. The algorithm allows the mobile to use the dynamic add/drop thresh-
old defined by the standard.
Background
Field data shows that under some conditions there may be more soft handoffs occurring
than are necessary when using the current IS-95A handoff algorithm. Such handoff over-
heads may also overuse system resources, thereby degrading total system capacity. The
new soft handoff algorithm is intended to improve these situations by introducing the
dynamic handoff threshold determined by combining the pilot strengths from the active
set. The mobile will send out a PSMM message to request the base station to add a pilot
into the active set only when the pilot is worthy of being added. The mobile will request
the base station to drop a pilot from the active set if the pilot contributes little.
Benefits
The IS-95B soft handoff algorithm introduces improvements that will reduce the time a
call is in soft handoff, and filters out unnecessary handoffs from each call; therefore, aver-
age number of legs for each call is reduced and the forward link capacity is increased.
Dynamic Thresholds
Three additional parameters are defined for IS-95B; namely, add_intcpt, drop_incpt, and
soft_slope. The parameters contribute to the calculation of the Dynamic Add and Drop
thresholds (DAT and DDT, respectively) as follows:
where PS
i
is the strength of the i
th
pilot in the Active Set, and A denotes the Active Set. In
the second equation (the DDT formula), DDT
j
is the drop threshold for dropping pilot j,
PS
j
is the strength of the pilot in question, i.e., the pilot to be dropped. Notice that the def-
inition of the Active Set strength for the DROP case is slightly different from that for the
ADD case. For the DROP case, the Active Set strength is the sum of only Active Set pilots
that are stronger than the pilot examined.
'
,
_
+
1
]
1
b _ add _ t , cpt int _ add PS log * 10 * slope _ soft max DAT

A PS : i
i
i
'
,
_
+
1
1
1
]
1
b _ drop _ t , cpt int _ drop PS log * 10 * slope _ soft max DDT

j i
i
PS PS
, A PS : i
i j
PS
i
E
c
/I
0
'
,
_
+
1
]
1
b _ add _ t , cpt int _ add PS log * 10 * slope _ soft max DAT

A PS : i
i
i
'
,
_
+
1
1
1
]
1
b _ drop _ t , cpt int _ drop PS log * 10 * slope _ soft max DDT

j i
i
PS PS
, A PS : i
i j
tion parameters.
Soft Handoff Enhancement
Activation
(sh_pm_enable)
Form: ceqface, ecp
This field is used to toggle on and off the CDMA Soft Handoff
Enhancement Activation feature. This field must be set to n
when the CDMA feature is not activated in the FAF. This parame-
ter may override a similar parameter on the ecp form.
Range: y or n
AUTOPLEX



Access Channel Overload Invocation Threshold.................. +154) __
Access Channel Overload Increase Persistence Step Size........ +155) __
Access Channel Overload Decrease Persistence Step Size........ +156) _

Degrees...+157) ___ Minutes...+158) __ Seconds...+159) _____
Degrees...+160) ____ Minutes...+161) __ Seconds...+162) _____

IS - 95B AHO, CAMSHO, SHO:
Access Handoff Enable......................................... +163) _
Channel Assignment Into Soft Handoff Enable................... +164) _
Soft Handoff Enhancement Feature Activation................... +165) _
tion parameters.
Soft Slope for IS-95B (dB)
(Primary/Alternate)
(soft_slope)
(soft_slope2)
Form: ceqface
It is the slope inequality criteria for adding a pilot to the active set,
or dropping the active set in IS-95B Mobile Soft Handoff system.
If this field is 0, IS-95B Soft Handoff Feature is not active. The pri-
mary parameter will be overridden by the alternate parameter.
Range: in 0.125 dB increments
(Primary) 0 - 7.875 dB
(Alternate) 0 - 7.875 dB
Add Intercept for IS-95B
(dB) (Primary/Alternate)
(add_intcpt)
(add_intcpt2)
Form: ceqface
This parameter is the inequality criteria for adding a pilot to the
active set. The primary parameter will be overridden by the alter-
nate parameter.
(Primary) -16 - 15.5 dB
(Alternate) -16 - 15.5 dB
Drop Intercept for IS-95B
(dB) (Primary/Alternate)
(drop_intcpt)
(drop_intcpt2)
Form: ceqface
This parameter is the inequality criteria for dropping a pilot to the
active set. The primary parameter will be overridden by the alter-
nate parameter.
(Primary) -16 - 15.5 dB
(Alternate) -16 - 15.5 dB
Pilot Detection Threshold
for IS-95B (dB) (Primary/
Alternate)
(t_add_b)
(t_add_b2)
Form: ceqface
This parameter provides the value of t_add used for IS-95B Soft
Handoff Algorithm. The purpose of this value is to provide a dif-
ferent set of t_add for IS-95B New Soft Handoff Algorithm fea-
ture. The usage is the same as that of t_add, but is for a mobile
to set up a threshold for adding a pilot into the candidate set. The
primary parameter will be overridden by the alternate parameter.
(Primary) -31.5 - 0 dB
(Alternate) -31.5 - 0 dB
Pilot Drop Threshold for IS-
95B (dB) (Primary/Alter-
nate)
(t_drop_b)
(t_drop_b2)
Form: ceqface
This parameter provides the value of t_drop used for IS-95B Soft
Handoff Algorithm. The purpose of this value is to provide a dif-
ferent set of t_drop for IS-95B New Soft Handoff Algorithm fea-
ture. The usage is the same as that of t_drop, but is for a mobile
to set up a threshold for dropping a pilot from the candidate set.
The primary parameter will be overridden by the alternate param-
eter.
(Primary) -31.5 - 0 dB
(Alternate) -31.5 - 0 dB
Soft Handoff Carrier List for
Alternate List
(sh_carr)
Form: ceqface
Specifies the list of carriers using the alternate list for IS-95B Soft
Handoff Algorithm feature.
Range: y or blank
AUTOPLEX

Primary Alternate
List: List:
Soft Slope.....................................+168)_ 173)_____
Add Intercept..................................+169)____ 174)_____
Drop Intercept.................................+170)____ 175)_____
Pilot Detection Threshold......................+171)_____ 176)_____
Pilot Drop Threshold...........................+172)_____ 177)_____

178) Carrier List for Alternate List:
[1] _ [3] _ [5] _ [7] _ [9] _
[2] _ [4] _ [6] _ [8] _ [10] _
HIGH SPEED PACKET DATA HANDOFF
When a High Speed Packet Data (HSPD) call is being made, a Fundamental Channel (F/
R-FCH) is established, and a Supplemental Channel (F/R-SCH) may be established during
bursts of data.
A 3G mobile (or data device) can be in soft handoff with up to six F-FCHs. However, only
one F-SCH is used. Instead, the system is doing an anchor transfer, transferring the F-SCH
to another antenna face in the active set. This transfer is essentially a very fast hard hand-
off in which the forward link is dynamically switched to the best serving cell.
The presence of anchor transfer should reduce the effects of interference from other cells
by ensuring that the strongest cell is always a source of signal rather than of interference.
Unlike the single-leg F-SCH operation (anchor transfer), the operation of the R-SCH is on
all legs of the call. Therefore, the rate of the burst is determined among all legs. For
instance, if five legs in soft handoff can support 153.6 kbps at a given time, but the sixth
leg can only support 19.2 kbps, the R-SCH will be limited to the rate of 19.2 kbps
HIGH SPEED PACKET DATA HANDOFF
FCH can be in soft handoff
F-SCH cannot be in soft handoff
Anchor transfer is used
R-SCH can be in soft handoff
HSPD ANCHOR TRANSFER
tion parameters.
Anchor Hysteresis (dB
(anchor_hyst)
Form: ceqface, ecp
This field is used to toggle on and off the CDMA Soft Handoff
Enhancement Activation feature. This field must be set to n
when the CDMA feature is not activated in the FAF. This parame-
ter may override a similar parameter on the ecp form.
Range: y or n
HSPD ANCHOR TRANSFER
AUTOPLEX


3G1X Data Load 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SEARCH WINDOW CONSIDERATIONS
The search windows for active pilots, neighbor pilots, and other pilots are specified by
srchwina, srchwinn, srchwinr, respectively. The search windows are defined to be cen-
tered on the expected phase offset (two-sided window). The active search window size is a
function of the largest expected delay spread to account for the propagation delay spread
from multipath. The neighbor search window size is a function of the difference in path
delays between the mobile and all base stations within view, plus the delay spread from
multipath.
The neighbor search window size should be selected to be large enough that the most
likely neighbor pilots will fall within the window, but not so large that it takes excessive
time to complete a search. The first consideration involves the distance between the
mobile and the difference between the nearest to the farthest detectable base stations. This
is a function of the cellular grid size and any topographical features that block a signal
from a close neighbor or allows reception from a far away neighbor.
The overlap region between neighbors is controlled by the t_add and t_tdrop translation
parameters, so the neighbor search windows should, at a minimum, cover the distance
across the overlap region. Selecting too small a value will result in a smaller overlap
region than is specified by the t_add and t_drop parameters. The search window should
equal the delay across the widest overlap region. To cover the overlap region shown, the
minimum search window should be:
2 (D
2
D
1
) 6.6 chips, plus the delay spread.
Where:
D
1
and D
2
are in miles.
A typical urban area has delay spread around 7 microseconds, while the suburban area is
closer to 2 microseconds. The search window sizes, in PN chips, can be estimated from
the following:
srch_win_a 2 (largest delay spread/T
c
)
srch_win_n 2 (largest distance difference/
light
+ largest delay spread)/T
c
srch_win_r 2 (largest distance difference/
light
+ largest delay spread)/T
c
Where
light
is the speed of light and T
c
is a PN chip duration (817 nanoseconds).
SEARCH WINDOW CONSIDERATIONS
Minimum Neighbor Search Window in chips is:
2 (D
2
D
1
) 6.6 + 2 Largest Delay Spread/T
c
Where:
D
1
and D
2
are in miles,
Urban Delay Spread 7 microseconds,
Suburban Delay Spread 2 microseconds
Note: 1/ (
light
T
c
) = 6.6
A
D
1
D
2
B
EXAMPLE OF
RELATIVE POSITIONING OF
NEIGHBOR OR REMAINING SET
SEARCH WINDOW
These windows are centered around the target Pilots PN offset relative to the arrival time
of the reference pilot in the Active Set.
For reference, the top two PN Phase axes show how the mobile will position the Active
Set search window. The lower two PN Phase axes show the relative positioning of the
Neighbor (or Remaining) Set search window. The mobile will add the appropriate number
of chips to find the Neighbor pilot based on the position of the earliest arrival of the refer-
ence pilot. Since the position of the reference pilot includes its propagation delay which is
related to D
1
, the overall offset will also include this delay. However, since the Neighbor
Pilot is coming from a different cell, its propagation delay is related to D
2
different than
that of the Active Pilot. As a result, the search window size for Neighbor and Remaining
set pilots must account not only for the largest delay of the target pilot but also for the
largest difference in propagation delays (loosely, difference in distance) between the refer-
ence pilot and the target pilot.
EXAMPLE OF
RELATIVE POSITIONING OF
NEIGHBOR OR REMAINING SET
SEARCH WINDOW
Base Station A,
transmitting
pilot A
(reference pilot)
Neighbor Set
Search Window
Mobile assumes pilot B is ([B - A] 64) chips away
from the earliest arrival of the reference pilot
Earliest arrival of
pilot A at mobile
Related to D
1
Mobile
looking for an
Active Set pilot
Active Set
Search Window
Pilot A
at Base
Station
Base Station B,
transmitting
neighbor pilot B
Mobile looking
for a Neighbor or
Remaining Set pilot
Pilot B is ([B - A] 64) chips away
PN phase
PN phase
PN phase
PN phase
Pilot B at Base Station
Earliest arrival of
pilot B at mobile
Related to D
2
SEARCH WINDOW
srchwina, srchwinn, srchwinr, srchwincell
tion parameters.
Search Window Size:
Active Set and Candidate Set
(srchwina)
Form: ceqface
specifies the window-size search to be used by the
mobiles for the Active Set and Candidate Set.
Range: 0 15
Neighbor Set
(srchwinn)
Form: ceqface
mobiles for the neighbor set.
Range: 0 15
Remaining Set
(srchwinr)
Form: ceqface
mobiles for the remaining set.
Range: 0 - 15
Cell (microseconds)
(srchwincell)
Form: ceqface
specifies the search window size (in microseconds) for
use by the traffic CEs
Range: 12 368 microseconds
SEARCH WINDOW
srchwina, srchwinn, srchwinr, srchwincell
Search Window Sizes
srchwin
Size
(chips) srchwin
Size
(chips)
0 4 8 60
1 6 9 80
2 8 10 100
3 10 11 130
4 14 12 160
5 20 13 226
6 28 14 320
7 40 15 452

Transmit Antenna Propagation Delay (microseconds)........................................................ 92) ___
Receive Antenna Propagation Delay (microseconds)......................................................... 93) ___
Pilot Detection Threshold (dB) ............................................................................................ 95) ___
Pilot Drop Threshold (dB).................................................................................................... 96) ___
Active Set vs Candidate Set Comparison Thresh (dB) ....................................................... 97) ___
Drop Timer .......................................................................................................................... 99) ___
Search Window Size: Active Set and Candidate Set .................................................. 100) ___
Neighbor Set.............................................................................. 101) ___
Remaining Set ........................................................................... 102) ___
Cell (microseconds).................................................................. 103) ___
Maximum Differential Transmit Delay (microseconds)........................................................ 105) ___

AUTOPLEX
SINGLE CARRIER HANDOFF
SUMMARY
SUMMARY
Pilots are categorized in four sets: active, candidate,
neighbor, and remaining set.
Pilots are moving in and out from the sets based on the four
handoff thresholds, t_add, t_drop, t_tdrop, t_comp, and the
Neighbor List.
The handoff thresholds determine the number of mobiles in
soft handoff.
A mobile can only look for 20 neighbors so in soft handoff
the Neighbor List Selection Algorithm determines the 20
best neighbors based on all active pilots neighbor lists.
For a single carrier system there are two handoff transitions
Soft handoff
Softer handoff
The F-SCH cannot be in soft handoff.
3G-1X uses the IS-95B Soft Handoff Algorithm.
Search windows are used at the receiver to capture all
usable multipath signals.
Knowledge Check
Question 1.
What can be done to decrease soft handoff activity?
A. Increase t_add
B. Decrease t_drop
C. Increase t_tdrop
D. All of the above
S
Answer: d
Note: Handoff activity is the movement of pilots in and out from the active set.
Question 2.
When can a pilot in the active set go to the candidate set?
A. When the pilot drops below t_drop and the t_tdrop timer has expired
B. When being replaced by a pilot from the candidate set
C. When a new neighbor list is sent
D. All of the above
S
Answer: b
Question 3.
The soft handoff region depends on what parameter(s)?
A. t_add
B. t_drop
C. t_tdrop
D. All of the above
S
Answer: d
Note: The soft handoff region is where the mobile is in soft handoff. With a low
t_add the mobile will go into soft handoff sooner. With a low t_drop and a big
t_tdrop the mobile will be in soft handoff longer.
Knowledge Check
Question 4.
Pilot A with PN offset 10 is the primary pilot and pilot B with PN offset 20 is its neighbor.
If pilot A arrives at the mobile with a delay of +6 chips and pilot B arrives at the mobile
with a delay of +15 chips, what is the minimum search window needed in order for the
mobile to detect pilot B?
A. 14 chips (srchwin_n = 4)
B. 20 chips (srchwin_n = 5)
C. 28 chips (srchwin_n = 6)
D. 40 chips (srchwin_n = 7)
S
Answer: b
Note: The mobile centers its neighbor search window around the first arriving
multi-path component in this example, from pilot A. Pilot As multi-path
component arrives at PN phase (system reference)
6 + 10 64 = 646.
Pilot B arrives at the mobile on PN phase
15 + 20 64 = 1295.
The mobile expects pilot B to arrive around
646 + (20 - 10) 64 = 1286.
Hence, we need a search window of at least
2 (1295 - 1286) = 18 chips
Knowledge Check
Question 5.
Pilot A with PN offset 64 is the primary pilot and pilot B with PN offset 76 is its neighbor.
If pilot A arrives at the mobile with a delay of +2 chips and pilot B arrives at the mobile
with a delay of +18 chips, what is the minimum search window needed in order for the
mobile to detect pilot B?
A. 14 chips (srchwin_n = 4)
B. 20 chips (srchwin_n = 5)
C. 28 chips (srchwin_n = 6)
D. 40 chips (srchwin_n = 7)
S
Answer: d
Note: The mobile centers its neighbor search window around the first arriving
multi-path component in this example, from pilot A. Pilot As multi-path
component arrives at PN phase (system reference)
2 + 64 64 = 4098.
Pilot B arrives at the mobile on PN phase
18 + 76 64 = 4882.
The mobile expects pilot B to arrive around
4098 + (76 - 64) 64 = 4866.
Hence, we need a search window of at least
2 (4882 - 4866) = 32 chips
Knowledge Check
Question 6.
In a single carrier system, a mobile is on a call and going from sector A to sector B. Given
the graph below showing the E
c
/I
0
as reported by the mobile. Given the graph and the
handoff translation parameters, answer the following questions.
Translation parameters for base station A and B:
t_add = -13
t_drop = -15
t_tdrop = 3
t_comp = 2
If the mobile only has pilot A in its active set, at what mile marker will the mobile go into
soft handoff with pilot B?
S
Answer 3.0
At what mile marker will the mobile at the earliest drop pilot A from the active set?
S
Answer: 5.0
A B
-19
-17
-15
-13
-11
-9
-7
-5
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0
[miles]
E
c
/
I
o

[
d
B
]
F1(A)
F1(B)
Knowledge Check
Question 7.
A mobile is in soft handoff with 2 (primary pilot), 2 (secondary pilot) and 6 (second-
ary pilot). The mobile has the following neighbor list, 6, 10 and 14. The parameters
for the system is as follows
maxlegs = 4
t_add = -13
t_drop = -15
t_tdrop = 3
t_comp = 2.5
The mobile sends a PSMM (Pilot Strength Measurement Message) to the base station
reporting the following pilot signal strengths
2 = -7 dB
2 = -5 dB
6 = -14 dB
6 = -14 dB
18 = -10 dB
What will happen?
A. 6 is dropped from the active set
B. 18 is added to the active set
C. 6 is added to the active set
D. Nothing
S
Answer: d
Note: 6 is not less than t_drop, 18 is not on the neighbor list and 6 is not
stronger than t_add.
Knowledge Check
Question 8.
A mobile is in soft handoff with 2 (primary pilot), 2 (secondary pilot) and 6 (second-
ary pilot). The mobile has the following neighbor list, 6, 10 and 14. The parameters
for the system is as follows
maxlegs = 3
t_add = -13
t_drop = -15
t_tdrop = 3
t_comp = 2.5
The mobile sends a PSMM (Pilot Strength Measurement Message) to the base station
reporting the following pilot signal strengths
2 = -7 dB
2 = -5 dB
6 = -10 dB
6 = -14 dB
18 = -10 dB
What will happen?
A. 6 is dropped from the active set
B. 18 is added and 6 is dropped from the active set
C. 6 is added and 6 is dropped from the active set
D. Nothing
S
Answer: c
Note: 6 is not less than t_drop, 18 is not on the neighbor list but 6 is stronger
than 6 by t_comp and within 5 dB of the average of 2 and 2. Maximum
number of active set legs are 3.
Knowledge Check
Question 9.
What is the objective of the IS-95B soft handoff algorithm?
A. To increase forward link capacity.
B. To increase reverse link capacity.
C. To increase packet pipe capacity.
D. All of the above.
S
Answer: a
Knowledge Check
Section 9
Power Control Section 9
Power Control CL8303 v1.0
POWER CONTROL OBJECTIVES
The fundamental purpose of power control is to maintain acceptable voice quality for the
largest number of users. Service providers identify the following as the objectives for
power control.
Satisfactory voice quality
Maximum system capacity consistent with the voice quality objective
Minimum power consumption for both the battery powered mobile and the base station
transmitters
To meet these objectives, CDMA power control must:
Control frame errors by setting and controlling E
b
/N
T
.
Serve as a power control manager, minimizing base station transmitted power via the
forward link power control, and minimizing mobile transmitted power via the reverse
link power control.
Provide acceptable voice quality for customers, allowing for gradual degradation of
voice quality in the context of high usage.
Provide power control translation parameters so service providers can control capacity
and voice quality.
CL8303 v1.0 Power Control
POWER CONTROL OBJECTIVES
Received
Signal
Power
Excessive Interference to Others
(Reduced Capacity)
Optimum Power Level
Voice Quality Deteriorates
P
opt
SATISFACTORY VOICE QUALITY
Because the frame error rate is a direct measure of voice quality, the system is controlled
by measured error rates rather than E
b
/N
T
. In particular, frame error rate (FER) is the key
quantity to control; therefore, to ensure satisfactory voice quality, it is not sufficient to
maintain a specific E
b
/N
T
; it is necessary to respond to frame errors as they occur.
In order to provide a satisfactory voice quality
*
for each individual mobile user, power
control algorithms will be specified to maintain an average FER
around the desired

FER.

* Satisfactory voice quality in terms of the Mean Opinion Score (MOS) can be achieved by reducing the
average frame error rate (FER) and shortening the number of consecutive frame errors.
The average FER is the FER averaged over a call in the cell or sector.
The desired FER will apply to all calls, and will be referred to as rfer for the reverse link and ffer for the
forward link.
Acronym
FER Frame Error Rate
SATISFACTORY VOICE QUALITY
Average FER less than 5%
Maximum string of consecutive frame errors
less than 5
Uplink Power Control
MOBILE POWER CONTROL
For uplink power control there are two algorithms, autonomous power control and base
station directed power control.
Autonomous mobile power control is used on the uplink or reverse traffic channel. It is
sometimes called open loop power control or reverse open loop power control.
Power control directed by the base station is also used on the uplink and is called closed
loop power control. There are two components to this closed loop power control that
are called the inner loop and outer loop respectively.
Autonomous control
Decreases interference to other base stations
Provides the initial power level
Extends mobile power control dynamic range
Called reverse open loop
Base Station directed control
Controls FER of signal received at the serving base
station
Called reverse inner closed loop and reverse outer
closed loop
AUTONOMOUS
This example shows path loss increasing (decreasing level of received power) due to
increasing path length. The loss can be due to shadowing in which case the change can be
relatively slow. Rayleigh fading is much faster, too fast to be accommodated by the
mobile autonomous power control, which changes power over interval from 20 to 100
milliseconds.
This example shows autonomous control to be useful in controlling large, slow changes in
path loss.
AUTONOMOUS
-190
Separation Distance
P
recv
at BS [dBm]
with Autonomous Control
-140
-90
0.1 1 10 100
~80 dB
No Autonomous Control
(log scale)
2 Decades
Separation
Distance
[miles]
AUTONOMOUS
Reverse Open Loop Control
The mobile measures the total signal power received from all base stations at the mobiles
location. The combined signals are used by the mobile to adjust its transmitter power; the
stronger the combined received signals, the lower the mobiles transmitter power. Recep-
tion of a strong signal from the base station indicates that the mobile is either close to the
base station or has a good path to the base station. This means the mobile can use less
transmitter power and still produce a good signal at the base station, reducing interference
to other stations.
Autonomous power control, also called open loop control, is useful for establishing the
link when originating a call and reacting to large path loss fluctuations from shadowing.
But open loop adjustments could cause over compensation; hence open loop control has a
relatively slow response. The closed loop control is faster and will compensate for errors
in the open loop control.
The open loop control is required to compensate for the large dynamic range of signals
experienced in the coverage area. The closed loop is required to quickly and accurately
control the mobile signal strength received by the base station.
The mobile open loop transmitter power, expressed in dBm, is given by:
*
Mobile Transmitter Power
dBm
=
-73 Mean Received Signal Strength
dBm
(Cellular Mobile)
Mobile Transmitter Power
dBm
=
-76 Mean Received Signal Strength
dBm
(PCS Mobile)
Shown is an example where the PCS mobile moves into a shadow area that increases the
path loss by about 50 dB in 500 msec. The upper plot shows the signal strength received
by the mobile; the lower plot shows the mobile effective radiated power (ERP), assuming
unity mobile antenna gain, increasing to compensate for the increasing path loss to the
base station.
* IS-95A, section 6.1.2.3.1.
S
Emphasize this is the uplink.
AUTONOMOUS
Reverse Open Loop Control
-120
0 100 400
-100
-80
-60
-40
200
500 300
S
i
g
n
a
l

R
e
c
e
i
v
e
d

a
t

M
o
b
i
l
e

[
d
B
m
]
P
R
(t1)
-20
0 100 400
-10
0
10
20
200 500 300
t1
Time [msec]
M
o
b
i
l
e

E
R
P

[
d
B
m
]
P
T
(t1)
30
40
50
60
t1
Time [msec]
DIRECTED
Reverse Closed Loop Control
Shown is the base station closed loop reverse power control algorithm. The algorithm uses
the E
b
/N
T
set by the pnom translation parameter as the setpoint E
b
/N
T
when a call is
placed. The base station measures the average E
b
on the first power control group (1536
bits) received in a 20 millisecond frame, computes an estimated E
b
/N
T
, and compares this
to the setpoint E
b
/N
T
. If the estimated E
b
/N
T
is greater than the setpoint, the base station
commands the mobile to reduce power 1 dB for the next power group; if not, the base sta-
tion commands the mobile to increase power 1 dB. This process, called the inner loop, is
repeated for all the power control groups in the frame. At the end of the frame, the base
station computes a new setpoint E
b
/N
T
based on whether the last frame had errors or not.
This calculation is done every 20 milliseconds and is called the outer loop. The new set-
point is then used by the inner loop for the next frame.
The inner loop is specified by the IS-95A standard, the outer loop is not specified and may
be different for different base station vendors.
DIRECTED
Reverse Closed Loop Control
Initialize E
b
/N
T
setpoint
on power control
group
Measured
E
b
/N
T
> setpoint?
Send power
down 1 dB
20 ms frame
received?
Calculate a new
E
b
/N
T
setpoint
Is
Setpoint > pmax
No
Yes
No
Is
Setpoint < pmin
?
No
Setpoint = pmax
Measure E
b
/N
T
Yes
to mobile
?
No
Yes
Yes
Inner Loop
(every 1.25 ms)
Outer Loop
(every 20 ms)
Send power
up 1 dB
to mobile
Setpoint = pmin
DIRECTED
Reverse Closed Inner Loop Control
The target value of E
b
/N
T
, which is held constant during a frame, is called a setpoint. The
value of N
T
is the total received interference plus the base station receiver noise and will
vary as traffic changes and mobiles move. The N
T
level is shown as a constant on the plot;
however, while it is relatively constant over a frame, it will vary from frame to frame. The
base station measures both the bit energy, E
b
, and the total interference plus noise, N
T
, to
compute the setpoint.
The base station sends power control bits 16 times during a 20 millisecond frame, corre-
sponding to 1.25 msec intervals or 800 bps data rate, to increase or decrease the mobile
transmitter power 1 dB to bring the measured E
b
/N
T
closer to the target for the frame.
Each power control bit changes the mobile transmitter power so the mobile may oscillate
about the setpoint for the frame. The base station will compute a different setpoint for the
next frame, decreasing the setpoint if the frame is error free and raising the setpoint if the
frame has an error.
S
For soft handoff involving two or more base stations, the primary base station
calculates the set point for the next frame and passes the value to the
secondary base stations.
DIRECTED
Reverse Closed Inner Loop Control
Setpoint is fixed during a frame
Setpoint can change from frame to frame
Received Energy
E
b
E
b
time
Frame
(20 msec)
Next Frame
E
b
/N
T
setpoint
Next E
b
/N
T
setpoint
Target E
b
N
T
(20 msec)
DIRECTED
Reverse Closed Outer Loop Setpoint Control
The setpoint is reduced a small amount (down_frr) for each consecutive frame until a
frame error occurs. Then the setpoint is increased a relatively large amount and the pro-
cess is repeated. The setpoint can range between the floor (pmin) and ceiling (pmax). The
objective of the reverse closed loop is to balance the desired frame error rate (FER) on the
reverse link and system capacity. The capacity can be controlled with the reverse outer
loop power control parameters to increase the acceptable FER. Changing the FER is
accomplished by setting the ratio of down_frr to up_frr. This is based on the assumption
that on the average, errors that cause jumps up in power occur at nearly the same power
level. On the average, an extra error occurs because of the latency in the loop, resulting in
about 2 errors per cycle. A cycle refers to the interval between jumps up. Based on these
assumptions, the parameter down_frr is calculated by the system from the desired FER
and up_frr. The translation parameters are rfer, rfer2, and up_frr; the down_frr is calcu-
lated by the system.
down_frr = rfer up_frr/2
The floor pmin reduces the so called stop light effect. The required E
b
/N
T
is higher for
a moving vehicle than it is for a stationary one. The E
b
/N
T
setpoint decreases to a low
value while a vehicle is stopped for a traffic light. However, the outer loop may not
respond fast enough when the vehicle starts up, and several voice frames may be lost
before the outer loop is able to raise the setpoint back to the value required by the moving
vehicle. The pmin translation limits the setpoint so it will be high enough so the voice
quality is not degraded when the vehicle starts up from the traffic light.
DIRECTED
Reverse Closed Outer Loop Setpoint Control
Setpoint Value
time
Floor (pmin)
[dB]
up_frr
up_frr
Frame Error
down_frr
20
msec
frame
down_frr = rfer up_ frr/2 Ceiling (pmax)
Inner Loop
The base station measures
16 times/20 msec frame
> setpoint, then command MS to decrease power
< setpoint, then command MS to increase power
E
b
N
T
E
b
N
T
SUMMARY UPLINK POWER CONTROL
Obstructions causing shadow areas require power control that is much faster than the
mobile open loop control. The power adjustments needed to compensate for these shadow
losses are handled by the directed power control system, having a response time of 1.25
msec for a 1 dB change and a total dynamic range of 48 dB. This quick response time
allows the directed power control system to override the mobile autonomous control when
necessary, i.e., the mobile reduces power in an area where the strongest received signal
comes from an interfering base station, not the serving base station. Together, the two
independent mobile power control systems cover a dynamic range of at least 80 dB.
The uplinks directed power control system consists of two parts, commonly called the
inner loop and outer loop. The outer loop is responsible for calculating a target E
b
/N
T

for the mobile to achieve the desired voice quality, while the inner loop is responsible for
keeping the mobile as close to the setpoint as possible.
SUMMARY UPLINK POWER CONTROL
Mobile in
the clear
Mobile
Station
received
signal
Base
Station
received
Increase
Power
Decrease
Power
Mobile
Station
transmitted
power
Base station
Instructions
Shadow
Enter Mobile in
the shadow
Leaving
shadow
in the
clear
Frame
error
No Frame
error
Set Point
E
b
N
T
1.25 msec.
20 msec Frame
Base
Station
REVERSE CLOSED LOOP
POWER CONTROL
rolpc_enable, rfer, rfer2, pnom, pnom2
tion parameters.
Reverse Link Closed-Loop
Enable Reverse Outer Loop
Power Control
(rolpac_enable)
Form: ceqface, ecp
specifies whether Reverse Outer Loop Power Control
(ROLPC) is enabled.
Range: y or n
Reverse Link Frame Error Rate
(%) - Rate Set 1
(rfer)
Form: ceqface, ecp
specifies the long-term frame error rate (FER used for
ROLPC for Rate Set 1.
Range: 0.2 3.0 percent in .2 increments
Reverse Link Frame Error
- Rate Set 2
(rfer2)
Form: ceqface, ecp
specifies the long-term FER used for ROLPC for Rate
Set 2.
Nominal E
b
/N
0
Setpoint (dB)
- Rate Set 1
(pnom)
Form: ceqface, ecp
defines the starting energy-per-bit to noise ratio (E
b
/N
0
)
setpoint for ROLPC for the call for Rate Set 1.
Range: 5.0 dB 9.0 dB in 0.1 dB increments and 9.5 dB
Nominal E
b
/N
0
Setpoint (dB)
- Rate Set 2
(pnom2)
Form: ceqface, ecp
defines the starting energy-per-bit to noise ratio (E
b
/N
0
)
setpoint for ROLPC for the call for Rate Set 2.
Range: 3.8 dB 8.3 dB in 0.1 dB increments
REVERSE CLOSED LOOP
POWER CONTROL
rolpc_enable, rfer, rfer2, pnom, pnom2

AUTOPLEX
System Cell ____ Face _
Reverse Link Closed-Loop:
Enable Reverse Outer Loop Power Control ... 174) ___
Rate
Set 1
Rate
Set 2
Reverse Link Frame Error Rate (%).................. +175) ___ +176) ___
Nominal E
b
/N
0
Setpoint (dB)............................. +177) ___ +178) ___
Violator Threshold................................................ +179) ___
Overload Control:
Upper Reverse Load Threshold (%) ................... +180) ___
Lower Reverse Load Threshold (%) ................... +181) ___
REVERSE CLOSED OUTER LOOP
POWER CONTROL
pmin, pmin2, pmax, pmax2
tion parameters.

E
b
/N
0
Setpoint -
Minimum (dB) - Rate Set 1
(pmin)
Form: ceqface, ecp
defines the minimum E
b
/N
0
setpoint for the ROLPC
loop for Rate Set 1. The Nominal E
b
/N
0
Setpoint - Rate
Set 1 must be greater than or, equal to this parameter.
This parameter, and E
b
/N
0
Setpoint - Maximum (dB) -
Rate Set 1 cannot be equal to each other.
Minimum (dB) - Rate Set 2
(pmin2)
Form: ceqface, ecp
defines the minimum E
b
/N
0
loop for Rate Set 2. The Nominal E
b
/N
0
Setpoint - Rate
Set 2 must be greater than or equal to this parameter.
This parameter, and E
b
/N
0
Setpoint - Maximum (dB) -
Rate Set 2 cannot be equal to each other.
Maximum (dB) - Rate Set 1
(pmax)
Form: ceqface, ecp
defines the maximum E
b
/N
0
loop for Rate Set 1. This parameter must be greater
than or equal to the value entered for E
b
/N
0
Setpoint -
Minimum (dB) - Rate Set 1. This parameter, and E
b
/N
0

Setpoint - Minimum (dB) - Rate Set 1 cannot be equal
to each other.
Range: 7.0 dB 9.0 dB in 0.1 dB increments and 9.5
dB, 10.0 dB, 10.5 dB
Maximum (dB) - Rate Set 2
(pmax2)
Form: ceqface, ecp
defines the maximum E
b
/N
0
loop for Rate Set 2. This parameter must be greater
than or equal to the value entered for E
b
/N
0
Setpoint -
Minimum (dB) - Rate Set 2." This parameter, and E
b
/
N
0
Setpoint - Minimum (dB) - Rate Set 2 cannot be
equal to each other.
S
The pmin and pmin2 translation parameters are effective in reducing the
stop light effect. The pmax and pmax2 translation parameters are
effective in reducing the grand effect.
POWER CONTROL
pmin, pmin2, pmax, pmax2

Overload Redirection to Analog ......................................................................... +217) ___
Max Access Channel Message Capsule Size (frames) ..................................... +218) ___
Access Channel Preamble Length (frames) ...................................................... +219) ___
Time Randomization for Access Channel Probes.............................................. +220) ___
- Backoff Range............................................................................................ +221) ___
- Sequence Backoff Range .......................................................................... +222) ___
Rate Rate
E
b
/N
0
- Minimum (dB) ........................................................................................... +223) ___+224) ___
- Maximum (dB) .......................................................................................... +225) ___+226) ___
- Minimum (dgu) ........................................................................................... +227) ___+228) ___
- Maximum (dgu) .......................................................................................... +229) ___+230) ___
Power Report Delay........................................................................................... +231) ___
Power Control Reporting Frames....................................................................... +232) ___
Lower Forward Link FER Threshold (%)............................................................ +233) ___
Upper Forward Link FER Threshold (%)............................................................ +234) ___
AUTOPLEX
POWER CONTROL
up_frr
tion parameters.
Simulations have been run to determine a starting point for setting up_frr given a desired
rfer.
If (0.2% rfer 0.4%), then up_frr = 6000
Full Rate Erasure Setpoint Increase
(setpoints)
(up_frr)
Form: ceqface
the amount of E
b
/N
0
setpoint increase when an erasure
is received after a run of full/half rate frames.
Range: 0 6000 setpoints
S
NOTE:
Making reverse power control more aggressive by changing the Full Rate
Erasure Setpoint increase translation parameter up_frr from 1024 to 3072
significantly improves reverse link performance. By more effectively tracking
reverse link environmental changes this parameter change reduces the
average reverse link setpoint and minimizes reverse link error bursts.
POWER CONTROL
up_frr

Full Rate Erasure Setpoint Increase (setpoints) .................................................. 243) ___
AUTOPLEX
E
b
/N
T
MAPPING
[dB] TO [Setpoints]
E
b
/N
T
MAPPING
[dB] TO [Setpoints]
E
b
/N
T
[dB]
[Set points] 8 kbps 13 kbps
3.0 1.2 5048
3.1 1.3 5152
3.2 1.4 5264
3.3 1.5 5376
3.4 1.6 5488
3.5 1.7 5600
3.6 1.8 5736
3.7 1.9 5872
3.8 2.0 6008
3.9 2.1 6152
4.0 2.2 6296
4.1 2.3 6464
4.2 2.4 6632
4.3 2.5 6808
4.4 2.6 6992
4.5 2.7 7176
4.6 2.8 7384
4.7 2.9 7600
4.8 3.0 7824
4.9 3.1 8056
5.0 3.2 8288
5.1 3.3 8544
5.2 3.4 8816
5.3 3.5 9088
5.4 3.6 9368
5.5 3.7 9664
5.6 3.8 9984
5.7 3.9 10320
5.8 4.0 10664
5.9 4.1 11024
E
b
/N
T
MAPPING
[dB] TO [Setpoints] (cont.)
E
b
/N
T
MAPPING
E
b
/N
T
[dB]
6.0 4.2 11392
6.1 4.3 11792
6.2 4.4 12208
6.3 4.5 12632
6.4 4.6 13080
6.5 4.7 13536
6.6 4.8 14024
6.7 4.9 14536
6.8 5.0 15056
6.9 5.1 15600
7.0 5.2 16168
7.1 5.3 16768
7.2 5.4 17400
7.3 5.5 18048
7.4 5.6 18720
7.5 5.7 19416
7.6 5.8 20152
7.7 5.9 20920
7.8 6.0 21720
7.9 6.1 22552
8.0 6.2 23408
8.1 6.3 24312
8.2 6.4 25248
8.3 6.5 26224
8.4 6.6 27240
8.5 6.7 28288
8.6 6.8 29392
8.7 6.9 30536
8.8 7.0 31728
8.9 7.1 32968
E
b
/N
T
MAPPING
E
b
/N
T
MAPPING
E
b
/N
T
[dB]
9.0 7.2 34256
9.1 7.3 35600
9.2 7.4 37000
9.3 7.5 38448
9.4 7.6 39960
9.5 7.7 41528
9.6 7.8 43168
9.7 7.9 44864
9.8 8.0 46632
9.9 8.1 48472
10.0 8.2 50384
10.1 8.3 52376
10.2 8.4 54440
10.3 8.5 56592
10.4 8.6 58824
10.5 8.7 61144
10.6 8.8 63552
10.7 8.9 66064
10.8 9.0 68672
10.9 9.1 71376
11.0 9.2 74192
11.1 9.3 77112
11.2 9.4 80144
11.3 9.5 83296
11.4 9.6 86576
11.5 9.7 89984
11.6 9.8 93512
11.7 9.9 97176
11.8 10.0 100984
11.9 10.1 104936
12.0 10.2 109048
UPLINK POWER CONTROL
CDMAPAFL
3: Frame Errors on Reverse Traffic Channel 8K Vocoder
If the call is in a soft handoff, this count is incremented for each bad frame the SHC
encounters during the process of choosing the best frame. The SHC notifies the cell site
about reverse bad frames by messaging on the Packet Pipe. If the call is not in a soft hand-
off, this count is incremented for each frame that the cell site determines as being in error.
This count is the total number of frames in error for the SM interval.
The units for this count are the number of frames in error for the SM interval.
4: Frame Errors on Reverse Traffic Channel 13K Vocoder
Similar to Frame Errors on Reverse Traffic Channel 8K Vocoder but for the 13K
Vocoder.
5: Frame Errors on Reverse Traffic Channel EVRC Vocoder
Similar to Frame Errors on Reverse Traffic Channel 8K Vocoder but for the EVRC
Vocoder.
8: Occurrences of Three or More Consecutive Frame Errors on Reverse Traffic
Channel
This count is pegged after the SHC has chosen the best frame. This count is pegged
whenever three or more consecutive frames, either voice or signaling, are determined to
be in error. Such an occurrence is indicative of degraded voice quality.
CDMAPAFRT {8K|13K|EVRC}{FULL|1/2|1/4|1/8}
2: Number of Frames Received on Reverse Traffic Channel
Total number of full, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 frames received on the reverse traffic channel.
CDMAPAFL
3: Frame Errors on Reverse Traffic Channel 8K
Vocoder
4: Frame Errors on Reverse Traffic Channel 13K
Vocoder
5: Frame Errors on Reverse Traffic Channel EVRC
Vocoder
8: Occurrences of Three or More Consecutive Frame
Errors on Reverse Traffic Channel
2: Number of Frames Received on Reverse Traffic
Channel
3G-1X UPLINK POWER CONTROL
The IS-2000 reverse power control scheme is a generalization of the IS-95 version, but is
simplified. The key factor in the simplification is the introduction of the reverse pilot R-
PICH, which is used as a reference for measurement and scaling in the open and inner
loops. The system computes the R-PICH power control corrections needed by the open
and inner loops, and then translates them to corrections that apply to the R-FCH. The scal-
ing is done per channel and per data rate, so that rate equalization can be performed easily.
3G Reverse Link Open Loop Power Control
The formulas for the Access Channel and the Reverse Traffic Channels with Radio Con-
figurations RC1 and RC2 are identical to the ones in IS-95. Thus, the cell support of the
open loop for the Access Channel and R-FCH with RC1 or RC2 is the same as that used in
2G. For other Radio Configurations, there are open loop parameters required by IS-2000
that are not in 2G. These new parameters are needed to compute the average output power
of the R-PICH after the mobile has used the access channel.
For RC 3 and 4, when the last channel operated before the R-PICH is the 2G Access Chan-
nel (R-ACH), the mean R-PICH output power in dBm is:
mean output power = mean R-ACH power - 8.5 + RLGAIN_ADJ
where RLGAIN_ADJ is calculated as the translation parameter rpich_offset + 8.5. The
8.5dB term in the output power expression is the difference in the 2G Access Channel
power offset (-73 for cellular, -76 for PCS) and the RC3 and RC4 power offset (-81.5 for
cellular, -84.5 for PCS) [IS-2000.2]. When the mean R-PICH output power is known, the
R-FCH power is calculated from R-PICH using the translation parameter rfch_offset.
3G Reverse Link Closed Loop Power Control
The 3G Reverse Link Closed Loop Power Control process, as seen in the figure, is similar
to the process used in 2G.
One major difference is that the base station measures the R-PICH E
c
/I
0
, not the R-FCH
E
b
/N
T
. If the received E
c
/I
0
is less than a setpoint, the base station sends a power-up com-
mand to the mobile. If the received E
c
/I
0
is greater than the setpoint, the base station sends
a power-down command to the mobile. This is done at a frequency of 800Hz, or every
1.25 ms. In addition to this inner loop, an outer loop also runs, adjusting the E
c
/I
0
setpoint
based on the target FER.
When a bad frame is received, the setpoint is increased by a fixed amount, upadj =
vrpc_stepup_sp. When a good frame is received, the setpoint is decreased by a fixed
amount, downadj, which is derived from upadj.
Initialize E
c
/I
0
setpoint
Measured
E
c
/I
0
> setpoint?
20ms frame received?
Is setpoint > pmax? Is setpoint < pmin?
Send power up
command to mobile
Send power down
command to mobile
Calculate new E
b
/N
T
setpoint
Measure E
c
/I
0
on R-PICH
Setpoint = pmax Setpoint = pmin
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes
Outer loop
(every 20ms)
Inner loop
(every 1.25ms)
DATA
R-FCH power control for 3G-1X data calls uses the same algorithms and procedures used
by the R-FCH for 3G1X voice calls. However, data calls and voice calls exhibit different
performance requirements; therefore, some of the translation parameter values used in
data are different than the ones used in voice calls. For instance, data and voice calls use
different R-FCH target frame error rates, which modify the values of other power control
parameters (e.g., initial E
b
/N
T
setpoint).
Unlike the forward link with two inner loops, IS-2000 supports only one inner loop on the
reverse link. Therefore, in order to power control the R-SCH at 800 Hz, the mobile applies
the inner loop power control commands to the R-FCH and the R-SCH. However, the
mobile has two outer loops, one for R-FCH and one for R-SCH. This is needed due to the
differences between R-FCH and R-SCH (e.g., target FER).
Data
Data use same process as voice
Different set of translation parameters
Inner Loop
R-FCH and R-SCH use same Inner Loop
Outer Loop
R-FCH and R-SCH use individual Outer Loop
3G-1X REVERSE POWER CONTROL FOR
VOICE AND DATA
tion parameters.
Power Control Active
(rpc3g_onoff)
Form: cell3g
Allows the user to turn on or off the reverse link closed-

loop power control of R-FCH and R-SCH for 3G1X voice
and data calls.
Range: y or n
Power Offset of Reverse Pilot (R-
PICH) to 2G Access (dB)
(rpich_offset)
Form: cell3g
This field is the Reverse Pilot Channel to Access channel

power offset in dB units relative to the 2G Access
Channel. This field is used for reverse open loop power
control of R-FCH for 3G1X data calls.
Range: -16.5 - -1.5 dB in 1.0 increments
Power Offset of R-FCH at 9.6
kbps to R-PICH (dB)
(rfch_offset)
Form: cell3g
This field is the R-FCH at 9.6 kbps and 20 ms frame to

Reverse Pilot Channel power offset relative to the reverse
pilot channel in 1/8 dB units.
Range: -0.250 - 7.625 dB in 0.125 increments
VOICE AND DATA
AUTOPLEX
System Cell ___

Power Control (PC) Configuration Information

CDMA 3G1X Reverse PC for Voice and Data:

Power Control Active........................................ 9) _
Power Offset of Reverse Pilot (R-PICH) to 2G Access (dB).... 10) _____
Power Offset of R-FCH at 9.6 kbps to R-PICH (dB)............ 11) _____
VOICE AND R-FCH VOICE
tion parameters.
Adjustment Gain for 1/8 Rate
Frames, RC3/RC4 (dB)
(rlag_8thrc3)
(rlag_8thrc4)
Form: ecp3g
Indicates the Attribute Adjustment Gain for eighth rate

frames (transmission rate 1500 bits/sec) for RC3.
(RC3) -6.000 - 6.000
(RC4) -6.000 - 6.000
Eb/Nt Step Up Size (dB)
(vrpc_stepup_sp)
Form: cell3g
Defines the size of the step up in Eb/Nt performed by

the R-FCH outer loop for 3G1X voice calls.
Range: 0 - 1.00 dB in 0.25 increments
R-FCH Voice FER (%) (RC3/RC4)
(vrpc_rc3fer)
(vrpc_rc4fer)
Form: cell3g
Defines the target frame error rate for the R-FCH for
3G1X voice calls in reverse RC3/RC4.
Range: in 0.5 increments
(RC3) 0.2 and 0.5 - 3.0%
(RC4) 0.2 and 0.5 - 6.0%
Eb/Nt Setpoint (dB) - Min (RC3/
RC4)
(vrpc_rc3mnsp)
(vrpc_rc4mnsp)
Form: cell3g
Defines the minimum value of the outer loop Eb/Nt

setpoint used by the R-FCH for 3G1X voice calls for
reverse RC3/RC4.
(RC3) 1.00 - 5.00 dB
(RC4) 1.00 - 5.00 dB
Eb/Nt Setpoint (dB) - Init (RC3/RC4)
(vrpc_rc3isp)
(vrpc_rc4isp)
Form: cell3g
Defines the initial value of the outer loop Eb/Nt

reverse RC3/RC4.
(RC3) 3.00 - 8.00 dB
(RC4) 3.00 - 8.00 dB
Eb/Nt Setpoint (dB) - Max (RC3/
RC4)
(vrpc_rc3mxsp)
(vrpc_rc4mxsp)
Form: cell3g
Defines the maximum value of the outer loop Eb/Nt

reverse RC3/RC4.
(RC3) 5.00 - 12.00 dB
(RC4) 5.00 - 12.00 dB
VOICE AND R-FCH VOICE
AUTOPLEX
System
CDMA 3G1X Power Control - Voice

Forward Power Control:
F-FCH PC Bit to Traffic Bit Ratio for RC3, RC4, RC5 (dB):
- simplex ............ 8) _____
- 2-way .............. 9) _____
- 3-way or more ..... 10) _____
Reverse Open Loop:
Adjustment Gain for 1/8 Rate Frames, RC3 (dB) ............ 11) ___

3G1X CDMA Power Control - Data
F-FCH PC Bit to Traffic Bit Ratio (dB): RC3
- simplex ........... 14) _____
- 2-way ............. 15) _____
- 3-way or more ..... 16) _____
AUTOPLEX
System Cell ___

CDMA 3G1X Reverse PC Fundamental Channel (R-FCH) - Voice

Outer Loop:
Eb/Nt Step Up Size (dB)....................................... 99) ____

RC3 RC4
FER (%)............................................. 100)___ 101)___
Eb/Nt Setpoint (dB) - Min........................... 102)_____ 103)_____
- Init.......................... 104)_____ 105)_____
- Max........................... 106)_____ 107)_____
R-FCH DATA
tion parameters.
R-FCH Data FER (%)
(drpc_fchrc3fer)
Form: cell3g
Defines the target frame error rate for the R-FCH for
3G1X data calls in reverse RC3.
Range: 0.2 and 0.5 - 7.5% in 0.5 increments
Eb/Nt Setpoint (dB) - Min (RC3)
(drpc_fchrc3msp)
Form: cell3g
Defines the target minimum value of the outer loop Eb/

Nt setpoint used by the R-FCH for 3G1X data calls for
reverse RC3.
Range: 1.00 - 5.00 dB in 0.25 increments
Eb/Nt Setpoint (dB) - Init (RC3)
(drpc_fchrc3isp)
Form: cell3g
Defines the target initial value of the outer loop Eb/Nt

setpoint used by the R-FCH for 3G1X data calls for
reverse RC3.
Eb/Nt Setpoint (dB) - Max (RC3)
(drpc_fchrc3xsp)
Form: cell3g
Defines the target maximum value of the outer loop

Eb/Nt setpoint used by the R-FCH for 3G1X data calls
for reverse RC3.
R-FCH DATA
AUTOPLEX
System Cell ___

CDMA 3G1X Reverse PC Fundamental Channel (R-FCH) - Data

FER (%)........................................................ 110)___

RC3
Eb/Nt Setpoint (dB) - Min...................................... 111)_____
- Init..................................... 112)_____
- Max...................................... 113)_____
R-SCH DATA
tion parameters
.
Power Offset, Target FER (dB) - Low/
Med/High
(dlrsch_2_rpich)
(dmrsch_2_rpich)
(dhrsch_2_rpich)
Form: cell3g
This field allows to set the power offset in 1/8 dB of R-

SCH relative to R-PICH used for data calls when the
R-SCH target frame error rate is low/medium/high.
(low) -4.000 - 3.875 dB
(medium) -4.000 - 3.875 dB
(high) -4.000 - 3.875 dB
Outer Loop Eb/Nt Step Up Size (dB)
(drpc_s_stepup)
Form: cell3g
Defines the size of the step up in Eb/Nt performed by

the R-SCH outer loop for 3G1X data calls.
Eb/Nt Setpoint (dB) - Min (RC3)
(drpc_src3msp)
Form: cell3g

setpoint used by the R-SCH for 3G1X data calls for
reverse RC3.
Eb/Nt Setpoint (dB) - Max (RC3)
(drpc_src3xsp)
Form: cell3g

setpoint used by the R-SCH for 3G1X data calls for
reverse RC3.
R-SCH Data FER (%) - 19.2/38.4/
76.8/153.6 kbps (RC3)
(drpc_s192rc3)
(drpc_s384rc3)
(drpc_s768rc3)
(drpc_s1563rc3)
Form: cell3g
Defines the target frame error rate for the R-SCH for
3G1X data calls in reverse RC3 for a data rate of 19.2/
38.4/76.8/153.6 kbps.
Range:
(19.2 kbps) 0.2 and 0.5 - 10.0% in 0.5 increments
(38.4 kbps) 0.2 and 0.5 - 10.0% in 0.5 increments, and
11 - 15% in 1 increments
(76.8 kbps) 0.2 and 0.5 - 10.0% in 0.5 increments, 11 -
15% in 1 increments, and 18, 21%
(153.6 kbps) 0.2 and 0.5 - 10.0% in 0.5 increments,
11 - 15% in 1 increments, and 18, 21, 24, 27, 30%
R-SCH DATA
AUTOPLEX
System Cell ___

CDMA 3G1X Reverse PC Supplemental Channel (R-SCH) - Data

Power Offset, Target FER (dB) - Low............................ 116) ______
- Med............................ 117) ______
- High........................... 118) ______
Outer Loop Eb/Nt Step Up Size (dB)............................. 119) ____

RC3
Eb/Nt Setpoint (dB) - Min...................................... 120) _____
- Max...................................... 121) _____
FER (%) - 19.2 kbps.......................................... 122) ____
- 38.4 kbps.......................................... 123) ____
- 76.8 kbps.......................................... 124) ____
- 153.6 kbps.......................................... 125) ____
R-SCH DATA
(CONT.)
tion parameters
Power Offset, Target FER (dB) - Low/
Med/High
(dlrsch_2_rpich)
(dmrsch_2_rpich)
(dhrsch_2_rpich)
Form: cell3g
This field allows to set the power offset in 1/8 dB of R-

SCH relative to R-PICH used for data calls when the
R-SCH target frame error rate is low/medium/high.
(low) -4.000 - 3.875 dB
(medium) -4.000 - 3.875 dB
(high) -4.000 - 3.875 dB
R-SCH DATA
(CONT.)
AUTOPLEX
System Cell ___

CDMA 3G1X Reverse PC Supplemental Channel (R-SCH) - Data

Power Offset, Target FER (dB) - Low............................ 116) ______
- Med............................ 117) ______
- High........................... 118) ______
Outer Loop Eb/Nt Step Up Size (dB)............................. 119) ____

RC3
Eb/Nt Setpoint (dB) - Min...................................... 120) _____
- Max...................................... 121) _____
FER (%) - 19.2 kbps.......................................... 122) ____
- 38.4 kbps.......................................... 123) ____
- 76.8 kbps.......................................... 124) ____
- 153.6 kbps.......................................... 125) ____
UPLINK POWER CONTROL SUMMARY
UPLINK POWER CONTROL SUMMARY
Autonomous (reverse open loop) power control
Responds to slow fading path loss
Mobile measures received RF energy
Mobile adjusts output power based on measured
signal strength
Reverse closed loop power control
Responds to fast fading
Base station measures received E
b
/N
T
Base station compares received E
b
/N
T
to a E
b
/N
T

setpoint
Base station tells mobile to power up or down in 1 dB
steps 16 times every frame
Base station adjust the E
b
/N
T
setpoint every frame
In soft handoff the mobile will only increase its power if all
the legs are telling the mobile to power up.
3G-1X uses same concept as 2G
R-PICH is measured; therefore, a conversion be-
tween R-PICH E
c
/I
0
to R-FCH E
b
/N
T
must be done
When a R-SCH is present, it uses the same inner-
loop as the R-FCH
Knowledge Check
Question 1.
What is another name for Autonomous Power Control?
A. Dynamic Power Control
B. Open Loop Power Control
C. Closed Loop Power Control
D. Base Station Power Control
S
Answer: b
Question 2.
What is another name for Base Station Directed Power Control?
A. Dynamic Power Control
B. Open Loop Power Control
C. Closed Loop Power Control
D. Base Station Power Control
S
Answer: c
Question 3.
During Autonomous Power Control, the ______ measure total signal power received from
all ______. The combined signals are used to adjust transmitter power of the ______. The
stronger the combined received signals, the lower the output power.
A. channel elements
B. base stations
C. mobiles
D. MSC
S
Answer: During Autonomous Power Control, the __c__ measure total signal
power received from all __b__. The combined signals are used to adjust
transmitter power of the __c__. The stronger the combined received signals, the
lower the output power.
Knowledge Check
Question 3.
What is the assumption that is made for the uplink power control?
A. The noise level is constant over a frame
B. The mobiles transmitter responds correctly to the autonomous power controls
instructions
C. Mobiles only receive RF power from its serving base station
D. Power control can achieve a constant, optimum power level
S
Answer: a
Question 4.
What are the translation parameters pmin and pmin2 (E
b
/N
0
Set Point Minimum Rate Set
1 and 2 respectively) used for?
A. To keep the mobile from turning itself off
B. To save mobile battery power
C. To help power control to reach the right power level when the required E
b
/N
0
is rap-
idly increased
D. To maintain optimum E
b
/N
0
S
Answer: c
Downlink Power Control
BASE STATION POWER CONTROL
The performance of the mobile unit is limited by the level of interference received from
both other users in the same cell, as well as users from neighboring cells. In the example
shown, mobile 2 (M2) receives a signal S2 from base station 2, and interference from base
station 1 (I2). The signal to impairment ratio for mobile 2 is S2/I2. Now, if mobile 1 (M1)
can operate at a lower signal from base station 1 and still have acceptable voice quality,
then the interference to mobile M2 will be lower, improving the voice quality to M2.
Downlink power control attempts to reduce the base station power to the minimum
required for each user served by that base station and, therefore, reduces interference to all
other users in the same cell and neighboring cells.
BASE STATION POWER CONTROL
I2
I1
S1 S2
BS1 BS2
M1 M2
Signal strength
at mobile M1
Signal strength
at mobile M2
Original
S/I
S1
I1
I2
S2
M1 M2
New S/I
W
i
t
h
o
u
t

f
o
r
w
a
r
d

p
o
w
e
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
W
i
t
h

f
o
r
w
a
r
d

p
o
w
e
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
DOWNLINK POWER CONTROL
Strategy
Downlink power control, sometimes called forward link power control (FPC), adjusts
transmit power at the base station for each traffic channel independently. Mobiles with
favorable propagation and interference conditions may require lower power on the aver-
age, but mobiles with less favorable propagation and interference conditions may require
more power on the average. The FPC algorithm attempts to achieve the desired frame
error rate, FER, on the signal received at each mobile.
The base station uses frame error information reported by a mobile to adjust the base sta-
tion traffic channel transmitted power. The mobile reports either the frame error rate to the
base station via a Power Measurement Report Message (PMRM) for Rate Set 1 (8K
vocoder and EVRC), or that the last received frame had an error via the frame erasure bit,
for Rate Set 2.
Strategy
Mobile
detects downlink frame errors, and
reports to base station
Base Station
adjusts traffic channel power to maintain FER
objective
Simplified
The downlink power control attempts to set each traffic channel transmit power to the
minimum required to maintain the desired frame error rate at the mobile.
At the very beginning of a call, that is, when the first traffic channel element begins trans-
mitting, the transmit power is initialized according to the value specified for the nom_gain
or nom2_gain translation parameters.
Any additional traffic channel elements that may be added to the call, soft handoff, would
not have the transmit power initialized based on translation parameters
*
.
The mobile detects frame errors and sends a report to the base station, and the base station
either increases power when an error is reported or decreases power when no error occurs.
The base station also restricts the power dynamic range so the transmitter power never
exceeds a maximum that would cause excessive interference and possibly reduce down-
link capacity, or falls below the minimum required to combat rapidly increased interfer-
ence.
The downlink power control algorithm uses different frame error information from the
mobile, depending on whether Rate Set 1 or Rate Set 2 is being used. There are indepen-
dent translation parameters stored in the MSC for each rate set so performance for each
rate set can be optimized.
For Rate Set 1 the mobile reports frame error information in the Power Measurement
Report Message (PMRM) whenever the frame errors exceed a threshold. For Rate Set 2
the mobile sets the Erasure Indicator Bit (EIB) in the frames transmitted to the base sta-
tion. The EIB indicates whether or not the mobile received a bad frame.
* The power used for a new soft handoff leg will have the same pilot to traffic channel gain ratio as existing
soft handoff legs.
Simplified
Initialize Mobile
with power control
reporting frames &
power report delay
Initialize traffic
channel power
Receive frame error
information from
mobile
Frame
error rate >
Set power to
Decrease traffic
channel power
Is
power > maximum
Is
power < minimum
maximum allowed
power
Set power to
minimum allowed
power
No No
No Yes
Yes Yes
? ?
?
Increase traffic
channel power
required
(Rate Set 1 ONLY)
Rate Set 1 Implementation
The downlink power control algorithm uses frame error rate information from the mobile
to adjust the base station traffic channel output power. The mobile can either report the
frame error rate periodically or when the frame error rate exceeds a threshold set by the
base station. The Lucent Technologies algorithm uses the threshold reporting method to
reduce reverse traffic signaling frames when the mobile is receiving adequate signals. A
voice traffic frame is replaced by a power control measurement report only when needed.
The base station decreases the traffic channel power (translation parameter fer_small),
after waiting for an interval (translation parameter fpc_step) and not receiving a report.
The algorithm uses two frame error rate thresholds to determine the amount of power
increase. When the reported frame error rate exceeds the fer_small threshold, but is less
than the upper threshold (translation parameter fer_big), the base station increases the traf-
fic channel power by an amount determined by small_delta_up. The base station increases
the traffic channel power by 2 small_delta_up when the frame error rate exceeds the
upper threshold. Exceeding the lower threshold increases the traffic channel power a
smaller amount than exceeding the upper threshold, so the downlink power converges rap-
idly without overshooting the optimum power.
Selecting appropriate parameters allows the cellular engineer to adjust the traffic channel
power to the minimum required for adequate voice quality, reducing interference to other
users and maximizing system capacity.
Since the 8K vocoder and EVRC vocoders behave differently from the Rate Set 2 vocoder
to frame errors, different algorithms are used to optimize the performance. The algorithms
use different FER information from the mobile and have separate translation parameters.
FER < lower threshold (fer_small)
2 small_delta_up
FER > upper threshold (fer_big)
small_delta_up
FER > lower threshold (fer_small)
fpc_step
delta_down
delta_down = (fpc_step/20) 5 ffer (small_delta_up/1500)
POWER CONTROL IN HANDOFF
Rate Set 1
When a mobile is in handoff with two or more sectors, gain adjustments on each active leg
are essentially controlled by the primary leg. When a secondary leg is established, the ini-
tial gain of the secondary leg is equal to the current gain of the primary leg. If a PMRM is
received, the primary leg processes the PMRM and determines the gain adjustment to be
used by each secondary leg. If no PMRM is received for an extended period of time, down
adjustments are performed on each active leg at a rate determined by the fpc_step setting
of that leg, as described for simplex operation.
In order to maximize the forward link performance gain achieved through the maximal
ratio combining performed by a mobile during handoff, it is necessary to keep the traffic
digital gain to pilot digital gain ratio balanced for each active leg. In other words, the traf-
fic digital gain to pilot digital gain ratio for all active legs should be equal during handoff.
As a result of this requirement, it is crucial that certain key Rate Set 1 FPC parameters are
set properly in order to maintain a consistent traffic digital gain to pilot digital gain ratio.
Mainly, nom_gain, min_gain, max_gain, and small_delta_up should be set according to
the pilot digital gain setting in each sector.
Normally, the pilot digital gain is set uniformly (set to the same value) in each sector. In
this case, nom_gain, min_gain, max_gain, and small_delta_up must be set uniformly (set
to the same value) in each sector. However, in some cases, it is necessary to fine-tune the
pilot power of a particular sector by adjusting the pilot digital gain. Changing the pilot dig-
ital gain requires scaling nom_gain, min_gain, max_gain, and small_delta_up appropri-
ately in order to maintain a consistent traffic digital gain to pilot digital gain ratio. The
table shows the proper Rate Set 1 FPC gain scalings for each allowed pilot digital gain
value in the range between 96 (corresponding to 1 dB below the pilot power at the default
value of 108) and 121 (corresponding to 1 dB above the pilot power at the default value of
108).
Starting with CDMA Cell Release 13.0, to better maintain the same pilot-to-traffic ratio
on all legs in soft handoff, the primary leg passes its pilot gain and the new traffic digital
gain determined from the PMRM to all its secondary legs. The secondary legs scale the
respective traffic digital gains as shown in the following.
traffic_gain_secondary = traffic_gain_primary pilot_gain_secondary/pilot_gain_primary
Rate Set 1
Pilot
Digital
Gain Nom_gain Min_gain Max_gain Small_delta_up
96 51 34 71 4
97 51 34 72 4
98 52 34 73 5
99 52 34 73 5
100 53 34 74 5
101 53 34 75 5
102 54 34 76 5
103 54 34 76 5
104 55 34 77 5
105 55 34 78 5
106 56 34 79 5
107 56 34 79 5
108 57 34 80 5
109 58 34 81 5
110 58 35 81 5
111 59 35 82 5
112 59 35 83 5
113 60 36 84 5
114 60 36 84 5
115 61 36 85 5
116 61 37 86 5
117 62 37 87 5
118 62 37 87 5
119 63 37 88 6
120 63 38 89 6
121 64 38 90 6
Proper 8K FPC Gain Scalings According to Pilot Digital Gain
The downlink power control algorithm uses mobile frame error information, the erasure
bit in the uplink traffic frame, to adjust the base station traffic channel output power. The
base station decreases the traffic channel power when the mobile sends a traffic frame
with the erasure bit set to false, indicating the last traffic frame received from the base sta-
tion was good. When the base station receives a traffic frame with the erasure bit set to
true, the algorithm increases the base station traffic channel power. The increase in power
is set by the up_adj translation. The decrease in power is calculated from the desired frame
error rate and the up_adj parameter.
down_adj = (up_adj ffer2)/100
Selecting appropriate parameters allows the cellular engineer to adjust the traffic channel
power to the minimum required for adequate voice quality, reducing interference to other
users and maximizing system capacity. In order to reduce the likelihood of long frame
error bursts, the parameters should be chosen so the traffic channel will be transmitting
maximum power after five consecutive bad frames. This means there should be a maxi-
mum of five up adjustments between the minimum (min2_gain) and maximum power
(max2_gain) allowed for the traffic channel.
Good uplink
Bad uplink traffic frame
Good uplink traffic
20 msec.
down_adj
down_adj = (up_adj ffer2)/100
with erasure bit false
with erasure bit true
up_adj
received with erasure
frame received
bit unknown
frame received
Rate Set 2
When a mobile is in handoff with two or more sectors, 13K FPC operates on each active
leg using the parameter settings associated with the serving sector of that leg. When a sec-
ondary leg is established, the initial gain of the secondary leg is equal to the current gain of
the primary leg. Subsequent gain adjustments are performed on each active leg in the same
manner described for simplex operation.
In order to maximize the forward link performance gain achieved through the maximal
ratio combining performed by a mobile during handoff, it is necessary to keep the traffic
digital gain to pilot digital gain ratio balanced for each active leg. In other words, the traf-
fic digital gain to pilot digital gain ratio for all active legs should be equal during handoff.
As a result of this requirement, it is crucial that certain key 13K FPC parameters are set
properly in order to maintain a consistent traffic digital gain to pilot digital gain ratio.
First, ffer2 should be set uniformly (set to the same value) in each sector. Second,
nom2_gain, min2_gain, max2_gain, and up_adj should be set according to the pilot digital
gain setting in each sector.
Normally, the pilot digital gain is set uniformly (set to the same value) in each sector. In
this case, nom2_gain, min2_gain, max2_gain, and up_adj must be set uniformly (set to the
same value) in each sector. However, in some cases, it is necessary to fine-tune the pilot
power of a particular sector by adjusting the pilot digital gain. Changing the pilot digital
gain requires scaling nom2_gain, min2_gain, max2_gain, and up_adj appropriately in
order to maintain a consistent traffic digital gain to pilot digital gain ratio. The table shows
the proper 13K FPC gain scalings for each allowed pilot digital gain value in the range
between 96 (corresponding to 1 dB below the pilot power at the default value of 108) and
121 (corresponding to 1 dB above the pilot power at the default value of 108).
Starting with CDMA Cell Release 11.0, a subset of 13K FPC parameter settings (ffer2,
min2_gain, max2_gain, and up_adj) are passed from the primary leg to each of the active
secondary legs involved in handoff. As a result, each active leg will use a common set of
13K FPC parameter settings as dictated by the settings of the primary leg. If a primary
transfer occurs, and the new primary leg has different 13K FPC parameter settings than
the original primary leg, the 13K FPC parameter settings of the new primary leg will be
used by the active secondary legs. This capability gives the freedom to optimize this sub-
set of 13K FPC parameters on a regionalized (per cluster) basis.
In CDMA Cell Release 13.0, the primary leg also passes its pilot gain and traffic digital
gain to the secondary leg. As a result, a consistent ratio of traffic digital gain to pilot digi-
tal gain can be maintained even with mismatched pilot gain settings.
Rate Set 2
Pilot
Digital
Gain Nom2_gain Min2_gain Max2_gain Up_adj
96 85 30 85 13
97 86 30 86 13
98 87 30 87 14
99 88 30 88 14
100 89 30 89 14
101 90 30 90 14
102 91 30 91 14
103 92 30 92 14
104 92 30 92 14
105 93 30 93 15
106 94 30 94 15
107 95 30 95 15
108 96 30 96 15
109 97 30 97 15
110 98 31 98 15
111 99 31 99 15
112 100 31 100 16
113 100 31 100 16
114 101 32 101 16
115 102 32 102 16
116 103 32 103 16
117 104 33 104 16
118 105 33 105 16
119 106 33 106 17
120 107 33 107 17
121 108 34 108 17
Proper 13K FPC Gain Scalings According to Pilot Digital Gain
flpc_enable, nom_gain, nom2_gain,
ffer, ffer2, small_delta_up, up_adj
tion parameters.

Enable Forward Link Power Control
(flpc_enable)
Form: ceqface, ecp
specifies whether forward link power control is
enabled.
Range:
y = yes, enable
n = no, do not enable
Nominal Traffic Channel Gain (dgu)
- Rate Set 1
(nom_gain)
Form: ceqface, ecp
specifies the nominal traffic gain in dgus for Rate Set 1.

Range: 34 108 dgu
Nominal Traffic Channel Gain (dgu)
- Rate Set 2
(nom2_gain)
Form: ceqface, ecp
specifies the nominal traffic gain in dgus for Rate Set 2.

Range: 40 108 dgu
Forward Frame Error Rate (%)
- Rate Set 1
(ffer)
Form: ceqface, ecp
specifies the desired frame error rate (FER) for the for-
ward link to calculate delta_down for the forward
power control (FPC) algorithm for Rate Set 1.
Forward Frame Error Rate (%)
- Rate Set 2
(ffer2)
Form: ceqface, ecp
specifies the desired FER for the forward link to calcu-
late delta_down for the FPC algorithm for Rate Set 2.
Small Gain Increment (dgu)
- Rate Set 1
(small_delta_up)
(Form: ceqface, ecp
defines the increase in gain when fer_big fer_est
fer_small for Rate Set 1.
Range: 0 40 dgu
Small Gain Increment (dgu)
- Rate Set 2
(up_adj)
Form: ceqface, ecp
defines the increase in gain when fer_big fer_est
fer_small for Rate Set 2.
Range: 1 50
flpc_enable, nom_gain, nom2_gain,
ffer, ffer2, small_delta_up, up_adj

AUTOPLEX
Forward Link:
Pilot Channel Gain (dgu)..................................... 184) ___
Paging Channel Gain (dgu)................................. 185) ___
Sync Channel Gain (dgu).................................... 186) ___
Traffic Channel Voice Activity Factor .................. 187) ___
Enable Forward Link Power Control ............... +188) ___
Loading Threshold for High Capacity (%) ........... +189) ___
Rate
Set 1
Rate
Set 2
Nominal Traffic Channel Gain (dgu)................ +190) ____ +191) ____
Forward Frame Error Rate (%) ......................... +192) ____ +193) ____
Small Gain Increment (dgu) ............................. +194) ____ +195) ____
Target Frame Error Rate for High Capacity (%).. +196) ____ +197) ____
Gain Threshold for High Capacity (dgu).............. +198) ____ +199) ____
Rate Set 1
pwrrepdelay, pwrrepframes, fer_small, fer_big
tion parameters.
Power Report Delay
(pwrrepdelay)
Form: ceqface, ecp
used to map to the period that mobiles should wait
after sending a power measurement report message
(PMRM) before restarting the counter.
Range: 0 31
Power Control Reporting Frames
(pwrrepframes)
Form: ceqface, ecp
used by the mobile to calculate the number of frames
over which the mobile must count frame errors using
the following equation: Number of frames counted =
[2
(pwrrepframes 2)
5]
Range: 0 12
Lower Forward Link FER Threshold (%)
(fer_small)
Form: ceqface, ecp
defines the minimum fer_est percentage required to
increase gain by delta_up. This parameter must be
less than the value of the Upper Forward Link FER
Threshold.
Range: 0.2 5.0 percent in increments of 0.2
Upper Forward Link FER Threshold (%)
(fer_big)
Form: ceqface, ecp
defines the maximum fer_est percentage required to
increase gain by big_delta_up. This parameter must
be greater than the value of the Lower Forward Link
FER Threshold.
Range: 2.0 10.0 percent in increments of 0.2
Frames Frames
0 = 5
1 = 7 (.07) 7 = 56 (.57)
2 = 10 8 = 80
3 = 14 (.14) 9 = 113 (.14)
4 = 20 10 = 160
5 = 28 (.28) 11 = 6 (.27)
6 = 40 12 = 320
Rate Set 1
pwrrepdelay, pwrrepframes, fer_small, fer_big

Max Access Channel Message Capsule Size (frames)...................................... +218) ___
Access Channel Preamble Length (frames)....................................................... +219) ___
- Backoff Range............................................................................................ +221) ___
- Sequence Backoff Range........................................................................... +222) ___
Rate Rate
E
b
/N
0
- Minimum (dB) ............................................................................................. +223) ___+224) ___
- Maximum (dB) ............................................................................................ +225) ___+226) ___
- Minimum (dgu)............................................................................................ +227) ___+228) ___
- Maximum (dgu)........................................................................................... +229) ___+230) ___
Power Report Delay ......................................................................................... +231) ___
Power Control Reporting Frames ................................................................... +232) ___
Lower Forward Link FER Threshold (%) ........................................................ +233) ___
Upper Forward Link FER Threshold (%) ........................................................ +234) ___
AUTOPLEX
Rate Set 1
fpc_step
tion parameters.
Forward Power Control Timer Value
(ms)
(fpc_step)
Form: ceqface, ecp
defines the timer value in the FPC algorithm used to

determine if a base station should decrease power to
the mobile.
Range: 20 5000 ms in increments of 20
Rate Set 1
fpc_step

Forward Power Control Timer Value (ms) ............................................................ +238) ___
AUTOPLEX
min_gain, min2_gain, max_gain, max2_gain
tion parameters.
Traffic Channel Gain -
Minimum (dgu) - Rate Set 1
(min_gain)
Form: ceqface, ecp
defines the minimum traffic channel gain setting allow-

able for FPC for Rate Set 1. This parameter must be less
than the value of Traffic Channel Gain - Maximum (dgu)
- Rate Set 1.
Range: 34 50 dgu
Minimum (dgu) - Rate Set 2
(min2_gain)
Form: ceqface, ecp
defines the minimum traffic channel gain setting allow-

able for FPC for Rate Set 2. This parameter must be less
than the value of Traffic Channel Gain - Maximum (dgu)
- Rate Set 2.
Range: 30 50 dgu
Maximum (dgu) - Rate Set 1
(max_gain)
Form: ceqface, ecp
defines the maximum traffic channel gain setting allow-

able for FPC expressed as a percentage of pilot channel
gain for Rate Set 1. This parameter must be greater than
the value of Traffic Channel Gain - Minimum (dgu) -
Rate 1.
Range: 50 108 dgu
Maximum (dgu) - Rate Set 2
(max2_gain)
Form: ceqface, ecp
defines the maximum traffic channel gain setting allow-

able for FPC expressed as a percentage of pilot channel
gain for Rate Set 2. This parameter must be greater than
the value of Traffic Channel Gain - Minimum (dgu) -
Rate 2.
Range: 50 127 dgu
min_gain, min2_gain, max_gain, max2_gain

Max Access Channel Message Capsule Size (frames) ..................................... +218) ___
Access Channel Preamble Length (frames) ...................................................... +219) ___
- Backoff Range............................................................................................ +221) ___
- Sequence Backoff Range .......................................................................... +222) ___
Rate Rate
E
b
/N
0
- Minimum (dB)............................................................................................. +223) ___+224) ___
- Maximum (dB)............................................................................................ +225) ___+226) ___
- Minimum (dgu) ......................................................................................... +227) ___+228) ___
- Maximum (dgu)......................................................................................... +229) ___+230) ___
Power Report Delay........................................................................................... +231) ___
Power Control Reporting Frames....................................................................... +232) ___
Lower Forward Link FER Threshold (%)............................................................ +233) ___
Upper Forward Link FER Threshold (%)............................................................ +234) ___
AUTOPLEX
CDMAPAFL
1: Power Measurement Report Messages Received 8K Vocoder
This message is sent from the mobile to the cell site as a result of threshold reporting. It
reflects the frame error rate on the forward traffic channels. The larger this count, the
larger the forward frame error rate. However, one cannot precisely determine the forward
frame error rate from this count for a number of reasons. For example, the CDMA mobile
will not increment its frame error counter for a specified time period following a measure-
ment report (PWR_REP_DELAY 4 frames as per TIA IS-95 Section 6.6.4.1.1).This
count is pegged for 8K vocoder operation only.
2: Power Measurement Report Messages Received EVRC Vocoder
Similar to Power Measurement Report Messages Received 8K Vocoder but for EVRC
vocoder.
6: Number of Frame Erasures on Forward Traffic Channel 13K Vocoder
This count is pegged only at the primary sector of the primary cell site. It reflects the
frame error rate on the forward traffic channels. This count is pegged whenever a frame is
received on the reverse traffic channel that contains the Erasure Indicator bit indicating an
error on the forward traffic channel. This count is pegged for 13K vocoder operation only.
7: Full Rate Error Frames on Forward Traffic Channel 13K Vocoder
Total number of full rate frames transmitted at a particular sector on the Forward Traffic
Channel which were corrupted while in transit over the air-link. This count is pegged for
13K vocoder operation only.
CDMAPAF
36: Average Squared Digital Gain on Forward Traffic Channels
During the conversation state of each call, the digital gain of the associated forward traffic
channels are sampled every two seconds. The squares of these samples are then averaged
over all the active traffic channels and normalized by the number of users for the given
sector. Thus, this count provides the average power on a per user basis.
41: Forward Erasure Bit Counter 13K Vocoder
This count will be pegged only at the primary sector of the primary cell site. This count
reflects burst errors (three or more consecutive frames in error) on the forward traffic
channels. This count is pegged for 13K vocoder operation only.
CDMAPAFL
1: Power Measurement Report Messages Received
8K Vocoder
2: Power Measurement Report Messages Received
EVRC Vocoder
6: Number of Frame Erasures on Forward Traffic
Channel 13K Vocoder
7: Full Rate Error Frames on Forward Traffic Channel
13K Vocoder
CDMAPAF
36: Average Squared Digital Gain on Forward Traffic
Channels
41: Forward Erasure Bit Counter 13K Vocoder
CDMAPAFCARR
58: Average Power on Forward Link
This count is the value of the average power on the forward link. It includes both traffic
and overhead channels, and takes into account the Voice Activity Factor (VAF), the BCR
attenuation factor and the Aggregate Overload Control (AOC) scaling factor.
59: Digital Gain Unit on Forward Traffic Channels
This count is the value of the average squared digital gain on forward traffic channels. The
digital gain determines the transmitter gain for a CDMA forward traffic channel that is
associated with a CDMA call.
Every 2 seconds, the square of the digital gain is sampled for each active leg for each call.
The primary cell site and the secondary cell site(s) sample gains only for legs controlled
by them. Gains are sampled only for traffic channels. The squared gain samples and the
counts of active (non-zero) samples are accumulated on a per path (sector) basis. This
includes cases in which a call is in a softer handoff. The accumulated totals are used to
compute (hourly) per path (per CCC per sector) averages. Per CCC per sector averages are
used to determine sector/carrier averages at the RCC.
This count provides lower granularity for the Average Squared Digital Gain on Forward
Traffic Channels count.
This count has a value of zero for all hours in which Aggregate Overload Control (AOC)
has been enabled for the entire hour. If AOC was enabled for any portion of the hour, it is
acceptable for this count to have a non-zero value.
1: Number of Frames Transmitted on the Forward Traffic Channel
Number of full, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 rate frames transmitted on the forward traffic channel.
CDMAPAFCARR
58: Average Power on Forward Link
59: Digital Gain Unit on Forward Traffic Channels
1: Number of Frames Transmitted on the Forward
Traffic Channel
3G-1X DOWNLINK POWER CONTROL
MOBILE
Power Control, specifically Forward Link Power Control (FPC), is one of the capacity
limiting factors in 2G. Therefore, the FPC algorithm has been redesigned for 3G and is
fundamentally different from its IS-95 predecessor. Its main objective is to increase the
voice call capacity in the forward link by a series of new enhancements:
High speed forward power control
Closed loop with fast time response
Variable power step size controlled by the base station
3G-1X FPC for voice is similar to the IS-95 Reverse Link Closed Loop Power Control,
with an inner loop and an outer loop. The 3G FPC consists of a closed loop that operates at
a rate of 800 Hz. The closed loop is used to compensate for power fluctuations due to fast
Rayleigh fading in the forward link. The closed loop involves both the base station and the
mobile.
3G FPC Mobile Operation
Similarly to the IS-95 Reverse Link Closed Loop Power Control, the 3G FPC operates
with an inner loop and an outer loop. See figure.
The mobile continuously monitors the F-FCH attenuation by measuring the forward link
signal to the interference ratio of the base station signal (E
b
/N
T
). If the link degrades, then
the mobile commands the base station, via the Reverse Power Control Sub-channel (on the
R-PICH), to increase the transmitted power of the traffic channel. On the other hand, if the
forward link quality exceeds its target, then the base station-transmitted power of the traf-
fic channel is too high, and the mobile commands the base station to lower the transmitted
power for the traffic channel.
The objective of the closed loop is to maintain an acceptable quality of service using the
FER as the indicator. However, since there is no one-to-one relationship between FER and
the E
b
/N
T
measured by the mobile, the inner loop E
b
/N
T
setpoint must be continually
adjusted to maintain the FER of the forward link. This adjustment of the inner loop E
b
/N
T

target value is referred as the forward link outer loop. The outer loop operates at 50 Hz,
i.e., every frame, the outer loop updates the value of the E
b
/N
T
target used by the inner
loop.
MOBILE
Initialize E
b
/N
T
setpoint
Estimated
E
b
/N
T
> setpoint?
20ms?
Is setpoint > max? Is setpoint < min?
Send power down
command on R-PICH
Calculate new E
b
/N
T
setpoint
Estimate received E
b
/N
T
Setpoint = max Setpoint = min
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes
Outer loop
(every 20ms)
Inner loop
(every 1.25ms)
Send power up
command on R-PICH
BASE STATION
The base station operation of the 3G FPC, seen in the figure, is a simple algorithm that
increases the traffic channel output power when a power up control command is received
on the R-PICH. When a power down command is received, the traffic channel gain is
reduced. The traffic channel gain will vary between a maximum and minimum value.
Simulations have shown that the performance of low speed users in simplex mode benefit
from a large step size in the gain adjustment of the FPC. On the contrary, high speed users,
especially the ones in two-way soft handoff, benefit from small step size, but this effect
can be overcome by increasing the minimum constraint gain of the F-FCH. Therefore, an
optimum compromise has been chosen to have two values: one for the single active set
member case, and one for two or more active set members. These two values are common
for all the 3G-1X Forward Radio Configurations 3 or greater.
BASE STATION
Initialize forward link
gain
Is gain >
maximum?
Is gain <
minimum?
Increase
gain?
Increase forward link
gain
Set gain to maximum
allowed gain
Set gain to minimum
allowed gain
Receive power
control commands
on R-PICH
No No No
Yes Yes
Yes Decrease forward
link gain
Data
When a 3G data call is in active mode, the FPC algorithms and procedures are the same as
those used by FPC for 3G voice calls.
Since data calls exhibit different performance characteristics and requirements from voice
calls, some of the translation parameter values used for data calls are different from the
values used for voice calls. The F-FCH for voice and data calls differ in the following
aspects:
FPC for the F-FCH operates at 800 Hz when the F-SCH is off, and at 400 Hz during an
F-SCH burst.
F-FCH target FER is determined mostly by the signaling traffic requirements (delay and
reliability), and the RLP (Radio Link Protocol) performance.
Minimum and maximum gain of the F-FCH depend on the speed of power control (800
Hz versus 400 Hz).
Value of the power control parameters used by the mobile station to set up the F-FCH
closed loop (initial, minimum and maximum E
b
/N
T
setpoint) depends on the speed of
power control.
IS-2000 limits the Power Control Sub-Channel on the R-PICH to support a data rate of
800Hz. When only the F-FCH is used (signaling or low speed data), the FPC for the F-
FCH is operates at 800Hz. However, when a F-SCH is used for data bursts for a High
Speed Packet Data (HSPD) call, the F-FCH and F-SCH shares the Power Control Sub-
Channel, i.e., 400Hz for F-FCH and 400Hz for F-SCH.
The sharing of the Power Control Sub-Channel between F-FCH and F-SCH allows for
separate inner and outer loops. This is needed since the power control needs are different
between the two channels, different data rates, target FER, RF conditions, etc. The gain
and setpoint for the F-SCH is derived from the F-FCH values using the Forward Supple-
mental Air Resources Allocation (F-SARA) algorithm.
Note: in dormant mode (no air-interface resources allocated for the data call) FPC is
turned off.
Data
Data use same process as voice
Different set of translation parameters
F-FCH and F-SCH use separate inner and outer
loops
Inner Loop when F-FCH and F-SCH are active:
R-PICH can only support 800Hz
F-FCH: 400Hz
F-SCH: 400Hz
Outer Loop for F-SCH:
F-SARA determines gain and setpoint
In dormant mode FPC is turned off
3G-1X FORWARD POWER CONTROL F-FCH VOICE
OUTER LOOP
tion parameters.
F-FCH Voice FER (%) (RC3/
RC5)
(vfpc_frc3fer)
(vfpc_frc5fer)
Form: cell3g
Defines the target frame error rate for the F-FCH for 3G1X
voice calls in RC3/RC5.
(RC3) 0.2 and 0.5 - 3.0%
(RC5) 0.2 and 0.5 - 6.0%
Eb/Nt Setpoint, Simplex/2 or
more (dB) - Min (RC3/RC5)
(vfpc_f1rc3msp)
(vfpc_f2rc3msp)
(vfpc_f1rc5msp)
(vfpc_f2rc5msp)
Form: cell3g
Defines the minimum value of the outer loop Eb/Nt setpoint

used by the F-FCH for 3G1X voice calls for RC3/RC5 with
various number of soft handoff legs.
(RC3, 1 leg) 2.00 - 11.00 dB
(RC3, 2+ legs) 2.00 - 7.00 dB
(RC5, 1 leg) 2.00 - 12.00 dB
(RC5, 2+ legs) 2.00 - 8.00 dB
more (dB) - Init (RC3/RC5)
(vfpc_f1rc3isp)
(vfpc_f2rc3isp)
(vfpc_f1rc5isp)
(vfpc_f2rc5isp)
Form: cell3g
Defines the initial value of the outer loop Eb/Nt setpoint

used by the F-FCH for 3G1X voice calls for RC3/RC5 with
(RC3, 1 leg) 5.00 - 13.00 dB
(RC3, 2+ legs) 5.00 - 8.00 dB
(RC5, 1 leg) 4.00 - 14.00 dB
(RC5, 2+ legs) 5.00 - 9.00 dB
more (dB) - Max (RC3/RC5)
(vfpc_f1rc3xsp)
(vfpc_f2rc3xsp)
(vfpc_f1rc5xsp)
(vfpc_f2rc5xsp)
Form: cell3g

setpoint used by the F-FCH for 3G1X voice calls for
RC3RC5 with various number of soft handoff legs.
(RC3, 1 leg) 3.00 - 16.00 dB
(RC3, 2+ legs) 3.00 - 10.00 dB
(RC5, 1 leg) 3.00 - 17.00 dB
(RC5, 2+ legs) 3.00 - 11.00 dB
OUTER LOOP
AUTOPLEX
System Cell ___

CDMA 3G1X Forward PC Fundamental Channel (F-FCH) - Voice

Outer Loop:
RC3 RC5
FER (%)....................................... 14) ___ 15) ___

Eb/Nt Setpoint, Simplex (dB) - Min.......... 16) _____ 17) _____
- Init......... 18) _____ 19) _____
- Max.......... 20) _____ 21) _____

Eb/Nt Setpoint, 2 or more (dB) - Min.......... 22) _____ 23) _____
- Init......... 24) _____ 25) _____
- Max.......... 26) _____ 27) _____
INNER LOOP
tion parameters.
Step Size for Simplex/2 or
more (dB)
(vfpc_pc_step1)
(vfpc_pc_step2)
Form: cell3g
This field is equal to the F-FCH Power Control Step Size to be

used for the F-FCH with various number of soft handoff legs.
This value is defined for RC3, RC4 and RC5. The value 0 dB
allows to turn off the closed loop forward power control.
Range:
(1 leg) 0, 0.25, 0.50 and 1.00 dB
(2+ legs) 0, 0.25, 0.50 and 1.00 dB
Initial Gain for RC3/RC4/
RC5 (dB)
(vfpc_initgain)
Form: cell3g
This field is equal to the initial gain for full rate frames used by
power control in the forward link for the F-FCH. This value is
defined for RC3, RC4 and RC5 for one or more soft handoff left
at call setup.
Range: -9.00 - 0 dB in 0.25 increments
Min Gain (dB) - Simplex/2-
way/3 or more (RC3/RC5)
(vfpc1rc3mng)
(vfpc2rc3mng)
(vfpc3rc3mng)
(vfpc1rc5mng)
(vfpc2rc5mng)
(vfpc3rc5mng)
Form: cell3g
This field is equal to the minimum gain for full rate frames used
by power control in the forward link for the F-FCH. This value
is defined for calls in RC3/RC5 with various numbers of soft
handoff legs.
(RC3, 1 leg) -20.00 - -9.00 dB
(RC3, 2 legs) -15.00 - -6.00 dB
(RC3, 3+ legs) -13.00 - -4.00 dB
(RC5, 1 leg) -20.00 - -9.00 dB
(RC5, 2 legs) -15.00 - -6.00 dB
(RC5, 3+ legs) -13.00 - -4.00 dB
Max Gain (dB) - Simplex/2
or more (RC3/RC5)
(vfpc1rc3mxg)
(vfpc2rc3mxg)
(vfpc1rc5mxg)
(vfpc2rc5mxg)
Form: cell3g
This field is equal to the maximum gain for full rate frames used
by power control in the forward link for the F-FCH. This value
is defined for calls in RC3/RC5 with various numbers of soft
handoff legs.
(RC3, 1 leg) -4.00 - 4.00 dB
(RC3, 2+ legs) -4.00 - 2.00 dB
(RC5, 1 leg) -4.00 - 4.00 dB
(RC5, 2+ legs) -4.00 - 2.00 dB
INNER LOOP
AUTOPLEX
System Cell ___

CDMA 3G1X Forward PC Fundamental Channel (F-FCH) - Voice

Inner Loop:

Step Size for Simplex (dB)............................. 30) ____
Step Size for 2 or more (dB)........................... 32) ____
Initial Gain for RC3/RC4/RC5 (dB)...................... 33) _____

RC3 RC5
Min Gain (dB) - Simplex..................... 34) ______ 35) ______
- 2-way....................... 36) ______ 37) ______
- 3 or more................... 38) ______ 39) ______
Max Gain (dB) - Simplex..................... 40) _____ 41) _____
- 2 or more................... 42) _____ 43) _____
3G-1X FORWARD POWER CONTROL F-FCH DATA
OUTER LOOP
tion parameters.
F-FCH Data FER (%) (RC3)
(dfpc_fchrc3fer)
Form: cell3g
Defines the target frame error rate for the F-FCH for
3G1X data calls in RC3.
Range: 0.2 and 0.5 - 7.5% in 0.5 increments
more (dB) - Min (RC3)
(dfpc_1rc3mnsp)
(dfpc_2rc3mnsp)
Form: cell3g

setpoint used by the F-FCH for 3G1X data calls for RC3
with various number of soft handoff legs.
(1 leg) 2.00 - 11.00 dB
(2+ legs) 2.00 - 7.00 dB
more (dB) - Init (RC3)
(dfpc_1rc3isp)
(dfpc_2rc3isp)
Form: cell3g
Defines the initial value of the outer loop Eb/Nt setpoint

used by the F-FCH for 3G1X data calls for RC3 with
(1 leg) 3.00 - 13.00 dB
(2+ legs) 3.00 - 8.00 dB
more (dB) - Max (RC3)
(dfpc_1rc3mxsp)
(dfpc_2rc3mxsp)
Form: cell3g

setpoint used by the F-FCH for 3G1X data calls for RC3
with various number of soft handoff legs.
(1 leg) 3.00 - 16.00 dB
(2+ legs) 3.00 - 10.00 dB
OUTER LOOP
AUTOPLEX
System Cell ___
CDMA 3G1X Forward PC Fundamental Channel (F-FCH) - Data

Outer Loop: RC3
FER (%)................................................ 46) ___
Eb/Nt Setpoint, Simplex (dB) - Min.................. 47) _____
- Init................. 48) _____
- Max.................. 49) _____
Eb/Nt Setpoint, 2 or more (dB) - Min.................. 50) _____
- Init................. 51) _____
- Max.................. 52) _____
Inner Loop: RC3
Min Gain (dB) - Simplex................................ 53) ______
- 2-way.................................. 54) ______
- 3 or more.............................. 55) ______
Max Gain (dB) - Simplex................................ 56) _____
- 2 or more.............................. 57) _____

Init Gain for RC3/RC4 (dB)............................. 58) _____
INNER LOOP
tion parameters.
Min Gain (dB) - Simplex/2-way/3
or more (RC3)
(dfpc_1rc3mng)
(dfpc_2rc3mng)
(dfpc_3rc3mng)
Form: cell3g
This field is equal to the minimum gain for full rate

frames used by power control in the forward link for the
F-FCH. This value is defined for data calls in RC3 with
various numbers of soft handoff legs.
(1 leg) -20.00 - -9.00 dB
(2 legs) -15.00 - -6.00 dB
(3+ legs) -13.00 - -4.00 dB
Max Gain (dB) - Simplex/2 or
more (RC3)
(dfpc_1rc3mxg)
(dfpc_2rc3mxg)
Form: cell3g
This field is equal to the minimum gain for full rate

frames used by power control in the forward link for the
F-FCH. This value is defined for data calls in RC3 with
various numbers of soft handoff legs.
(1 leg) -4.00 - 4.00 dB
(2+ legs) -4.00 - 2.00 dB
Init Gain for RC3/RC4 (dB)
(dfpc_initgain)
Form: cell3g
This field is equal to the initial gain for full rate frames
used by power control in the forward link for F-FCH.
This value is defined for data calls in RC3 and RC4 for
one or more soft handoff legs at call setup.
Range: -9.00 - 0 dB in 0.25 increments
INNER LOOP
AUTOPLEX
System Cell ___
CDMA 3G1X Forward PC Fundamental Channel (F-FCH) - Data

Outer Loop: RC3
FER (%)................................................ 46) ___
Eb/Nt Setpoint, Simplex (dB) - Min.................. 47) _____
- Init................. 48) _____
- Max.................. 49) _____
Eb/Nt Setpoint, 2 or more (dB) - Min.................. 50) _____
- Init................. 51) _____
- Max.................. 52) _____
Inner Loop: RC3
Min Gain (dB) - Simplex................................ 53) ______
- 2-way.................................. 54) ______
- 3 or more.............................. 55) ______
Max Gain (dB) - Simplex................................ 56) _____
- 2 or more.............................. 57) _____

Init Gain for RC3/RC4 (dB)............................. 58) _____
3G-1X FORWARD POWER CONTROL F-SCH DATA
tion parameters.
Max F-SCH Power Percentage
Threshold (%)
(dfpc_mx_pwthr)
Form: cell3g
This field is equal to the F-SCH maximum power

threshold used by forward SARA to compute the
maximum F-SCH gain. Range: 100 - 150% in
increments of 5
Inner Loop Power Control Step Size
for RC3/RC4 (dB)
(dfpc_pcstp_sch)
Form: cell3g
This field is equal to the F-SCH Power Control Step

Size. This value is defined for RC3 and RC4.
Variance Margin for F-SCH
Admission (%)
(dfpc_var_mrgn)
Form: cell3g
This field is equal to the F-SCH gain variance margin

used by forward SARA to determine if the maximum F-
SCH gain is supportable.
Range: 0 - 150% in increments of 5
Max F-SCH Power Allowed,
Relative to Forward Pilot (dB)
(dfpc_mxg_fplot)
Form: cell3g
This field is equal to the maximum F-SCH gain relative

to the forward pilot allowed to a F-SCH burst by
forward SARA.
Range: 5 - 15 dB
Eb/Nt Setpoint Offset for RC3/RC4
(dB)
(dfpc_mxebntoff)
Form: cell3g
Defines the offset used by forward SARA to compute

the value of the outer loop maximum Eb/Nt setpoint
used by the F-SCH for 3G1X data calls.
Eb/Nt Setpoint for RC3 (dB) - 19.2/
38.4/76.8/153.6 kbps (Min)
(dfpc_sch192msp)
(dfpc_sch384msp)
(dfpc_sch768msp)
(dfpc_sch1536ms)
Form: cell3g

setpoint used by the F-SCH for 3G1X data calls for an
F-SCH data rate of 19.2/38.4/76.8/153.6 kbps for RC3.
(19.2 kbps) 0 - 14.00 dB
(38.4 kbps) 0 - 15.00 dB
(76.8 kbps) 0 - 16.00 dB
(153.6 kbps) 0 - 17.00 dB
AUTOPLEX
System Cell ___

CDMA 3G1X Forward PC Supplemental Channel (F-SCH) - Data

Max F-SCH Power Percentage Threshold (%) ...................... 61) ___
Inner Loop Power Control Step Size for RC3/RC4 (dB)............ 62) ____
Variance Margin for F-SCH Admission (%) ....................... 63) ___
Max F-SCH Power Allowed, Relative to Forward Pilot (dB)........ 64) __
Eb/Nt Setpoint Offset for RC3/RC4 (dB)......................... 65) _____

Forward Outer Loop for F-SCH: Min Max
Eb/Nt Setpoint for RC3 (dB) - 19.2 kbps............ 66) _____ 67) _____
- 38.4 kbps............ 68) _____ 69) _____
- 76.8 kbps............ 70) _____ 71) _____
- 153.6 kbps............ 72) _____ 73) _____
AUTOPLEX
System Cell ___


Eb/Nt Setpoint for Sector Offset Estim (dB) - Simplex........ 76) _____
- 2 or more...... 78) _____
Eb/Nt Setpoint Measurement Aged Timer (sec).................. 79) _____

FER for RC3/RC4 (%) - 19.2 kbps.......................... 80) ____
- 38.4 kbps.......................... 82) ____
- 76.8 kbps.......................... 84) ____
- 153.6 kbps.......................... 86) ____

Rate Offset Value (dB) - 19.2 kbps.......................... 88) _____
- 38.4 kbps.......................... 90) _____
- 76.8 kbps.......................... 92) _____
- 153.6 kbps.......................... 94) _____
F-SARA Threshold (dB)........................................ 96) ___
(Cont.)
tion parameters.
Eb/Nt Setpoint for RC3 (dB) -
19.2/38.4/76.8/153.6 kbps
(Max)
(dfpc_sch192xsp)
(dfpc_sch384xsp)
(dfpc_sch768xsp)
(dfpc_sch1536xs)
Form: cell3g
Defines the maximum value of the outer loop Eb/Nt setpoint

used by the F-SCH for 3G1X data calls for an F-SCH data
rate of 19.2/38.4/76.8/153.6 kbps for RC3.
(19.2 kbps) 4.00 - 17.00 dB
(38.4 kbps) 5.00 - 18.00 dB
(76.8 kbps) 6.00 - 19.00 dB
(153.6 kbps) 7.00 - 20.00 dB
Eb/Nt Setpoint Measurement
Aged Timer (sec)
(dfpc_mx_olrage)
Form: cell3g
Used to determine if the F-FCH Eb/Nt Setpoint

measurement from the Outer Loop Report message is too old
to be used. The value of zero has a special meaning: do not
request Outer Loop Report messages from the mobile
station.
Range:
0 - 10.00 sec in 0.25 increments and
11.00 - 20.00 sec in 1.00 increments
Eb/Nt Setpoint Measurement
Aged Timer (sec)
(dfpc_mx_olrage)
Form: cell3g
Used to determine if the F-FCH Eb/Nt Setpoint

measurement from the Outer Loop Report message is too old
to be used. The value of zero has a special meaning: do not
request Outer Loop Report messages from the mobile
station.
Range:
0 - 10.00 sec in 0.25 increments and
11.00 - 20.00 sec in 1.00 increments
(Cont.)
AUTOPLEX
System Cell ___



- 38.4 kbps............ 68) _____ 69) _____
- 76.8 kbps............ 70) _____ 71) _____
- 153.6 kbps............ 72) _____ 73) _____
AUTOPLEX
System Cell ___


- 2 or more...... 78) _____

FER for RC3/RC4 (%) - 19.2 kbps.......................... 80) ____
- 38.4 kbps.......................... 82) ____
- 76.8 kbps.......................... 84) ____
- 153.6 kbps.......................... 86) ____

- 38.4 kbps.......................... 90) _____
- 76.8 kbps.......................... 92) _____
- 153.6 kbps.......................... 94) _____
(Cont.)
F-SCH Data FER for RC3/RC4
(%) - 19.2/38.4/76.8/153.6
kbps
(dfpc_fer192)
(dfpc_fer384)
(dfpc_fer768)
(dfpc_fer1536)
Form: cell3g
Defines the target frame error rate for the F-SCH of data rate
19.2/38.4/76.8/153.6 kbps for 3G1X data calls RC3 or RC4.
Range:
(19.2 kbps) 0.2 and 0.5 - 10.0% in 0.5 increments
(38.4 kbps) 0.2 and 0.5 - 10.0% in 0.5 increments, and 11 -
15% in 1 increments
(76.8 kbps) 0.2 and 0.5 - 10.0% in 0.5 increments, 11 - 15%
in 1 increments, and 18, 21%
(153.6 kbps) 0.2 and 0.5 - 10.0% in 0.5 increments, 11 -
15% in 1 increments, and 18, 21, 24, 27, 30%
Rate Offset Value (dB) - 19.2/
38.4/76.8/153.6 kbps
(dfpc_rtoff192)
(dfpc_rtoff384)
(dfpc_rtoff768)
(dfpc_rtoff1536)
Form: cell3g
Defines the rate offset term used by F-SARA to compute F-

SCH Eb/Nt setpoint for a F-SCH data rate 19.2/38.4/76.8/
153.6 kbps.
(19.2 kbps) -9.00 - 9.00 dB
(38.4 kbps) -9.00 - 9.00 dB
(76.8 kbps) -9.00 - 9.00 dB
(153.6 kbps) -9.00 - 9.00 dB
F-SARA Threshold (dB)
(dfpc_ecio_thrs)
Form: cell3g
Defines the threshold used by F-SARA to determine the

selected active set to compute the geometry of the anchor leg
based in the F-FCH geometry.
Range: -18 - -8
(Cont.)
AUTOPLEX
System Cell ___



- 38.4 kbps............ 68) _____ 69) _____
- 76.8 kbps............ 70) _____ 71) _____
- 153.6 kbps............ 72) _____ 73) _____
AUTOPLEX
System Cell ___


- 2 or more...... 78) _____

FER for RC3/RC4 (%) - 19.2 kbps.......................... 80) ____
- 38.4 kbps.......................... 82) ____
- 76.8 kbps.......................... 84) ____
- 153.6 kbps.......................... 86) ____

- 38.4 kbps.......................... 90) _____
- 76.8 kbps.......................... 92) _____
- 153.6 kbps.......................... 94) _____
3G-1X FORWARD POWER CONTROL
VOICE AND DATA
F-FCH PC Bit to Traffic Bit
Ratio for RC3, RC4, RC5 -
simplex/2-way/3-way or more
(vfpc1sho_sbchg)
(vfpc2sho_sbchg)
(vfpc3sho_sbchg)
Form: ecp3g
Indicates the power level of the forward link power control

subchannel relative to the power level of the full rate traffic
bits of the F-FCH for 3G1X voice calls for RC3, RC4, and
RC5 with a number of soft handoff legs.
(1 leg) 0 - 31.75
(2 legs) 0 - 31.75
(3+ legs) 0 - 31.75
F-FCH PC Bit to Traffic Bit
Ratio for RC3, RC4 (dB) -
simplex/2-way/3-way or more
(dfpc1sho_sbchg)
(dfpc2sho_sbchg)
(dfpc3sho_sbchg)
Form: ecp3g
Indicates the power level of the forward link power control

subchannel relative to the power level of the traffic code
symbol at full rate of the F-FCH for 3G1X data calls with a
number of soft handoff legs for RC3 and RC4.
(1 leg) 0 - 31.75
(2 legs) 0 - 31.75
(3+ legs) 0 - 31.75
3G-1X FORWARD POWER CONTROL
VOIC AND DATA
AUTOPLEX
System
CDMA 3G1X Power Control - Voice

F-FCH PC Bit to Traffic Bit Ratio for RC3, RC4, RC5 (dB):
- simplex ............ 8) _____
- 2-way .............. 9) _____
- 3-way or more ..... 10) _____
Reverse Open Loop:

3G1X CDMA Power Control - Data
F-FCH PC Bit to Traffic Bit Ratio (dB): RC3
- simplex ........... 14) _____
- 2-way ............. 15) _____
- 3-way or more ..... 16) _____
DOWNLINK POWER CONTROL SUMMARY
DOWNLINK POWER CONTROL SUMMARY
2G Forward Link Power Control
Mobile detects frame errors on the downlink.
Mobile reports frame error information to the base
station
RS1: PMRM
RS2: EIB
Base station adjusts its forward link power based on
downlink frame error objective.
In soft handoff every leg should have the same pilot to
traffic channel gain ratio.
3G-1X Forward Link Power Control
Reverse Link Closed Loop Power Control process is
adopted.
The mobile has a E
b
/N
T
setpoint, adjusted every
20ms, and sends power control commands on the
R-PICH to the base station every 1.25 ms.
When a F-SCH is present, forward power control is
400 Hz for F-FCH and 400 Hz for F-SCH.
Knowledge Check
Question 1.
At what network element does the downlink power control algorithm attempt to achieve a
desired FER on the received signal?
A. Mobile
B. Base station
C. MSC
D. All of the above
S
Answer: a
Question 2.
During the downlink power control, the ___ detects downlink frame errors, and reports
back to the ___. The ___ adjust traffic channel power to maintain FER objective.
A. base station
B. mobile
C. MSC
S
Answer: During the downlink power control, the _b__ detects downlink frame
errors, and reports back to the _a__. The __a_ adjust traffic channel power to
maintain FER objective.
Question 3.
What will the downlink power control algorithm do to overcome high FER?
A. Increase datarate
B. Decrease datarate
C. Increase power
D. Decrease power
S
Answer: c
Knowledge Check
Question 4.
What power control algorithm does the 3G Forward Power Control algorithm (at the
mobile station) resemble the most?
A. 2G Forward Power Control
B. 2G Open Loop Reverse Power Control
C. 2G Closed Loop Reverse Power Control
D. 2G Autonomous Power Control
S
Answer: c
Question 5.
When a Forward Supplemental Channel (F-SCH) is active, how often does the power
change on the F-SCH?
A. Every 1.25 ms
B. Every 2.5 ms
C. Every 10 ms
D. Every 20 ms
S
Answer: b
Comment: When an F-SCH is active, the R-PICH power control sub-channel is
shared between F-FCH and F-SCH, therefore the power commands for the
F-SCH is sent ever 2.5 ms or 400 Hz.
Question 6.
True or False? For 3G Reverse Power Control the base station measures the received E
b
/
N
0
to determine the power control commands to be sent to the mobile station.
S
Answer: False
Comment: The 3G RPC measures the E
c
/I
0
of the R-PICH
Section 10
Overload Control Section 10
Overload Control CL8303 v1.0
CONCEPT OF
UPLINK OVERLOAD CONTROL
The CDMA performance is limited by the total interference. As the number of users
increases, the base station received interference increases correspondingly, until the power
control can no longer maintain the required E
b
/N
T
. The system must measure the base sta-
tion activity and take action when the base station approaches overload to prevent
degraded voice quality or dropped calls. The ECPC will first deny access for new calls,
but allow emergency calls and handoff into the physical antenna face of the cell site. If this
does not prevent overload, the ECPC next denies all new calls and handoffs into the phys-
ical antenna face of the cell site.
The ratio of total received power to the background noise in an idle system is defined as
the noise rise and is a measure of the number of active users as the uplink loading factor.
The base station uses a pair of thresholds to limit the number of users in a sector so all
active users have acceptable voice quality. There are two thresholds, called the
lower_rev_load and the upper_rev_load translation parameters.
The base station estimates the uplink loading factor by comparing the current received
power to the power measured when the system is idle. The estimated loading factor is
compared to the two thresholds. New calls and handoffs into the sector are allowed when
the loading factor is below the lower threshold. Handoffs are allowed into the sector when
the loading factor is between the lower and upper thresholds. Note, the base station does
not block new calls, but sends the ECPC the new call request with a flag indicating that the
loading factor is between the upper and lower thresholds. The ECPC has the final decision
on denying or accepting the call. The ECPC will accept emergency calls (that is, calls with
a special string of dialed digits, such as, 911) in this condition. New calls, including emer-
gency calls and handoffs into the sector, are denied by the ECPC when the loading factor
exceeds the upper threshold. The system will attempt a hard handoff to another CDMA RF
channel, if possible, or a handoff from CDMA to analog, if allowed. This strategy favors
calls in progress and emergency calls over new calls to minimize the probability of drop-
ping calls in progress.
This uplink overload control can be disabled by using a special value of 100 for the
upper_rev_load translation parameter. The uplink overload control algorithm would then
allow all new calls and handoffs, but would count appropriate service measurements.
S
This uplink overload control algorithm is replaced by the Improved Reverse
Link Overload Control (IROC) algorithm in release R16.1.
CL8303 v1.0 Overload Control
CONCEPT OF
lower_rev_load
Deny new calls into the sector
Deny handoffs into the sector
Allow emergency calls into the sector
Allow handoffs into the sector
Allow new calls into the sector
Time
0
50
100
, Cell Loading [%]
Where: Cell Loading = =
Current Quantity of Users
Theoretical Pole Point
=
M
M
max
upper_rev_load
Note: upper_rev_load = 100 disables uplink overload control
UPLINK OVERLOAD CONTROL PROCESSING
The base station calculates the cell loading by measuring the base station noise level peri-
odically and estimating the cell loading factor, , from the noise increase over the quiet
system noise.
UPLINK OVERLOAD CONTROL PROCESSING
Measure total
uplink received
Calculate cell
loading,
Is <
lower_rev_load
Allow new calls
Allow handoffs
Deny new calls
Deny handoffs
No
No
Yes
Yes
?
CDMA-PAF 32, and
CDMA-PAF-CARR 2
Is
upper_rev_load
= 100
?
Is <
upper_rev_load
?
Deny new calls*
Allow handoffs
Yes
No
* Allow emergency calls
energy P
rec
upper_rev_load, lower_rev_load
tion parameters.
Upper Reverse Load Threshold (%)
(upper_rev_load)
Form: ceqface, ecp
defines the upper load limit on the reverse link and the
percentage specified is used by the cell as the thresh-
old for denying new calls and incoming handoffs on the
reverse link. The value entered must be greater than
that for the Lower Reverse Load Threshold field.
Range: 100 = disable or 50 90 percent in increments
of 5
Lower Reverse Load Threshold (%)
(lower_rev_load)
Form: ceqface, ecp
defines the lower load limit on the reverse link and the
percentage specified is used by the cell as the thresh-
old for denying new calls on the reverse link. The value
entered must be less than that for the Upper Reverse
Load Threshold field.
Range: 40 85 percent in increments of 5
S
The current algorithm that estimates reverse link loading is accurate over a
long period of time, but may deny calls during short periods of high noise. It
is recommended to set upper_rev_load to 100 to prevent calls being blocked
when the cell still has capacity. However, the cell site will still report reverse
overload service measurement so traffic engineers will be able to predict
when more capacity is needed.
upper_rev_load, lower_rev_load

AUTOPLEX
Reverse Link Closed-Loop:
Enable Reverse Outer Loop Power Control........ 174) ___
Rate
Set 1
Rate
Set 2
Reverse Link Frame Error Rate (%) .................... +175) ___ +176) ___
Nominal Eb/N0 Setpoint (dB)............................... +177) ___ +178) ___
Violator Threshold................................................... +179) ___
Overload Control:
Upper Reverse Load Threshold (%) ................ +180) ___
Lower Reverse Load Threshold (%)................ +181) ___
IMPROVED REVERSE LINK OVERLOAD
CONTROL CONSIDERATIONS
The improved reverse link overload control algorithm is designed to protect the system
against performance degradation due to increased interference (external and internal). The
following related issues are addressed in the algorithm:
CDMA loading number of Walsh Codes (WC)
Reverse link coverage Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) rise
Additional reverse link performance (from existing call perspective) Measured Re-
verse Frame Error Rate (MRFER).
When CDMA loading (number of users) in a sector approaches its pole capacity, the inter-
ference increases exponentially. As a result, the system performance degrades severely
when mobiles have reached their maximum transmit power. To protect the system against
this performance degradation, CDMA loading needs to be constrained to a limit. An esti-
mation of sector loading based on the number of total Walsh Codes (WC), measured voice
activities, and an Other Cell Interference Calibration factor (calib_factor) is used.
To compensate for the inaccuracy of WC-based CDMA loading estimate, RSSI rise and
MRFER are also taken into account. RSSI rise to protect reverse link coverage and
MRFER to protect performance of existing calls.
RSSI is the total received power at the cell/sector and consists of three components: noise
floor, CDMA interference (corresponds to CDMA loading) and jammer interference.
RSSI rise is the rise of the RSSI above the noise floor. In general, high CDMA loading
will cause high RSSI, but the reverse is not true. A high RSSI value can be caused by one
or more of the three RSSI components. By using a combination of total WC and RSSI rise,
CDMA loading can be more accurately estimated.
Sometimes, the combination of RSSI rise and Walsh Codes may still give inaccurate indi-
cations of CDMA loading, therefore MRFER is taken into account. MRFER is a good
indication of system performance. However, there are many reasons that MRFER can
become higher than expected. Therefore, MRFER is used only as an additional qualifying
metric in the reverse link overload control algorithm instead of as a major component.
IMPROVED REVERSE LINK OVERLOAD
CONTROL CONSIDERATIONS
Increased reverse link interference decreases reverse link
coverage and performance.
Improved reverse link overload control algorithm considers:
Number of Walsh Codes used
RSSI rise
Reverse link FER.
S
Improved reverse link overload control algorithm is implemented in R16.1.
IMPROVED REVERSE LINK
OVERLOAD CONTROL
The objective of the reverse link overload control algorithm is to protect the system
against performance degradation due to increased interference (external and internal). The
Improved Reverse Link Overload Control (IROC) algorithm is achieving the objective by
consider CDMA loading (as number of Walsh Codes), Received Signal Strength Indicator
(RSSI) rise, and Measured Reverse FER (MRFER).
The call blocking philosophy is to save any type of existing calls and block new non-
emergency calls first when overload occurs. In order to maximize capacity and minimize
blocking, two different loading thresholds are used, L1 (lo_load_thres) and L2
(hi_load_thres). The loading thresholds define three loading levels, [0.0-L1], [L1-L2], and
[L2-1.0].
For every loading region there are three call blocking regions:
Region I. RSSI rise < lower threshold
Region II. Lower threshold < RSSI rise < upper threshold
Region III. RSSI rise > upper threshold.
Each region/loading level determines uniquely if the call should be blocked or not. The
actual blocking is performed by the call processing subsystem. The figure depicts the call
blocking regions. Call blocking will be done as follows.
Region I will block calls all the time.
Region II will block calls if the calculated average MRFER is larger than the MRFER
threshold (mrfer_thres).
Region III will have no call blocking.
The blocking philosophy is to save any type of existing calls and block new non-emer-
gency calls first. Therefore, for hard handoff, semi-soft handoff and emergency calls the
thresholds defining the call blocking regions are raised by an adjustment factor,
hho_thres_adj.
Call blocking include new calls (emergency or non-emergency calls), hard handoffs,
semi-soft handoffs, but does not include soft/softer handoffs. This is because soft/softer
handoffs should never be blocked even if reverse link is in overload. Blocking soft/softer
handoffs will cause increased reverse link interference and create more reverse link load-
ing on the surrounding cells due to dragging of the legs.
IMPROVED REVERSE LINK
OVERLOAD CONTROL
up_rssi_1_thres
up_rssi_3_thres
up_rssi_2_thres
lo_rssi_1_thres
lo_rssi_2_thres
lo_rssi_3_thres
Average
Walsh Code
Loading
lo_load_thres up_load_thres
I
II
III
RSSI Rise [dB]
Block all calls except soft/softer handoff.
Block all calls except soft/softer handoff if
MRFER > = mrfer_thres.
Do not block any calls.
Note: for hard handoff, semi-soft handoff and
emergency calls the RSSI rise thresholds
are raised by hho_block_adj.
I
II
III
REVERSE LINK OVERLOAD CONTROL
mrfer_thres, calib_factor,
up_load_thres, lo_load_thres,
tion parameters.
Measured RFER thresh (%)
(mrfer_thres)
Form: ceqface, ecp
This threshold is used by the reverse link overload control

to determine whether the new call, semi-soft handoff
requests, and CDMA-to-CDMA hard handoff requests
should be blocked or not.
Other Cell Interference Calibration
Factor
(calib_factor)
Form: cmpptm
This parameter represents one plus Beta (the ratio of

other cell/sector interference to the target cell interfer-
ence). It is used by the loading calculation.
Upper Load Thresh L2
(up_load_thres)
Form: ceqface, ecp
This parameter is used by the reverse link overload con-

trol algorithm to determine what upper RSSI rise thresh-
olds to use based on loading of the sector/carrier.
Lower Load Thresh L1
(lo_load_thres)
Form: ceqface, ecp
This parameter is used by the reverse link overload con-

trol algorithm to determine what upper RSSI rise thresh-
olds to use based on loading of the sector/carrier.
S
Prior to R16.1, reverse link overload control is recommended to be disabled by
using a value of 100 for upper_rev_load translation parameter. The algorithm
would then allow calls but count appropriate service measurements.
mrfer_thres, calib_factor,
up_load_thres, lo_load_thres

CDMA Improved Reverse LInk Overload Control (IROC)
Measured RFER Thresh (%).......................................................................................... +313) ___
Other Cell Calibrate Factor ........................................................................................... +314) ___
Upper Load Thresh L2................................................................................................... +315) ___
Lower Load Thresh L1 .................................................................................................. +316) ___
Upper Thresh of RSSI Rise (dB):
(1) [0 to L1] .................................................................................................................. +317) ___
(2) [L1 to L2] ................................................................................................................ +318) ___
(3) [L2 to 1] .................................................................................................................. +319) ___
Lower Thresh of RSSI Rise (dB):
(1) [0 to L1] .................................................................................................................. +320) ___
(2) [L1 to L2] ................................................................................................................ +321) ___
(3) [L2 to 1] .................................................................................................................. +322) ___
Hard HO Blk Thresh Adj (dB) .......................................................................................... +323) ___
AUTOPLEX
up_rssi_1_thres, up_rssi_2_thres,
up_rssi_3_thres, lo_rssi_1_thres, lo_rssi_2_thres,
lo_rssi_3_thres, hho_thres_adj
tion parameters.
Upper Thresh of RSSI Rise (dB): (1)
[0-L1]
(up_rssi_1_thres)
Form: ceqface, ecp

to determine whether calls should be blocked or not when
loading is between 0 and L1.
[L1-L2]
(up_rssi_2_thres)
Form: ceqface, ecp

loading is between L1 and L2.
[L2-1]
(up_rssi_3_thres)
Form: ceqface, ecp

loading is between L2 and 1.
Lower Thresh of RSSI Rise (dB): (1)
[0-L1]
(lo_rssi_1_thres)
Form: ceqface, ecp

loading is between 0 and L1.
[L1-L2]
(lo_rssi_2_thres)
Form: ceqface, ecp

loading is between L1 and L2.
[L2-1]
(lo_rssi_3_thres)
Form: ceqface, ecp

loading is between L2 and 1.
Hard HO Blk Thresh Adj (dB)
(hho_thres_adj)
Form: ceqface, ecp
This parameter provides delta adjustment over the

up_rssi_x_thres and lo_rssi_x_thres (where x equals to
1, 2 or 3) for hard handoff blocking decision making.
Range: 0 - 6
up_rssi_1_thres, up_rssi_2_thres,
up_rssi_3_thres, lo_rssi_1_thres, lo_rssi_2_thres,
lo_rssi_3_thres, hho_thres_adj

CDMA Improved Reverse LInk Overload Control (IROC)
Measured RFER Thresh (%) ........................................................................................... +313) ___
Other Cell Calibrate Factor .............................................................................................. +314) ___
Upper Load Thresh L2..................................................................................................... +315) ___
Lower Load Thresh L1..................................................................................................... +316) ___
Upper Thresh of RSSI Rise (dB):
(1) [0 to L1]................................................................................................................. +317) ___
(2) [L1 to L2]............................................................................................................... +318) ___
(3) [L2 to 1]................................................................................................................. +319) ___
Lower Thresh of RSSI Rise (dB):
(1) [0 to L1]................................................................................................................. +320) ___
(2) [L1 to L2]............................................................................................................... +321) ___
(3) [L2 to 1]................................................................................................................. +322) ___
Hard HO Blk Thresh Adj (dB)........................................................................................ +323) ___
AUTOPLEX
As in the case of forward link, reverse link loading is more critical in 3G-1X data systems
since reverse high-rate data bursts are at a much higher power than the low-rate funda-
mental channels.
For the voice system, if a reverse overload condition is identified, the current approach is
to enable call blocking and prevent additional increase in RSSI rise and loading. With data
service, the overload condition is reduced by actively releasing reverse high-speed data
channels.
Assign R-SCH
As with forward overload control, reverse overload control for data also takes a dual-track
approach to address the overload issue. The proactive part is the Reverse Supplemental
Air Resource Allocation (R-SARA) algorithm that will assign R-SCH only when a suffi-
cient power budget is available.
R-SCH Release Due to Overload
The reactive part of reverse overload control algorithm tracks the current loading and
RSSI rise, and takes the corrective action of releasing bursts in cases of extreme reverse
overload.
If the estimated loading and the measured RSSI rise is high enough to cause a negative
performance impact to existing calls, all active R-SCH bursts are released. The release
threshold for RSSI rise is typically set lower than the upper thresholds for voice, since
there will be messaging latency before the mobile actually releases the reverse burst.
These release thresholds are derived from the voice upper thresholds using an offset, spec-
ified as the translation value rsch_rrssiof.
R-SARA will only assign R-SCH when sufficient
interference margin is available.
If RSSI rise exceeds threshold R-SCH will be released
Region I
up_rssi_X_thres + rsch_rrssiof
3G-1X REVERSE LINK OVERLOAD CONTROL
tion parameters.
RSSI Offset for R-SCH Bursts,
Admit (Prim/Alt)
(rsch_arssiof)
(arsch_arssiof)
Form: ceqface3g
This offset is applied to the voice lower RSSI

thresholds and used by the reverse link SARA
algorithm to determine whether to admit an R-SCH
burst request after estimating the RSSI rise and loading
impact. When the alternate value is specified, it will
take precedence over the primary value.
(Primary) -3.00 - 3.00
(Alternate) -3.00 - 3.00
Admit Carriers Using Alt
(arssi_carr)
Form: ceqface3g

Range: y or blank
Release (Prim/Alt)
(rsch_rrssiof)
(arsch_rrssiof)
Form: ceqface3g
This offset is applied to the voice upper RSSI

thresholds and used by the reverse link overload
algorithm to determine whether release ongoing R-
SCH bursts due to increased RSSI rise and loading.
When the alternate value is specified, it will take
(Primary) -3.00 - 3.00
(Alternate) -3.00 - 3.00
Release Carriers Using Alt
(rrssi_carr)
Form: ceqface3g

Range: y or blank
Loading Correction Factor in L1,
L2 (Prim/Alt)
(rho_l1_l2)
(arho_l1_l2)
Form: ceqface3g
This parameter is used by R-SARA algorithm to

estimate the increase in loading from admitting a new
burst when the current loading is in region [L1, L2].
(Primary) 1.00 - 2.00
(Alternate) 1.00 - 2.00

AUTOPLEX
3G1X CDMA Overload Control Information - Data
Forward Link:
Scale Thresh for F-SCH Bursts: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
- Release ........+87) ____ +88) ____ 90) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Power Thresh for F-SCH Bursts (%):
- Admit .........+110) __ +111) ___ 113) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
- Release .......+133) ___ +134) ___ 136) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Reverse Link:
RSSI Offset for R-SCH Bursts (dB):
- Admit .........+156) _____ +157) _____ 159) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
- Release .......+179) _____ +180) _____ 182) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Loading Correction Factor in:
- [L1 to L2] ....+202) ____ +203) ____ 205) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
- [L2 to 1] .....+225) ____ +226) ____ 228) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Ec/Io Offset for
R-SCH Admit (dB) ..........+248) ____ +249) ____ 251) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
(Cont.)
tion parameters.
Loading Correction Factor in L1,
L2 Carriers Using Alt
(l1_l2_carr)
Form: ceqface3g

Range: y or blank
Loading Correction Factor in L2, 1
(Prim/Alt)
(rho_l2_1)
(arho_l2_1)
Form: ceqface3g
This parameter is used by R-SARA algorithm to

estimate the increase in loading from admitting a new
burst when the current loading is in region [L2, 1].
(Primary) 1.00 - 3.00
(Alternate) 1.00 - 3.00
Loading Correction Factor in L2, 1
Carriers Using Alt
(l2_1_carr)
Form: ceqface3g

Range: y or blank
Ec/Io Offset for R-SCH Admit
(Prim/Alt)
(rsch_apoffset)
(arsch_apoffset)
Form: ceqface3g
All non-active set pilots reported in the PSMM must at

least be this offset below the strongest active set pilot
before an R-SCH burst is assigned. This offset is used
by R-SARA during R SCH assignment. When the
alternate value is specified, it will take precedence over
the primary value.
(Primary) 1.00 - 8.00 seconds
(Alternate) 1.00 - 8.00 seconds
Ec/Io Offset for R-SCH Admit
Carriers Using Alt
(apoffset_carr)
Form: ceqface3g

Range: y or blank

AUTOPLEX
Forward Link:
- Release ........+87) ____ +88) ____ 90) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
- Admit .........+110) __ +111) ___ 113) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
- Release .......+133) ___ +134) ___ 136) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Reverse Link:
- Admit .........+156) _____ +157) _____ 159) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
- Release .......+179) _____ +180) _____ 182) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
- [L1 to L2] ....+202) ____ +203) ____ 205) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
- [L2 to 1] .....+225) ____ +226) ____ 228) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Ec/Io Offset for
R-SCH Admit (dB) ..........+248) ____ +249) ____ 251) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
CDMAPAFCARR
2: Duration of Power Control Overload on Reverse Traffic Channels
This count is incremented for each second that a CDMA carrier frequency is experiencing
power control overload on reverse traffic channels, that is, whenever new calls would be
blocked.
34: Semi-soft Handoff Denied Due to Power Control Overload on Reverse Link
The number of semi-soft handoffs that were denied because of power control overload in
the reverse link at the target sector.
36: Hard Handoff Denied Due to Power Control Overload on Reverse Link
The number of hard handoffs that were denied because of power control overload in the
reverse link at the target sector.
CDMAPAF
32: Number of Times of Power Control Overload on Reverse Traffic Channels
For release 16.1 and later cells, this count is pegged for each RSSI rise occurring in
Region I, and for each RSSI rise in Region II if the MRFER is greater than the MRFER
threshold. To obtain this count in dB, multiply the count by a factor of 0.1.
Prior to release 16.1, this service measurement counts whenever the lower_rev_thresh is
exceeded.
ECPPAFCARR CDMA
1: Originations Denied Due to Power Control Budget
The number of originations that were denied because of lack of power control budget.
2: Terminations Denied Due to Power Control Budget
The number of terminations that were denied because of lack of power control budget.
CDMAPAFCARR
2: Duration of Power Control Overload on Reverse
Traffic Channels
34: Semi-soft Handoff Denied Due to Power Control
Overload on Reverse Link
36: Hard Handoff Denied Due to Power Control
Overload on Reverse Link
CDMAPAF
32: Number of Times of Power Control Overload on
Reverse Traffic Channels
ECPPAFCARR CDMA
*
* These counts are used for both uplink and downlink overload control.
CDMAPAFCARR
74: Average RSSI Rise Above the Noise Floor
The count provides the average Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) rise above the
noise floor. The RSSI rise is generated every 2 seconds. To obtain this count in dB, multi-
ply the count by a factor of 0.01.
75: Peak RSSI Rise Above the Noise Floor
This count provides the peak RSSI rise above the noise floor. This RSSI rise is generated
every 2 seconds. To obtain this count in dB, multiply the count by a factor of 0.01
76: RSSI Rise Count 1
Defines the number of times of RSSI rise in the Improved Reverse Link Overload Control
(IROC) Blocking Region II for walsh code loading [0-lo_load_thres].
Similar to RSSI Rise Count 1 but for walsh code loading [lo_load_thres-up_load_thres].
Similar to RSSI Rise Count 1 but for walsh code loading [up_load_thres-1].
Similar to RSSI Rise Count 1 but for IROC Blocking Region I.
82: Average MRFER Count 1
The MRFER shall be recorded each time the RSSI rise in the IROC Blocking Region II
for walsh code loading [0-lo_load_thres]. To obtain this count in dB, multiply the count
by a factor of 0.1.
Similar to Average MRFER Count 1 but for walsh code loading [lo_load_thres-
up_load_thres].
Similar to Average MRFER Count 1 but for walsh code loading [up_load_thres-1].
CDMAPAFCARR
74: Average RSSI Rise Above the Noise Floor
75: Peak RSSI Rise Above the Noise Floor
CONCEPT OF
DOWNLINK OVERLOAD CONTROL
On the downlink, the base station calculates the current fraction of power amplifier avail-
able power that is being used. Again, the base station compares the fraction of available
power to the downlink thresholds. New calls and handoffs into the sector are allowed
when the fraction of available power is below the lower threshold. New calls are denied,
but handoffs and emergency calls (that is, calls with a special string of dialed digits, such
as, 911) are allowed into the sector when the fraction is between the lower and upper
thresholds. New calls and handoffs are denied when the fraction is above the upper thresh-
old.
CONCEPT OF
Deny handoffs into the sector
Allow emergency calls into the sector
Allow new calls into the sector
Time
0
50
100
Percent of Available Power [%]
Upper
Threshold
Lower
Threshold
Power
Power
DOWNLINK OVERLOAD CONTROL PROCESSING
The system estimates the total downlink power to control overload conditions. In addition,
the system will limit input to the power amplifier so the amplifier operates below its
design output power limit in those situations where all users are demanding full power on
the traffic channels. The base station periodically estimates the total transmitted power for
each power amplifier from the current pilot, page, sync, and traffic channel digital gains.
Where scale, bcratt_fact, pilot_gain, page_gain, sync_gain, and traffic_gain were defined
in the power balancing section. The traffic activity is the average voice activity for a traf-
fic channel calculated by the base station.
The P
Total
estimate is compared to the upper and lower power thresholds. The power
thresholds are computed from the lower_pwr_thresh, upper_pwr_thresh, max_power and
tcvact_fact translation parameters.
lower power threshold = lower_pwr_thresh max_power function (tcvact_fact)
upper power threshold = upper_pwr_thresh max_power function (tcvact_fact)
When P
Total
is below the lower threshold, all new calls and handoffs into the sector are
processed. When P
Total
is between the lower and the upper thresholds the base station
notifies the ECPC so the ECPC can block new calls but allow emergency calls. The base
station continues to accept handoffs into the sector.
When P
Total
exceeds the upper threshold, the base station notifies the ECPC so the ECPC
can block all new calls. The base station will not accept handoffs into the sector, but the
system will attempt a hard handoff to another CDMA RF channel, if possible.
The base station also compares the estimate of total power to the max_power translation
parameter, since the total power can never be allowed to exceed the power rating on the
power amplifier. If the total power estimate exceeds the power amplifier rating, the base
station clips the signal to the power amplifier so the amplifier is operating within its rat-
ing. The base station will continue clipping until the total power falls below the value
specified by the del_hyst parameter.
P
Total
(100 del_hyst) max_power
scale 10 pilot_gain
2
+ sync_gain
2
+ paging_gain
2
+ traffic_gain
i
2
traffic activity
i = 1
M
bcratt_fact
10
P
Total
=
DOWNLINK OVERLOAD CONTROL PROCESSING
Calculate upper and
Estimate total power,
P
Total
Let P = P
Total
- Notify ECPC of
power overload
- Do not accept
No
Is
Yes
P max_power?
Is
P < lower
No
lower power
thresholds
power thresh?
Is
P < upper
power thresh?
incoming handoffs
Clip output power to
max_power
Estimate P
Stop clipping
Yes
No
Process all calls
- Notify ECPC of
power overload
- Accept incoming
handoffs and
Yes
Yes
No
Is P <
(100-del_hyst) max_power)
?
emergency calls
AGGREGATE OVERLOAD CONTROL
The forward link overload control algorithm based on a Gain Clipping (GC) algorithm to
limit the power overshoots, has certain limitations. The power overshoot control algo-
rithms discussed in this section includes Aggregate Overload Control (AOC) and its varia-
tion Modified Aggregate Overload Control (MAOC). Simulation results have indicated
that AOC based overload control algorithm has performance gains over GC based over-
load algorithm and provides the capability to operate in a higher capacity mode while
meeting amplifier overshoot constraints.
It is worth mentioning that the call admission control under AOC/MAOC is quite different
from the call admission control under GC. In GC, blocking new call originations is the
first action taken when the system is in overload because there is no other way to control
the power overload. Gain clipping takes place only as the last resort to bring down the
power because the priority is always to save the existing calls first. In AOC/MAOC, call
blocking can be activated sometime after the AOC/MAOC scaling because the AOC/
MAOC scaling already controls the power overload situation without hurting the existing
calls, therefore a higher downlink capacity can be achieved.
Simulation of AOC and MAOC based overload control algorithm has indicated that the
capacity gain is achieved with a graceful loss in quality of service (FFER, call dropping
rate etc.). With the AOC action, in addition to the net output power being reduced, the
total interference to each user is reduced as well, which results in a graceful degradation in
the quality of service.
AOC adjust output power by scaling every channel. Scaling the overhead channels, espe-
cially the pilot channel, will dynamically change the cell coverage. The AOC scaling
(pilot shrinking) may cause some unexpected coverage holes when the cell is in overload.
For some markets, dynamic changes in cell coverage may not be desirable. A modified
AOC (MAOC) algorithm is provided for this case. Instead of scaling all logical channels,
the MAOC will scale only the traffic channels to reduce the net output power, i.e.; the
overhead channels maintain their default power allocation even under overload.
It is important that soft handoffs be accepted even when the average power is at or above
the blocking threshold (block_pwr_thresh, the threshold for new call blocking under
AOC/MAOC). The soft handoff users will consume little additional power from the over-
loaded sector, but call dropping will be avoided. Additionally, accepting soft handoffs
helps in reducing both forward and reverse interference.
The Gain Clipping based algorithm brings down the power
by blocking calls before limiting the gain adjustments.
Aggregate Overload Control (AOC) limits the gain before
blocking calls.
Increase downlink capacity
The gain is limited by scaling output power.
AOC scales all channels
Modified AOC scales traffic channels only
AOC/MAOC only blocks new non-emergency calls.
AGGREGATE OVERLOAD CONTROL ALGORITHM
Shown here is the algorithm for Aggregate Overload Control (AOC) and Modified AOC
(MAOC). The scale factor, K
AOC
, is applied to all channels for AOC but only the traffic
channels for MAOC.
When the system is in overload, AOC/MAOC controls power overshoot by frequent con-
trol action. The call admission control is used to restrict the power increase caused by
admitting new calls when the system is approaching the amplifier power constraint. Simu-
lations show that, when used with AOC/MAOC, the call admission control (call blocking)
thresholds should be set such that call blocking from overload is turned on infrequently;
i.e., only under high values of admitted load. This way, the system can operate with higher
output power and lower overshoots at higher admitted loads.
The overload call blocking algorithm when used with AOC is based on pilot fraction.
Since AOC adjusts the pilot power, call blocking is needed once the pilot fraction falls
below a threshold. It must be emphasized that the blocking criterion for AOC and MAOC
is equivalent only from a threshold point of view. From a blocking performance perspec-
tive, the two are different: using MAOC, calls would be blocked when the average output
power reaches a threshold; using AOC, calls would be blocked when the average
demanded power reaches the threshold.
Blocking of new non-emergency calls stops when the output power drops below the
blocking threshold by a hysteresis value, block_delta_hyst.
AGGREGATE OVERLOAD CONTROL ALGORITHM
No
pwr
cur
> =
No
th
AOC
pwr
max
Allow all calls
No
Yes
Yes
pwr
max
= max_power scale factor
?
Calculate K
AOC
between
K
low
and 1. Apply K
AOC
*
Block new non-emergency
Honor incoming handoffs
pwr
avg
> =
th
block
pwr
max
?
pwr
avg
<
(th
block
- hyst) pwr
max
?
Calculate K
AOC
between
K
low
and 1. Apply K
AOC
*

Yes
Legend
K
AOC
AOC scale factor
K
low
lower limit for K
AOC
(RC/V)
th
AOC
threshold to start AOC (RC/V)
th
block
threshold for blocking (RC/V)
hyst hysteresis to stop blocking (RC/V)
pwr
max
max power with multiplier
pwr
cur
average output power after scaling
pwr
avg
AOC: average output power before scaling
MAOC: average output power after scaling
*) AOC: K
AOC
applied to all logical channels
MAOC: K
AOC
applied to traffic channels
Initialize with K
AOC
= 1
AGGEGRATE OVERLOAD CONTROL
Forward link power overload occurs due to a variety of reasons, and is more critical in 3G-
1X systems carrying data services. This is because a single logical data channel transmits
at a much higher power than a voice channel for high-rate data bursts (F-SCH data bursts).
Therefore, the same AOC/MAOC based forward link overload control algorithm as for
voice is used for packet data also, but with additional constraints and actions to handle F-
SCH data bursts.
The AOC/MAOC algorithm controls the output power to be within desired limits by
dynamic scaling of the output signal. However, during overload due to F-SCH data bursts,
the AOC scale factor would reduce towards its lower limit, while the F-SCH bursts will
increase their power usage towards their individual maximum limits. This condition is
caused by the received E b /N 0 driven power control at the mobile and overload control at
the base station working in opposition to each other.
The only way to handle this issue in a flexible manner is to admit F-SCH bursts only when
there is sufficient power budget available (proactive), coupled with a mechanism to
release bursts if an extreme overload situation occurs under system operation (reactive).
Assign F-SCH
The Forward Supplemental Air Resource Allocation (F-SARA) algorithm will assign F-
SCH only when a sufficient power budget is available.
F-SCH Release Due to Overload
The figure shows the additional process to decide wether to release F-SCH.
The system will active F-SCH until the average output power falls below the threshold, or
when there are no more F-SCHs to release, if the following two conditions are true:
The AOC scale factor is below a specified threshold, fsch_raocthr.
The short-term average power is above a specified threshold, fsch_rpwrthr.
The two conditions together signal the occurrence of a sustained overload condition.
K
AOC
<
fsch_raocthr?
Release necessary F-SCH
Yes
No
pwr
cur
>
fsch_rpwrthr?
Yes
No
Continue with active F-SCH
AOC/
MAOC
aoc_pwr_thresh, block_pwr_thresh,
block_delta_hyst, upper_pwr_thresh,
lower_pwr_thresh, fpwr_rpt
tion parameters.
Scaling Power Thresh (%)
(aoc_pwr_thresh)
Form: ceqface, ecp
Defines the threshold as a percentage used for the

AOC algorithm to compute what power scaling factor
should be achieved.
Range: 70 100 percent
Call Block Pwr Thresh (%)
(block_pwr_thresh)
Form: ceqface, ecp
Defines the threshold as a percentage used by the call

admission algorithm to determine when new non-emer-
gency calls should be blocked.
Delta Hyst (%)
(block_delta_hyst)
Form: ceqface, ecp
Defines the delta hysteresis as a percentage used for

the call admission algorithm to determine when to admit
new non-emergency calls again.
Range: 0.0 10.0 in increments of 0.5
Upper Power Threshold (%)
(upper_pwr_thresh)
Form: ceqface, ecp
used by the cell to calculate an upper power threshold

limit on the forward link for denying incoming handoffs.
The percentage specified in this parameter is applied to
the value specified in the Total Forward Power Ceiling
Allotted for CDMA field to determine the actual value.
This parameter must be greater than the value of the
Lower Power Threshold parameter.
Lower Power Threshold (%)
(lower_pwr_thresh)
Form: ceqface, ecp
used by the cell to calculate a lower power threshold

limit on the forward link for denying new calls. The per-
centage specified in this parameter is applied to the
value specified in the Total Forward Power Ceiling
Allotted for CDMA field to determine the actual value.
This parameter must be less than the value of the
Upper Power Threshold parameter.
Range: 60 92
Flexent RCS Forward Power Report
(fpwr_rpt)
Form: ceqface, ecp
This parameter indicates the power allocation reporting

mechanism to be used. The two methods used are
CRC software calculation or CBR hardware measure-
ment.
Range: crc and cbr
aoc_pwr_thresh, block_pwr_thresh,
block_delta_hyst, upper_pwr_thresh,
lower_pwr_thresh, fpwr_rpt

AUTOPLEX
Forward Aggregate Overload Control:
Scaling Power Thresh (%)........................................... +202) ___
Call Block Pwr Thresh (%) .......................................... +203) ___
- Delta Hyst (%)......................................................... +204) ___
Overload Control:
Upper Power Threshold (%)......................................... +205) ___
Lower Power Threshold (%)......................................... +206) ___
CRTU Single Channel Functional Test: Rate
Set 1
Rate
Set 2
Forward Link Frame Error Rate Threshold (%)............... +207) ____ +208) ____
Reverse Link Frame Error Rate Threshold (%) .............. +209) ____ +210) ____
Flexent RCS Forward Power Report .............................. +211)
Receive Diversity Equipped............................................... 212)
Maximum Delay Upon Redirection .................................... +213)
CDMA/Analog Separate Rx Path....................................... 214)
pwr_alloc_swc, del_hyst
tion parameters.
Forward Power Report Source
(pwr_alloc_swc)
Form: ceqface, ecp
defines the source of the forward power report. The

source can be either the bus interface unit (BIU) or the
CDMA channel controller (CCC).
Range: b for BIU and c for CCC
Forward Power Clipping Hysteresis
(%)
(del_hyst)
Form: ceqface, ecp
defines the clipping hysteresis for forward power.
Range: 1 15 percent
pwr_alloc_swc, del_hyst

Forward Power Report Source ........................................................................... +239) ___
Forward Power Clipping Hysteresis (%) ............................................................ +240) ___
AUTOPLEX
FORWARD AGGREGATE OVERLOAD
CONTROL TRANSLATION PARAMETERS
fwd_ovd_sw, n_win_aoc, n_win_block,
aoc_scale_limit, preheatup_factor
tion parameters.
Overload Algorithm Switch
(fwd_ovd_sw)
Form: cell2, ecp
This parameter defines the switch that enables the cell to

select different overload control algorithms.
Range: g = GC, a = AOC and m = MAOC
Scale Factor Averaging Filter
Window
(n_win_aoc)
Form: cell2, ecp
This parameter defines the constant for the AOC scale

factor averaging filter. The scale factor will be filtered
using this constant, and the averaged output will be used
by the AOC algorithm.
Range: 1 - 20
Call Blocking Average Filter
Window
(n_win_block)
Form: cell2, ecp
This parameter defines the time constant for the call

blocking power averaging filter, the measured forward link
power (MAOC) or AOC will be filtered using this constant,
and the averaged output will be used by the call admis-
sion control algorithm.
Range: 25 - 2000, in increments of 25
Power Scaling Window
(aoc_scale_limit)
Form: cell2, ecp
This parameter defines the lower limit that the AOC

power scaling can reach (meaning the lowest power that
can be scaled).
Range: 0.10 - 1.00, in 0.01 increments
Amplifier Heatup Interval for
Pre-Cool-Down
(preheatup_factor)
Form: cell2, ecp
This parameter is used to compute the interval used by

the cool down algorithm to decide when to enter the pre-
cool-down state. This parameter is expressed as a frac-
tion of the heatup interval (a hard-coded value).
Range: 30 - 100 percent, in increments of 5
CONTROL TRANSLATION PARAMETERS
fwd_ovd_sw, n_win_aoc, n_win_block,
aoc_scale_limit, preheatup_factor

CDMA Cell Site Information ONLY
Forward Aggregate Overload Control:
Overload Algorithm Switch..................................................................................... +298) ___
Scale Factor Averaging Filter Window .................................................................. +299) ___
Call Blocking Power Averaging Filter Window..................................................... +300) ___
Power Scaling Limit................................................................................................. +301) ___
Amplifier Heatup Interval for Pre-Cool_Down (%) ................................................ +302) ___
AUTOPLEX
System Cell ____
3G-1X FORWARD LINK OVERLOAD CONTROL
tion parameters.
Scale Thresh for F-SCH Bursts,
Release (Prim/Alt)
(fsch_raocthr)
(afsch_raocthr)
Form: ceqface3g
The threshold used by the forward link overload algorithm

to determine whether to release (kill) existing active F-
SCH bursts due to a sustained power overload condition.
(Primary) 0.70 - 1.00
(Alternate) 0.70 - 1.00
Scale Thresh for F-SCH Bursts,
(raoc_carr)
Form: ceqface3g

Range: y or blank
Power Thresh for F-SCH Bursts,
Admit (Prim/Alt)
(fsch_apwthr)
(afsch_apwthr)
Form: ceqface3g
The threshold used by the F-SARA algorithm to

determine the power budget when allocating an F-SCH
burst. When the alternate value is specified, it will take
Range:
(Primary) 0 - 100
(Alternate) 0 - 100
Admit Carriers Using Alt
(apw_carr)
Form: ceqface3g

Range: y or blank
Release (Prim/Alt)
(fsch_rpwthr)
(afsch_rpwthr)
Form: ceqface3g
The threshold used by the forward link overload algorithm

to determine whether to release (kill) existing active F-
SCH bursts due to increased power usage and sustained
power overload condition. When the alternate value is
specified, it will take precedence over the primary value.
Range:
(Primary) 80 - 130
(Alternate) 80 - 130
(rpw_carr)
Form: ceqface3g

Range: y or blank
3G-1X FORWARD LINK OVERLOAD CONTROL
AUTOPLEX
Forward Link:
- Release ........+87) ____ +88) ____ 90) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
- Admit .........+110) __ +111) ___ 113) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
- Release .......+133) ___ +134) ___ 136) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Reverse Link:
- Admit .........+156) _____ +157) _____ 159) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
- Release .......+179) _____ +180) _____ 182) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
- [L1 to L2] ....+202) ____ +203) ____ 205) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
- [L2 to 1] .....+225) ____ +226) ____ 228) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Ec/Io Offset for
R-SCH Admit (dB) ..........+248) ____ +249) ____ 251) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
max_power
tion parameters.
Max Pwr
(max_power)
Form: ceqcom2, cdmeqp, crcseq,
bbueqp
identifies the maximum power level at the antenna con-

nector.
Range: varies depending on the hardware used.
S
NOTE:
It is recommended that the tables for max_power in the Translation
Application Notes are followed.
max_power

AUTOPLEX
Cellular SERIES II CELL EQUIPAGE COMMON (ceqcom2) Screen 17 of 23
System Cell ____
BBA BBA BBA CDMA CDMA Num of Base LAC Phy Sub
Stat Stat Type Carr Chanl Page Chnl Class ID Ant Mem
202) BBA 203) BBA 204) 205) 206) 207) 208) 209) 210) 211) 212)
[1] 1 _ 2 _ _____ __ ____ _ ____ __ _ _
[2] 3 _ 4 _ _____ __ ____ _ ____ __ _ _
[3] 5 _ 6 _ _____ __ ____ _ ____ __ _ _
Max
Pwr
213)
LMT/CATV
Max Pwr
214)
Atten
Fact
215)
WARNING: REMOVE THE BBA PRIOR TO
CHANGING ANY INFO FOR THAT BBA. FAILURE
TO FOLLOW THE PROPER PROCEDURES MAY
CORRUPT THE CELL OPERATION.
[1] ____ ___ __
[2] ____ ___ __
[3] ____ ___ __
FORWARD LINK CAPACITY ENHANCEMENT
The capacity enhancement feature increases the forward link capacity by maximizing the
utilization of the amplifier. In order to support more users, the lower and upper power
thresholds are raised by a specified amount. Since the utilization of the amplifier is
increased as a result of heavier forward link loading, additional safeguards have been
added to the forward link overload control algorithm in order to prevent overdriving the
amplifier and violating FCC requirements. Recent studies have verified that the perfor-
mance degradation due to heavier forward link loading situations resulting from the
implementation of this feature is not significant.
FORWARD LINK CAPACITY ENHANCEMENT
In order to better utilize amplifiers the upper and lower
thresholds in the forward link overload control algorithm are
raised.
Additional safeguards have been added to the forward
link overload algorithm in order to prevent overdriving
the amplifier and violating FCC requirements.
Studies have shown that performance degradation with the
feature activated is not significant.
This feature is available with the following amplifiers:
LAC, HTPA, CAM
PCA (CTU and HPCTU Option 1)
Flexent Microcell, Flexent Modular Cell.
tcvact_fact
tion parameters.
Note: This translation parameter has been borrowed for the Forward Link Capacity
Enhancement Feature.
Traffic Channel Voice Activity Factor
(tcvact_fact)
Form: ceqface
specifies the multiple factor to be used for the Capacity

Enhancement feature.
Range: 0.30 1.0 in 0.05 increments
Traffic Channel
Voice Activity Factor
tcvact_fact
ceqface form
Multiple Factor
for Threshold
Calculations
Function (tcvact_fact)
0.30 1.00
0.35 1.00
0.40 1.00
0.45 1.00
0.50 1.00
0.55 1.00
0.60 1.06
0.65 1.13
0.70 1.19
0.75 1.25
0.80 1.31
0.85 1.38
0.90 1.44
0.95 1.50
1.00 1.50
tcvact_fact

AUTOPLEX
Forward Link:
Pilot Channel Gain (dgu)..................................... 184) ___
Paging Channel Gain (dgu)................................. 185) ___
Sync Channel Gain (dgu).................................... 186) ___
Traffic Channel Voice Activity Factor ............. 187) ___
Enable Forward Link Power Control ................... +188) ___
Loading Threshold for High Capacity (%) ........... +189) ___
Rate
Set 1
Rate
Set 2
Nominal Traffic Channel Gain (dgu).................... +190) ____ +191) ____
Forward Frame Error Rate (%) ........................... +192) ____ +193) ____
Small Gain Increment (dgu) ................................ +194) ____ +195) ____
Target Frame Error Rate for High Capacity (%).. +196) ____ +197) ____
Gain Threshold for High Capacity (dgu).............. +198) ____ +199) ____
CDMAPAFCARR
3: Duration of Power Control Overload on Forward Traffic Channels
This count is incremented for each second that a CDMA carrier frequency is experiencing
power control overload on forward traffic channels. This event occurs whenever the
Lower Power Threshold is reached. The units for this count are in seconds.
29: Soft Handoff Denied Due to Power Control Overload on Forward Link
The number of soft handoffs that were denied because of power control overload in the
forward link at the target sector.
31: Softer Handoff Denied Due to Power Control Overload on Forward Link
Similar to Soft Handoff Denied but for Softer Handoff.
33: Semi-soft Handoff Denied Due to Power Control Overload on Forward Link
35: Hard Handoff Denied Due to Power Control Overload on Forward Link
37: Gain Increase Denied (Gain Clipping) Due to Power Control Overload in For-
ward Link
The number of requests denied for gain increase (gain clipping) when forward link is in
overload.
CDMAPAF
34: Number of Times of Power Control Overload on Forward Traffic Channels
This service measurement counts whenever the lower_pwr_thresh is exceeded. The ser-
vice measurement counts each occurrence if overload occurs on different CDMA channels
simultaneously.
CDMAPAFCARR
3: Duration of Power Control Overload on Forward
Traffic Channels
29: Soft Handoff Denied Due to Power Control
Overload on Forward Link
31: Softer Handoff Denied Due to Power Control
33: Semi-soft Handoff Denied Due to Power Control
35: Hard Handoff Denied Due to Power Control
37: Gain Increase Denied (Gain Clipping) Due to
Power Control Overload in Forward Link
CDMAPAF
34: Number of Times of Power Control Overload on
Forward Traffic Channels
ECPPAFCARR CDMA
The number of originations that were denied because of lack of power control budget.
The number of terminations that were denied because of lack of power control budget.
9: Originations Denied Due to Power Control Overload in Forward Link
This count represents the number of originations that were denied due to power control
overload in the forward link.
10: Terminations Denied Due to Power Control Overload in Forward Link
This count represents the number of terminations denied due to power control overload in
the forward link.
ECPPAFCARR CDMA
*
*
9: Originations Denied Due to Power Control Overload
in Forward Link
10: Terminations Denied Due to Power Control
Overload in Forward Link
* These counts are used for both uplink and downlink overload control.
CONTROL SERVICE MEASUREMENTS
CDMAPAFCARRL
1: Aggregate Overload Control Scaling Factor 1
The Aggregate Overload Control (AOC) algorithm recalculates a scaling factor every 20
msec. The scaling factor ranges from less than or equal to 0.1 to 1.0 and is applied to the
forward link power output of every active channel (traffic and overhead) on the carrier.
The range for this count is from less than or equal to 0.1 to less than 0.2. This count speci-
fies the number of times the range was calculated and applied during the hour.
Similar to Aggregate Overload Control Scaling Factor 1 but for the range [0.2, 0.3].
Similar to Aggregate Overload Control Scaling Factor 1 but the scaling factor ranges from
less than or equal to 0.1 to 1.0.
CONTROL SERVICE MEASUREMENTS
CDMAPAFCARRL
OVERLOAD CONTROL SUMMARY
OVERLOAD CONTROL SUMMARY
Reverse link overload control
Objective: prevent performance degradation and
coverage reduction.
Base station estimates Walsh Code loading, RSSI
rise, and MRFER and blocks calls based on
thresholds.
Forward link overload control
Objective: protect amplifier from overdriving and
maintain performance at the cell edge during full
load.
Gain Clipping algorithm: base station estimates
downlink power, compares used power with Max
Power, and blocks calls based on thresholds.
AOC/MAOC: base station estimates downlink pow-
er, adjusts a scale factor for power, and blocks calls
based on threshold.
If high speed data is present, SCH may be released to
decrease loading.
NOTE:
Prior to R16.1 the Reverse Link Overload Control measured only noise rise and
blocked cells based on thresholds.
OVERLOAD CONTROL
Knowledge Check
Question 1.
What is the objective of the uplink overload control algorithm?
A. To prevent the mobile from transmitting too much power
B. To prevent performance degradation and uplink coverage reduction
C. To keep the base station's transmitter within its power rating and maintain perfor-
mance at the edge of the cell
D. To minimize interference for other mobiles
S
Answer: b
Question 2.
What is the objective of the downlink overload control algorithm?
A. To prevent the mobile to transmit too much power
B. To prevent performance degradation and uplink coverage reduction
C. To keep the base station's transmitter within its power rating and maintain perfor-
mance at the edge of the cell
D. To minimize interference to neighboring base stations
S
Answer: c
Question 3.
What is the purpose of the Forward Link Capacity Enhancement Feature (tcvact_fact)?
A. To keep the base station within its power rating
B. To make forward link power control more efficient
C. To better utilize the base station transmitter to increase coverage
D. To better utilize the base station transmitter to increase capacity
S
Answer: d
OVERLOAD CONTROL
Knowledge Check
Question 4.
What is the main reason why Gain Clipping Forward Link Overload Control is not used in
3G-1X?
A. Gain cannot be clipped.
B. CPU processing capacity is increased.
C. New Forward Power Control algorithm.
D. 3G-1X amplifiers are more efficient.
S
Answer: c
Question 5.
What factors does the Improved Reverse Link Overload Control (IROC) algorithm con-
sider?
A. Number of Walsh codes used.
B. Received signal strength.
C. Reverse Link Frame Error Rate.
D. All of the above.
S
Answer: d
Question 6.
True or False? Improved Reverse Link Overload Control (IROC) will never block a
request for soft handoff.
S
Answer: True
Section 11
Multi-Carrier Handoff Section 11
Multi-Carrier Handoff CL8303 v1.0
WHY INTER-FREQUENCY HANDOFF
When a mobile is on a traffic channel there are two reasons why the mobile would do an
inter-frequency handoff.
Carrier is discontinuing (border carrier). If the mobile is on a carrier that is discontinu-
ing and moving out from that carriers coverage area, an inter-frequency handoff has to
be performed to avoid losing the call.
Current carrier may be blocked (handoff escalation). A mobile may not be able to per-
form a soft/softer handoff because there are no resources available at the target sector.
To avoid dragging the call too far and risking a dropped call the mobile may perform
an inter-frequency handoff.
CL8303 v1.0 Multi-Carrier Handoff
WHY INTER-FREQUENCY HANDOFF
Carrier is discontinuing border carrier
Current carrier is blocked handoff escalation
F1/F2/F3
Traffic
Cell
F1/F2/F3
Traffic
Cell
F1/F2/F3
Traffic
Cell
F1/F2/F3
Traffic
Cell
F1 Traffic
F2 Border
Cell
F1
Traffic
Cell
F1
Traffic
Cell
F1 Traffic
F2 Border
Cell
Traffic
F3 Border
Cell
F1/F2
Traffic
F3 Border
Cell
F1/F2
F1/F2
Traffic
Cell
F1/F2
Traffic
Cell
F1/F2/F3
F1/F2
F1 (Common Carrier)
SEMI-SOFT HANDOFF
A semi-soft handoff occurs when the mobile is commanded to retune to a different CDMA
RF channel, or to change frame offset, but the frame selector and MSC vocoder remains
assigned to the call. Semi-soft handoffs require a packet pipe connection from the frame
selector to both base stations. Either both base stations are connected to the same DCS or
there exists a packet connection between DCSs when the base stations are connected to
different DCSs. This type of handoff is used when the call cannot be handed to a new cell
using the same CDMA RF channel, or frame offset, because the base station is not
equipped with the CDMA RF channel, or the channel is blocked, or the base station is
equipped but the frame offset cannot be used. This last event may occur if the new base
station has too many calls assigned to a frame offset, or the base station belongs to an
adjoining system and does not support the required frame offset.
CDMAtoCDMA Hard Handoff
A CDMAtoCDMA hard handoff occurs when a new frame selector and vocoder are
assigned to the call by the MSC. A change of CDMA RF channel may also occur, which
would be referred to as an inter-frequency handoff. This type of handoff is used when the
call is transferred to a base station connected to a different DCS that does not have a ATM
or packet bus connection to the old DCS. For example, non-networked adjacent systems.
During a semi-soft handoff, the MSC keeps the original speech handler and frame selector
configuration uninterrupted. The mobile does a hard handoff (break-before-make connec-
tion) while changing to another CDMA carrier frequency. The hard handoff can occur at
the same base station or as the mobile moves from one base station to another. Either way,
the base station is doing a hard handoff while the call continues on a different CDMA car-
rier frequency, radio and channel elements.
SEMI-SOFT HANDOFF
Mobile does hard handoff
BS(s) do hard handoff
MSC does soft handoff
F
1
- F
2
handoff
Handoff can be on same BS
or between two BSs.
MSC
Speech Handler
Frequency 2
Frame Selector
Base
Station 2
PSTN
Frequencies 1 and 2
Base
Station 1
INTER-MSC SEMI-SOFT HANDOFF
The mobile retunes to a different carrier frequency as it does a CDMA hard handoff
between the two base stations. The ATM link allows the originating MSC speech handler
and frame selector configuration to be preserved for the duration of the call.
INTER-MSC SEMI-SOFT HANDOFF
BSs do hard handoff
MSCs do inter-MSC soft handoff
F
1
- F
2
handoff
MSC 1
Speech Handler
Frequency 2
Frame Selector
Base
Station 2
PSTN
Frequency 1
MSC 2
ATM
Base
Station 1
Inter-MSC
Data Link
INTER-MSC HARD HANDOFF
When MSCs are joined without an ATM link, calls in progress that are moving between
the two respective coverage areas can be maintained by performing a hard handoff. Dur-
ing an inter-MSC hard handoff, the mobile may be changed to a different CDMA carrier
frequency or not, depending upon the network configurations. This type of handoff results
in the call transferring to a different CDMA radio, channel element, speech handler and
frame selector; all associated with the MSC to which the call is being handed over.
INTER-MSC HARD HANDOFF
BSs do hard handoff
MSCs do inter-MSC hard handoff
F
1
- F
2
handoff possible, but not required
MSC 1
Speech Handler Base
Frequency 1 or 2
Frame Selector
Station 1
Base
Station 2
PSTN
Frequency 1 or 2
MSC 2
Speech Handler
Frame Selector
Inter-MSC
Data Link
not
ATM Link
HANDDOWN VERSUS HANDOVER
For the basic cases of inter-frequency handoffs that are one-way-to-one-way configura-
tions, these handoffs can be divided into two types:
handdown
handover.
Handdown
The handoff from one carrier frequency to another carrier frequency is accomplished
without any change in the physical antenna face that is serving the mobile. The inter-fre-
quency handoff is to a physical antenna face with a pilot offset index that was already in
the active set. This is inherently more reliable than handover.
Handover
The handoff from one carrier frequency to another carrier frequency is accompanied by a
simultaneous change in the physical antenna face that is serving the mobile. The inter-fre-
quency handoff is to a physical antenna face with a pilot offset index that was not in the
active set.
The advent of the CDMA Multiple Pilots Inter-Frequency Handoff (CDMA MPIFHO)
feature relieves some of the complications associated with this destination, as discussed
later in this unit.
HANDDOWN VERSUS HANDOVER
Handdown = Inter-Frequency Handoff
within a Physical Antenna Face
Handover = Inter-Frequency Handoff
between Physical Antenna Faces
F
2
F
1
F
1
Handdown
F
2
F
2
F
1
Handover
F
2
F
1
PILOT ASSISTED VERSUS NON-PILOT ASSISTED
The inter-frequency handoff decision can be made either with or without the benefit of a
Pilot Beacon. The Pilot Beacon is used to provide a signal which can be measured by the
mobile as it executes the location algorithm.
This signal on one frequency is used as a proxy for a different frequency. Although there
are still considerations regarding the faithfulness of the proxy, Pilot Assisted is considered
more reliable than Non-Pilot Assisted. However, economic factors may motivate using
Non-Pilot Assisted. The Inter-Frequency Handoff Trigger Improvement (IFHOTI) feature
together with the CDMA Multiple Pilot Inter-Frequency Handoff (CMPIFHO) feature
makes non-pilot assisted handoff very reliable in normal RF environments.
PILOT ASSISTED VERSUS NON-PILOT ASSISTED
Pilot Assisted
Non-Pilot Assisted
F
2
F
1
F
1
Pilot Beacon
on F
2
Mobile tuned to a Traffic Channel on F
2
can make measurements of Pilot Beacon on F
2
.
F
2
F
1
F
1
Mobile tuned to a Traffic Channel on F
2
cannot make measurements of Pilot Channel on F
1
.
INTER-FREQUENCY HANDOFF PROCESS
Just like the intra-frequency handoff process for a single carrier system, the inter-fre-
quency handoff process for a multi-carrier system has two major parts, trigger and transi-
tion. The trigger triggers the inter-frequency handoff process based on what the mobile
station is reporting in the Pilot Strength Measurement Message (PSMM) and parameters
specified in translations. When an inter-frequency handoff is triggered, the transition
determines to what carrier and sectors the mobile shall handoff to.
The triggers in current software are the following:
Tr_CHo threshold based trigger for directed handoff. The equivalent trigger for
CDMA-to-Analog handoff is Tr_AHo.
Inter-Frequency Handoff Trigger Improvement (IFHOTI) trigger for directed handoff.
IFHOTI reduces the effect of loading compared to the Tr_CHo/Tr_AHo threshold
based trigger.
Pilot assisted handoff trigger, t_comp. The equivalent trigger for CDMA-to-Analog
handoff is t_ancomp.
Pilot assisted handoff trigger, t_add.
The transition is based on translations. The transition can also be based on what pilots are
in the active set. These are the transitions currently used in the software:
Simplex transition, activate only one sector on the new carrier frequency.
Multiple pilot transition, activate a number of sectors on the new carrier frequency to
allow the mobile to go directly into soft handoff.
The above triggers and transitions will be discussed in the following lessons.
INTER-FREQUENCY HANDOFF PROCESS
Trigger
Based on what the mobile is reporting in the PSMM
and translations
Tr_CHo/Tr_Aho Directed Handoff
IFHOTI Directed Handoff
T_comp/T_ancomp Pilot Assisted Handoff
T_add Pilot Assisted Handoff
Transition
Based on what the mobile is reporting in the PSMM
and translations
Simplex Transition
Multiple Pilot Transition (CMPIFHO)
BORDER BASE STATIONS
Border base stations are utilized to facilitate inter-frequency handoffs.
A border base station is defined as a base station where at least one physical antenna face
satisfies these criteria:
1. the periodic location trigger, reqpsm, translation parameter on the ceqface form is
specified with a value greater than 0, and
2. a) the directed handoff forms, cdhfl and cdhnl, are populated, or
b) the pilot type translation value is greater than zero.
BORDER BASE STATIONS
At least one physical antenna face satisfies these criteria:
1. reqpsm on ceqface form > 0
2. a) cdhfl form and cdhnl form populated
b) pilot_type > 0
and
or
PERIODIC PILOT STRENGTH
MEASUREMENT MESSAGE
The mobile station shall send an autonomous Pilot Strength Measurement Message
(PSMM) as a message requiring an acknowledgment and containing measurements con-
sistent with the event whenever any of the following events occur:
The strength of a Neighbor Set or Remaining Set pilot is found to be above t_add.
The strength of a Candidate Set pilot exceeds the strength of an Active Set pilot by
t_comp and a PSMM carrying this information has not been sent since the last Handoff
Direction Message (HDM) or Extended HDM was received.
The handoff drop timer of an Active Set pilot has expired and a PSMM carrying this
information has not been sent since the last Handoff Direction Message (HDM) or Ex-
tended HDM was received.
The base station sends a Pilot Measurement Request Order to the mobile requesting a
PSMM.
The inter-frequency handoff process is triggered based on what the mobile is reporting in
the PSMM. If a mobile is on a discontinuing carrier moving out from the core area there
will be no pilots triggering a PSMM due to the first two events above. Also, when the
handoff drop timer, t_tdrop, expires the mobile is in such poor RF environment that an
inter-frequency handoff may be unreliable.
To solve the problem in a border area the base station will periodically request a PSMM
from the mobile so that the inter-frequency handoff process can be triggered when needed.
PERIODIC PILOT STRENGTH
MEASUREMENT MESSAGE
The only measurement the system has to make decisions
on is what the mobile reports in the PSMM.
At the border there may not be a new pilot above t_add for
the mobile to measure.
Therefore, at the border we want the mobile to periodically
report pilot signal strengths (E
c
/I
0
) in the PSMM.
PERIODIC LOCATION TRIGGER
reqpsm
tion parameters.
Request for Pilot Measurement
Interval (sec)
(reqpsm)
Form: ceqface, ecp
specifies the maximum time that is expected between

mobile pilot measurement reports. This is the interval
between the previous time an MS_CS_Pilot_Strength_
Measurement message was processed and when a new
measurement message should be expected.
Range: 0 disable checking and 2 30 seconds
PERIODIC LOCATION TRIGGER
reqpsm

Redirection Destination ...................................................................................................... +130) ___
Redirection Band................................................................................................................ +131) ___
[1] ____ [2] ____ [3] ____
Border Sector Loss Threshold for Inter-Frequency Handoff................................................... +144) ___
Request for Pilot Measurement Interval (sec) ................................................................... +147) ___
AUTOPLEX
LOCATION TRIGGER
This measurement is pegged only for the Primary Sector at the Primary Cell Site. It is
incremented if the cell receives an autonomous or non-autonomous
Pilot_Strength_Measurement message from the mobile that is a Trigger, i.e., a member is
added to or removed from the active set. However, this count will not include the CDMA
Periodic Cell-Requested Triggers.
The mobile will autonomously send a pilot strength measurement (PSM) when:
The strength of a Neighbor set or Remaining set pilot is found to be above the T_ADD
threshold.
The strength of a candidate set pilot exceeds the strength of an active set pilot by
T_COMP threshold.
The strength of an active set pilot has been below the T_DROP threshold for time
T_TDROP.
PSM request after handoff reject.
2: CDMA Periodic Cell Requested Triggers
This count is pegged when the cell site detects a Trigger in response to the cell site
requesting a pilot strength measurement message that is timer-initiated.
This event will occur if the cell site has not received a Pilot Strength Measurement mes-
sage within the time REQPSM (Request for Pilot Measurement Interval) after receiving
the previous Pilot Strength Measurement message (cell R10.0 and later).
LOCATION TRIGGER
2: CDMA Periodic Cell Requested Triggers
INTER-FREQUENCY HANDOFF TRIGGER
Tr_CHo/Tr_AHo
One of the inter-frequency CDMA-to-CDMA handoff triggers is the E
c
/I
0
based threshold
for CDMA-to-CDMA handoff, Tr_CHo (c_c_ho_th). The trigger will trigger an inter-fre-
quency handoff when the E
c
/I
0
signal strength of the strongest active set pilot drops below
a threshold value.
The restrictions for the threshold based trigger, Tr_CHo, are that there can only be up to
two pilots in the active set and the pilots in the active set have to be border pilots. If there
are more than two pilots in the active set or a non-border pilot in the active set the handoff
will not be triggered.
One drawback with the E
c
/I
0
based threshold trigger is that E
c
/I
0
will change when load-
ing changes. This means that the inter-frequency handoff may not be triggered at the same
location every time, making inter-frequency handoff optimization harder.
There is also an equivalent threshold for CDMA-to-Analog handoffs, Tr_AHo
(c_a_ho_th). Tr_AHo is similar to Tr_CHo but directs the mobile to an analog system.
Tr_CHo/Tr_AHo
Yes
No
No Only border pilots
in the Active Set
?
Yes
Two pilots or less in the
Active Set
?
Start handoff
evaluation
No
Yes
Strongest active
pilot < threshold
?
Do not trigger the inter-
frequency transition
Trigger the inter-
INTER-FREQUENCY HANDOFF THRESHOLDS
c_c_ho_th, c_a_ho_th
tion parameters.
CDMAtoCDMA Handoff Threshold
(c_c_ho_th)
Form: ceqface, ecp
specifies the CDMAtoCDMA handoff threshold value.

Note: This field is not used when the CDMA IFHO TI is
on in the cell2 form. The Border Sector Loss Threshold
for Inter-Frequency Handoff is used instead.
CDMAtoAnalog Handoff Threshold
(c_a_ho_th)
Form: ceqface, ecp
specifies the CDMAtoAnalog handoff threshold value.

Note: This field is not used when the CDMA IFHO TI is
on in the cell2 form. The Border Sector Loss Threshold
for Inter-Frequency Handoff is used instead.
INTER-FREQUENCY HANDOFF THRESHOLDS
c_c_ho_th, c_a_ho_th

[1] ____ [2] ____ [3] ____
CDMA-to-Analog Handdown Threshold................................................................................. +140) ___
CDMA-to-CDMA Handoff Threshold................................................................................... +141) ___
CDMA-to-Analog Handoff Threshold.................................................................................. +142) ___
Border Sector Loss Threshold for Inter-Frequency Handoff .................................................. +144) ___
Border Sector Loss Threshold for CDMA-to-Analog Handoff................................................. +145) ___
Carrier Assignment Algorithm ................................................................................................ +148) ___
RF Loading Weight Factor ..................................................................................................... +149) ___
AUTOPLEX
HANDOFF FEATURE
CDMA IFHOTI
The CDMA Inter-Frequency Handoff Trigger Improvement (CDMA IFHOTI) feature
addresses some of the challenges associated with triggering inter-frequency handoffs at
border base stations.
This feature improves the CDMAtoCDMA inter-frequency handoff trigger and
CDMAtoAnalog handoff evaluation at a border sector by using a new E
c
/I
0
loss metric
algorithm. The new E
c
/I
0
loss metric algorithm bases on the forward link loading factor
information of the strongest pilot sector in the active set to make the handoff trigger loca-
tion constant. The E
c
/I
0
loss metric algorithm is specific to Lucent Technology products.
This feature also has the system start the periodic pilot strength measurement when a bor-
der sector is added in the active set.
The IFHOTI feature requires all border pilots in the active set to have the feature turned on
in order for IFHOTI to work. Up to three pilots, of which at least one is a border pilot, can
be in the Active Set.
Acronym
CDMA IFHOTI CDMA Inter-Frequency Handoff Trigger Improvement
HANDOFF FEATURE
CDMA IFHOTI
Pilot E
c
/I
0
changes with cell loading
E
c
/I
0
decreases when cell loading increases.
Restrictions
Mobile can only be in max three way soft handoff.
Mobile has to have at least one border cell in the ac-
tive set.
All border cells in the active set have to have IFHOTI
activated.
E
c
I
0
E
c
/I
0
Light Traffic Load Heavy Traffic Load
E
c
I
0
E
c
/I
0
CDMA INTER-FREQUENCY HANDOFF
TRIGGER IMPROVEMENT
This feature provides an alternative for both CDMAtoCDMA interfrequency handoff
trigger and CDMAtoAnalog handoff evaluation at a border sector by using a new E
c
/I
0

Loss Metric algorithm. The new E
c
/I
0
Loss Metric algorithm is based on the forward link
loading factor information of the strongest pilot sector in the active set. When the criteria
for interfrequency handoff are met, this feature allows a call on a border carrier to handoff/
handdown even if the call is in soft handoff with a non-border sector.
The E
c
/I
0
Loss Metric algorithm is a Lucent proprietary capability. It is defined as follows.
E
c
/I
0
Loss Metric = Transmitting E
c
/I
0 max
(dB) E
c
/I
0 agg
(dB)
The forward link overload process for each sector computes the Forward Link Loading
Factor used in the calculation of the Transmitting E
c
/I
0
. E
c
/I
0 agg
is the aggregate received
E
c
/I
0
reported in the PSMM. The Transmitting E
c
/I
0
of the sector associated with the max-
imum received E
c
/I
0
is defined as Transmitting E
c
/I
0 max
and is used in computing the
metric.
With this feature, the loading dependency of the CDMA-to-CDMA interfrequency hand-
off and CDMA-to-Analog handoff is reduced. To trigger a CDMA-to-CDMA interfre-
quency handoff (or a CDMA-to-Analog handoff) with CDMA Interfrequency Handoff
Trigger Improvement, the following two criteria have to be met.
1. The border pilot strength minus the interior pilot strength has to be greater than the
value in the Border Pilot versus Interior Pilot Threshold field so that the primary
sector will calculate the E
c
/I
0
Loss Metric for the border sector (the strongest pilot).
2. The E
c
/I
0
Loss Metric value has to be greater than the value in the Border Sector
Loss Threshold for Interfrequency Handoff field (or Border Sector Loss Threshold
for CDMA-to-Analog Handoff field).
Note that when CDMA Interfrequency Handoff Trigger Improvement feature is active,
CDMA-to-CDMA Handoff threshold (Tr_CHo), and CDMA-to-Analog Handoff Thresh-
old (Tr_AHo) fields in the ceqface form are not used. Instead, the Border Sector Loss
Threshold for Interfrequency Handoff and the Border Sector Loss Threshold for CDMA-
to-Analog Handoff field in the ceqface form are used.
The Transmitting E
c
I
0
Pilot Power Maximum Power ( )

serving frequency
Forward Link Loading Factor ( )
serving frequency
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- =
CDMA INTER-FREQUENCY HANDOFF
TRIGGER IMPROVEMENT
Yes
No
Max 3
active pilots incl. Border
pilot(s)
?
Yes
No
Non-border pilots
in Active Set
?
Yes
Start handoff evaluation
No
Strongest
border - strongest interior
> bpinp_comp
?
Do not trigger the inter-
Trigger the inter-
Loss metric
> threshold
?
Calculate loss metric
Yes
No
Loss metric = Rx
pilot power/max power
forward link loading factor
E
c
/I
0aggr
E
C
/I
0
Tx
E
C
/I
0
Rx
E
C
/I
0
Tx
E
C
/I
0
=
=
INTER-FREQUENCY HANDOFF
TRIGGER IMPROVEMENT
f_list5.c_feat[4]
tion parameters.
CDMA IFHO TI
(f_list5.c_feat[4])
Form: cell2
indicates if the CDMA Inter-frequency Handoff Trigger
Improvement (CDMA IFHO TI) optional feature is active
on this cell site.
Range: y or n
TRIGGER IMPROVEMENT
f_list5.c_feat[4]

AUTOPLEX
System Cell ____
198) 200) 202) 204)
TRIGGER IMPROVEMENT
ifho_blos_th, caho_blos_th, bpinp_comp
tion parameters.
Border Sector Loss Threshold for
(ifho_blos_th)
Form: ceqface, ecp
used by the border sectors to determine the E

c
/I
0
Loss
Metric level above which the mobile will be directed to
handoff to another CDMA frequency.
Border Sector Loss Threshold for
CDMA-to-Analog Handoff
(caho_blos_th)
Form: ceqface, ecp
used by the border sectors to determine the E

c
/I
0
Loss
Metric level above which the mobile will be directed to
handoff to analog.
Border Pilot Versus Interior Pilot
Threshold
(bpinp_comp)
Form: ceqface, ecp
used by the border sectors to determine the power level

above which the primary sector shall calculate the E
c
/I
0

Loss Metric when a call is in soft handoff and at least a
border sector is in the active set.
TRIGGER IMPROVEMENT
ifho_blos_th, caho_blos_th, bpinp_comp

[1] ____ [2] ____ [3] ____
Border Sector Loss Threshold for Inter-Frequency Handoff ........................................... +144) ___
Border Sector Loss Threshold for CDMA-to-Analog Handoff.......................................... +145) ___
Border Pilot Versus Interior Pilot Threshold ..................................................................... +146) ___
AUTOPLEX
Example
This example shows the process for inter-frequency handoff trigger using the Inter-Fre-
quency Handoff Trigger Improvement (IFHOTI) feature.
Sector A, B, D, and E are configured for border sectors, configured for inter-frequency
handoff. Sector C and F are non-border sectors. The translations used for the border sec-
tors are:
bpinp_comp = 4 dB
ifho_blos_th = 3 dB
Shown in the example are four locations and the table show values that will be used in the
IFHOTI process.
Point 1
The mobile is in a simplex call with sector C. Sector C is a non-border sector so there are
no IFHOTI calculations done.
Point 2
Sectors B and D are added to the active set. B and D are border sectors with IFHOTI acti-
vated. Since there are now border sectors in the active set periodic PSMM is requested and
IFHOTI calculations are being done.
The first check is to compare border sectors with non-border sectors since there is a non-
border sector, sector C, in the active set. The strongest border sector as reported by the
mobile according to the table is sector B (-8.0 dB). The strongest border sector minus the
strongest non-border sector is, (-8.0) - (-11.0) = 3 dB.
3 dB is less than the translation value bpinp_comp (4 dB), therefore further IFHOTI calcu-
lations are not done. Inter-frequency handoff transition is not triggered.
Point 3
At this location the strongest border sector minus strongest non-border sector criteria is
met, (-8.0) - (-13.0) = 5 dB. 5 dB is greater than the bpinp_comp translation, 4 dB.
The IFHOTI process continues to calculate the loss metric, Tx E
c
/I
0
- Rx E
c
/I
0 agg
(-5.5) - (-5.87) = 0.37 dB
0.37 dB is less than the loss metric threshold (ifho_blos_th = 3 dB), inter-frequency hand-
off transition is not triggered.
Point 4
Now the bpinp_comp criteria is met, (-10.0) - (-17.0) = 7 dB > 4 dB. The loss metric is
(-5.0) - (-8.19) = 3.19 dB
which is greater than ifho_blos_th and the inter-frequency handoff transition is triggered.
Example
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Sector A
Config. for
IFHO
Sector C
Sector B
Config. for
IFHO
Sector D
Config. for
IFHO
Sector F
Sector E
Config. for
IFHO
F1/F2 Cell
F1/F2 Cell
F1 Only Cell
Sector Type Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4
B Rx E
c
/I
0
N/A -8.0 dB -8.0 dB -10.0 dB
B Tx E
c
/I
0
N/A N/A -5.5 dB -5.0 dB
C Rx E
c
/I
0
-8.0 dB -11.0 dB -13.0 dB -17.0 dB
D Rx E
c
/I
0
N/A -12.0 dB -13.0 dB -15.0 dB
Agg Mobile Rx -8.0 dB -5.21 dB -5.87 dB -8.19 dB
INTER-FREQUENCY HANDOFF TRANSITION
CDMA MPIFHO
The CDMA Multiple Pilot Inter-Frequency Handoff (CDMA MPIFHO) feature extends
inter-frequency handoffs beyond the basic cases of one-way-to-one-way to more interest-
ing cases of many-way-to-many-way. This feature then introduces the advantages of soft
handoffs into inter-frequency handoffs. This idea has been referred to informally as shot-
gun handoff.
This feature increases the quality of a CDMAtoCDMA handoff from one frequency to
another at border sectors. Instead of specifying only one handoff neighbor in the Extended
Handoff Direction Message, this feature allows multiple inter-frequency neighbors to be
specified. These multiple inter-frequency neighbors represent a merging of the Directed
Handover Neighbor Lists associated with all of the pilots in the Active Set. Then, on the
target frequency side, the system will apply a soft handoff connection. This greatly
increases the success of an inter-frequency handoff.
Acronym
CDMA MPIFHO CDMA Multiple Pilot Inter-Frequency Handoff
INTER-FREQUENCY HANDOFF TRANSITION
CDMA MPIFHO
Mobile in Soft Handoff
while being served on F
2
, and
after handoff to F
1
.
F
2
F
1
F
1
F
2
F
1
F
2
CMPIFHO PROCESS
The CDMA Multiple Pilot Inter-Frequency Handoff (CMPIFHO) process will a target
carrier to which the mobile can be directed. First, CMPIFHO finds at least one common
carrier among the border pilots in the active set, using the CDMA Directed Handoff Fre-
quency List (cdhfl) forms. When the common carriers in the chdfl forms have been found
the process is searching for all the common carriers. In other words, only one common
carrier has to be specified in the cdhfl form, the algorithm will find the rest.
The target carrier for the mobile will be the least forward link loaded and unblocked car-
rier among the common carriers.
Target sectors will be determined using the CDMA Directed Handoff Neighbor List
(cdhnl) forms for the active border sectors. The CMPIFHO process will produce a com-
bined inter-frequency neighbor list based on the cdhnl forms using the neighbor list selec-
tion algorithm seen in unit 2.
Seven minus Number_of_CEs_used_on_serving_carrier will be selected as the target sec-
tors. This is because the semi-soft handoff will use the same speech handler and the
speech handler can only support up to 7 legs for a call.
The first entry in the handoff candidate set will be assigned as the new primary. The new
primary will establish the soft handoff connection for the handoff candidates included in
the handoff candidate set, regardless of its own Maximum Number of Active Set (maxleg)
setting. If the CMPIFHO feature is not active at the new primary, the new primary will be
designated as the only handoff candidate in the handoff candidate set.
CMPIFHO PROCESS
System finds all common carriers for the border pilots in the
Active Set.
The target carrier will be the least loaded, unblocked carrier
of the common carriers.
A number of directed neighbors will be selected for the
target carrier using the Neighbor List Selection Algorithm
and candidate neighbors from the chdnl form entries for the
border pilots in the Active Set.
MULTIPLE PILOTS INTER-FREQUENCY HANDOFF
f_list6.c_feat[11]
tion parameters.
CDMA MPIFHO
(f_list6.c_feat[11])
Form: cell2
indicates if the CDMA Multiple Pilots Inter-Frequency
Handoff (CMPIFHO) optional feature is active on this cell
site.
Range: y or n
f_list6.c_feat[11]

AUTOPLEX
System Cell ____
198) 200) 202) 204)
csno, antfc, channel, bandclass
tion parameters.
Serving Cell Site Number
(csno)
Form: cdhfl
the identifying number for a Series II cell site.
Range: 1 222
Serving Antenna Face Number
(antfc)
Form: cdhfl
the identifying number for a Physical Antenna Face.
Range: 0 6
Channel Number
(channel[ ])
Form: cdhfl
these fields indicate the target channel number that can
be used when performing a directed frequency handoff.
The directed frequency handoff will be performed from
the frequency defined by the carrier index where the
entry is made. The serving frequency is used to obtain
the directed frequency list row.
Range:
Freq 1-10: 850 (1-309, 358-624, 691-692, 741-777,
1015-1023), 1800 (25-575), 1900 (25-1175)
Band Class
(bandclass[ ])
Form: cdhfl
this field indicates the first target band class that can be
used when performing a directed frequency handoff. The
directed frequency handoff will be performed from the
frequency and band class defined by the carrier index
where the entry is made. The serving frequency is used
to obtain the directed handoff frequency list row.
Range:
850 = cellular, 1800 = Korea CDMA PCS,
and
1900 = CDMA PCS
csno, antfc, channel, bandclass

AUTOPLEX
Cellular CDMA DIRECTED HANDOFF FREQUENCY LIST (cdhfl) Screen 1 of 1
System
Serving Cell Site Number ................................................................................... *1) ___
Serving Antenna Face Number.......................................................................... *2) ___
3) CDMA Directed Handoff Frequency List
Serving
CDMA
Carrier
Target
4)
Channel
Number
Target
5)
Band
Class
Target
6)
Channel
Number
Target
7)
Band
Class
Target
8)
Channel
Number
Target
9)
Band
Class
[1] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[2] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[3] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[4] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[5] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[6] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[7] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[8] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[9] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[10] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
S
The discontinuing carrier number is used as the row number for Serving
CDMA Carrier.
csno, antfc, target_chan, target_bc,
oper_mode, hdhandoff
tion parameters.
Serving Cell Site Number
(csno)
Form: cdhnl
is used to specify the cell site number where the serving
antenna face resides.
Range: 1 222
Serving Antenna Face Number
(antfc)
Form: cdhnl
is used to specify the serving Physical Antenna Face (omni,
alpha, beta, gamma, delta, epsilon, or zeta). The delta, epsi-
lon, and zeta antennas apply to 6 sector cell sites only. It
specifies the serving sector that owns the Directed Handoff
Neighbor List.
Range:
0 = omni
1 = alpha
2 = beta
3 = gamma
4 = delta
5 = epsilon
6 = zeta
Target Channel Number
(target_chan)
Form: cdhnl
is used to specify the CDMA channel number for the
directed handoff to the sectors specified in the Neighbor Cell
Site Sector List. analog is entered to designate hard hand-
off to analog.
Range: 1 1175, analog
Target Band Class
(target_bc)
Form: cdhnl
is used to specify the CDMA band class associated with the
target channel number.
Range:
850 = cellular, 1800 = Korea CDMA PCS,
and
1900 = CDMA PCS
Neighbor Operating Mode
(oper_mode)
Form: cdhnl
is used to specify the operating mode that the neighbor cell
site sectors will support. A value of C indicates IS-95
CDMA operation, and a value of J indicates JTC operation.
Range:
A = analog, C = IS-95 CDMA, J = JTC
Hard Handoff Only
(hdhandoff)
Form: cdhnl
indicates whether or not a hard handoff must be performed
when this neighbor list is selected.
Range: y or n
csno, antfc, target_chan, target_bc,
oper_mode, hdhandoff

AUTOPLEX
Cellular CDMA DIRECTED HANDOFF NEIGHBOR LIST (cdhnl) Screen 1 of 2
System
Serving Cell Site Number ................................................................. *1) ___
Serving Antenna Face Number........................................................ *2) ___
Target Channel Number ................................................................... *3) ___
Target Band Class ............................................................................ *4) ___ (optional)
Neighbor Operating Mode................................................................ 5) ___
Hard Handoff Only ............................................................................ 6) ___
ncs_c, nghbrantf, srvgrp
tion parameters.
Neighbor Cell Site Sector List Note: The order in which entries appear on this list deter-
mine the priority of each entry when more than one of them
could apply to a given call.
Cell Site
(ncs_c)
Form: cdhnl
is used to specify the cell site where the directed handoff will
be sent.
Range: 1 222
Ant Face
(nghbrantf)
Form: cdhnl
is used to specify the sector on the cell site where the
directed handoff will be sent.
Range:
0 = omni
1 = alpha
2 = beta
3 = gamma
4 = delta
5 = epsilon
6 = zeta
Analog Srv Grp
(srvgrp)
Form: cdhnl
is used to specify the server group to be used when perform-
ing a directed handoff to analog for the specified sector.
Note: This field should only be populated if the Neighbor
Operating Mode field is set to A.
Range:
0 = primary
1 = secondary
ncs_c, nghbrantf, srvgrp

AUTOPLEX
System
7) Neighbor Cell Site Sector List
Cell Site
8)
Ant
Face
9)
Analog
Srv Grp
10)
Extended System ID
DCS ECP System
11) 12) 13)
[1] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[2] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[3] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[4] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[5] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[6] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
MPIFHO
Example
When the interfrequency handoff condition is met, the serving primary uses the serving
frequency F3 to find a Target Channel/Target Band Class that is common to all border
sectors (i.e., Target Channel and Target Band Class for border sectors cell 11 alpha and
beta sectors). Using that, the serving primary then obtains the directed neighbor list for
cell 11 alpha and beta sectors respectively, and applies the Neighbor List Selection Algo-
rithm to get the combined directed neighbor list, which has five entries in the example.
Since 7 minus the number of CEs on serving carrier is 6 in this case, no further trunca-
tion of the handoff candidates is needed. The first entry in the combined neighbor list is
designated as the new primary. The new primary finds that both F1 and F2 are in common
for all the Handoff_Candidate_Set members and F2 has lower RF loading, therefore, the
call is handed off to F2 and is in soft handoff with members specified in the
Handoff_Candidate_Set.
The following pages will show translations needed to configure CMPIFHO for this exam-
ple.
MPIFHO
Example
F1 = 25, common carrier
F2 = 75, common carrier
F3 = 125, border carrier
Mobile is on F3, in softer handoff with , sectors of cell 11 and is going towards
cell 22 and cell 33. E
c
/I
0
for 11 is -8 dB, and for 11 -10 dB.
F1/F2
F1/F2
F1/F2
F1/F2
F1/F2
F1/F2
F1/F2/F3
F1/F2/F3
F1/F2/F3
Cell 22
Cell 33
Cell 11
Border
Old Connection
MPIFHO
Example (contd.)
For cellular systems Target Band Class would be 850 and Target Channel Number
corresponding channel number for F1.
MPIFHO
Example (contd.)

AUTOPLEX
System
Serving Cell Site Number...................................................................................... *1) 11
Serving Antenna Face Number............................................................................. *2) 1
Serving
CDMA
Carrier
Target 4)
Channel
Number
Target 5)
Band
Class
Target 6)
Channel
Number
Target 7)
Band
Class
Target 8)
Channel
Number
Target 9)
Band
Class
[1] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[2] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[3] 25 1900 ____ ____ ____ ____
[4] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[5] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[6] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[7] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[8] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[9] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[10] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

AUTOPLEX
System
Serving
CDMA
Carrier
Target 4)
Channel
Number
Target 5)
Band
Class
Target 6)
Channel
Number
Target 7)
Band
Class
Target 8)
Channel
Number
Target 9)
Band
Class
[1] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[2] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[3] 25 1900 ____ ____ ____ ____
[4] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[5] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[6] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[7] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[8] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[9] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[10] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
MPIFHO
Example (contd.)
MPIFHO
Example (contd.)

AUTOPLEX
System
Serving Cell Site Number.................................................................... *1) 11
Serving Antenna Face Number........................................................... *2) 1
Target Channel Number ..................................................................... *3) 25
Target Band Class .............................................................................. *4) 1900 (optional)
Neighbor Operating Mode................................................................... 5) J
Hard Handoff Only .............................................................................. 6) n

AUTOPLEX
System
Cell Site
8)
Ant Face
9)
Analog
Srv Grp
10)
Extended System ID
DCS ECP System
11) 12) 13)
[1] 11 1 ____ ____ ____ ____
[2] 11 2 ____ ____ ____ ____
[3] 22 3 ____ ____ ____ ____
[4] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[5] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[6] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
MPIFHO
Example (contd.)
MPIFHO
Example (contd.)

AUTOPLEX
System
Target Channel Number ..................................................................... *3) 25
Target Band Class .............................................................................. *4) 1900 (optional)
Neighbor Operating Mode................................................................... 5) J
Hard Handoff Only .............................................................................. 6) n

AUTOPLEX
System
Cell Site
8)
Ant Face
9)
Analog
Srv Grp
10)
Extended System ID
DCS ECP System
11) 12) 13)
[1] 11 2 ____ ____ ____ ____
[2] 33 1 ____ ____ ____ ____
[3] 33 3 ____ ____ ____ ____
[4] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[5] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[6] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
MPIFHO
Example
In this example the least loaded carrier is F2. The mobile will go into soft handoff on F2
with the following sectors.
The new primary will be 11, the first entry on the combined neighbor list.
11 (2 sponsors)
11 (1 sponsor, first entry on strongest sponsor)
22 (1 sponsor, last entry on strongest sponsor)
33 (1 sponsor, first entry on weakest sponsor)
33 (1 sponsor, last entry on weakest sponsor)
MPIFHO
Example
New primary determines that F2 has lower loading.
Combined directed neighbor list
cell 11 sector (new primary)
cell 22 sector
cell 11 sector
cell 33 sector
cell 33 sector
Call is in soft handoff on F2 at interfrequency handoff complete.
F1/F2
F1/F2
F1/F2
F1/F2
F1/F2
F1/F2
F1/F2/F3
F1/F2/F3
F1/F2/F3
Cell 22
Cell 33
Cell 11
Border
Old Connection
New Connection
CDMA MPIFHO METHODS
If the CMPIFHO feature is not active, call processing will only use the first entry in the
directed handoff candidate list that is determined from the Neighbor List Selection Algo-
rithm for each directed handoff frequency. CMPIFHO will be treated as active if all the
border sectors in the Active Set have CMPIFHO active. The figure further illustrates the
CDMA-to-CDMA directed interfrequency handoff candidate selection process.
When a border sector is added to the Active Set, the primary sector will get the CMPIFHO
activation status. The feature activation is a per cell based parameter. Once a directed
interfrequency handoff condition is detected, the cell will use the serving frequency to get
the directed handoff frequency list. The directed handoff frequency list will have Target
Channel Number and Target Band Class information that will indicate that the call will be
handed off to CDMA cellular, CDMA PCS or analog.
The target channel on the cdhfl form is not always the frequency that will be used at the
target sectors of the directed handoff. It is only used by the old primary sector to obtain
and combine directed neighbor lists. The new primary sector will select a carrier based on
one that is common among all the new active set members. If a common carrier cannot be
found, the new primary sector will then select a carrier based on its RF loading.
In the case of CDMA-to-CDMA interfrequency semi-soft handoff (Hard Handoff Only
parameter in the directed handoff neighbor list on cdhnl form is set to no), the primary
will truncate the HO_Candidate Set to 7 minus CEs_on_serving_frequency (e.g., softer-
soft-soft-soft will use 4 CEs). This is because the semi-soft handoff will use the same
speech handler and the speech handler can only support up to 7 legs for a call. The first
entry in the HO_Candidate Set will be assigned as the new primary. The new primary will
establish the soft handoff connection for the handoff candidates included in the
HO_Candidate Set, regardless of its own Maximum Number of Active Set (maxlegs) set-
ting. If the CMPIFHO feature is not active at the new primary, the new primary will be
designated as the only handoff candidate in the HO_Candidate Set.
In the case that the interfrequency handoff is triggered by the pilot only carrier, the cdnfl
and cdhnl forms will not be used. Instead, the last PSMM will be used to determine the
new HO_Candidate set. Any pilots above T_add from the active/candidate set may be
used if CMPIFHO is active.
In the case of CDMA-to-Analog handoff (the Target Channel Number of the selected
directed handoff frequency is Analog), the primary will truncate the HO_Candidate Set to
three entries (the ECP will then choose the first allowed entry as the handoff candidate).
CDMA MPIFHO METHODS
Yes
No
No More than one border
sector in the Active Set?
Yes
No
Yes
CMPIFHO active for all
the border sectors?
CMPIFHO active?
Yes
Found target channel and
target bandclass common to
all border sectors that can
serve the mobile?
Use the target channel and
bandclass to obtain the
Directed Neighbor Lists for the
sectors. Apply neighbor list
selection algorithm to obtain up
to 6 HO candidates.
From the strongest active
border sector, select the first
target channel and target
bandclass the mobile can
support and obtain the cor-
responding Directed Neigh-
bor List(s). Only the first
entry from the candidate list
will be used.
From the strongest active
border sector, select the first
target channel and target
bandclass the mobile can
support and obtain the cor-
responding Directed Neigh-
bor List.
Interfrequency HO
trigger met
No
PILOT ASSISTED HANDOFF CONFIGURATIONS
TRIGGER
Inter-frequency handoffs can be triggered using a pilot only configuration, a pilot assisted
handoff. A pilot only configuration is a sector with no traffic channels on one or more car-
riers. The pilot only carrier is used as a beacon for the mobile to measure, to aid the inter-
frequency handoff process. There are two handoff triggers for a pilot assisted handoff,
T_comp Pilot Assisted Handoff and T_add Pilot Assisted Handoff.
T_comp Pilot Assisted Handoff
For a T_comp Pilot Assisted Handoff the translation parameter pilot_type has to have a
value of 1. Using this configuration the CDMA-to-CDMA inter-frequency handoff will be
triggered when the pilot only, in the example carrier F2 on cell B, is seen t_comp stronger
than the strongest pilot in the active set.
For a CDMA-to-Analog handoff the pilot only sector has to be t_ancomp stronger than the
strongest active pilot.
For a T_add Pilot Assisted Handoff the translation parameter pilot_type has to have a
value of 2. Using this configuration the inter-frequency handoff will be triggered when the
pilot only, carrier F2 on cell B, is seen above t_add. CDMA-to-CDMA and CDMA-to-
Analog are using the same inter-frequency trigger.
TRIGGER
T_comp Pilot Assisted Handoff pilot_type = 1
CDMACDMA handoff when pilot-only (F2
B
) > active set (F2
A
) + t_comp
T_add Pilot Assisted Handoff pilot_type = 2
CDMACDMA handoff when pilot-only (F2
B
) > t_add
F2
F1
F2 pilot only
F1
Cell A Cell B
TRANSITION
Once a pilot assisted handoff is triggered the inter-frequency transition can take place. The
transition depends on what pilot only configuration is used.
T_comp Pilot Assisted Handoff
For the T_comp Pilot Assisted Handoff the mobile will handover from the serving carrier,
in the example F2 on cell A, to a new carrier on the pilot only sector, F1 on cell B (note:
same sector as the pilot only but not the same carrier), if CMPIFHO is not active. If
CMPIFHO is active the mobile will go to the new serving carrier and enter soft handoff
with the sectors currently in the active set as well as the candidate sector, the pilot only.
For a CDMA-to-Analog handoff the mobile will handover from the serving carrier to the
analog system on the pilot only cell, cell B.
For the T_add Pilot Assisted Handoff the mobile will handdown from the serving carrier,
in the example F2 on cell A, to a new carrier on the same sector, F1 on cell A, if
CMPIFHO is not active. If CMPIFHO is active the mobile will go to the new serving car-
rier and enter soft handoff with the sectors currently in the active set as well as the candi-
date sector, the pilot only.
For a CDMA-to-Analog handoff the mobile will handdown from the serving carrier to the
analog system on the same cell, cell A.
Usually the T_comp Pilot Assisted Handoff will perform the inter-frequency handoff fur-
ther away from the cell site and therefore being served by that cell over a bigger coverage
area (more efficiently using the cells capacity). However, since the handoff is taking
place far away from the cell site the RF coverage may be weak.
The T_add Pilot Assisted Handoff will usually perform the inter-frequency handoff closer
to the serving cell where the RF coverage is more advantageous. However, the mobile is
not being served by the cell over a big area and therefore the cells capacity may not be
maximized.
TRANSITION
T_comp Pilot Assisted Handoff pilot_type = 1
CDMACDMA handover from F2
A
to F1
B
or CMPIFHO (active set and candidate)
T_add Pilot Assisted Handoff pilot_type = 2
CDMACDMA handdown from F2
A
to F1
A
or CMPIFHO (active set and candi-
date)
F2
F1
F2 pilot only
F1
Cell A Cell B
PILOT BEACON
pilot_type
tion parameters.
CDMA Pilot Level Calibration and Pilot Type
Common Carrier
Pilot Type
(pilot_type)
Form: ceqface
specifies the pilot type associated with each carrier within
a face.
When the type is set to 1, no traffic channel elements
(CE) will be used for this carrier on this sector.
When a soft handoff request is received from a neighbor-
ing sector for this carrier, the handoff overflow service
measurement will not be pegged for this carrier. If
another carrier is available for traffic on this sector, and
the signal strength at this sector is greater than the stron-
gest active set member by the amount entered in the
Active Set vs. Candidate Set Comparison Thresh field
(i.e., T_COMP), the handoff will escalate to a semi-soft
handoff.
Range:
0 = No Pilot Only,
1 = Pilot Only T_Com and
2 = Pilot Only T_Add
PILOT BEACON
pilot_type

AUTOPLEX
System Cell ____ Face ____
CDMA Per Carrier Information
253) CDMA Pilot Level Calibration and Pilot Type
Pilot
Channel
Calibration
Value (dB)
Pilot
Type
Test Carrier
Designation
Common Carrier [1] ____ ____ ____ ____
[2] ____ ____ ____ ____
[3] ____ ____ ____ ____
[4] ____ ____ ____ ____
[5] ____ ____ ____ ____
[6] ____ ____ ____ ____
[7] ____ ____ ____ ____
[8] ____ ____ ____ ____
[9] ____ ____ ____ ____
[10] ____ ____ ____ ____
HANDOFF ESCALATION
T_comp Interfrequency Handover Due to Handoff Escalation
CDMAtoCDMA interfrequency handoff can occur when the candidate sector does not
have resources (e.g., CE blocking, packet pipe blocking, etc.) on the requested carrier, but
the candidate pilot is T_comp greater than the strongest Active set member. Interfrequency
handoff can also occur if the candidate sector is in forward/reverse overload, but the can-
didate pilot is T_comp greater than the strongest Active set member when T_comp is equal
to (or less than) T_ancomp. The candidate sector will select a new carrier, if available,
based on RF loading when the handoff request is received, and the system will perform an
interfrequency handoff.
T_comp CDMAtoCDMA Interfrequency Handoff Due to Escalation
If CMPIFHO is active, on interfrequency handoff, T_comp candidate (i.e., the new pri-
mary) can add old Active and Candidate set members as soft legs if their received signal
strengths at the old primary are above T_add. If CMPIFHO is not active, a handover is
done to the new primary sector.
HANDOFF ESCALATION
No resources available on F1 on cell B gamma face.
Gamma face on cell B acts like a pilot-only and the mobile
will do a T_comp Pilot Assisted Handoff.
Handover to F2 on cell B gamma face, or
CMPIFHO using the active set and the candidate pilot
Cell A: F1/F2 traffic
Pilot Assisted Handover from
Cell A alpha (F1) to Cell B
gamma (F2)
alpha
beta
gamma
Cell B: F1/F2 traffic with no F1
resources available to gamma or
F1 is in forward/reverse overload
alpha
beta
Gamma
Pilot X
(F2)
Cell A Alpha (Primary Sector) Cell B (Receiving Cell)
1.
2.
T_comp must be set on ceqface form.
Cell B, gamma sector is a neighbor in
the CDMA neighbor list on the fci
form.
SEMI-SOFT HANDOFF
CDMAPAFCARRVO
10: Semi-Soft Handoff Request
This count shall be pegged at the requesting cell site when the requesting cell site sends a
semi-soft handoff request to the ECPC or sends an intra/inter cell handoff request to the
target cell specifying that only a semi-soft handoff is permissible.
11: Semi-Soft Handoff Order
This count shall be pegged at the requesting cell site when the requesting cell site receives
a msc_old_handoff message with a CDMA target cell identified from the ECPC or
receives an intra/inter-cell_ack message from the target cell indicating that a semi-soft
handoff command should be initiated.
12: Semi-Soft Handoff Complete at Requesting Cell Site
This count shall be pegged at the requesting cell site when the requesting cell site receives
a handoff_completion message from the mobile after initiating a semi-soft handoff.
13: Semi-Soft Handoff Complete at Target Cell Site
This count shall be pegged at the target cell site when the target cell site receives a handoff
completion message from the mobile after initiating a semi-soft handoff.
14: Inter-MSC Semi-Soft Handoff Request
Similar to Semi-Soft Handoff Request peg count.
15: Inter-MSC Semi-Soft Handoff Order
Similar to Semi-Soft Handoff Order peg count.
16: Inter-MSC Semi-Soft Handoff Completion at Target Cell Site
Similar to Semi-Soft Handoff Completion at Target Cell Site peg count.
17: Inter-MSC Semi-Soft Handoff Completion at Requesting Cell Site
Similar to Semi-Soft Handoff Completion at Requesting Cell Site peg count.
18: Inter-MSC Hard Handoff Request
19: Inter-MSC Hard Handoff Order
20: Inter-MSC Hard Handoff Completion at Target Cell Site
Similar to Semi-Soft Handoff Completion at Target Cell Site peg count.
21: Inter-MSC Hard Handoff Completion at Requesting Cell Site
Similar to Semi-Soft Handoff Completion at Requesting Cell Site peg count.
SEMI-SOFT/HARD HANDOFF
CDMAPAFCARRVO
10: Semi-Soft Handoff Request
11: Semi-Soft Handoff Order
12: Semi-Soft Handoff Complete at Requesting Cell
Site
13: Semi-Soft Handoff Complete at Target Cell Site
14: Inter-MSC Semi-Soft Handoff Request
15: Inter-MSC Semi-Soft Handoff Order
16: Inter-MSC Semi-Soft Handoff Completion at
Target Cell Site
17: Inter-MSC Semi-Soft Handoff Completion at
18: Inter-MSC Hard Handoff Request
19: Inter-MSC Hard Handoff Order
20: Inter-MSC Hard Handoff Completion at Target Cell
Site
21: Inter-MSC Hard Handoff Completion at Requesting
Cell Site
CDMAPAFCARR
15: Mobile Hard Handoff Request
16: Mobile Hard Handoff Order
17: Mobile Hard Handoff Complete at Requesting Cell Site
Similar to Semi-Soft Handoff Complete at Requesting Cell Site peg count.
18: Mobile Hard Handoff Complete at Target Cell Site
Similar to Semi-Soft Handoff Complete at Target Cell Site peg count.
10: Multiple Pilots Soft Handoff Requests at New Primary Sector
The number of the multiple pilots soft handoff requests from the new primary to the new
secondary. This count is pegged at the new primary.
11: Multiple Pilots Soft Handoff Acknowledgments at New Primary Sector
The number of the multiple pilots soft handoff acknowledgements from the new second-
ary to the new primary. This count is pegged at the new primary.
CDMAPAFCARR
15: Mobile Hard Handoff Request
16: Mobile Hard Handoff Order
17: Mobile Hard Handoff Complete at Requesting Cell
Site
18: Mobile Hard Handoff Complete at Target Cell Site
10: Multiple Pilots Soft Handoff Requests at New
Primary Sector
11: Multiple Pilots Soft Handoff Acknowledgements at
New Primary Sector
CDMAANALOG HANDOFF METHODS
T_ancomp Pilot Assisted Handoff
The T_ancomp Pilot Assisted Handoff for CDMA-to-Analog handoffs works the same
way as T_comp Pilot Assisted Handoff with the exception that the translation t_ancomp is
used instead of t_comp. A CDMA-to-Analog handoff will be triggered when the pilot only
sector is t_ancomp stronger than the strongest active pilot. The mobile will go to an analog
system on the pilot only cell.
For the handoff to work the target sector has to have the Analog Handdown Physical
Antenna Face at Serving Sector and Analog Equivalent Server Group fields populated for
intra-MSC neighbors and pilot_type has to be set to 1. One or more Analog radios must be
available.
On the serving, primary sector t_ancomp must be set no greater than the value of t_comp.
In the case that t_ancomp is set to a value that is greater than the t_comp value, set Request
for Pilot Measurement Interval to a non-zero value so that the mobile will report the pilot
strength from the pilot-only sector. A neighbor list entry must exist for the pilot only and
the Analog-Only field has to be set to yes.
For an inter-MSC neighbor, populate the Analog Antenna Face and Equivalent Server
Group fields.
Analog handover to pilot-only neighbor on fci form
Target sector
pilot_type = 1
Analog Handdown Physical Antenna Face at
Serving Sector (ceqface) specified
Analog Equivalent Server Group (ceqface)
specified
Primary sector
Analog-Only = y (fci)
If inter-MSC handoff:
Analog Antenna Face (fci) specified
Equivalent Server Group (fci) specified
The T_add Pilot Assisted Handoff for CDMA-to-Analog handoffs works the same way as
T_add Pilot Assisted Handoff for CDMA-to-CDMA handoff. CDMA-to-Analog handoff
will be triggered when the pilot only sector is seen above t_add. The mobile will go to an
analog system on the strongest serving cell.
For the handoff to work the primary sector has to have the Analog Handdown Physical
Antenna Face at Serving Sector and Analog Equivalent Server Group fields populated,
and Analog Antenna Face left blank. A neighbor list entry must exist for the pilot only and
the Analog-Only field has to be set to yes. One or more Analog radios must be available.
The pilot only sector has to have pilot_type set to 2.
CDMA-ANALOG HANDOFF METHODS
Analog handdown to strongest active pilot
Target cell
pilot_type = 2
Primary sector
Analog-Only = y (fci)
Analog Antenna Face (fci) blank
Analog Handdown Physical Antenna Face at
Serving Sector (ceqface) specified
Analog Equivalent Server Group at Serving
Sector (ceqface) specified
CDMATOAMPS
DIRECTED HANDDOWN
aphyant, asrvgrp
tion parameters.
Analog Handdown Physical Ant
Face at Serving Sector
(aphyant)
Form: ceqface
identifies the physical antenna face that is to be used in

identifying a handoff candidate when a CDMAtoanalog
handoff is being attempted.
Range:
0 = omni
1 = alpha
2 = beta
3 = gamma
4 = delta
5 = epsilon
6 = zeta
Analog Equivalent Server Group at
Serving Sector
(asrvgrp)
Form: ceqface
identifies the server group that is to be used in identifying

a handoff candidate when a CDMAtoanalog handoff is
being attempted.
Range: 0 or 1
CDMATOAMPS
DIRECTED HANDDOWN
aphyant, asrvgrp

Transmit Antenna Propagation Delay (microseconds) ........................................................ 92) ___
Receive Antenna Propagation Delay (microseconds) ......................................................... 93) ___
Pilot PN Sequence Offset Index .......................................................................................... 94) ___
Pilot Detection Threshold (dB)............................................................................................. 95) ___
Pilot Drop Threshold (dB) .................................................................................................... 96) ___
Active Set vs Candidate Set Comparison Thresh (dB)........................................................ 97) ___
Active Set vs Candidate Set Comparison Thresh for Analog (dB) ...................................... 98) ___
Drop Timer........................................................................................................................... 99) ___
Search Window Size: Active Set and Candidate Set........................................................ 100) ___
Neighbor Set................................................................................. 101) ___
Remaining Set .............................................................................. 102) ___
Cell (microseconds)...................................................................... 103) ___
Sector Size (miles)............................................................................................................... +104) ___
Maximum Differential Transmit Delay (microseconds) ........................................................ 105) ___
Analog Handdown Physical Ant Face at Serving Sector............................................... 106) ___
Analog Equivalent Server Group at Serving Sector....................................................... 107) ___

AUTOPLEX
NEIGHBOR LIST
cdmanbr_list.aphyant, cdmanbr_list.asrvgrp,
cdmanbr_list.anbeaplt
tion parameters.
CDMA Principle Neighbor List
Anlg Ant Face
(cdmanbr.aneqphyant)
Form: fci
specifies the analog equivalent physical antenna face for

this neighbor.
Notes: 1) If NULL is entered and the corresponding Anlg
Only Pilot field is set to y, and this is a nonhome cell,
the pilot strength measurements from this neighbor will
be used to trigger CDMA analog handdown. 2) For
CDMA neighbor cells on this MSC, the value in this field
is defined on the ceqface form and displayed here.
Range: 0 6
Eqvlnt Srv Grp
(cdmanbr.aneqsrvgrp)
Form: fci
specifies the analog equivalent server group for this

neighbor on nonhome cells.
Note: For CDMA neighbor cells on this MSC, the value in
this field is defined on the ceqface form and displayed
here.
Range: 0 1
Analog Only Pilot
(cdmanbr.anbeaplt)
Form: fci
specifies whether the pilot represents an analog-only pilot

(beacon-like radio).
Range: y or n
NEIGHBOR LIST
cdmanbr_list.aphyant, cdmanbr_list.asrvgrp,
cdmanbr_list.anbeaplt

AUTOPLEX
Cell
Site
261)
Ant
Face
262)
Pilot
PN
263)
Prior
Grp
264)
Anlg
Ant
Face
265)
Eqvlnt
Serv
Grp
266)
Anlg
Only
Pilot
267)
Ngbr
Conf
268)
Band
Class
269)
Hard
Handoff
Only
270)
AHO
271)
CAM
SHO
272)
AEHO
273)
Extended System ID
DCS ECP SYS
274) 275) 276)
[1] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[2] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[3] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[4] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[5] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[6] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[7] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[8] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[9] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[10] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[11] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
[12] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Database Directed Handoff
The transition method for a non-pilot assisted, or database directed handoff, CDMA-to-
Analog handoff is using the two forms used for CDMA Multiple Pilot Inter-Frequency
Handoff (CMPIFHO), CDMA Directed Handoff Frequency List (cdhfl) and CDMA
Directed Frequency Neighbor List (cdhnl). For a CDMA-to-Analog handoff the mobile
will hand off to the first entry in the primary pilots cdhnl form.
In the cdhfl form the Target Channel Number translation is specified to Analog. In the
cdhnl form Neighbor Operating Mode is set to Analog, Hard Handoff Only to y, and
the Analog Server Group is specified.
Database Directed Handoff
IFHOTI and Tr_AHo Directed Handoff
Analog handoff to first entry in primary pilots cdhnl
form
Primary cell
Target Channel Number = Analog (cdhfl)
Neighbor Operating Mode = Analog (cdhnl)
Hard Handoff Only = y (cdhnl)
Analog Server Group (cdhnl) specified
CDMAANALOG DIRECTED HANDOFF
Example
Example

AUTOPLEX
System
Serving
CDMA
Carrier
Target 4)
Channel
Number
Target 5)
Band
Class
Target 6)
Channel
Number
Target 7)
Band
Class
Target 8)
Channel
Number
Target 9)
Band
Class
[1] Analog ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[2] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[3] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[4] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[5] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[6] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[7] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[8] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[9] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[10] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Example
Example

AUTOPLEX
System
Target Channel Number ..................................................................... *3) Analog
Target Band Class .............................................................................. *4) ____ (optional)
Neighbor Operating Mode................................................................... 5) a
Hard Handoff Only .............................................................................. 6) y

AUTOPLEX
System
Cell Site
8)
Ant Face
9)
Analog
Srv Grp
10)
Extended System ID
DCS ECP System
11) 12) 13)
[1] 111 1 0 ____ ____ ____
[2] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[3] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[4] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[5] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
[6] ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Handoff Escalation
CDMAtoAnalog Handoff Due to Handoff Escalation
The scenario described in this section applies to both 850 MHz cellular and 1900 MHz
PCS systems if the system is equipped with analog. The scenario does not apply to a
CDMA system that does not have an overlaid analog system.
CDMAtoAnalog handoff can occur when the candidate sector is call processing inhib-
ited, but the candidate pilot is T_comp above the strongest active set member. CDMAto
Analog handoff can also occur when the candidate sector is in forward/reverse power
overload, but no CDMAtoCDMA interfrequency handoff occurred due to T_comp esca-
lation, and the candidate pilot is T_ancomp stronger than the strongest Active set member.
The RCC that is currently handling the call will perform a CDMAtoAnalog handoff
(either handdown or handover) by sending the ECP a list of up to three strongest Active
and/or Candidate set sectors that can support analog handoff.
A sector in the Active set is said to be able to support analog handoff (i.e., handdown) if
the Analog Handdown Physical Antenna Face at Serving Sector and Analog Equivalent
Server Group at Serving Sector fields in the ceqface form of this sector are populated. A
sector in the Candidate set is said to be able to support analog handoff (i.e., handover) if
the Analog Equivalent Antenna Face and Server Group fields in the FCI form of this sec-
tor are populated.
The ECP then checks the availability of the analog radio of the first entry in the list
received from the RCC. If the radio is available at the time of checking, the CDMAto
Analog handoff will be triggered to the first entry. If it is not available for the first entry,
the ECP will check the second entry in the list, then the third entry if necessary.
If a service provider chooses to initiate a CDMAtoAnalog handoff due to the forward/
reverse overload or call process inhibited condition, one or more sectors in the Active set
or Candidate set have to be configured for analog handoff. If no sector in the Active or
Candidate set can support analog handoff, no CDMAtoAnalog handoff will occur as a
result of forward/reverse overload or call process inhibited condition.
Handoff Escalation
Handoff Escalation
CDMA carrier is blocked
Candidate t_ancomp stronger than strongest active
set pilot
ECP will select one of up to the three strongest active
and candidate pilots that can support analog handoff
CDMATOAMPS HARD HANDOFF
CDMAPAF
16: CDMAtoAnalog Handoff Request
This count is pegged at the Requesting Cell Site when the Requesting Cell Site sends an
analog_handoff_request message to the ECPC. This SM count will include inter-vendor
CDMAtoanalog handoffs.
17: CDMAtoAnalog Handoff Order
This count is pegged at the Requesting Cell Site when the Requesting Cell Site receives a
msc_old_handoff message with an analog target cell identified from the ECPC.
18: CDMAtoAnalog Handoff Complete at Requesting Cell Site
This count is pegged at the Requesting Cell Site when the Requesting Cell Site receives a
a layer 2 acknowledgment of a analog_handoff_direction message from the mobile.
After the serving cell site has sent the mobile analog handoff direction to the mobile, it
waits for the mobile to acknowledge that it has received the direction. When the mobile
acknowledges the handoff direction, this count is incremented.
CDMATOAMPS HARD HANDOFF
CDMAPAF
16: CDMAtoAnalog Handoff Request
17: CDMAtoAnalog Handoff Order
18: CDMAtoAnalog Handoff Complete at
INTER-VENDOR ANSI-41 HANDOFF
Lucent Technologies are currently supporting the following ANSI-41 inter-frequency
handoff methods:
Pilot Assisted ANSI-41 CDMA-to-CDMA Handover (t_comp)
Pilot Assisted ANSI-41 CDMA-to-Analog Handover (t_ancomp)
Non-pilot Assisted ANDI-41 Directed CDMA-to-CDMA Handover
Non-pilot Assisted ANDI-41 Directed CDMA-to-Analog Handover
ANSI-41 CDMA Multiple Pilot Inter-Frequency Handoff (with ANSI-41 revision C).
Please refer to Translation Application Note number 4 for more details on the configura-
tions for ANSI-41 inter-frequency handoffs.
INTER-VENDOR ANSI-41 HANDOFF
Lucent supports
Pilot Assisted ANSI-41 CDMACDMA Handover
Pilot Assisted ANSI-41 CDMAAnalog Handover
Non-pilot Assisted ANSI-41 Directed CDMACDMA
Handover
Non-pilot Assisted ANSI-41 Directed CDMAAnalog
Handover
ANSI-41 CMPIFHO is supported with ANSI-41 revi-
sion C
See Translation Application Note No. 4 for details
MULTI-CARRIER HANDOFF DIFFERENCES
In general, the same inter-frequency carrier handoff methods can be used for 3G-1X as for
2G. However, 3G-1X adds more inter-frequency handoff scenarios that will be discussed:
Border area, 3G is discontinuing
Pilot-only candidate
2G-only candidate
Handoff escalation
With a solid understanding of the 2G handoff scenarios, the scenarios introduced by 3G-
1X should not be surprising. If one sees the 3G-1X carriers as just another set of carriers
with 3G-1X capability, then the 2G philosophies can be applied. The main guiding princi-
ple for 3G-1X handoffs is that 3G mode is maintained whenever possible. The Traffic
Channel Assignment (TCA) algorithm makes sure the 3G-1X carriers have proper bias.
Also, keep in mind that when 3G-1X and 2G co-exist, the same pilot, W
0
64
, is used for
both generations.
3G-1X Pilot-Only Handoff
Since the pilot beacon is the same for both generations, W
0
64
, it will not matter whether
the call is 2G or 3G. The regular Pilot Only algorithm will be followed.
T_comp Pilot Only:
T_add Pilot Only:
The only difference between 2G and 3G-1X is the selection of candidate frequencies. For
3G-1X mobiles, 3G mode is preferred.
Inter-Generation Handoff
If a candidate does not have 3G-1X resources soft handoff cannot be performed, a service
re-negotiation will take place and a Inter-Generation Handoff takes place.
3G-1X Handoff Escalation
If a candidate does not have 3G-1X resources due to resource blocking, then soft handoff
cannot be performed, and handoff escalation is considered. The handoff is considered a
T_comp Pilot Only handoff.
3G-1X Border Handoff
A 3G-1X Border Handoff is considered a handoff when both 3G-1X and 2G are discontin-
ued. If only 3G-1X is discontinued, the mobile will still be able to measure the 2G pilot,
W
0
64
, and the handoff will be a Pilot Only handoff. For a border handoff, the same algo-
rithms are used in 3G-1X as in 2G.
MULTI-CARRIER HANDOFF DIFFERENCES
3G-1X Pilot-Only Handoff
Inter-Generation Handoff
3G-1X Handoff Escalation
3G-1X Border Handoff
Objective
Maintain 3G mode whenever possible.
Pilot used is W
0
64
2G thinking can be applied if the 3G-1X carrier is thought of
as just another carrier even when co-existing with 2G
INTER-GENERATION HANDOFF
If a candidate does not have 3G-1X resources, but only 2G resources, soft handoff cannot
be performed. The situation is similar to the 3G-1X Pilot Only scenario and will be treated
as such. However, the inter-generation handoff will be performed as a CDMA Multiple
Pilot Inter-Frequency Handoff (CMPIFHO) whether or not the feature is turned on.
Also, since 3G mode is the preferred mode, possible 2G-only candidates must pass a qual-
ity test, as seen in the figure, before being considered as candidates. A 2G-only candidate
will be eliminated as a candidate if the following two statements are true:
1. The combined E
c
/I
0
of the active set is greater than the smaller value of t_quality
and -10dB
2. The 2G-only candidate is weaker than the strongest active set pilot
Note: 2G to 3G inter-generation handoff is not supported in the first release of 3G-1X.
INTER-GENERATION HANDOFF
Process handoff
trigger
Eliminate 2G-only pilot Process handoff
trigger
2G-only candidate?
Is the combined Ec/Io
min[-10dB, t_quality]?
Is 2G-only pilot <
strongest active pilot?
List of candidates that
passed the BAHO test
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
3G-1X HARD HANDOFF
tion parameters.
Number of 3G Traffic
Channel Preamble
(num_pream_3g1x)
Form: ceqface3g
Specifies the length of traffic channel preamble that the mobile

station is to send when performing a hard handoff to a 3G
traffic channel. Each NUM_PREAMBLE value is mapped into
a preamble length in units of 1.25ms.
Range: 0 - 7
Data Relative Strength
Threshold (dB)
(t3gd_comp)
Form: ceqface3g
Specifies the difference in signal strength between a hard hand-

off candidate and the strongest Active Set Pilot that will cause a
3G Data call to be released.
Range: 0 - 4.0 in 0.5 increments
3G-1X HARD HANDOFF
AUTOPLEX
System
3G1X CDMA - Voice

Cell Site - Number ...........................................*1) ___

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AUTOPLEX


3G1X Data Load 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MULTIPLE CARRIER FREQUENCY
DEPLOYMENT RECOMMENDATIONS
To support the actual deployment of a new carrier frequency, five recommendations have
been provided. Following such recommendations should lead to a happy compromise of
being able to serve additional Offered Traffic Load on the new carrier frequency while
maintaining call quality on the challenging border of the area where service on a new car-
rier frequency is being provided.
The details of the compromise may become the subject of discussion which may lead to a
re-examination of these five particular recommendations. These recommendations, how-
ever, are consistent with strategies to deal with the complexities of call processing algo-
rithms operating at the base stations on the border as discussed in Unit 4.
S
These revised recommendations are effective for R13.0 and higher.
MULTIPLE CARRIER FREQUENCY
DEPLOYMENT RECOMMENDATIONS
Recommendation 1
The base stations providing service on a new carrier
frequency should be deployed in a contiguous cluster.
Recommendation 2
The base stations on the border of the area where service
is being provided on a new carrier frequency should be
deployed with the new carrier frequency on all physical
antenna faces.
Recommendation 3
deployed to support inter-frequency handoffs on outward-
facing physical antenna faces, using CMPIFHO.
Recommendation 4
deployed to support inter-frequency handoffs.
using Interfrequency Handoff Trigger
Improvements and Multiple Pilot Interfrequency
Handoff. (MPIFHO should be on for the entire
multi-carrier area.)
Recommendation 5
The base stations chosen to be on the border of the area
where service is being provided on a new carrier frequency
should be in area with only low to moderately high Offered
Traffic Load.
MULTI-CARRIER HANDOFF SUMMARY
MULTI-CARRIER HANDOFF SUMMARY
Trigger
T_comp/T_add Pilot-Only Handoff
Tr_CHo Directed Handoff
IFHOTI Directed Handoff
Transition
CMPIFHO
Simplex Handoff
3G-1X introduces new handoff scenarios
3G-1X Pilot only handoff
Inter-Generation handoff
Handoff escalation
3G-1X Border handoff
HANDOFF
Knowledge Check
Question 1.
Why may handoffs at border areas (going to an area with less number of carriers) be trou-
blesome?
A. The neighbor list is different between the carriers
B. The mobile can only measure E
c
/I
0
on the serving carrier
C. A special RCC has to be used
D. Signaling between the carriers is slow
S
Answer: b
Question 2.
For what reason should reqpsm (Request For Pilot Measurement) be specified to a non-
zero value in a border area (different number of carriers)?
A. So that the mobile is constantly measuring the pilots
B. So that the base station is regularly informed about the strength of the pilots
C. The keep the neighbor list up to date
D. All of the above
S
Answer: b
Question 3.
Which handoff type is a handdown?
A. Intra-frequency handoff within the physical antenna face
B. Intra-frequency handoff between physical antenna faces
C. Inter-frequency handoff within the physical antenna face
D. Inter-frequency handoff between physical antenna faces
S
Answer: c
HANDOFF
Knowledge Check
Question 4.
Which handoff type is a handover?
A. Intra-frequency handoff within the physical antenna face
B. Intra-frequency handoff between physical antenna faces
C. Inter-frequency handoff within the physical antenna face
D. Inter-frequency handoff between physical antenna faces
S
Answer: d
Question 5.
What does the CDMA Multiple Pilot Inter-Frequency Handoff (CMPIFHO) feature allow
us to do?
A. To trigger the handoff closer to the cell
B. To go directly into soft handoff on the new carrier
C. To be in soft handoff between carriers
D. All of the above
S
Answer: b
HANDOFF
Knowledge Check
Question 6.
A mobile is in soft handoff with 11 and 22, and 33 on F2 in a system with two carriers.
Sectors 11 and 22 are border sectors configured for inter-frequency handoff, 33 is an
interior sector. The cdhnl forms for 11 and 22 are as follow
The mobile sends a PSMM with the following information
11 = -7 dB
22 = -9 dB
33 = -12 dB
If the E
c
/I
0
loss metric is calculated, the value would be 3.1 dB. What will happen if the
translation parameters below are assumed?
CIFHOTI (CDMA Inter-Frequency Handoff Trigger Improvement) = Activated
CMPIFHO (CDMA Multiple Pilot Inter-Frequency Handoff) = Activated
bpinp_comp (Border Pilot vs. Interior Pilot Threshold) = 3.5 dB
ifho_blos_th (Border Sector Loss Threshold for IF Handoff) = 3.0 dB
A. The mobile will stay in soft handoff with 11, 22, and 33 on F2.
B. The mobile will handoff to 11, 11, 22, 22, and 33 on F1.
C. The mobile will handoff to 11, 22, 33, and 33 on F1.
D. The mobile will handoff to 11, 22, 22, and 33 on F1.
S
Answer: d
Note: bpinp_comp and loss metric criteria is met, IFHOTI triggers handoff.
The combined neighbor list is:
22 - Two sponsors
11 - One sponsor, first on the strongest sponsors list
33 - One sponsor, third on the strongest sponsors list
22 - One sponsor, first on the second strongest sponsors list
11 - One sponsor, third on the second strongest sponsors list
11 will be truncated since 3 CEs are used on F2, 7 - 3 = 4.
Sector 11 Sector 22
11 22
22 22
33 11
HANDOFF
Knowledge Check
Question 7.
True or False? During an inter-generation handoff, CDMA Multiple Pilot Inter-Frequency
Handoff (CMPIFHO) will always be used.
S
Answer: True
Section 12
Appendix Section 12
Appendix CL8303 v1.0
CL8303 v1.0 Appendix
Appendix I
Hardware Overview
UPLINK RAKE RECEIVER IN CHANNEL ELEMENT
Simplified View
The antenna face is first selected (e.g., maybe just ).
Then searchers assigned to the fingers look for the strongest signals. They are given the
range of offsets to be covered.
S
The inputs are from the BCR. Therefore separate I and Q are present. This
shows the logical structure.
UPLINK RAKE RECEIVER IN CHANNEL ELEMENT
Simplified View
Rake Finger 1
CE Control Searchers
I
0
, I
1
I
0
, I
1
Q
0
, Q
1
face
face
face
I
Q
Deinterleaver
Viterbi
Soft
Decoder
{
{
{
Rake Finger 2
Rake Finger 3
Rake Finger 4 Antenna
Connection
Interface
MULTIPATH RECEPTION
Example
MULTIPATH RECEPTION
Example
1
h
g
d
b
c
e
a
f
SEARCHERS OPERATION
Example
The searchers scan their assigned range of offsets for their assigned antennas. Their task is
to provide a list of signals, strongest first. this is done as follows:
Searchers are assigned to the antennas to be scanned.
They scan through an assigned range of offsets.
They note the amplitude and offset of each signal found (sliding correlation).
The data is sent to the CE controller where a single combined list is formed, ranked by sig-
nal strength and accompanied by offsets.
The four strongest signals (assuming that there are four above threshold) are assigned to
fingers of the RAKE receiver, and their outputs combined in a near optimal way. The
combined output is then deinterleaved. Finally, the deinterleaved symbols are passed to
the soft Viterbi decoder for final decoding.
In this example the searchers find three signals on
0
, two on
1
, one each on
0
and
1
,
and
0
and none from
1
.
SEARCHERS OPERATION
Example
0
a: amplitude, delay
c: amplitude, delay
f: amplitude, delay
b: amplitude, delay
e: amplitude, delay
d: amplitude, delay
g: amplitude, delay
h: amplitude, delay
no output
1
a: amplitude, delay
h: amplitude, delay
weaker
List (in CE controller memory)
Searcher Findings
ANTENNA CONNECTION INTERFACE
Finger Assignments Example
Diversity receiving antenna pairs R0 and R1 serve the same antenna face. In earlier sys-
tems such as AMPS, diversity meant that the stronger of the two signals was selected.
Here, the signals are combined with a resulting increase in signal to noise ratio. There is
no e signal presented since no fingers are available to identify it. (Two searchers per
receiver.)
ANTENNA CONNECTION INTERFACE
Finger Assignments Example
Rake receiver uses:
Time diversity multipath
Spatial diversity within a face between sectors.
#1
#2
#3
#4
finger
a
c
b
d
Antenna
Connection
Interface
I
0
I
1
I
0
I
1
I
0
I
1
Q
0
Q
1
Q
0
Q
1
Q
0
Q
1
a
c
b
d
Appendix II
Receiving and Modeling Fading
TIME DIVERSITY AND COMBINING
FROM RAKE RECEIVING
Usually there is no direct line of sight signal from base to mobile in a cellular system. As a
result, the signal received at the mobile from the base (and at the base from the mobile) is
made up of the sum of many signals, each traveling over a separate path. Since these path
lengths are not equal, the information carrier on the radio link will experience a spread in
delay as it travels between base and mobile. In the illustration a transmitted narrow pulse
arrives as four pulses, where the delay spread is defined as T
M
. Typical delay spreads are
from 2 to 5 s in urban areas. This effect causes intersymbol interference (ISI) as the path
length differences become larger. In a digital channel ISI needs to be mitigated by a pro-
cess called a delay equalization in the radio receiver.
ISI occurs when received pulses overlap one another. The tail of one pulse smears into
adjacent symbol intervals as to interfere with the detection process.
In addition to delay spread, the same multipath environment causes severe local variations
in signal strength as these multipath signals are added constructively, and destructively, at
the receiving antenna. This type of variation is called Rayleigh fading. Statistically, the
received signal will be 10 dB below the local mean in 10% of the locations, and 20 dB
below the local mean in 1% of the locations. This can cause large blocks of information to
be lost. The third effect of multipath propagation is caused by the movement of the
mobile. This effect is known as doppler spread and causes each receive signal to be shifted
in frequency as a function of the direction and speed of the mobile. Shifts as much as 100
and 200 Hz can take place in cellular systems at 900 MHz and 1800 MHz, respectively.
As a result, differential detection techniques must be used to demodulate the received sig-
nal.
Multipath has been treated as causing delayed versions of the signal to add to the system
noise when the differential delay exceeds the chip time. Substantial performance improve-
ment can occur by detecting each additional path separately, thereby enabling the signals
to be combined coherently.
CDMA can reject multipath signals separating them for individual processing. Consider
two paths, with the receiver synchronized to the time delay and phase of the first path and
the delay difference between the two paths exceeding a chip interval the interference
power of the second path will be suppressed by the processing gain. Recall that the corre-
lation function of a PN code, when the delay exceeds the chip time, is approximately zero.
The integrator output is essentially the autocorrelation function of the PN code.
A CDMA receiver can resolve an individual path. A receiver can be implemented which
resolves each individual path such that the paths can be combined to produce a net overall
gain. This is known as a RAKE receiver.
In the RAKE receiver for user 1 the baseband demodulated signal z(t) is the sum of N sig-
nals arriving on N different paths. Consider path 2. The multiplication of z(t) by c
1
(t
2
),
with the integration beginning at time,
2
, and lasting T
b
seconds, yields the peak
response for path 2. The contributions from the other paths average out to 0, since the dif-
ferential delays exceed the chip time, T
c
.
The response from each path is summed to produce the stronger signal. (The actual sum
occurs when all path responses have been determined.)
Additional circuit (not shown) is needed to determine the various differential delays,
i
.
TIME DIVERSITY AND COMBINING
FROM RAKE RECEIVING
Transmitted Pulse
Multiple
Received
Pulses
T
M
t
1
Delay Spread, T
M
t
2
t
3
t
4
4
1
3
2
Base Station
Antenna
Path 1
Path 2
Path 3
Path N
integrate
&
dump
T
b
second
T
b
+
2
T
b
c
1
(t)
integrate
&
dump
T
b
second
c
1
(t -
2
)
integrate
&
dump
T
b
second
hold
until
T
b
+
N
T
b
c
1
(t -
3
)
integrate
&
dump
T
b
second T
b
+
N
c
1
(t -
N
)
decide
b
1
(t)
1
= differential delay between path i and path 1;
1
= 0
hold
until
T
b
+
N
hold
until
T
b
+
N
T
b
+
3
cos
c
t
Rx Tx
z(t)
0
Equal Gain Combining
MEAN PATH LOSS
AT STREET LEVEL MICROCELLS
Base Antenna Height Dependence
Propagation for PCS systems at 1.7 GHz is similar to propagation at the cellular frequen-
cies in an urban environment. However, the path loss models used for 850 MHz cellular
are defined at distances greater than 1 mile, and many PS applications will be cells smaller
than 1 mile. One model used to estimate small base station path loss in an urban environ-
ment at street level is shown. The path loss increases as r
2
while there is a line of sight
path between the mobile and the base station, and then increases as r
4
when the mobile is
out of sight of the base station. The point where this transition occurs is a function of the
base station antenna height. The curves shown are typical small 1 km BSs served by
microcells with low antennas.
*
PCS cells can be placed on a regular hexagonal grid, as is done with cellular cells to pro-
vide large area coverage, or in a linear arrangement of microcells to provide coverage
along a street. Also microcells can provide better coverage in buildings, where needed.
The microcells provide primary coverage to serve high density on-street and in building
traffic areas, and the macrocells provide backup secondary coverage in the lower density
traffic areas off-street.
Microcells, because of their small size, can require a handoff strategy that hands up
higher velocity mobiles to a macrocell, instead of trying to accomplish frequent microcell
to microcell handoffs. Generally, microcells have a coverage radius of less than 0.5 mile.
Okamura and Hata models are not accurate for microcells at short distances and low
antenna heights. Extrapolation of them to low antenna heights and elevations is inaccu-
rate. The path loss slope is actually much less. An adjusted model is needed. Embedded
microcells require custom engineering design and optimization.
Comparison of Measurement Based and Site Specific Ray Based Microcellular Path Loss
Predictions, Piazzi, L., Liang, G., Bertoni, H., Kim, S., IEEE No. 0-7803-3300-4/96.
Path Loss Formulas for PCS Microcells Based on Environmental Parameters, Har, D.,
Xia, H., Bertoni, H., IEEE No. 0-7803-3300-4/96.
Cell Shape for Microcellular Systems in Residential and Commercial Environments,
Maciel, L. R., Bertoni, H. L., IEEE No. 0-7803-1396-8/93.
Measurement Results on Indoor Radio Frequency Reuse at 900 MHz and 18 GHz, Van-
nucci, G., Roman, R., IEEE No. 0-7803-0841-7/92.
Radio Coverage Prediction for In-building Simulcast Microcells, Ho, M., Stuber, G.,
Chow, P., IEEE No. 0-7803-3300-4/96.
Short Distance Attenuation Measurements at 900 MHz and 1.8 MHz Using Low Antenna
Heights for Microcells, Harley, P., IEEE Journal on Selected Areas in Communications,
Vol. 7, No. 1, Jan. 1989.
* Source: D. A. McFarlane and S. T. S. Chia, Microcellular Mobile Radio Systems, Br. Telecom Technol
J., Vol. 8, No. 1, January 1990.
AT&T Practices 401-661-111, AUTOPLEX
Cellular Telecommunications Systems System 1000 Se-

ries II, Microcell Implementation, Installation, and Maintenance Guidelines, pp. 6267, Issue 2, Novem-
ber 1993.
MEAN PATH LOSS
AT STREET LEVEL MICROCELLS
Base Antenna Height Dependence
6 Meter Antenna Height
10 Meter Antenna Height
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
10 100 1000
Distance from Microcell [Meters]
M
e
a
n

P
a
t
h

L
o
s
s

[
d
B
]
r
2
r
4
Limit of
Line of
Sight
MORPHOLOGY CATEGORIES
AND TRAFFIC DISTRIBUTION
In the CDMA system, subscribers, and the calling traffic they generate, are distributed
irregularly following population density, urbanization/business activity, vehicular traffic
volumes and economic factors (income per subscriber). These characteristics also match-
up with land use morphologies which can alter path loss slopes necessary for RF design
engineering. Good basic alignment of RF coverage and capacity possibilities to traffic
location and density probabilities maximizes the capacity efficiency of each CDMA car-
rier and eases control of coverage quality and reliability.
Traffic distribution estimation begins with population density and penetration into the
population of a coverage area. The probability of subscription of wireless service by the
household must be approximated from economic and marketing parameters. Aspects of
the wireless pricing plan will help drive estimates of the erlang usage per subscriber and
the locations where calls might be made. For example, at low volume pricing, a recre-
ational user might make many more calls in residential, shopping, and resort areas, a busi-
ness user with very active VMS and SMS (voice mail service and short message service)
usage may make more calls in business centers, urban core areas, airports and commuter
highways. Very often, the peak busy hour will move around the system to different groups
of cells at different times of the day. Population densities in areas of good income will usu-
ally indicate high traffic usage. Commercial areas or areas where people are employed,
shop or interact with government or service offices might be adjusted upward even if the
income per resident household or population density is low. Highways and major transpor-
tation arteries also cause additional calling traffic based on the number of vehicles (in
vehicle population density) and urban traffic congestion. Penetration into populations will
not be uniformly distributed geographically since income level, vehicular routes and com-
mercial areas will modify traffic distribution significantly. Usually a detailed demograph-
ics study is required to estimate area based wireless traffic demand.
Subscribers must be characterized by usage types. Different types will predominate in dif-
ferent morphology zones. Some common types might be:
Walk-around or street portable characterized by 1.5 meter antenna elevation, pedes-
trian velocity, no building or car attenuation and about 2 dB of head and body antenna
orientation loss.
In car or in vehicle portable characterized by 1 meter antenna elevation, velocity distri-
bution over 1 to 60 m.p.h., 5 to 6 dB of vehicle attenuation and 2 dB of head and body
antenna orientation loss.
Indoor portable of in-building user characterized by an antenna height specified by the
types of buildings available, i.e., average number of floors or average elevation where
the people are in the buildings, pedestrian velocity, building attenuation as specified or
measured for the types of buildings in the area (often between 6 to 20 dB) and 2 dB of
head and body antenna orientation loss.
Other subscriber types may include fixed users or Wireless Local Loop users. These
categories will require special considerations since fixed (possible high gain) antenna
systems at varying elevations and probably no head and body losses could be config-
ured for subscribers.
MORPHOLOGY CATEGORIES
AND TRAFFIC DISTRIBUTION
Dense urban, city morphology, closely situated buildings over eight stories, popu-
lation density greater than 9000 per square mile with building penetration losses
between 11 to 20 dB.
Urban, city morphology with lower or less cluttered high rises than dense urban,
population density between 5000 and 9000 per square mile with building penetra-
tion losses between 11 to 15 dB.
Suburban, dominated by a dense distribution of one or two story buildings and
major highway corridors, population density between 1000 and 5000 per square
mile with building penetration losses between 8 to 11 dB and in vehicle penetra-
tion losses between 5 to 6 dB.
Rural, very sparse man-made structures, open fields or forests, population density
below 1000 per square mile with building penetration losses between 0 to 5 dB
and in vehicle penetration losses between 5 to 6 dB.
Dense
Urban
Urban
Rural
Suburban
MICROSCOPIC RADIO PROPAGATION
Rayleigh Fading
The composite signal at the receiver usually does not have a direct line-of-sight compo-
nent from the transmitter. Instead, it will consist of signals received over several different
paths, each different distances traveled.
Since these signals travel different distances, they arrive at slightly different times, and
phases. The composite signal results from constructive and destructive combining these
delayed signals in the receive antenna. The composite signal will have a large variation in
strength and will change from a very strong signal (constructive combining) to a very
weak signal (destructive combining) when the receiver moves a short distance (less than a
foot). In fact, the signal will vary when the receiver is stationary, since the reflectors are
moving, and change the relative phase of the composite signal components. This rapid
fading is described by Rayleigh statistics, and is commonly called Rayleigh fading. The
Rayleigh distribution is a good description when there is no dominate component in the
composite, as is the usual case over most of the coverage area in suburban and urban envi-
ronments. When there is a dominate component, the fading is described by the Ricean sta-
tistics. The Ricean distribution introduces a continuum between the two extreme cases of
no fading, only one component, and Rayleigh fading, many components. The Ricean dis-
tribution becomes a Rayleigh distribution when there are a large number of components.
The probability distribution function of the envelope of a signal with amplitude A, can be
represented by the Ricean function:
Where: 0 x < , and I
0
is a zero-order modified Bessel function. The distribution of x is
usually called Ricean, after S. O. Rice.
The probability distribution function of the envelope of many signals with random phase
and amplitudes, is the Rayleigh function:
Notice the Ricean function becomes the Rayleigh function as the dominate signal ampli-
tude approaches zero.
lim P
Ricean
(x) = P
Rayleigh
(x)
The effect is seen on both the uplink and downlink; however, for the sake of clarity, only
the downlink path is shown.
P
Ricean
(x)
x
2
------
exp
x
2
A
2
+
2
2
-------------------
,

_
I
0
xA
2
----------
,

_
=
P
Rayleigh
(x)
x
2
------
exp
x
2
2
2
---------
,

_
=
A 0
MICROSCOPIC RADIO PROPAGATION
Rayleigh Fading
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Distance [Meters]
[feet]
0 233
R
e
c
e
i
v
e
d

S
i
g
n
a
l

S
t
r
e
n
g
t
h

[
d
B
m
]
Acronyms
A-2 LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES PROPRIETARY
Acronyms CL8303 v1.0
LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES PROPRIETARY A-3
CL8303 v1.0 Acronyms
ACDN Administrative CDN
ACK Acknowledgment
ACU Analog Conversion Unit
AIF Antenna Interface Frame
AM Administrative Module
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
AUTHR Authentication Response
BBA BIU/BCR/ACU Trio
BCR Baseband Combiner and RF Unit
BIU Bus Interface Unit
BPF Band Pass Filter
BS Base Station
CAI Common Air Interface
CCC CDMA Cluster Controller
CCU CDMA Channel Unit
CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
CDN Call Processing/Database Node
CE Channel Element
CELP Codebook Excited Linear Predictive
CM Communications Module
CNI Common Network Interface
CRC CDMA Radio Complex
CRM CDMA Radio Module
CRTU CDMA Radio Test Unit
CS Cell Site
CSN Cell Site Node
CUC Channel Unit Cluster
DC Directional Coupler
DCS Digital Cellular Switch
DFI Digital Facilities Interface
DL Data Link
DLTU Digital Line Trunk Unit
DRU Digital Radio Unit
DS0 Digital Signal Level 0
DS1 Digital Signal Level 1
DSN Digital Switch Mode
DTMF Dual Tone Multi-frequency
ECP Executive Cellular Processor
ECPC Executive Cellular Processor Complex
ESN Electronic Serial Number
EVRC Enhanced Variable Rate Codec
FER Frame Error Rate
FM Frequency Modulation
FRPH Frame Relay Packet Handler
FS Frame Selector
GPS Global Positioning System
IMS Inter processor Message Switch
IS41 Interim Standard #41
LAC Linear Amplifier Combiner
LAF Linear Amplifier Frame, contains LAC(s)
LPF Low Pass Filter
MIN Mobile Identification Number
MS Mobile Station
MSC Mobile Switching Center
MU Mobile Unit
NIPM Nonchannelized ISDN Packet Mode
OIF Optical Interface Frame
OMP Operations and Management Platform
PAI PSU ATM Interface
Pb Probability of blocking
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
PHV Packet Handler, Voice
PICB Peripheral Interface Control Bus
PIDB Peripheral Interface Data Bus
PP Packet Pipe
PCSC Personal Communications Switching Center
PS Personal Station
PSTN Public Switched Telecommunication Network
PSU Packet Switch Unit
QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
RCC Radio Control Complex
RCF Radio Channel Frame
RCU Radio Channel Unit
RF Radio Frequency
RTU Radio Test Unit
SC Speech Coder
SCT Synchronized Clock and Tone Unit
SCTi Interfaces SCT and TDM Bus
SH Speech Handler
SM Switch Module
SMP Switch Module Processor
SPE Speech Processing Element
SPU Speech Processing Unit
SSD Shared Secret Data
TDM Time Division Multiplexing
TDMA Time Division Multiple Access
TIA Telecommunications Industry Association
TMS Time Multiplex Switch
TSI Time Slot Interchange
UTC Universal Coordinated Time
(formerly Greenwich Mean Time)
Glossary
Glossary CL8303 v1.0
G-2 LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES PROPRIETARY
Abbreviated Alert
An abbreviated alert is used to remind the mobile station user that previously selected
alternative routing features are still active.
AC
See Authentication Center.
Access Attempt
A sequence of one or more access probe sequences on the Access Channel containing the
same message. See also Access Probe and Access Probe Sequence. Access Channel. A reverse
CDMA Channel used by mobile stations for communicating to the base station. The Access
Channel is used for short signaling message exchanges such as call originations, responses to
pages, and registrations. The Access Channel is a slotted random access channel.
Access Channel Message
The information part of an access probe consisting of the message body, length field and CRC.
Access Channel Message Capsule
An Access Channel message plus the padding.
Access Channel Preamble
The preamble of an access probe consisting of a sequence of all-zero frames that is sent at the
4800 bps rate.
Access Channel Request Message
An Access Channel message that is autonomously generated by the mobile station. See also
Access Channel Response Message.
Access Channel Response Message
A message on the Access Channel generated to reply to a message received from the base
station.
Access Channel Slot
The assigned time interval for an access probe. An Access Channel slot consists of an integer
number of frames. The transmission of an access probe is performed within the boundaries of
an Access Channel slot.
Access Probe
One Access Channel transmission consisting of a preamble and a message. The transmission is
an integer number of frames in length and transmits one Access Channel message. See also
Access Probe Sequence and Access Attempt.
Access Probe Sequence
A sequence of one or more access probes on the Access Channel. The same Access Channel
message is transmitted in every access probe of an access attempt. See also Access Probe and
Access Attempt.
Acknowledgment
A Layer 2 response by the mobile station or the base station confirming that a signaling
message was received correctly.
Action Time
The time at which the action implied by a message should take effect.
Active Set
The set of pilots associated with the CDMA Channels containing Forward Traffic Channels
assigned to a particular mobile station.
Aging
A mechanism through which the mobile station maintains in its Neighbor Set the pilots that
have been recently sent to it from the base station and the pilots whose handoff drop timers
have recently expired.
CL8303 v1.0 Glossary
LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES PROPRIETARY G-3
A-key
A secret, 64-bit pattern stored in the mobile station. It is used to generate/update the mobile
stations Shared Secret Data. The A-key is used in the mobile station authentication process.
Analog Access Channel
An analog control channel used by a mobile station to access a system to obtain service.
Analog Color Code
An analog signal (see Supervisory Audio Tone) transmitted by a base station on an analog
voice channel and used to detect capture of a mobile station by an interfering base station or
the capture of a base station by an interfering mobile station.
Analog Control Channel
An analog channel used for the transmission of digital control information from a base station
to a mobile station or from a mobile station to a base station.
Analog Paging Channel
A forward analog control channel that is used to page mobile stations and send orders.
Analog Voice Channel
An analog channel on which a voice conversation occurs and on which brief digital messages
may be sent from a base station to a mobile station or from a mobile station to a base station.
Authentication
A procedure used by a base station to validate a mobile stations identity.
Authentication Center (AC)
An entity that manages the authentication information related to the mobile station.
Authentication Response (AUTHR)
An 18-bit output of the authentication algorithm. It is used, for example, to validate mobile
station registrations, originations and terminations.
Autonomous Registration
A method of registration in which the mobile station registers without an explicit command
from the base station.
AWGN
Additive White Gaussian Noise
Bad Frames
Frames classified as erasures (frame category 10) or 9600 bps frames, primary traffic only
with bit errors (frame category 9). See also Good Frames.
Base Station
A station in the Domestic Public Cellular Radio Telecommunications Service, other than a
mobile station, used for communicating with mobile stations. Depending upon the context, the
term base station may refer to a cell, a sector within a cell, an MSC, or other part of the cellular
system. See also MSC.
Base Station Authentication Response (AUTHBS)
An 18-bit pattern generated by the authentication algorithm. AUTHBS is used to confirm the
validity of base station orders to update the Shared Secret Data.
Base Station Random Variable (RANDBS)
A 32-bit random number generated by the mobile station for authenticating base station orders
to update the Shared Secret Data.
BCH Code
See Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem Code.
Blank-and-Burst
The pre-emption of an entire Traffic Channel frames primary traffic by signaling traffic or
secondary traffic. Blank-and-burst is performed on a frame-by-frame basis.
Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem Code (BCH Code)
A large class of error-correcting cyclic codes. For any positive integers m, m >= 3, and t < 2
m-
1
, there is a binary BCH code with a block length n equal to 2
m
-1 and n - k <= mt partly check
bits, where k is the number of information bits. The BCH code has a minimum distance of at
least 2t + 1.
bps
Bits per second.
Busy-Idle Bits
The portion of the data stream transmitted by a base station on a forward analog control
channel that is used to indicate the current busy-idle status of the corresponding reverse analog
control channel.
Call Disconnect
The process that releases the resources handling a particular call. The disconnect process
begins either when the mobile station user indicates the end of the call by generating an on-
hook condition or other call release mechanism, or when the base station initiates a release.
Call History Parameter
A modulo-64 event counter maintained by the mobile station and Authentication Center that is
used for clone detection.
Candidate Set
The set of pilots that have been received with sufficient strength by the mobile station to be
successfully demodulated, but have not been placed in the Active Set by the base station. See
also Active Set, Neighbor Set, and Remaining Set.
CDMA
See Code Division Multiple Access.
CDMA Carrier
A CDMA Carrier is a pair of frequency bands, each has bandwidth 1.25 MHz, supporting
forward and reverse links. A CDMA Carrier centers at a set of predefined carrier frequencies.
A CDMA Carrier can be reused in every sector. There are two special CDMA Carriers;
Primary Carrier and Secondary Carrier.
CDMA Channel
The set of channels transmitted between the base station and the mobile stations within a given
CDMA frequency assignment. See also Forward CDMA Channel and Reverse CDMA
Channel.
CDMA Channel Number
An 11-bit number corresponding to the center of the CDMA frequency assignment.
CDMA Frequency Assignment
A 1.23 MHz segment of spectrum centered on one of the 30 kHz channels of the existing
analog system.
Code Channel
A subchannel of a Forward CDMA Channel. A Forward CDMA Channel contains 64 code
channels. Code channel zero is assigned to the Pilot Channel. Code channels 1 through 7 may
be assigned to the Paging Channels or the Traffic Channels. Code channel 32 may be assigned
to either a Sync Channel or a Traffic Channel. The remaining code channels may be assigned
to Traffic Channels.
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
A technique for spread-spectrum multiple-access digital communications that creates channels
through the use of unique code sequences.
Code Symbol
The output of an error-correcting encoder. Information bits are input to the encoder and code
symbols are output from the encoder. See Convolutional Code.
Continuous Transmission
A mode of operation in which Discontinuous Transmission is not permitted.
Control Mobile Attenuation Code (CMAC)
A 3-bit field in the Control-Filler Message that specifies the maximum authorized power level
for a mobile transmitting on an analog reverse control channel.
Convolutional Code
A type of error-correcting code. A code symbol can be considered as the convolution of the
input data sequence with the impulse response of a generator function.
CRC
See Cyclic Redundancy Code.
Cyclic Redundancy Code (CRC)
A class of linear error detecting codes which generate parity check bits by finding the
remainder of a polynomial division.
D
The distance separating base stations that have the same channel assignments and are potential
sources of co-channel interference; called the Reuse Distance.
Data Burst Randomizer
The function that determines which power control groups within a frame are transmitted on the
Reverse Traffic Channel when the data rate is lower than 9600 bps. The data burst randomizer
determines, for each mobile station, the pseudorandom position of the transmitted power
control groups in the frame while guaranteeing that every modulation symbol is transmitted
exactly once.
dB
A unit used to express a ratio using logarithms, called deciBel.
dBc
The ratio (in dB) of the sideband power of a signal, measured in a given bandwidth at a given
frequency offset from the center frequency of the same signal, to the total inband power of the
signal. For CDMA, the total inband power of the signal is measured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth
around the center frequency of the CDMA signal.
dBi
A measure of the gain of an actual antenna compared to an isotropic radiator.
dBm
A measure of power expressed in terms of its ratio (in dB) to one milliwatt.
dBm/Hz
A measure of power spectral density. dBm/Hz is the power in one Hertz of bandwidth, where
power is expressed in units of dBm.
dBW
A measure of power expressed in terms of its ratio (in dB) to one Watt.
Dedicated Control Channel
An analog control channel used for the transmission of digital control information from either
a base station or a mobile station.
Deinterleaving
The process of unpermuting the symbols that were permuted by the interleaver. Deinterleaving
is performed on received symbols prior to decoding.
Digital Color Code (DCC)
A digital signal transmitted by a base station on a forward analog control channel that is used
to detect capture of a base station by an interfering mobile station.
Dim-and-Burst
A frame in which primary traffic is multiplexed with either secondary traffic or signaling
traffic.
Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)
A mode of operation in which a mobile station transmitter autonomously switches between
two transmitter power levels while the mobile station is in the conversation state on an analog
voice channel.
Distance-Based Registration
An autonomous registration method in which the mobile station registers whenever it enters a
cell whose distance from the cell in which the mobile station last registered exceeds a given
threshold.
DLCI
The Data Link Connection Identifier is the address field embedded in a LAPD frame. A
channel element will be designated by a preassigned DLCI, and a frame selector will be
designated by two DLCIs for the two links of the frame selector.
DTMF
See Dual-Tone Multifrequency.
Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF)
Signaling by the simultaneous transmission of two tones, one from a group of low frequencies
and another from a group of high frequencies. Each group of frequencies consists of four
frequencies.
E
b
Average energy per information bit for the Sync Channel, Paging Channel, or Forward Traffic
Channel at the mobile station antenna connector.
E
c
/ I
0
The ratio of the combined received energy per bit to the effective noise power spectral density
for the Sync Channel, Paging Channel, or Forward Traffic Channel.
E
c
Average energy per PN chip for the Pilot channel, Sync Channel, Paging Channel, Forward
Traffic Channel, power control subchannel, or OCNS.
E
c
/ N
0
The ratio of the average transmit energy per PN chip for the Pilot Channel, Sync Channel,
Paging Channel, Forward Traffic Channel, power control subchannel, or OCNS to the total
transmit power spectral density.
E
c
/ I
0
The ratio between the pilot energy accumulated over one PN chip period (E
c
) to the total
power spectral density in the received bandwidth (I
o
).
Effective Radiated Power (ERP)
The transmitted power multiplied by the antenna gain referenced to a half-wave dipole.
Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
A 32-bit number assigned by the mobile station manufacturer, uniquely identifying the mobile
station equipment.
Encoder Tail Bits
A fixed sequence of bits added to the end of a block of data to reset the convolutional encoder
to a known state.
ERP
See Effective Radiated Power.
ESN
See Electronic Serial Number.
Extended Protocol
An optional expansion of the signaling messages between the base station and mobile station
to allow for the addition of new system features and operational capabilities.
Fade Timer
A timer kept by the mobile station as a measure of Forward Traffic Channel continuity. If the
fade timer expires, the mobile station drops the call.
F
dB

The noise figure of a receiver in units of dB.
FER
Frame Error Rate of Forward Traffic Channel. The value of FER is calculated by Service
Option 2.
Flash
An indication sent on an analog voice channel or CDMA Traffic Channel indicating that the
user directed the mobile station to invoke special processing.
Foreign NID Roamer
A mobile station operating in the same system (SID) but a different network (NID) from the
one in which service was subscribed. See also Foreign SID Roamer and Roamer.
Foreign SID Roamer
A mobile station operating in a system (SID) other than the one from which service was
subscribed. See also Foreign NID Roamer and Roamer.
Forward Analog Control Channel (FOCC)
An analog control channel used from a base station to a mobile station.
Forward Analog Voice Channel (FVC)
An analog voice channel used from a base station to a mobile station.
Forward CDMA Channel
A CDMA Channel from a base station to mobile stations. The Forward CDMA Channel
contains one or more code channels that are transmitted on a CDMA frequency assignment
using a particular pilot PN offset. The code channels are associated with the Pilot Channel,
Sync Channel, Paging Channels, and Traffic Channels. The Forward CDMA Channel always
carries a Pilot Channel and may carry up to one Sync Channel, up to seven Paging Channels,
and up to 63 Traffic Channels, as long as the total number of channels, including the Pilot
Channel, is no greater than 64.
Forward Traffic Channel
A code channel used to transport user and signaling traffic from the base station to the mobile
station.
FER 1
Number of good frames received
Number of frames transmitted
------------------------------------------------------------------------------- =
Frame
A basic timing interval in the system. For the Access Channel, Paging Channel and Traffic
Channel, a frame is 20 ms long. For the Sync Channel, a frame is 26.666 ms long.
Frame Category
A classification of a received Traffic Channel frame based upon transmission data rate, the
frame contents (primary traffic, secondary traffic, or signaling traffic), and whether there are
detected errors in the frame.
Frame Offset
A time skewing of Traffic Channel frames from System Time in integer multiples of 1.25 ms.
The maximum frame offset is 18.75 ms.
Frame Quality Indicator
The CRC check applied to 9600 bps and 4800 bps Traffic Channel frames.
G
A
The gain of an antenna.
Global Positioning System (GPS)
A US government satellite system that provides location and time information to users. See
Navstar GPS Space Segment / Navigation User Interfaces ICD-GPS-200 for specifications.
Good Frame
A received frame is declared a good frame if it is received with the correct rate with no bit
errors.
Good Frames
Frames not classified as bad frames.
Good Message
A received message is declared a good message if it is received with a correct CRC.
GPS
See Global Positioning System.
Half Frame
A 10 ms interval on the Paging Channel. Two half frames comprise a frame. The first half
frame begins at the same time as the frame.
Handoff
The act of transferring communication with a mobile station from one base station to another.
Hard Handoff
A handoff characterized by a temporary disconnection of the Traffic Channel. Hard handoffs
occur when the mobile station is transferred between disjoint Active Sets, the CDMA
frequency assignment changes, the frame offset changes, or the mobile station is directed from
a CDMA Traffic Channel to an analog voice channel. See also Soft Handoff.
Hash Function
A function used by the mobile station to select one out of N available resources. The hash
function distributes the available resources uniformly among a random sample of mobile
stations.
HLR
See Home Location Register.
Home Location Register (HLR)
The location register to which a MIN is assigned for record purposes such as subscriber
information.
Home System
The cellular system in which the mobile station subscribes for service.
Idle Handoff
The act of transferring reception of the Paging Channel from one base station to another, when
the mobile station is in the Mobile Station Idle State.
Implicit Registration
A registration achieved by a successful transmission of an origination or page response on the
Access Channel.
Interleaving
The process of permuting a sequence of symbols.
Intersector Handoff
An intersector handoff could either be soft handoff or softer handoff. If the sectorized cell has
no more than three sectors, then, the handoff between sector will be a softer handoff. If the cell
has more than three sectors, then the sectors will be partitioned into several subcells; each has
three sectors or less. The handoff between sectors in a subcell will be a softer handoff, and the
handoff between sectors of different subcells will be a soft handoff.
I
AMPS

The typical amount of co-channel interference received on an analog FM radio channel by a
base station.
I
o

The total power spectral density of interference received by a mobile station.
IP
The initial open loop power radiated by a mobile station on the first probe during the access
procedure.
k
Boltzmans constant (1.38 mu 10
-33
Joules/Kelvin).
kbps
Kilo-bits per second (10
3
bits per record).
kHz
Kilohertz (10
3
Hertz).
ksps
Kilo-symbols per second (10
3
symbols per second).
K
The number of channel groups into which the radio spectrum is equally divided; called the
Reuse Factor; sometimes referred to as N.
Layering
A method of organization for communication protocols. A layer is defined in terms of its
communication protocol to a peer layer in another entity and the services it offers to the next
higher layer in its own entity.
Layer 1
See Physical Layer.
Layer 2
Layer 2 provides for the correct transmission and reception of signaling messages, including
partial duplicate detection. See also Layering and Layer 3.
Layer 3
Layer 3 provides the control of the cellular telephone system. Signaling messages originate
and terminate at layer 3. See also Layering and Layer 2.
L
C
The loss associated with a cable; called Cable Loss.
Local Control
An optional mobile station feature used to perform manufacturer-specific functions.
Long Code
A PN sequence with period 2
42- 1
that is used for scrambling on the Forward CDMA Channel
and spreading on the Reverse CDMA Channel. The long code uniquely identifies a mobile
station on both the Reverse Traffic Channel and the Forward Traffic Channel. The long code
provides limited privacy. The long code also separates multiple Access Channels on the same
CDMA Channel. See also Public Long Code and Private Long Code.
Long Code Mask
A 42-bit binary number that creates the unique identity of the long code. See also Public Long
Code, Private Long Code, Public Long Code Mask, and Private Long Code Mask.
Long PN Code
It is also called User PN code. It is a PN sequence with period of 2
-42
1, and it uniquely
identifies a user terminal.
LSB
Least significant bit.
L
P
The loss associated with propagation; called Path Loss.
M
The general term for the number of simultaneous calls served.
Master Cell Site
The master cell site refers to the original cell site from which a user terminal requests for a soft
handoff. The new cell site which joining to the soft handoff is called the secondary (slave) cell
site. Only the master cell site will initiate the transmission of the forward in-band signaling
messages to the user terminal. The secondary cell site will only transpond the forward in-band
signaling messages received from the master cell site to the user terminal.
Maximal Length Sequence (m-Sequence)
A binary sequence of period 2
n
1, n a positive integer, with no internal periodicities. A
maximal length sequence can be generated by a tapped n-bit shift register with linear
feedback.
Mcps
Megachips per second (10
6
chips per second).
Mean Input Power
The total received calorimetric power measured in a specified bandwidth at the antenna
connector, including all internal and external signal and noise sources.
Mean Output Power
The total transmitted calorimetric power measured in a specified bandwidth at the antenna
connector when the transmitter is active.
MER
Message Error Rate.
Message
A data structure that conveys control information or application information. A message
consists of a length field (MSG_LENGTH), a message body (the part conveying the
information), and a CRC.
MER 1
Number of good messages received ( )
Number of messages transmitted ( )
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ - =
Message Body
The part of the message contained between the length field (MSG_LENGTH) and the CRC
field.
Message Capsule
A sequence of bits comprising a single message and padding. The padding always follows the
message and may be of zero length.
Message CRC
The CRC associated with a message. See also Cyclic Redundancy Check.
Message Field
A basic named element in a message. A message field may consist of zero or more bits.
Message Record
An entry in a message consisting of one or more fields that repeats in the message.
MHz
Megahertz (10
6
Hertz).
MIN
See Mobile Station Identification Number.
M
MAX
The pole point.
M
o

The theoretical number of simultaneous calls that could be served, but only in an ideal,
interference-free environment.
Mobile Protocol Capability Indicator (MPCI)
A 2-bit field used to indicate the mobile stations capabilities.
Mobile Station
A station in the Domestic Public Cellular Radio Telecommunications Service intended to be
used while in motion or during halts at unspecified points. Mobile stations include portable
units (e.g., hand-held personal units) and units installed in vehicles.
Mobile Station Class
Mobile station classes define mobile station characteristics such as slotted operation and
transmission power.
Mobile Station Identification Number (MIN)
The 34-bit number that is a digital representation of the 10-digit directory telephone number
assigned to a mobile station.
Mobile Station Originated Call
A call originating from a mobile station.
Mobile Station Terminated Call
A call received by a mobile station (not to be confused with a disconnect or call release).
Mobile Switching Center (MSC)
A configuration of equipment that provides cellular radiotelephone service. Also called the
Mobile Telephone Switching Office (MTSO).
Modulation Symbol
The output of the data modulator before spreading. On the Reverse Traffic Channel, 64-ary
orthogonal modulation is used and six code symbols are associated with one modulation
symbol. On the Forward Traffic Channel, each code symbol (when the data rate is 9600 bps) or
each repeated code symbol (when the data rate is less than 9600 bps) is one modulation
symbol.
M
omni

The number of simultaneous calls that can realistically be served by an omni directional base
station.
ms
Millisecond.
MSB
Most significant bit.
MSC
See Mobile Switching Center.
M
sector

The number of simultaneous calls that can realistically be served on one physical antenna face
of a sectorized base station.
Multiplex Option
The ability of the multiplex sublayer and lower layers to be tailored to provide special
capabilities. A multiplex option defines such characteristics as the frame format and the rate
decision rules. See also Multiplex Sublayer.
Multiplex Sublayer
One of the conceptual layers of the system that multiplexes and demultiplexes primary traffic,
secondary traffic, and signaling traffic.
NAM
See Number Assignment Module.
Neighbor Set
The set of pilots associated with the CDMA Channels that are probable candidates for handoff.
Normally, the Neighbor Set consists of the pilots associated with CDMA Channels that cover
geographical areas near the mobile station. See also Active Set, Candidate Set, and Remaining
Set.
Network
A network is a subset of a cellular system, such as an area-wide cellular network, a private
group of base stations, or a group of base stations set up to handle a special requirement. A
network can be as small or as large as needed, as long as it is fully contained within a system.
See also System.
Network Identification (NID)
A number that uniquely identifies a network within a cellular system. See also System
Identification.
NID
See Network Identification.
NIPM
The nonchannelized ISDN Packet Mode refers to the method of transporting LAPD packets in
a nonchannelized pipe with bandwidth of one or more DS0s.
N
o

The absolute minimum noise power spectral density received due to noise temperature and
noise figure.
Non-Autonomous Registration
A registration method in which the base station initiates registration. See also Autonomous
Registration.
Non-Slotted Mode
An operation mode of the mobile station in which the mobile station continuously monitors
the Paging Channel when in the Mobile Station Idle State.
ns
Nanosecond.
N
T
The effective noise power spectral density.
NULL
Not having any value.
Null Traffic Channel Data
One or more frames of 16 '1s followed by eight '0s sent at the 1200 bps rate. Null Traffic
Channel data is sent when no service option is active and no signaling message is being sent.
Null Traffic Channel data serves to maintain the connectivity between the mobile station and
the base station.
Number Assignment Module (NAM)
A set of MIN-related parameters stored in the mobile station.
Numeric Information
Numeric information consists of parameters that appear as numeric fields in messages
exchanged by the base station and the mobile station and information used to describe the
operation of the mobile station.
OLC
See Overload Class (CDMA) or Overload Control (analog).
Optional Field
A Field defined within a message structure that is optionally transmitted to the message
recipient.
Order
A type of message that contains control codes for either the mobile station or the base station.
Ordered Registration
A registration method in which the base station orders the mobile station to send registration
related parameters.
Overhead Message
A message sent by the base station on the Paging Channel to communicate base-station-
specific and system-wide information to mobile stations.
Overload Class
The means used to control system access by mobile stations, typically in emergency or other
overloaded conditions. Mobile stations are assigned one (or more) of sixteen overload classes.
Access to the CDMA system can then be controlled on a per class basis by persistence values
transmitted by the base station.
Overload Control (OLC)
A means to restrict reverse analog control channel accesses by mobile stations. Mobile stations
are assigned one (or more) of sixteen control levels. Access is selectively restricted by a base
station setting one or more OLC bits in the Overload Control Global Action Message.
Packet
The unit of information exchanged between the service option applications of the base station
and the mobile station.
Padding
A sequence of bits used to fill from the end of a message to the end of a message capsule,
typically to the end of the frame or half frame. All bits in the padding are '0'.
Paging
The act of seeking a mobile station when a call has been placed to that mobile station.
Paging Channel (Analog)
See Analog Paging Channel.
Paging Channel (CDMA)
A code channel in a Forward CDMA Channel used for transmission of control information and
pages from a base station to a mobile station.
Paging Channel Slot
An 80 ms interval on the Paging Channel. Mobile stations operating in the slotted mode are
assigned specific slots in which they monitor messages from the base station.
Parameter-Change Registration
A registration method in which the mobile station registers when certain of its stored
parameters change.
Parity Check Bits
Bits added to a sequence of information bits to provide error detection, correction, or both.
Persistence
A probability measure used by the mobile station to determine if it should transmit in a given
Access Channel Slot.
Physical Layer
The part of the communication protocol between the mobile station and the base station that is
responsible for the transmission and reception of data. The physical layer in the transmitting
station is presented a frame by the multiplex sublayer and transforms it into an over-the-air
waveform. The physical layer in the receiving station transforms the waveform back into a
frame and presents it to the multiplex sublayer above it.
Pilot Channel
An unmodulated, direct-sequence spread spectrum signal transmitted continuously by each
CDMA base station. The Pilot Channel allows a mobile station to acquire the timing of the
Forward CDMA Channel, provides a phase reference for coherent demodulation, and provides
a means for signal strength comparisons between base stations for determining when to
handoff.
Pilot PN Sequence
A pair of modified maximal length PN sequences with period 215 used to spread the Forward
CDMA Channel and the Reverse CDMA Channel. Different base stations are identified by
different pilot PN sequence offsets.
Pilot PN Sequence Offset Index
The PN offset in units of 64 PN chips of a pilot, relative to the zero offset pilot PN sequence.
Pilot Strength
The ratio of received pilot energy to overall received energy. See also E
c
/ I
o
.
PN Chip
One bit in the PN sequence.
PN Code
Pseudo-Random Noise Code is a maximal length sequence, usually with period 2
n
- 1 where n
is a positive number.
PN Sequence
Pseudonoise sequence. A periodic binary sequence.
Power Control Bit
A bit sent in every 1.25 ms interval on the Forward Traffic Channel to signal the mobile station
to increase or decrease its transmit power.
Power Control Group
A 1.25 ms interval on the Forward Traffic Channel and the Reverse Traffic Channel. See also
Power Control Bit.
Power-Down Registration
An autonomous registration method in which the mobile station registers on power down.
Power-Up Registration
An autonomous registration method in which the mobile station registers on power up.
PPM
Parts per million.
Preamble
See Access Channel Preamble and Traffic Channel Preamble.
Primary Carrier
The Primary CDMA Carrier is the default Carrier in a CDMA system where a user terminal
should tune to when power-up. All CDMA systems should implement the Primary Carrier.
Primary CDMA Channel
A CDMA Channel at a preassigned frequency assignment used by the mobile station for initial
acquisition. See also Secondary CDMA Channel.
Primary Paging Channel (CDMA)
The default code channel (code channel 1) assigned for paging on a CDMA Channel.
Primary Traffic
The main traffic stream carried between the mobile station and the base station, supporting the
active primary service option, on the Traffic Channel. See also Secondary Traffic, Signaling
Traffic, and Service Option.
Private Long Code
The long code characterized by the private long code mask. See also Long Code.
Private Long Code Mask
The long code mask used to form the private long code. See also Public Long Code Mask and
Long Code.
Public Long Code
The long code characterized by the public long code mask.
Public Long Code Mask
The long code mask used to form the public long code. The mask contains the ESN of the
mobile station. See also Private Long Code Mask and Long Code.
Punctured Code
An error-correcting code generated from another error-correcting code by deleting (i.e.,
puncturing) code symbols from the coder output.
Quick Repeats
Additional transmissions of identical copies of a message within a short interval to increase the
probability that the message is received correctly.
R
The radial distance which defines the limit of the range served by a base stations called the
Cell Radius.
Receive Objective Loudness Rating (ROLR)
A perceptually weighted transducer gain of telephone receivers relating electrical excitation
from a reference generator to sound pressure at the earphone. The receive objective loudness
rating is normally specified in dB relative to one Pascal per millivolt. See IEEE Standard 269-
1992, IEEE Standard 661-1979, CCITT Recommendation P.76, and CCITT Recommendation
P.79.
Registration
The process by which a mobile station identifies its location and parameters to a base station.
Registration Zone
A collection of one or more base stations treated as a unit when determining whether a mobile
station should perform zone-based registration.
Release
A process that the mobile station and base station use to inform each other of call disconnect.
Remaining Set
The set of all allowable pilot offsets as determined by PILOT_INC. excluding the pilot offsets
of the pilots in the Active Set, Candidate Set and Neighbor Set. See also Active Set, Candidate
Set and Neighbor Set.
Request
A layer 3 message generated by either the mobile station or the base station to retrieve
information, ask for service or command an action.
Response
A layer 3 message generated as a result of another message, typically a request.
Reverse Analog Control Channel (RECC)
The analog control channel used from a mobile station to a base station.
Reverse Analog Voice Channel (RVC)
The analog voice channel used from a mobile station to a base station.
Reverse CDMA Channel
The CDMA Channel from the mobile station to the base station. From the base stations
perspective, the Reverse CDMA Channel is the sum of all mobile station transmissions on a
CDMA frequency assignment.
Reverse Traffic Channel
A Reverse CDMA Channel used to transport user and signaling traffic from a single mobile
station to one or more base stations.
RN
Random Number.
Roamer
A mobile station operating in a cellular system (or network) other than the one from which
service was subscribed. See also Foreign NID Roamer and Foreign SID Roamer.
ROLR
See Receive Objective Loudness Rating.
RP
The random time associated with the persistence of the mobile station during the access
procedure.
RS
The random time associated with the sequence repetition of the mobile station during the
access procedure.
RT
The random time associated with the delay before transmitting again of the mobile station
during the access procedure.
SAT
See Supervisory Auditory Tone.
Scan of Channels
The procedure by which a mobile station examines the signal strength of each forward analog
control channel.
SCI
Synchronized Capsule Indicator bit.
Search Window
The range of PN sequence offsets that a mobile station searches for a pilot.
Secondary Carrier
Similar to the Primary Carrier, if a CDMA system has two or more Carriers, then it should also
implement the Secondary Carrier. If a user terminal can not find the Primary Carrier, it should
tune to the Secondary Carrier.
Secondary CDMA Channel
A CDMA Channel at a preassigned frequency assignment used by the mobile station for initial
acquisition. See also Primary CDMA Channel.
Secondary Cell Site
It is also called slave cell site. See Master Cell Site.
Secondary Traffic
An additional traffic stream that can be carried between the mobile station and the base station
on the Traffic Channel. See also Primary Traffic and Signaling Traffic.
Seizure Precursor
The initial digital sequence transmitted by a mobile station to a base station on a reverse
analog control channel.
Service Option
A service capability of the system. Service options may be applications such as voice, data or
facsimile.
Shared Secret Data (SSD)
A 128-bit pattern stored in the mobile station (in semi-permanent memory) and known by the
base station. SSD is a concatenation of two 64-bit subsets: SSD_A, which is used to support
the authentication procedures, and SSD_B, which serves as one of the inputs to the process
generating the encryption mask and private long code.
Short PN Code
It is also called sector-specific PN code or pilot PN code. It is a modified PN code with period
2
15
. A sector is identified by a pair of short PN codes.
SID
See System Identification.
Signaling Tone
A 10 kHz tone transmitted by a mobile station on an analog voice channel to: 1) confirm
orders, 2) signal flash requests, and 3) signal release requests.
Signaling Traffic
Control messages that are carried between the mobile station and the base station on the
Traffic Channel. See also Primary Traffic and Secondary Traffic.
Slot Cycle
A periodic interval at which a mobile station operating in the slotted mode monitors the Paging
Channel.
Slotted Mode
An operation mode of the mobile station in which the mobile station monitors only selected
slots on the Paging Channel when in the Mobile Station Idle State.
S
min
The minimum signal level required to meet some criteria of E
b
/ N
0
Soft Handoff
A handoff occurring while the mobile station is in the Mobile Station Control on the Traffic
Channel State. This handoff is characterized by commencing communications with a new base
station on the same CDMA frequency assignment before terminating communications with the
old base station. See also Hard Handoff.
Softer Handoff
This refers to the handoff process that is handled by a channel element which supports
multiple sectors (up to 3). The user terminal, during the (intersector) soft handoff, will
communicate through two sectors (radios) with only one channel element. The ROC will be
involved in setting up the intersector soft handoff; however, the MSC will not be involved.
SOM
Start-of-Message Bit.
sps
Symbols per second.
Station Class Mark (SCM)
An identification of certain characteristics of a mobile station.
Status Information
The following status information is used to describe mobile station operation when using the
analog system:
Serving-System Status Indicates whether a mobile station is tuned to channels associated with
System A or System B.
First Registration ID Status A status variable used by the mobile station in association with
its processing of received Registration ID messages.
First Location Area ID Status A status variable used by the mobile station in association with
its processing of received Location Area ID messages.
Location Registration ID Status A status variable used by the mobile station in association
with its processing of power-up registration and location-based registrations.
First Idle ID Status A status variable used by the mobile station in association with its pro-
cessing of the Idle Task.
Local Control Status Indicates whether a mobile station must respond to local control mes-
sages.
Roam Status Indicates whether a mobile station is in its home system.
Termination Status Indicates whether a mobile station must terminate the call when it is on
an analog voice channel.
Supervisory Audio Tone (SAT)
One of three tones in the 6 kHz region that is transmitted on the forward analog voice channel
by a base station and transponded on the reverse analog voice channel by a mobile station.
Supplementary Digital Color Code (SDCC1, SDCC2)
Additional bits assigned to increase the number of color codes from four to sixty-four,
transmitted on the forward analog control channel.
Symbol
See Code Symbol and Modulation Symbol.
Sync Channel
Code channel 32 in the Forward CDMA Channel which transports the synchronization
message to the mobile station.
Sync Channel Superframe
An 80 ms interval consisting of three Sync Channel frames (each 26.666 ms in length).
System
A system is a cellular telephone service that covers a geographic area such as a city,
metropolitan region, county or group of counties. See also Network.
System Identification (SID)
A number uniquely identifying a cellular system.
System Time
The time reference used by the system. System Time is synchronous to UTC time (except for
leap seconds) and uses the same time origin as GPS time. All base stations use the same
System Time (within a small error). Mobile stations use the same System Time, offset by the
propagation delay from the base station to the mobile station. See also Universal Coordinated
Time.
TA
The specified time associated with waiting for an acknowledgement by the mobile station
during the access procedure.
T
c

The time period between chips.
T
b
The time period between bits.
Timer-Based Registration
A registration method in which the mobile station registers whenever a counter reaches a
predetermined value. The counter is incremented an average of once per 80 ms period.
Time Reference
A reference established by the mobile station that is synchronous with the earliest arriving
multipath component used for demodulation.
TOLR
See Transmit Objective Loudness Rating.
Traffic Channel
A communication path between a mobile station and a base station used for user and signaling
traffic. The term Traffic Channel implies a Forward Traffic Channel and Reverse Traffic
Channel pair. See also Forward Traffic Channel and Reverse Traffic Channel.
Traffic Channel Preamble
A sequence of all-zero frames that is sent at the 9600 bps rate by the mobile station on the
Reverse Traffic Channel. The Traffic Channel preamble is sent during initialization of the
Traffic Channel.
Transmit Objective Loudness Rating (TOLR)
A perceptually weighted transducer gain of telephone transmitters relating sound pressure at
the microphone to voltage at a reference electrical transmission. It is normally specified in dB
relative to one millivolt per Pascal. See IEEE Standard 269-1992, IEEE Standard 661-1979,
CCITT Recommendation P.76 and CCITT Recommendation P.79.
Unique Challenge-Response Procedure
An exchange of information between a mobile station and a base station for the purpose of
confirming the mobile stations identity. The procedure is initiated by the base station and is
characterized by the use of a challenge-specific random number (i.e., RANDU) instead of the
random variable broadcast globally (RAND).
Unique Random Variable (RANDU)
A 24-bit random number generated by the base station in support of the Unique Challenge-
Response procedure.
Universal Coordinated Time (UTC)
An internationally agreed-upon time scale maintained by the Bureau International de lHeure
(BIH) used as the time reference by nearly all commonly available time and frequency
distribution systems i.e., WWV, WWVH, LORAN-C, Transit, Omega and GPS.
UTC
Universal Temps Coordin.
See Universal Coordinated Time.
Voice Channel
See Analog Voice Channel.
Voice Mobile Attenuation Code (VMAC)
A 3-bit field in the Extended Address Word commanding the initial mobile power level when
assigning a mobile station to an analog voice channel.
Voice Privacy
The process by which user voice transmitted over a CDMA Traffic Channel is afforded a
modest degree of protection against eavesdropping over the air.
Walsh Chip
The shortest identifiable component of a Walsh function. There are 2N Walsh chips in one
Walsh function where N is the order of the Walsh function. On the Forward CDMA Channel,
one Walsh chip equals 1/1.2288 MHz, or 813.802 ns. On the Reverse CDMA Channel, one
Walsh chip equals 4/1.2288 MHz, or 3.255 s.
Walsh Function
One of 2N time orthogonal binary functions (note that the functions are orthogonal after
mapping '0' to 1 and '1' to -1).
Zone-Based Registration
An autonomous registration method in which the mobile station registers whenever it enters a
zone that is not in the mobile stations zone list.
The channel activity factor; called alpha.
The capacity reduction factor due to co-channel interference; called beta.
The margin required to limit increase in interference to an analog base station
from a CDMA mobile station to 1 dB; called Delta.
The phase offset; called delta.
The slope for the path loss; called gamma.
The gain in capacity realized with sectorization; called kappa.
The capacity reduction factor due to loading; called mu.
s Microsecond
The capacity reduction factor due to imperfect power control; called eta.
c
The frequency of the radio carrier signal in units of radians per second; called
omega.
The mathematical operation of the summation of discrete terms; called Sigma.
The statistical attribute of standard deviation; called sigma.
light
The speed of light; called upsilon.
The sectorization efficiency; called zeta.
References
R-2 LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES PROPRIETARY
References CL8303 v1.0
LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES PROPRIETARY R-3
CL8303 v1.0 References
Lucent Technologies AUTOPLEX
Feature Descriptions:
Service Measurements Report Generator, 401-612-008,
Subscriber Access Control, 401-612-189,
Short Message Service, 401-612-010,
Authentication, 401-612-041,
Selective Paging, 401-612-056,
Non-Integrated 13 kbps Vocoder, 401-612-106,
Mobile Activity Supervision, 401-612-112,
Multiple Vocoding and EVRC, 401-612-115,
CDMA Mobile Loopback Test, 401-612-117,
PCS CDMA CATV Distribution System, 401-612-131,
CDMA Handoff Matrix, 401-612-140,
Automated Inventory Control, 401-612-142,
PC CDMA Cell Translations, 401-612-155,
CDMA SMS Mobile Terminated Point-to-Point Over Traffic Channel, 401-612-183,
CDMA System Hashing Over Paging Channel, 401-612-187,
Service Measurements On-Demand, 401-612-190,
CDMA Packet Pipe Optimization (PPOPT) and Packet Pipe 16 (PP16), 401-612-221,
CDMA Private Network and User Zone, 401-612-182,
CDMA Undeclared Neighbor List, 401-612-204,
CDMA Frame Error and Power Level Measurements, 401-612-203, and
CDMA Multiple Pilots Interfrequency Handoff, 401-612-218.
Other:
Vijay K. Garg et al, Applications of CDMA in Wireless/Personal Communications,
1997 Prentice Hall, Inc.
Marvin K. Simon et al, Spread Spectrum Communications Handbook, 1994 McGraw-
Hill, Inc. Ramjee Prasad, CDMA for Wireless Personal Communications, 1996 Artech
House
Qualcomm Inc., Power Control Notes, Version 1.3, Feb. 28, 1994.
Zoran Kostic and Gordana Pavlovic, Resolving Sub-Chip Spaced Multipath Components
in CDMA Communication Systems, Conference Record of the 43rd IEEE Vehicular
Technology Conference, pp. 469-472.
A.J. Viterbi: Very Low Rate Convolutional Codes for Maximum Theoretical
Performance of Spread-Spectrum Multiple-Access Channels, IEEE
G.L. Turin: The Effects of Multipath and Fading on the Performance of Direct-Sequence
CDMA Systems, IEEE Trans. of JSAC, Vol. 2, No. 4, pp. 597-603, 1984.
W.C.Y. Lee: Overview of Cellular CDMA, IEEE Trans. of VT, Vol. 40, No. 2, pp. 328-
353, (1991).
G.L. Turin: Introduction to Spread-Spectrum Antimultipath Techniques and Their
Application to Urban Digital Radio:, Proc. IEEE, Vol. 68, No. 3, pp. 328-353, (1980).
K.S. Gilousen, I.M. Jacobs, R. Padavani, A.J. Viterbi, L.A. Weaver, and C.E. Wheatley
III: On the capacity of a cellular CDMA system, IEEE Trans. Veh. Technology, vol. 40,
pp. 303-312, May 1991.
R. Walton and M. Wallace: Near Maximum Likelihood Demodulation for M-ary
Orthogonal Signalling, Conference Record of the 43rd IEEE Vehicular Technology
Conference, pp. 5-8, May 1993.
J.G. Proaksi: Digital Communications, McGraw-Hill International Editions, 1989.
QiBi: A Detector Based on Optimal Estimator Asynchronous CDMA Systems,
Conference Record of the 43rd IEEE Vehicular Technology Conference, pp. 432-435,
May 1993.
Kyoung Il Kim: CDMA Engineering Issues, IEEE Transactions on Vehicular
Technology, vol. 42, No. 3, pp. 345-349, August 1993.
G. Vanucci and R.S. Roman Measurement results on indoor radio frequency re-use at 900
MHz and 18 GHz, Proceedings of the Third IEEE International Symposium on Personal,
Indoor and Mobile Radio Communications, 1992.
Pursley, M.B., Performance Evaluation for Phase-coded Spread Spectrum Multiple
Access Communications Systems, Part I, System Analysis, IEEE Transactions on
Communications, Vol. COM-25, pp. 795-799, Aug. 1977.
COST, Urban Transmission Loss Models for Mobile Radio in the 900 and 1800 MHz
Bands, COST 231 TD (91) 73, 1991.
Walfish, J., and Bertoni, A Theoretical Model of UHF Propagation in Urban
Environments, IEEE Transactions, AP-38, 1988, pp. 1788-1796.
Ikegami, F., et al, Propagation Factors Controlling Mean Field Strength on Urban
Streets, IEEE Transactions AP-32, 1984, pp. 1788-1796.
Rathgeber, R., F.M. Landsdorfer, and R.W. Lorenz, Extension of the DBP Field Strength
Predication Programme to Cellular Mobile Radio, IEE ICAP Conference Proceedings,
333, 1991, pp. 164-168.
Yang, J., Bao, D and A1i, M, PN Offset Planning in IS-95 Based CDMA Systems,
Proceedings of the 47th IEEE Vehicular Technology Conference, Phoenix, Arizona, May
1997, pp. 1435-9.

Cdma Call Processing

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cdma Call Processing

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES PROPRIETARY

Use pursuant to Company instructions

Cellular Telecommunications Systems, System 1000, CDMA Engineering

Cellular Telecommunications Systems, System 1000, Data Base Update,

Cellular Telecommunication System, System 1000, Service Measurements,

System Capacity Monitoring and Engineering Guidelines

Specifies the transmit power

indicates the home or nonhome cell site physical

the neighbor pilot PN sequence offset for this neighbor

used to map to the maximum number of access channel

used by the mobile to compute the time randomization for

used to map to the maximum number of access channel

used to map to the maximum number of access channel

indicates if the CDMA Access Channel Overload Control

the increase to the Persistence Step Size.

Identifies whether this Principle Neighbor List entry is lim-

Identifies whether this Principle Neighbor List entry is lim-

specifies the system (SID) that the mobile is to be redi-

indicates whether the mobile is to ignore the CDMA Capa-

indicates to the mobile whether CDMA is available or not.

indicates which Network to redirect calls to for CDMA PCS

specifies whether calls should be redirected to CDMA Cel-

This parameter is used to indicate if this carrier is a desig-

Identifies whether this Principle Neighbor List entry is lim-

2000 switch DCS is not involved.

indicates whether the undeclared neighbor list feature is

indicates BAHO Mobile type.

b _ add _ t , cpt int _ add PS log * 10 * slope _ soft max DAT

b _ drop _ t , cpt int _ drop PS log * 10 * slope _ soft max DDT

b _ add _ t , cpt int _ add PS log * 10 * slope _ soft max DAT

b _ drop _ t , cpt int _ drop PS log * 10 * slope _ soft max DDT

around the desired

Allows the user to turn on or off the reverse link closed-

This field is the Reverse Pilot Channel to Access channel

This field is the R-FCH at 9.6 kbps and 20 ms frame to

Indicates the Attribute Adjustment Gain for eighth rate

Defines the size of the step up in Eb/Nt performed by

Defines the minimum value of the outer loop Eb/Nt

Defines the initial value of the outer loop Eb/Nt

Defines the maximum value of the outer loop Eb/Nt

Defines the target minimum value of the outer loop Eb/

Defines the target initial value of the outer loop Eb/Nt

Defines the target maximum value of the outer loop

This field allows to set the power offset in 1/8 dB of R-

Defines the size of the step up in Eb/Nt performed by

Defines the minimum value of the outer loop Eb/Nt

Defines the maximum value of the outer loop Eb/Nt

This field allows to set the power offset in 1/8 dB of R-

specifies the nominal traffic gain in dgus for Rate Set 1.

specifies the nominal traffic gain in dgus for Rate Set 2.

defines the timer value in the FPC algorithm used to

defines the minimum traffic channel gain setting allow-

defines the minimum traffic channel gain setting allow-

defines the maximum traffic channel gain setting allow-

defines the maximum traffic channel gain setting allow-

Defines the minimum value of the outer loop Eb/Nt setpoint

Defines the initial value of the outer loop Eb/Nt setpoint

Defines the maximum value of the outer loop Eb/Nt

This field is equal to the F-FCH Power Control Step Size to be

Defines the minimum value of the outer loop Eb/Nt

Defines the initial value of the outer loop Eb/Nt setpoint

Defines the maximum value of the outer loop Eb/Nt

This field is equal to the minimum gain for full rate